JP7358983B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pinball gaming machine.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration for transitioning is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-31031

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set multiple types of stages and can suitably switch stages. It is something to do.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the following features:
a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
a game control means that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as a production stage in the variable display;
display selection means for selecting a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, displaying a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section;
An operation means that can be operated by a player, which includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation, and whose operation is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the stage set by the stage setting means. means and
an operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, some of the symbols set in the plurality of types are displayed in the variable display under the control of the display control means. preset,
When one stage is set by the stage setting means and a fluctuating display is executed with the symbol corresponding to the one stage, the operation control means controls the operation control means every time the fluctuating display is displayed a predetermined number of times. , configured to be capable of at least executing specification-compatible operation control of switching the specification of the operating means to another specification among a plurality of types of specifications set in advance corresponding to the variable display according to the symbol and operating the operating means. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages and can suitably switch stages.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine A perspective view showing a pachinko machine in an open state A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Back view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flowchart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing (A) is a front view showing a part of the pattern sheet, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the pattern sheet taken along line AA in FIG. 13(A). (A) to (C) are front views of the decorative pattern display device of the second embodiment, and (D) is a front view showing a part of the pattern sheet corresponding to each pattern row. A front view of a decorative pattern display device in a modification of the second embodiment (A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and (B) to (C) are front views of the decorative pattern display device of the third embodiment. Front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment (A) is a front view of the light-emitting decoration, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the light-emitting decoration taken along line BB in FIG. 18(A). A screen diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the decorative pattern display device of the fifth embodiment A schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing operation device included in the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment Schematic diagram showing an example of the external appearance of the press operation device depending on the operation position FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operating position of the pressing operation device and the reaction force to the pressing operation when the pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device. Front perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment A schematic diagram for explaining a press operation device included in a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment (A) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device when a special symbol starts winning, and (B) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device when a special symbol starts winning. Screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in a variable display displayed on a decorative pattern display device when a push operation is performed A screen diagram showing an example of a variable display and a fixed display displayed on a decorative pattern display device in a pachinko machine according to a tenth embodiment. A screen diagram showing an example of display content displayed on the decorative pattern display device during the operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input in the pachinko machine of the eleventh embodiment. A screen diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the decorative pattern display device during the operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input in the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining amount of the operable period and the state of the push operation device in a variable display configured to allow operation input. Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time of the variable display and the state of the press operation device A time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during the variable display. A time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during the variable display. A diagram for explaining control in which the height position of the operation surface of the press operation device is set to multiple types of displacement from an initial position to different height positions as a trigger for a performance executed in a variable display. A diagram for explaining control in which the height position of the operation surface of the press operation device is set to multiple types of displacement from an initial position to different height positions as a trigger for a performance executed in a variable display. A diagram for explaining multiple types of control when the operation surface of the press operation device is pressed down and the operation surface is lowered and then returned to its original state as a performance executed in a variable display. An explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism. An explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism. An explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism. An explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism. An explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism. An explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism. An explanatory diagram for explaining how the sub-control board changes the operating force of the pressing operation device according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism. (A) is a screen diagram showing an example of a variable display screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of each of the three types of stages. Explanatory diagram to explain the fluctuation display executed at each stage

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a pinball gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described, followed by a description of modified examples and other types of gaming machines. First, regarding an embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, the structural configuration, electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, the configuration of the structural parts of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 shows the pachinko machine 100 in a closed state, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened to the intermediate block 103. It shows. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state shown in FIG. Note that various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104. It is configured to be movable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body support means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate part 111, a bottom plate part 112, a left side plate part 113, and a right side plate part 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed therein. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided at the game parlor, and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). Note that the outer frame 101 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 100, and the main body portion that has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101 and corresponds to the structure of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A structure may be adopted in which a support mechanism for supporting the island equipment and a part of a locking mechanism for locking the main body portion thereof are provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 rotates at one end (left side) in the left and right direction when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front. It is configured to be rotatable forward, with the proximal end being the proximal end and the other end (right side) being the rotating distal end.

For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from each other at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, a shaft part provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support part provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft part is inserted into a shaft hole provided in the shaft support part. is configured to be rotatable by being in the inserted state. Note that the configuration that allows the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 to be rotatable is not limited to the above configuration, but may include, for example, providing a shaft hole on the intermediate block 103 side and forming a shaft portion on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may also be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function to release the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, so that the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. It is removably attached to the For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by opening the intermediate block 103 by a certain amount or more with respect to the outer frame 101 and performing a predetermined removal operation of moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount. Ru. Thereby, the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged to overlap with the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and can be removed by a predetermined removal operation. configured to be possible.

A rear block 104 is arranged on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are supported by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 rearwardly with respect to the intermediate block 103. , and is configured to be removably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

The pachinko machine 100 also includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front block locking mechanism that restricts opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103. A lock operation mechanism is provided which is operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the Pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is activated. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is placed in an opening/closing state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, in response to a left rotation operation using a predetermined operation key on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is activated. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 is released, and the front block 102 is placed in an opening/closing state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening/closing regulating mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. Thereafter, the block opening/closing regulation mechanism allows the rear block 104 relative to the intermediate block 103 to be switched between a state where opening/closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state where opening/closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that

For example, as shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening/closing regulating mechanism includes two opening/closing regulating parts 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing regulating part 150C provided in the rear block 104. . These three opening/closing regulating parts 150A to 150C are provided with rotatable pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the state of engagement with the opening portions arranged so as to overlap front and back when the rear block 104 is in the closed state by rotating, and thereby the opening/closing prohibited posture corresponding to the opening/closing prohibited state is changed. and an opening/closing permissible posture corresponding to the opening/closing permissible state. When all the rotary pieces 151A to 151C are placed in the opening/closing permissible position, each of the rotary pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 becomes in the opening/closing permissible state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the opening/closing prohibited posture and the opening/closing allowed posture, it is sufficient that the opening/closing prohibited state and the opening/closing allowed state can be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the rotating pieces 151A to 151C may only rotate at a fixed position. It may also be configured to move in a fixed direction, or it may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to changes in posture when the constituent members of each device transition between a plurality of postures.

Among the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to some of them are formed on the rear block 104 when the opening and closing of the rear block 104 is prohibited, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed on the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open/close permissible postures only by operating from one side, such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. is enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulating mechanism that restricts the movement of game balls from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. For example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, the game ball movement regulating mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow regulating piece 161 provided on the intermediate block 103 and a regulation changing section 162 provided on the front block 102, The flow regulating piece 161 is biased toward the front side where the front block 102 is located by a coil spring (not shown).

In the state where the front block 102 is closed to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow regulating piece 161 is in a movement permitting state that allows the game balls to flow downward, and specifically, The changing portion 162 pushes the intermediate block 103 toward the rear side. The flow regulating piece 161 is arranged to be shifted to the rear side with respect to a guiding path (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement permitted state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened to the intermediate block 103 (the open state of the front block 102), the pressure on the flow regulating piece 161 by the regulation changing section 162 is released, and compared to the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, the flow regulating piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102 and is prohibited from moving. The flow regulating piece 161 protrudes into the guide path in the movement prohibited state and prevents the game balls from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 has an intermediate block 103 closed to the outer frame 101, for example, at the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and at the lower end on the rotating tip side (left side in rear view). For example, as shown in FIG. 3, an open/close detection switch 108 is provided to detect whether or not the intermediate block is An opening/closing detection switch 109 is provided for detecting whether the front block 102 is closed or not.

Next, each structure of the front block 102, intermediate block 103, and rear block 104 will be explained in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It functions as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is constructed by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decoration body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed by including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It has been installed. When the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decoration body 210 are combined, an opening 210A is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction over a wide range except for the outer peripheral portion where the front decoration body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, and a main storage mechanism 230 that stores game balls. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 that stores game balls, and a firing operation device 250 that is operated by a player to fire the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 includes an opening periphery 211 that surrounds the periphery of the opening 210A as a part of the front decoration body 210, and an opening periphery 211 that protrudes forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A. an upper protrusion 217 located below the upper protrusion 217 and protruding forward; and a lower protrusion 217 and a lower protrusion on the right side of the lower protrusion 218. A flat portion 219 is formed, which is a generally flat area located further back than 218 and in which the firing operation device 250 is arranged. A main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be viewed while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decoration body 210 in the front-rear direction when combined. For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the center panel 220 includes a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, and a light-transmitting panel fitted into the front side of the panel frame 221. a front plate 222 (see FIG. 1), and a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted on the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially parallel to the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap therebetween. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired as the game progresses and game balls lent from the game parlor. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage section 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 includes an inlet 231A that allows game balls to flow into the storage unit 231 from inside the pachinko machine 100, and an outlet (not shown) that allows game balls to flow out from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) is provided upstream of the discharge port. By opening the discharge port, game balls are discharged from the storage section 231 to the player side without being taken into the interior of the Pachinko machine 100. The ball ejecting mechanism has a function of switching the destination of the game balls between the outlet and the outlet.

Game balls acquired as the game progresses and game balls lent out in response to a lending operation on a lending operation device 292, which will be described later, flow into the storage section 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage section 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, and through this opening, game balls owned by a player are manually inputted, and game balls lent out at a game parlor are supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage section 231 are aligned in a line and are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (the upper right side in FIG. 1). When a ball extraction operation (for example, a pressing operation) is not performed on the ball extraction operation member 232, the game ball is guided to a firing device 330 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, through the outlet. On the other hand, when a ball extraction operation is being performed on the ball extraction operation member 232, game balls are guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 includes a storage section 241 having game ball inlets 241A, 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1), and a storage section 241 that opens and closes the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball extraction mechanism 243 that operates the ball extraction mechanism 243 and a ball extraction operation member 242 that operates the ball extraction mechanism 243. Game balls etc. acquired as the game progresses mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage section 231 is full, they flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, even in response to a ball extraction operation on the ball extraction operation member 232, game balls flow from the storage section 231 to the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241C.

The bottom surface of the storage section 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball extraction operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball extraction operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball extraction operation on the ball extraction operation member 242, it remains in the open state until the return operation (for example, pressing operation again) is performed on the ball extraction operation member 242. maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the inlet 241A to detect whether or not excessive game balls are stored in the storage section 241.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 that projects forward from the flat part 219 of the front decoration body 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and a It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that disables the firing of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the player's operation. When the player rotates the firing handle 252, a game ball is fired from the firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the amount of the rotational operation. Note that if the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or if the firing operation is disabled by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is not rotated. Even if the game ball is not ejected from the ejecting device 330.

Furthermore, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decoration body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap on the back side with respect to the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration body 210, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral portion 211 includes an upper center edge 211A, an upper left edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on both left and right sides of the upper center edge 211A, and an upper left edge. It has a left side edge 211D located below 211B and a right side edge 211E located below 211C as light emitting parts, and a frame light emits corresponding to each light emitting part. Devices 271 to 275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right edge 211C. It is composed of a device 273, a left side frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left side edge 211D, and a right side frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right side edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 includes one or more light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components are integrated and electrically connected. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left sound output port 211F and an upper right sound output port 211G, for example, at the upper part of the opening periphery 211, and these upper left sound output ports 211F. An upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (backward) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration body 210.

Further, in the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, a game ball lending device 290 is provided, for example, on the right side of the upper surface of the upper protrusion 217. The game ball rental device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value according to the remaining amount of banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (not shown) arranged in line with the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball rental device 291. It includes a lending operation device 292 that is operated by the player when receiving a card, and a return operation device 293 that is operated by the player when returning banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit and numerical values corresponding to the amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display on the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are lent out. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the remaining amount and the card on which the remaining amount is recorded are returned from the card unit in response to the return operation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform an input operation other than the firing operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can be pressed, a rotation operation device 262 that can be rotated, and a selection operation device 263 that can be operated in up, down, left, and right directions. These operating devices 261 to 263 are used to perform a performance selection operation to select a performance to be performed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation to set the volume and light intensity of each device that executes a performance in the pachinko machine 100, or a player-related It is possible to perform performance setting operations that allow the pachinko machine 100 to perform performances according to previous games by inputting information, and these operations can be performed by players and game hall managers as necessary. It is said that The input operation section of the input operation device 260 that the player contacts (for example, the annular rotary operation section of the rotation operation device 262) can be rotated, moved up and down, or It is preferable that operations such as vibrations be configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), and may be performed either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation. By operating the input portion at multiple timings, it is possible to provide a variety of effects that accompany input operations, such as actively encouraging input operations.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be explained. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and has a function of integrating the main body of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is constructed by attaching a plurality of functional parts including a game board 400 to a base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) that is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame 301. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game board 400 that holds game balls. A firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) that fires a gun, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is attached to the back side of the game board 400 and centrally controls the progress of the game, and a A sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) is provided to control game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage is formed inside to guide game balls released from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102. A plurality of wiring (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and the plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are connected to various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, the frame light emitting device 271 to 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) and devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 or the rear block 104 (for example, the main controller 370 and the sub-control device 390). The signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base body 401 having through holes such as an ejection port 401A through which game balls can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that curves smoothly from the bottom left to the top right of the base body 401. 402, an inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. A recoil prevention member 405 is attached. The outer rail 402 guides game balls fired from a firing device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game balls once released into the game area from the shooting path 401B formed by the portion between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing each other in parallel to return to the shooting path 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball, such as when a game ball that goes over the top center of the game board 400 and heads to the right side returns to the left side via the top center again. However, it is made of a material such as damping rubber, for example.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage section 163 is formed in the lower part of the back side of the front block 102. As shown in FIG. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the firing device 330 in the direction of the firing path 401B and the outer rail 402, and although the game ball is fired from the firing device 330, it does not go beyond the ball return prevention mechanism 404 and is fired. The game balls returning back through the passage 401B are returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inlet 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage section 163 arranged below this gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) within the game area while falling due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer circumferential shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the areas have a front-to-back width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The gaming area is generally partitioned at its outer periphery by an outer rail 402 and an inner rail 403, the front side is partitioned into a substantially planar shape by the rear plate 223 of the center panel 220, and the rear side is partitioned into a substantially planar section by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Note that various structures provided in the gaming area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the firing device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends out the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a shooting position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 (FIG. 10) that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331. ), a firing mechanism 333 that fires the game ball placed at the firing position, a firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a firing mechanism 333 that fires the game ball placed at the firing position, a firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 (see FIG. A guiding member 335 that guides the firing passage 401B is provided. As described above, the firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation performed on the firing operating device 250, and the drive control of the firing solenoid 334 changes in response to the firing operation performed on the firing operating device 250, thereby adjusting the firing force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a two-part board case 371 that accommodates the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving traces.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, an attachment part 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is attached to the attachment part 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the attachment part 372 can be attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily checked while it is still attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the attachment portion 372 in such a way that it cannot be removed without leaving traces, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a two-part board case 391 that accommodates the sub-control board 940. For example, like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving traces. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area of the game board 400 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. In addition, in FIG. 7, an example of the decorative pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, flow-changing members such as nails 411 and windmills 412 that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a center plate located approximately in the center of the base body 401. A structure 420, a starting device (specifically, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) related to the first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420, and a center starting device 431B. A starting device related to the second special symbol (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) arranged on the lower right side with respect to the structure 420, and a big winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432 , 434 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged above (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the starting device 436 of the game board 400. A winning combination operating device 435 located on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower big winning devices 433, 434, and a general winning device 439A located on both left and right sides of the lower middle start winning device 431B. , 439B.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches serving as detection means for detecting passage of a game ball in correspondence with the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A, etc. (see FIG. 10), and a plurality of switches corresponding to each switch are provided. Entry of a game ball into a predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that enters the upper middle start winning device 431A, a middle start winning switch (lower middle start winning switch) that detects a game ball that enters the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right start winning switch 442 that detects the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432, lower big winning switch 443 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower big winning device 433, upper big winning device 434, a prize-winning switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning combination operating device 435, a winning combination activation switch 445 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the starting device 436, a starting switch 446 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the starting device 436, and a lower A non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the big winning device 433, and a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower big winning device 433. A specific passage switch 448 that detects game balls that have entered the general prize winning devices 439A, 439B, and general prize winning switches 449A, 449B that detect game balls that have entered the general prize winning devices 439A, 439B, respectively, are installed on the game board 400.

Furthermore, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors to prevent fraud (see FIG. 10), and is capable of detecting abnormalities that occur in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, etc. are installed on the game board 400.

The game ball entrance portions of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitute ball entry ports, and the game balls that have entered each ball entry port are released into the game area. Each winning device, specifically, the upper middle start winning device 431A, the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning hole, and the game balls that enter each winning hole are guided through a through hole formed in the base body 401 to a collection and discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401. . In addition, game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to a collection and discharge passage through a discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection and discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game parlor. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls depending on the type of winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Note that each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, upper middle start winning device 431A and lower middle start winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured as follows, and the starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters. It may also be used as a ball entrance where the ball is released into the game area again without being paid out.

The upper mid-start winning device 431A and the lower mid-start winning device 431B related to the first special symbol, as well as the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B, do not change the probability of the game ball entering them. The played game ball is guided to the back side of the base body 401. Further, the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism that changes the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol; instead, or in addition, it may be provided in the starting device related to the first special symbol and the general winning device. It may be provided in one or more of 439A and 439B. Furthermore, the mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering may be configured by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or may be typified by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that enters a predetermined area. It may also be configured by a mechanism that operates mechanically.

The right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 that changes the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by transition between an entry permission posture and an entry prohibition posture, and a right entry restriction mechanism. 452, and a right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10). The right entry restriction mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by a right entry restriction solenoid 462, and when the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibited position, the two movable pieces close the entrance (winning opening). ) by narrowing (or closing) the game ball, the game balls cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry-permitting attitude, the two movable pieces close their tips. By adopting an arrangement in which the interval between the parts is expanded, the game ball can enter the right start winning device 432. The right entry regulating mechanism 452 prevents right entry when a game ball entering the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won in a lottery based on being detected by the starting switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). In accordance with the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the entry permission posture is shifted a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower large prize winning device 433 includes a lower entry regulating mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of game balls into its interior by transitioning between an entry-permitting posture and an entry-prohibiting posture; The downward entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guidance attitude and the guided attitude cause the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 to enter a non-specific passage or a specific passage. A distribution mechanism (not shown) that distributes the balls, and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the distribution mechanism to switch the guiding destination of the game balls are provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower prize winning device 433 because the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). , when the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 is in the entry-permitting attitude, the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower large prize winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that enters the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in the non-guidance posture where it protrudes forward, and when it is in the guidance posture where the distribution mechanism is retracted backwards. will be directed to a specific passage. The specific passage, non-specific passage, and distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of gaming states, and when a game ball enters a specific passage, an advantageous gaming state is given to the player as a benefit. .

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper entrance winning device 434 includes an upper entry regulating mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of game balls into the inside thereof by transition between an entry allowed posture and an entry prohibited posture; An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the upper large winning device 434, but the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 When is in the entry-permitting attitude, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 opens the entry port, allowing the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434.

In addition, the entry permissible posture and the entry prohibited posture as a mechanism that changes the probability of a game ball entering the inside of the right entry regulating mechanism 452, etc., are the winning opening (or ball entrance opening) of each device that constitutes each mechanism. corresponds to a change in the posture of the operating member that switches between a special state in which the game ball can enter and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, and at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. It's good to have. In addition, as a mechanism that changes the probability of a game ball entering, such as the right entry restriction mechanism 452, it is not necessarily necessary to make the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and it is possible to allow the entry of the game ball even in the normal state, and to In this state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state where it is easier for the game ball to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower jackpot prize device 433 and the upper prize prize device 434 when a jackpot lottery is won. Specifically, the game ball that entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle start winning device 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle start winning switch 441A or the lower middle start winning switch 441B. (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery"), or the game ball entering the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442. When a lottery based on the above (hereinafter also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is activated. As a result of this operation, at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 assumes the entry permission posture for a predetermined period of time over a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guiding attitude according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined period of time from the transition of the downward approach restriction mechanism 453 to the entry permissible attitude, and further switches to the guiding attitude after a predetermined period of time from the transition to the guiding attitude. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guidance position.

The winning combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower major prize winning device 433 and the upper major prize winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the jackpot lottery, either the lower jackpot winning device 433 or the upper jackpot winning device 434 starts operating on the condition that the game ball passes through the winning combination operating device 435. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot, he or she can start the special gaming state at the timing that the player intends. It should be noted that it is not necessarily necessary to configure either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 to start operating on the condition that the game ball passes through the winning combination operating device 435, and instead of or in addition to In addition, either the lower major prize winning device 433 or the upper major prize winning device 434 may start operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display fluctuations in symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times games are suspended. A display device having a plurality of light emitting parts is provided at the lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting sections are divided in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

Specifically, the game board 400 includes a first special symbol that fluctuates and displays the first special symbol in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, or permanently displays the first special symbol as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 471 related to the special symbol, and a second device that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or permanently displays the second special symbol as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, a special symbol preservation display device 476 that displays the number of pending unit games related to the first special symbol, and a special symbol pending display device 476 that displays the number of pending unit games related to the second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to play the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to play the unit game related to the second special symbol are each reserved up to four times. Here, a unit game is one game that is executed based on one starting prize, and a lottery that is executed based on one starting winning and a lottery based on the correctness determination. It refers to a series of games that includes the start to end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right to play the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the starting winning device 431 is either the upper middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning switch. Even if it is detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to play the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball entering the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). Also, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting parts, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is expressed by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts (a combination of light emission states (extinguished, lit, blinking) including emission color). The special symbol retention display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol retention display device 477 related to the second special symbol display the number of retention times based on the combination of the light emitting states (off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochrome light emitting parts. indicate.

In addition, the game board 400 includes a normal symbol display device 473 that displays the normal symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the normal symbol lottery, or permanently displays the normal symbols as a stop symbol according to the lottery result; A normal symbol reservation display device 478 is provided which displays the number of times the right of a unit game is reserved. The right for unit games related to normal symbols is reserved up to four times. When the right to the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved to the maximum number of times, the right to the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball entering the starting device 436 is detected by the starting switch 446.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting parts, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). A normal pattern is expressed by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. Further, the normal symbol reservation display device 478 displays the number of reservations based on a combination of the light emitting states (off, on, blinking) of the two monochrome light emitting parts.

In addition, on the game board 400, in a unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and decorative symbols are displayed in a fixed manner so as to overlap with the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided.

The decorative pattern display device 479 includes three pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C arranged in the left-right direction. The pattern display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C are all areas in which decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner or fixedly displayed. Among the symbol display areas 479A, 479B, and 479C, the decorative symbols displayed in the leftmost symbol display region 479A constitute the left symbol column, and the decorative symbols displayed in the rightmost symbol display region 479B. constitutes the right symbol row. Moreover, the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display area 479C located between the symbol display area 479A and the symbol display area 479B constitute a middle symbol row.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 479 is configured as a reel device including three cylindrical reels (rotating bodies) aligned in the left-right direction. Each reel of the reel device is configured to be independently rotatable by a motor (not shown) controlled by a sub-control board 940.

Each cylindrical reel constituting the reel device includes a cylindrical body (hereinafter also referred to as a "reel body") made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, a transparent resin), and an outer peripheral surface of the reel body. A strip-shaped pattern sheet 601 (see FIG. 13) is attached along the circumferential direction of the sheet. On the pattern sheet 601, a plurality of decorative patterns are provided in rows along the longitudinal direction in a predetermined order.

The decorative symbol display device 479 moves a plurality of decorative symbols provided on the symbol sheet 601 from top to bottom or in the opposite direction in each symbol display area 479A, 479B, 479C by rotating each reel ( scroll). Thereby, variable display of decorative patterns on the decorative pattern display device 479 is realized. Note that the decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily need to be composed of a plurality of reels, and may be composed of other devices such as a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying images.

The variable display and fixed display of decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 479 are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of decorative symbols, more complex and diverse effects are performed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the fluctuating display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the fluctuating display and final display of the decorative symbol do not necessarily start to fluctuate at completely coincident timings, or stop displaying as a final display. It is not necessary, and a setting may be made in which the fluctuations are started at approximately the same timing with a slight time difference between each timing, and the confirmation display is performed at approximately the same timing.

In addition, the game board 400 includes a board light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub control board 940. Performs various lighting effects and status notifications by lighting.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be explained. The normal gaming state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal gaming state") is a state where the variable display time of the first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state"). handle.

If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters a specific path (internal path of the lower jackpot prize winning device 433) during the special game state that is transitioned based on the win. Depending on whether or not the game state is changed to after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific path during the special game state, the variable display time of the first special symbol lottery, second special symbol, and normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the "time saving state"). A gaming state (also referred to as "low probability state" hereinafter) in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "low probability state") (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving gaming state"). On the other hand, if the game ball enters a specific path during the special game state, it is a time saving state and the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal game state. (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state") (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability variable gaming state").

The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but after that, the game returns to the normal game state. Further, the variable probability game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but after that it returns to the normal game state.

Note that the gaming states and transitions between gaming states do not necessarily have to be structured as described above; for example, the high probability state may continue until the next jackpot is won, or the above gaming states may be changed depending on other contents. It may be configured to have at least one, or it may be configured to further include a gaming state other than each of the gaming states described above, or it may be configured to transition between gaming states depending on conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be explained roughly in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various variable pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various gaming states are generated. When the game ball that enters either of the starting winning devices 431A, 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by either of the middle starting winning switches 441A, 441B (see FIG. 10), the starting winning of the first special symbol occurs. becomes. When the first special symbol starts winning, if the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol has not been reserved to the maximum number of times, the winning random number, jackpot symbol random number, and stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

A unit game based on a random number obtained based on the starting winning of the first special symbol is not in a special game state, is not in a unit game related to the first special symbol or second special symbol, and is a unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights are not reserved, it will start immediately after storing those random numbers. In addition, even if you are not in a special game state, during a unit game related to the first special symbol or second special symbol, or when the right to a unit game related to the first special symbol or second special symbol is reserved, After the unit games related to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) that were reserved before the current prize winning are completed, the unit game based on the current starting prize is started. If each random number is obtained based on the starting winning of the first special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on that random number will be played after all the pending winnings before the current starting winning after the special gaming state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

Further, the unit game based on the random number obtained based on the starting winning of the first special symbol is started after all the unit games related to the second special symbol are completed. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the starting winning of the second special symbol after the current starting winning, the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol is executed with priority. It should be noted that it is not necessary that the unit game based on the starting prize of the second special symbol is executed in priority to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are played in the order of the starting prize. It may be a configuration in which the unit game superiority control related to is executed, or it may be a configuration in which the two special symbols are not alternative but variable at the same time.

If a jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery based on the starting prize of the first special symbol, the stop symbol ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of stop symbol and the type of jackpot correspond to each other, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry permission posture, A plurality of types of jackpots are set corresponding to the types of game states such as a game state to be shifted to after a special game state (whether to shift to a variable probability game state or not), and a jackpot symbol is set for each type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a losing symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as a stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is drawn based on the current gaming state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the right for the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved. The variation display time of the symbols is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbols is selected. Variation patterns of decorative symbols can be roughly divided into variation patterns in which a reach display is performed before a decorative symbol corresponding to a stop symbol (jackpot symbol or loss symbol) related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed (hereinafter referred to as a "reach" symbol). There is also a variable pattern (also referred to as "variable pattern"), and a variable pattern in which, when the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a losing symbol, the ready-to-reach display is not displayed before the corresponding decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "reach display" means that after the variable display of decorative symbols starts in the unit game related to special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), each symbol column except symbol column 1 (for example, The combination of decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed in the left and right symbol rows satisfies the conditions for becoming a jackpot symbol, and the remaining symbol rows (for example, the middle symbol row) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. This is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of a jackpot symbol depending on the display result (ie, the stopped symbol) when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The reach display includes normal reach, which is a reach display with a relatively short variable display time (for example, about 25 seconds to about 30 seconds), and reach display, which has a variable display time that is longer than normal reach (for example, about 60 seconds to about 180 seconds). This includes Super Reach. The type of reach display is not limited to two types, normal reach and super reach, but may be three or more types including special reach, which is a reach display with a variable display time longer than super reach.

After the variable display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variable pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display time is selected, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and Variation display (variation performance) of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 479 is started, and the first special symbol continues to be displayed in a constant pattern over the variable display time, and the decorative symbol continues to display the variable display in a fixed pattern over the variation display time. Fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern continues over the display time. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbols related to the first special symbols are displayed definitively, and the symbols corresponding to the stop symbols of the first special symbols are definitively displayed as decorative symbols. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol continues for at least a predetermined period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state after the first special symbol is displayed for confirmation. In the special gaming state, the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 of the lower jackpot device 433 and the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 of the upper jackpot device 434 enter the entry permissive posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. . When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the big prize switches 443 and 444 during each entry permissible posture of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454, or when a predetermined maximum When the allowable entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition position. Thereafter, after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission position again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 are configured such that only one of them takes an entry permissive posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period). ), one side shifts to the initial approach permissible attitude. Further, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and further after that a predetermined standby time has elapsed (after the ending period). After the special gaming state ends, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state.

In various game states, when a game ball entering the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the second special symbol starts winning. Control of the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved to the maximum number of times at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained and the unit game based on this starting winning is executed. be done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the determination of the variable display time of the second special symbol, the selection of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display time, the execution of the variable display, and the game state The transition control and the like are also executed in the same way as the control related to the first special symbol.

In various gaming states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the starting switch 446, if the right to play the unit game related to the normal symbol is not reserved to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is obtained. and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, immediately after the storage, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, after the unit game based on the right of the acquired normal symbol unit game is completed, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started.

In a unit game related to normal symbols, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol has been won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the winning symbol has been won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, if the winning symbol is not won in the normal symbol lottery, a predetermined losing symbol is set as a stop symbol. After the normal symbol drawing, the normal symbol display device 473 starts to display the normal symbols in a variable manner, and in the non-time-saving state, the variable display in a constant pattern continues for a predetermined variable display time, and in the time-saving state. The variable display according to a fixed pattern continues for a predetermined variable display time that is shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the gaming state, the stop symbols related to the normal symbols are displayed for a certain period of time.

If the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the entry permission posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when winning in a non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start prize winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum allowed entry time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time-saving state (time-saving gaming state and variable probability gaming state), the right start winning device 432 enters a predetermined maximum allowable entry time (for example, about 4.8 seconds) that is longer than in the non-time-saving state. ) intermittently (for example, divided into three times) into the approach permissible attitude. However, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start prize switch 442, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to elapse. Moreover, even if the number of times of transition to the entry permissible posture has not reached the predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

Next, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be explained. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, you must first win in the normal symbol lottery, and furthermore, based on the winning, the game ball enters the right startup prize device 432 in the entry permission state of the right startup prize device 432. Must. The winning probability of a normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time of the right-start winning device 432 in the entry permission state based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds), so the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. is much smaller than the chance per unit time of receiving the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in time-saving states such as time-saving gaming states and variable probability gaming states, the chance per unit time of receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly greater than the chance per unit time of receiving the first special symbol lottery. .

Therefore, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and moving to the variable probability game state by entering the game ball into a specific path in the subsequent special game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery before each gaming state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the center of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game ball mainly flows down from the left side of the central structure 420 is provided. The structure is such that a game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball mainly flows down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. A player plays a game using a left-handed gaming method in the normal gaming state, and plays a game using a right-handed gaming method in the time-saving gaming state and variable probability gaming state. Further, since the lower major winning device 433 and the upper major winning device 434 are arranged on the right side of the central structure 420, the game is played using the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be explained. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view of the pachinko machine 100, respectively. Note that in FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is constructed by attaching other members and devices to a base 501. The base body 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported by the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game balls (for example, in one line) and arranges them in one stage on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit that stores game balls. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment section, a case rail 530 as a ball guide section that guides game balls flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a case rail 530 that serves as a ball guide section for guiding game balls flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the case rail 530. A payout device 540 that lends out game balls, and a ball guiding section that guides game balls flowing out from the payout device 540 to a guide path (not shown) formed in the base 501 on the downstream side of the payout device 540. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls the payout of game balls and lending of game balls by the payout device 540, and a power supply that converts external power into power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply/launch control device 570 that has a function as a means and a launch control means that controls the launch of game balls based on a launch operation on the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920, and a payout control device 560. and a relay device 950 that relays signals between the game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a card unit (not shown) placed on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The base body 501 is integrally molded from resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The base part 502 has an upper part formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower part formed in a substantially flat shape with a thickness in the front-rear direction, to which other devices can be attached. It has the function of an attached part.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed into a substantially plate shape that is thick in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but covers a portion of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that requires frequent inspection and confirmation, such as a portion of the main control device 370, on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. The size is set to form a window for exposure to. A large number of ventilation holes 503A are formed on the back surface of the protective cover portion 503 and have a function of improving heat dissipation of heat generated in the main control device 370 and the sub-control device 390.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally elongated box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulating device (not shown) of the island facility are sequentially replenished at one end in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side to which game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls supplied to the game ball tank 510 move toward the opening side by their own weight. Furthermore, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) compared to the longitudinal direction, and guides the game balls preferentially toward the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . In addition, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap thereon, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and Static electricity on the game ball downstream of it is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and game balls flow into the game ball tank 510 through the opening. The tank rail 520 includes a passage forming member 521 that forms a generally gutter-shaped passage for game balls having a width for the game balls to pass through in a row, and a passage forming member 521 that gradually increases in height as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. The game ball has a rectifying member 522 which has a top surface part where the flow rate is lowered and rectifies the game balls flowing down the passage from the vertically overlapping height gradually to the one level height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is formed vertically so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and the game balls from the tank rail 520 flow into it. The case rail 530 is curved from side to side and continues downward to prevent the game balls from flowing too vigorously. Further, a ball breakage detection section 539 for detecting a ball breakage is provided in the middle of the ball path in the case rail 530. The ball outage detection unit 539 has a built-in storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10), and the storage ball switch 591 detects whether game balls are inside the case rail 530 due to ball clogging or the like occurring on the case rail 530 or its upstream side. Detects out of bulbs that are not being replenished properly.

The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism that sends out game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). According to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are released to the downstream side. Passage of the released game ball through the ball path is detected by the payout counting switch 592, and thereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of game balls paid out.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the dispensing control device 560 and the power supply/launch control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. It is being The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power source/launch control device 570 can be used continuously even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that accommodates the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, does not leave any traces of opening. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power source/launch control device 570 includes a power source/launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that accommodates the power source/launch control board 900, and the power source/launch control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed board case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a back setting switch 905 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The rear setting switch 905 is used to enable a setting operation for setting the ball launch rate of the pachinko machine 100 to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages (for example, 6 stages, 9 stages, etc.). It is a device that converts

By inserting a predetermined key (not shown) into the rear setting switch 905 and rotating it to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position), the setting of the ball exit rate can be changed. can be enabled (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (in this embodiment, pressing the initialization switch 907) while the setting change of the ball exit rate is thus enabled, the setting change of the ball exit rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the ball exit rate is effectively performed, the predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. In other words, changing the setting of the ball exit rate by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 can be said to be changing the setting of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the initial winning probability (in this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery probability of winning), and probability-variable continuation rate (in this embodiment, when transitioning to a special gaming state via the second special symbol lottery in a variable-probability gaming state, the probability of transitioning to a variable-probability gaming state after the special gaming state) It is possible to select one of nine types of game modes with different combinations. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball launch rate (the setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the first special symbol lottery and the second special lottery are performed so that the initial hit probability and continuation probability correspond to the set stage. The ball launch rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the symbol lottery (that is, using probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability).

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, there is a top type with a significantly low first hit probability but a significantly high variable continuation rate, and a middle type with a medium initial hit probability and a medium variable continuation rate. You can choose between the type and the bottom type, which has a significantly lower probability of first hit but a significantly higher probability of continuation. Furthermore, in each of these types, the first hit probability of each type is divided into three stages of probability states (hereinafter also referred to as probability setting states) that are narrower than the width of the first hit probability between each type, that is, Among the three stages, a first stage probability having the lowest first hit probability, a second stage probability having the second lowest first hit probability, and a third stage probability having the highest first hit probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls that are won in the upper and lower middle start winning devices 431A, 431B and the right start winning device 432 is smaller than in other types, but the number of prize balls that are won in the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 is smaller than in other types. The number of prize balls associated with this is higher than other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls due to winnings to the middle start winning device 431A, 431B and the right start winning device 432 is larger than other types, but the number of winning balls to the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 is larger than that of other types. The number of prize balls associated with this is smaller than other types.

Here, the number of prize balls may be set to the same number for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for players to judge whether the setting is top type, middle type, or bottom type based on the number of balls awarded, and the gameplay of guessing which type is the setting can be reduced for a long time. can be added.

Additionally, the profit rate for players changes depending on the stage of the probability setting state for the top type, middle type, and bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for all types. The profit margin for players is set to be substantially the same. For this reason, even if the probability settings are changed by changing the type, the profits earned by the gaming parlor side per fixed period (for example, one day) can be easily predicted, and the gaming parlor can be easily managed.

Note that the game mode that is changed by changing the setting of the ball exit rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the initial hit probability and the variable entry rate as described above; It may be either the entry rate. In addition, lottery probabilities other than the initial hit probability and variable entry rate, such as the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery The probability that a small hit will be selected in , the probability of entry into a variable probability game state (in this embodiment, the rate of entry into a variable probability game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), the variable probability game state to which the special game state is entered after the special game state. may be the probability that the variable probability game state ends (for example, the probability that the end of the variable probability game state is selected in the falling lottery that is performed every time the variable display of symbols is executed during the variable probability game state), etc., and each of these game modes It may be a combination of two or more.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905. When the setting change of the ball exit rate (the setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed by operating the rear setting switch 905, the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed on the setting display device 906. . The setting display information is composed of a combination of alphabetic characters representing the type and numbers representing the probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type, middle type, and bottom type are represented by the letters "T", "M", and "B", respectively. Further, in the probability setting state of each type, the first stage probability is represented by "1", the second stage probability is represented by "2", and the third stage probability is represented by "3".

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "T1" when the game mode is a top type first stage probability, and when the game mode is a middle type third stage probability game mode. The setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is “M3”, and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 in the bottom type second stage probability game mode is “B2”.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply/launch control board 900, a power monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub-control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Each of these main control circuit devices will be explained in detail below.

The power supply/launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power at a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a firing device that operates according to the operation of the firing operation device 250. 330, and a signal relay section 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, 24 volts AC) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal power (for example, 24 volts DC), and generates various kinds of power from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of a drive voltage (for example, 12 volts DC) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, and power for driving various switches and executing control processing. This includes power of a control voltage (for example, 5 volts DC) to maintain the power supply, power of a backup voltage to maintain the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various kinds of power generated from internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power monitoring board 910 is supplied with internal power, driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. The main control board 920 is supplied with driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. The payout control board 930 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 are supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, intake of external power is stopped. Note that the pachinko machine can be turned off by turning off the power switch 909 or by unplugging the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply section 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown). A state in which the supply of power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power outage state."

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output control voltage power for a predetermined period even after transition to a power outage state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that the current control state can be restored.

The firing control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. Note that the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are allowed to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on a contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and that the firing stop switch 255 for stopping firing is activated. On the condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs an on-state launch permission signal to the main control board 920. Further, based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feeding solenoid control signal to the firing control section 902. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the on state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. let As a result, game balls are sequentially fired from the firing device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the initialization signal in the ON state. Note that the initialization switch 907 does not necessarily have to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay section 903; for example, the initialization switch 907 may be mounted directly on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be housed in the board case 371, and thereby it is possible to prevent unauthorized signal input aimed at the signal transmission section.

In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the on-state ball overflow signal, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low-speed payout signal controls the rotational speed of the payout motor 542 (the payout The payout speed of game balls from the device 540 is reduced. In addition, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the OFF state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Make it faster.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a rear setting switch 905 and a setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay section 903. The signal relay unit 903 relays an on-state setting signal that is output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 allows the game mode to be changed in response to receiving an on-state setting signal from the rear setting switch 905. Further, the signal relay unit 903 relays a setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906. Setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

The power supply monitoring board 910 includes a power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply/launch control board 900, and a power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply/launch control board 900 and the power supply and transmission of various signals between the power supply/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920. and a signal relay section 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power outage signal to the main control board 920 in response to transition to a power outage state, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. If the state in which the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that there is a power outage, and a power outage signal in an on state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power outage state by receiving the power outage signal in the on state.

The main control board 920 centrally controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and a ROM (not shown) that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs. It also includes a RAM (not shown) that stores the following information. The main control board 920 is also equipped with various other circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown). There is. The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to be able to maintain (back up) internal data by supplying backup voltage power from the power source/launch control board 900 even after transition to a power outage state.

The payout control board 930 controls the operation of putting out game balls by the payout device 540 in response to instructions from the main control board 920 and the lending operation of game balls by the payout device 540 in response to the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Like the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown).

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices for information communication, and for example, bidirectional information input/output communication is possible with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The opening/closing detection switches 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the dispensing counting switch 592 are connected to enable information input communication in only one direction, and the dispensing motor 542 is connected to enable information input communication in only one direction. Only output communication is possible. Note that, like the RAM of the main control board 920, the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function that allows internal data to be maintained for a certain period of time in a power outage state, or the RAM of the main control board 920 Unlike this, a configuration may be adopted in which internal data is not maintained during a power outage.

The sub-control board 940 controls the operations of various performance devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, etc. based on instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated.For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , are connected to the input operation device 260 so that information can be communicated bidirectionally, and connected to the decorative pattern display device 479 and the like so that only unidirectional information output communication is possible.

<Various control processing>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be explained. The control processing in the main control board 920 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon recovery from a power outage state, and execution that interrupts the main processing periodically (in this embodiment, at a 2 ms (millisecond) cycle). This consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the main processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing (abbreviated as "main control main processing" in FIG. 11) of the main control board 920.

In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initialization processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. After that, there is an interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits interrupts, and the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the jackpot random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol and the normal symbol. A random number initial value update process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the RAM) and a first variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), variation pattern, etc. Variation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the fourth variation type counter (a part of the RAM) and interrupt permission processing S1023 for permitting interrupts are repeatedly executed. Note that if a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 sets an initial value to a stack pointer (a part of RAM) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. A start-up standby process S1003 in which the control board 930, the sub-control board 940, etc. wait for a predetermined period of time is executed.

After startup standby processing S1003, processing S2001 for determining the output state of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power supply/launch control board 900 is performed. In the determination process S2001, if it is determined that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the off state (S2001: N), the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply/launch control board 900 Determination processing S1004, determination processing S1005 for the value of power outage information (a part of the RAM), and determination processing S1007 for the storage state of saved information are performed, and based on these determination results, it is determined whether or not to erase the saved information in the RAM. It is determined whether or not. Here, the saved information is information necessary to return to the gaming state before the power outage, and corresponds to a part of the RAM that was updated according to the progress of the game before the power outage. Examples include a counter value related to a unit game in the middle, a counter value stored by starting winnings, and the like.

The storage state of saved information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a predetermined range of storage area in the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and power outage monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) is performed based on the current checksum value and the transition to the previous power outage state. ), it is determined whether the exclusive OR with the RAM judgment value which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in ) is "0" (determination process S1007), and thereby It is determined whether the checksum value at the time of transition to the power outage state is the same.

If the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), if the power outage information is not a predetermined power outage value indicating that the saved information was saved and ended when transitioning to the power outage state (S1005: N), or If the information is not held normally (S1007: N), RAM clearing processing S1008 is executed to erase the information stored in the RAM. After it is determined that the saved information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clearing process S1008 is executed, the hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 Software initialization processing S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 for determining whether the power outage information is a power outage value is executed. If the power outage information is a power outage value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 is performed to initialize various information including restoration of retained information, and a recovery command indicating completion of the setting is set (return command Output processing S1012). By restoring the held information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power outage state.

On the other hand, if the power outage information is not the power outage value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the retained information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the settings is output. (Initialization command output processing S1014).

In addition, in RAM recovery setting processing S1011 and RAM initialization processing S1013, power outage information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power outage value, and various error states such as a fraud detection error are set immediately before transition to the previous power outage state. Even if an error occurs, all error states will be cleared. Also, either a return command or an initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command Predetermined initialization processing is also executed in each of the above.

After initializing the RAM according to the startup situation (judgment process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the conditional device was activated when the transition to the previous power outage status occurred, the special gaming status is entered. Preparations for returning are made (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and the process corresponding to the gaming situation during the power outage state is executed on the sub control board 940. Ru.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state is set or not by determining whether the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is determined. In the case (S1016: Y), a time-saving command is output (time-saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, if it is in a non-time-saving state (S1016: N), a non-time-saving command is output (non-time-saving command output processing S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initialization process S1019).

On the other hand, in the determination process S2001, if it is determined that the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in an on state indicating that the rear setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key (S2001: Y), the RAM 922 RAM clear processing S2002 is executed to erase information in substantially the entire area. Specifically, in the RAM clearing process S2002, information in substantially all areas except the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined stages (nine types in this embodiment) of game modes, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM 922. ing. Therefore, through the RAM clearing process S2002, information in substantially all areas except the storage area of the setting correspondence information in the RAM 922 of the main control board 920 is erased, and a state is entered in which setting changes are permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, a setting display signal identifying the gaming mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is output to the setting display device 906. Setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from main control board 920. That is, the setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

Next, setting change processing S2003 is executed to change the settings of the game mode until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off. Note that the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off when the back setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting of the game mode is changed by pressing the initialization switch 907 while the back setting switch 905 is operated with a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on the depression of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order in which nine predetermined game modes are selected cyclically (for example, ... → T1 → T2 → T3 → M1 → M2 → M3 → B1 → B2 → B3 → T1 → T2 → ) are determined in advance, and the selected game mode is sequentially changed in accordance with the order each time the initialization switch 907 is pressed.

Each time the change is made, a value corresponding to the selected game mode is stored in the RAM 922 as setting correspondence information. Every time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922 is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is displayed on the setting display device. 906.

Therefore, the person who changes the settings, such as the administrator of the gaming hall, has to operate the settings switch 905 on the back with a predetermined key, and then press the initialization switch 907 until the game mode that he or she wants to set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected. After repeatedly pressing the button, the selection of the game mode can be completed by placing a game ball in the upper middle-start winning device 431A or the lower middle-start winning device 431B. Therefore, the setting change process S2003 ends when a game ball is won in the medium start winning device 431A, 431B after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), RAM change is performed to initialize various information in the RAM 922 except for the information related to the setting of the game mode (i.e., setting correspondence information). Setting processing S2005 is executed. As a result, startup of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and it is confirmed that the game will proceed in the gaming mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM 922.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 is executed to output a set command indicating completion of setting of the RAM 922 to the payout control board 930. By receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 will shift to normal gaming processing, and can also recognize which gaming mode to operate in. can. After the set command output process S2006, special game state return preparation process S1015 and subsequent processes are executed.

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as "main control interrupt process" in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 920, first, interrupt start processing S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. Thereafter, power outage monitoring processing S1202 to external information output processing S1221, which are related to practical control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors, are sequentially executed. However, if the game progress is stopped based on detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), control signal output processing S1208 to external information output processing S1221 are not executed. Finally, interrupt permission processing S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt processing ends. Below, various main processes will be explained individually.

In power outage monitoring processing S1202, the value of power outage information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power outage signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power outage signal is checked three times, and if the on state is detected all three times, it is determined that there is a power outage. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power outage state, the power outage information is maintained at the energization value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that there is a power outage, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a predetermined range of storage area of the RAM is calculated, and the two's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM judgment value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which no actual control such as progress of the game or monitoring of various sensors is performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM judgment value is set is maintained based on the backup power. Ru. Note that since the output state of the power outage signal is checked three times, each timer interrupt process is executed twice after the reception of the power outage signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value that is "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is If the value of the winning random number counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the value after the change is the same as the circulating initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol will be the same as the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol. The initial value of the cycle is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and winning random number counter related to normal symbols are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to special symbols. However, a unique value is set for each counter as the update range determined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, and multiple counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the cyclic initial value of each counter is refers to an initial value counter specific to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol have the same value range.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it will be changed to a value that is "1" larger than the current value, and the special When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the initial random number value counter for special symbols and the initial winning random number counter for normal symbols, except that the maximum and minimum values are unique to these counters, the initial winning random number counter for special symbols It is updated in the same way as a value counter.

In the variation counter update process S1205, the values of the first to fourth variation type counters for determining the variation display time (variation time), variation pattern, etc. are updated. Specifically, if the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value that is "1" larger than the current value, and the first variation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second to fourth variation type counters are updated in the same way as the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and specified minimum value are unique values for those counters. be done.

It should be noted that each winning random number counter, jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and each variation type counter related to special symbols and normal symbols do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the above counters may have a different configuration. For example, it may be configured to update from a fixed initial value without using an initial value counter, or it may be configured using a random number generation IC without using a program and refer to the value as necessary. .

In game stop determination processing S1206, if the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to a game stop value and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, each process for stopping the game progress is not executed and the game stop determination process S1206 ends. Note that the fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when occurrence of various types of fraud is detected in fraud detection processing S1211. Further, in determination processing S1207, it is determined whether the game is being stopped based on whether or not the fraud detection information is a game stop value.

In control signal output processing S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the special symbol display device 472 related to the normal symbol Signals for controlling various notification devices such as the normal symbol display device 473 are output. Also, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as the ball feed solenoid 332, firing solenoid 334, right approach restriction solenoid 462, downward approach restriction solenoid 463, upward approach restriction solenoid 464, and switching solenoid 465 are activated. A control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, middle start winning switches 441A, 441B, right starting winning switch 442, lower big winning switch 443, upper big winning switch 444, role combination operation switch 445, starting switch 446, non-specific passage switch 447, specific The signal states from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of game balls by the various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the RAM) twice at a predetermined time interval, and the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the RAM) twice. For each, the signal state read the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as the "first signal state") and the signal state read the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as the "second signal state"). , changes in the detection states of various switches are detected based on the detection states detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection states"). Then, for each switch, if the previous detected state is the off state, the first signal state is the on state, and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch has transitioned to the on state. Then, a detection flag (a part of the RAM) is set according to the type of switch. As explained in the power outage monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each timer interrupt process is executed twice, so the on state of various switches may be changed immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even if the detection flags of various switches are started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In timer update processing S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each gaming state, fraud monitoring, etc. are updated.

In fraud detection processing S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right start prize winning device 432, the lower prize winning device 433, and the upper prize winning device 434 are forcibly moved to entry-permitting postures, and the game ball is guided to a specific path of the lower prize winning device 433 by vibration. , forcibly inducing malfunction of the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 by radio waves, guiding game balls to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle starting winning device 431A, A situation in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as guiding a game ball to the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434 at abnormal timing has been carried out. Detect occurrence.

In winning detection response processing S1212, control is executed based on the detection of game balls by various switches provided on the game board 400. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). , the medium start prize counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. In addition, when the lower prize switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the higher prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). If the big winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the big winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

In the firing control process S1213, firing related information for controlling the firing of game balls by the firing device 330 is updated. Specifically, the activation flag of the ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 and the activation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, the intermediate block is 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is detected whether it is closed or not. Also, based on the output state of the signal from the opening/closing detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is connected to the front block 102 (see FIGS. 3) is closed or not is detected.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands are set according to the payout control state as necessary. In addition, the sub-control board 940 which received the payout state command causes the decorative pattern display device 479, the upper left sound device 281, the upper right sound device 282, etc. to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. Note that the first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a prize ball command based on that winning is set. The payout control board 930 issues an award to the main control board 920 every time it executes control to pay out the number of game balls (for example, 3) corresponding to the winning (in detail, shortly before the payout is completed). In a situation where a ball command is requested and the payout of prize balls continues, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to winnings in which the number of prize balls is different from that of the first payout counter (for example, 13 balls), and the payout control board issues a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter. When the payout control board 930 receives the prize ball command, the payout control board 930 executes control to payout the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol related process S1217, reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower jackpot prize device Operation control of 433 and top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

In addition, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, each piece of information for displaying the variable display and fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbols executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 may be based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers. It is selected based on the value and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved.

In addition, in the special symbol related process S1217, reservation control of the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol and control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower jackpot prize device Operation control of 433 and top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

In addition, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, each piece of information for displaying the variable display and fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbols executed on the decorative symbol display device 479 may be based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, and various variation pattern random numbers. It is selected based on the value and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved.

In the normal symbol related process S1218, reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbols, the operation control of the normal symbol reservation display device 478 is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. .

In the display control processing S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related processing S1217, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol reservation display device 477 etc. related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The combined output data is output to each device in control signal output processing S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each piece of information selected in the special symbol related process S1217 for displaying the variable display and fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in special symbol related processing S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub control board 940 in control signal output processing S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. Sub-control board 940 controls decorative pattern display device 479 based on commands received from main control board 920.

In motor control processing S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In external information output processing S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Design sheet>
Next, the structure of the pattern sheet 601 will be explained with reference to FIG. 13. 13(A) is a front view showing a part of the pattern sheet 601, and FIG. 13(B) is a sectional view of the pattern sheet 601 taken along the line AA in FIG. 13(A). In addition, in FIG. 13(B), the direction of each surface on the pattern sheet 601 is shown by an arrow for reference.

As shown in FIGS. 13(A) and 13(B), the pattern sheet 601 includes a sheet-like base material 611 extending in a band shape having light transmittance (translucent property) such as transparent material, and a back surface of the base material 611. Decorative patterns 621 formed on the surface of the base material 611 (the surface facing the reel body when the pattern sheet 601 is attached to the reel body) and A decorative portion 622 is formed on the surface facing outward in the state.

The decorative pattern 621 includes a main pattern 621A that can constitute a jackpot pattern and a sub pattern 621B that cannot form a jackpot pattern. The decorative patterns 621 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the pattern sheet 601 so that main patterns 621A and sub-designs 621B alternate.

The main symbol 621A is configured as a symbol that includes information that defines individual numerical values (hereinafter, this information will be referred to as "numeric information"), such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13(A), the main pattern 621A includes numbers indicating numerical values such as "2" and "3" and characters corresponding to each number (for example, a blowfish corresponding to "2" and " 3) (corresponding to ``3'') as numerical information.

In addition, the main pattern 621A may have numerical information composed only of numbers indicating numerical values, or may be composed only of characters corresponding to each numerical value (number). In addition, the main pattern 621A is a pattern that includes only numbers indicating numerical values as numerical information, a pattern that includes only characters corresponding to each numerical value as numerical information, or a pattern that includes numbers indicating numerical values and characters corresponding to each number. The configuration may be unified with any one of the symbols that include both of these as numerical information, or the configuration may be a configuration in which these symbols are mixed.

The main symbol 621A is configured as a symbol including numerical information corresponding to each numerical value from "1" to "9", for example. The main symbol 621A may be a symbol that includes numerical information corresponding to each numerical value from "1" to "9" except for some numerical values (for example, "4").

The jackpot symbol is constituted by, for example, a predetermined combination of main symbols 621A (for example, a combination of the same main symbols 621A) in each symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row, middle symbol row). In a unit game involving special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), if the first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery is won, the jackpot symbol will stop on the preset active line. It will be displayed as a final pattern.

The "valid line" is a line where the game state changes to a special game state when a jackpot symbol based on a decorative symbol is displayed as a stop symbol on the line. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, five active lines are set. Specifically, three horizontal effective lines (specifically, the upper line located at the top, the lower line located at the bottom, and the middle line located between the upper line and the lower line) , two diagonally oriented effective lines (specifically, an upward-toward-right effective line and a downward-rightward effective line) are set.

Note that the number of valid lines to be set does not necessarily have to be five, and may be set to one or more appropriate numbers. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which three effective lines, such as an upper line, a lower line, and a middle line, are set, or a configuration in which one effective line such as a middle line is set.

The main symbols 621A are arranged on the symbol sheet 601 so that when the reels are viewed from the front, the numerical information is in ascending or descending order from top to bottom. For example, in the symbol sheet 601 used for the reel corresponding to the left symbol row in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the main symbol 621A corresponds to numerical information when the reel is viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 13(A). The numbers are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom. On the other hand, in the symbol sheet 601 used for each reel corresponding to the right symbol row and the middle symbol row, the main symbols 621A are arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the numerical information are in descending order from top to bottom when the reels are viewed from the front. Arranged.

The sub-design 621B is configured as a predetermined symbol that is smaller than the main symbol 621A and does not include numerical information. In the example shown in FIG. 13(A), the sub-symbol 621B is configured as a star-shaped pattern. In the symbol sheet 601, the sub symbol 621B is arranged between the two main symbols 621A.

The decorative pattern 621 (main pattern 621A, sub-pattern 621B) is formed as a coating film on the back side of the base material 611 by printing using a light-transmitting ink. Therefore, when a backlight (not shown) provided on the inner circumferential side of the reel body is turned on, the light from the backlight passes through the decorative pattern 621 and the base material 611, so that the light drawn on the pattern sheet 601 does not change. The decorative pattern 621 can be displayed by emitting light.

The decorative portion 622 is provided outside the formation area of the decorative pattern 621 (main pattern 621A, sub pattern 621B) on the pattern sheet 601. The decorative portion 622 is colored with a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621. Note that "at least some colors that color the decorative pattern 621" includes, for example, the main color that colors each main pattern 621A included in the decorative pattern 621 (for example, the color that colors the largest area of the main pattern 621A). ) may be the color that most easily reflects light (for example, the color with the highest brightness), or it may be the color that most easily reflects light among the colors that color all the decorative patterns 621.

Further, "a color configured to easily reflect light" may be defined, for example, by the presence or absence of glitter, or may be defined by the brightness of the color. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, for example, the decorative pattern 621 is colored with ink that does not contain a glittering material, and the decorative part 622 reflects more light than at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621. Colors that can be easily configured include glittering colors such as metallic colors (for example, gold and silver) and pearlescent colors (for example, pearlescent white).

Alternatively, the decorative portion 622 may be configured in a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621, compared to the color that most easily reflects light among the colors that color the decorative pattern 621. The structure may be such that it is colored with a high brightness color (for example, a high brightness color such as white or pale yellow).

As shown in FIG. 13B, the decorative portion 622 is formed as a coating film on the surface side of the base material 611 by printing using ink of a color configured to easily reflect light. As a result, the decorative part 622 is in a state of protruding forward (to the front side) from the decorative pattern 621 formed on the back side of the base material 611, and the decorative part 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative pattern 621. can. The decorative portion 622 may have a smooth surface (the surface facing outward) or may have an uneven surface, and the surface may have a smooth portion and an uneven portion. It may be a configuration in which both are mixed.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a decorative pattern 621 is formed on the back side of a sheet-like base material 611 having light transmittance (translucent property), and a decorative pattern 621 is formed on the front side of the base material 611. A decorative portion 622 is formed on the peripheral edge side of 621. Thereby, the decorative part 622 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative pattern 621, so that the decorative feeling of the decorative pattern 621 by the decorative part 622 can be improved.

In particular, since the decorative portion 622 is colored with a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors that color the decorative pattern 621, it is possible to add glamor and sparkle to the decorative portion 622, Thereby, the decorative feeling of the decorative portion 622 can be improved more suitably.

In this way, by improving the sense of decoration by the decorative portion 622, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the decorative pattern 621 provided on the peripheral edge side of the decorative portion 622, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine. can be done.

The reel of the reel device constituting the decorative pattern display device 479 includes a base material 611, a decorative pattern 621 formed with a coating film on the back side of the base material 611, and a decorative pattern 621 formed with a coating film on the front side of the base material 611. Since the pattern sheet 601 having the decorative part 622 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel main body, the decorative part 622 improves the decorative feeling, and the decorative pattern 621 can be displayed in a variable manner or stopped (determined). The degree of attention to the display) can be suitably improved.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 14. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs is drawn on the pattern sheet 601.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described embodiment (hereinafter, this embodiment is also referred to as the "first embodiment") will be designated by the same reference numerals and the explanation will be omitted. do. Further, the configuration described below as the second embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above, or a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment described above. You may prepare it instead.

14(A) to 14(C) are front views of the decorative pattern display device 479 of the second embodiment. FIG. 14(D) is a front view showing a part of the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row. In addition, in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 14(C), for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is illustrated by a dashed-dotted line.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14(A), a heater 650 functioning as a heat source is provided on the inner peripheral side of each reel body corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2, respectively. , are provided at positions that can overlap with patterns 721A and 721B, which will be described later, when viewed from the front.

The pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row Z1, Z2, Z3 is difficult or impossible to see under normal conditions, but when a certain light such as a flash light is applied, the light is retroreflected and becomes visible. Possible patterns 701, 702, and 703 are provided. The symbols 701, 702, and 703 are drawn across the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, and Z3, and each symbol is drawn when the predetermined main symbol 621A is placed on the middle line L2 in the final display. It is composed to complete the picture.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14(B), the main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in each symbol row Z1, Z2, and Z3 is displayed as confirmed with being placed on the middle line L2. (that is, when the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" becomes a stop symbol and is confirmed and displayed), the symbol 701A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 and A pattern 701 is completed by a pattern 701B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2 and a pattern 701C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14(C), the main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 is arranged on the middle line L2, and in the middle symbol row Z3. When the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" is displayed as confirmed on the middle line L2, the symbol 702A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 is displayed. A pattern 702 is completed by a pattern 702B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2 and a pattern 702C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3.

In other words, in a configuration in which the stopping order of the decorative symbols 621 that are variably displayed is the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z2, and the middle symbol row Z3, the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2 are numbers corresponding to the numerical value "5". After a reach display occurs on the middle line L2 by the main symbol 621A containing information, the main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the number "9" stops on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z3, resulting in a losing symbol ( More specifically, the pattern 702 is completed when the pattern 702 becomes a losing pattern constituting a losing reach.

In addition, in the example pattern sheet 601 shown in FIG. 14(D), the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the left and right pattern rows Z1 and Z2 is arranged on the middle line L2, and When the main symbol 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" is displayed on the middle line L2 in the middle symbol row Z3, the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1 is displayed. A pattern 703 is completed by a pattern 703A provided on the pattern 703A, a pattern 703B provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2, and a pattern 703C provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 has a structure in which the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13), and the pattern sheet 601 has a structure in which the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13). The pattern that becomes visible when the light is retroreflected when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied has retroreflectivity on the surface side of the base material 611, and when the surface side of the base material 611 is irradiated with flash light etc. It is formed using ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green).

Therefore, when the predetermined main pattern 621A is placed on the middle line L2 in the final display and the predetermined pattern (for example, the pattern 701 or the pattern 702) is completed, flash photography with the camera is performed. , it is possible to obtain an image in which the predetermined pattern is drawn in a predetermined color.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the symbol sheets 601 corresponding to the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 have symbols that are difficult or impossible to see under normal conditions, but become visible when heated or warmed. Patterns 721A and 721B are provided.

As shown in FIG. 14(B), the symbols 721A and 721B are viewed from the front when the main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is located on the middle line L2 in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2. The heater 650 is provided at a position overlapping the heater 650. The patterns 721A and 721B are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 using ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or heated.

The heater 650 is activated when the main symbol 621A including the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is displayed as confirmed in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 with the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" placed on the middle line L2 (that is, the numerical value "7" When the jackpot symbol by the main symbol 621A corresponding to "" becomes a stop symbol and is confirmed and displayed), it is configured to be heated or heated under control by the sub-control board 940.

Therefore, when the jackpot symbol based on the main symbol 621A corresponding to the numerical value "7" becomes a stop symbol and is confirmed and displayed, the symbols 721A and 721B appear in predetermined colors so as to be visible. In addition, if heating or heating of the heater 650 is started when the main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is placed on the middle line L2 and heating is started, the sub-control board 940 ends the heating or warming by the heater 650 when the variable display of the special symbol is started thereafter.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is difficult or impossible to see under normal conditions, but becomes visible when a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied to it as the light is retroreflected. Since there are patterns 701, 702, and 703 that are difficult or invisible under normal conditions, and patterns 721A and 721B that become visible when heated or warmed, different patterns can be displayed in different situations. can be displayed visibly. As a result, attention to the gaming machine can be increased by different patterns that become visible depending on the situation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the stopped symbol is a predetermined losing symbol (for example, the losing symbol shown in FIG. It can be made visible by irradiation (for example, flash photography with a camera). When the decorative pattern 621 is confirmed and displayed as a losing pattern, if the number of reservations of the unit game rights related to the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is zero, the next special pattern (first special pattern) , 2nd special symbol) until the starting winning occurs, the state of the losing symbol that is confirmed and displayed is maintained for a period of time. In other words, a specific pattern such as the pattern 702 can be maintained in a completed state over the period.

Therefore, when the number of suspensions of the right for a unit game related to a special symbol is zero, the period during which a specific symbol completed when the decorative symbol 621 is confirmed to be displayed as a predetermined losing symbol is defined as the number of suspensions. is 1 or more, the period can be longer than that in the case where is 1 or more. The longer a specific pattern is visible, the more likely it is that the player will be able to prevent the player from missing the specific pattern (for example, missing the specific pattern because the camera is not ready for flash photography in time). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a game experience in which the player enjoys not increasing the number of times the rights to unit games related to special symbols are reserved.

In addition, when the decorative pattern 621 is confirmed to be a predetermined jackpot pattern, a special game state will occur thereafter, so the player enters the game ball into the big winning devices 433, 434 in the special game state. Because there is a tendency to give priority to operations to make a specific pattern (operations on the firing handle 252), operations to make a specific pattern visible (for example, operating a camera for flash photography) cannot be performed, and There is a possibility that you may miss it. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not win the special symbol lottery, it is possible to visually recognize the completed specific symbol (for example, symbol 702) by illuminating the flash light. Therefore, even if the player does not win the special symbol lottery, it is possible to provide a game feature in which a specific symbol can be visually recognized.

Note that, as described in this embodiment, in a configuration in which the patterns 701, 702, and 703 become visible when illuminated with a predetermined light such as flash light, for example, a stage 670 is placed in front of the decorative pattern display device 479. By providing this, it is possible to improve the gameplay by making the symbols 701, 702, and 703 visible under certain conditions.

FIG. 15 is a front view of a decorative pattern display device 479 in a modification of this embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 15, the stage 670 provided on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 479 is simply illustrated by the shape of its rolling surface. Further, in FIG. 15, game balls P1 and P2 are shown as an example of game balls rolling on the stage 670 for reference. Further, in FIG. 15, for reference, the position of the middle line L2, which is one of the set effective lines, is illustrated by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 15, in this modification, a stage 670 is provided on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 479. The stage 670 includes a rolling surface that is approximately W-shaped when viewed from the front. A warp passage (not shown) that can guide game balls flowing down the left side of the central structure 420 to the stage 670 is provided on the left end side of the stage 670, and game balls that have entered the warp passage are guided to the stage. Guide to the left end side of 670.

The game ball that has entered the left end side of the stage 670 reciprocates on the stage 670 in the left-right direction along the rolling surface of the stage 670. By positioning the two recesses in the approximately W-shaped stage 670 at the portions corresponding to the eyes in the pattern 702 imitating a face, game balls (for example, game balls P1, P2) passing near the recesses can be ) can be visualized.

As a result, the time when the symbol 702 can be displayed (that is, the main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the left symbol column Z1, and the numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "5" in the right symbol column Z2) When the main pattern 621A containing ``9'' and the main pattern 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the middle pattern row Z3 are placed on the middle line L2 and the pattern 702 is completed, the timing for flash photography with the camera. This makes it possible to obtain an interesting image that looks as if eyes have been added to the pattern 702.

In addition, the passage through which the game balls ejected (falling) from the two recesses in the approximately W-shaped stage 670 can pass is provided with a light transmittance (transparent) that allows the game balls passing through the passage to be visible to the player. By forming the recess with a resin that has optical properties, it is possible to make the game ball ejected from the recess look like a teardrop. By making the passage a zigzag passage that goes downward while reciprocating from side to side, it is possible to ensure a period during which the player can visually recognize the game ball.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 16. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, the currently set game mode can be suggested by using a configuration in which a pattern that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs is drawn on the pattern sheet 601. be done.

In addition, in the following explanation, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure same as the structure in the pachinko machine 100 of 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and description is abbreviate|omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the third embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first or second embodiment described above, or The pachinko machine 100 may be provided in place of a part of the configuration.

FIG. 16(A) is a schematic side view for explaining the configuration of the reel device, and FIGS. 16(B) to 16(C) are front views of the decorative pattern display device 479 of the third embodiment. It is. In addition, in FIG. 16(A), in order to facilitate understanding of the drawing, the reel body R and the symbol sheet 601 attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel body R are shown separated from each other. In addition, in FIG. 16A, for reference, the direction of light irradiation by the light emitter 690 is illustrated by arrows, and the vertical direction of the decorative patterns 621 located on the upper line, middle line, and lower line are displayed. The range is illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 16(B), 16(C), and 16(D), the positions of the upper line L3, the middle line L2, and the lower line L1 are illustrated by dashed lines for reference. ing. In addition, in FIG. 16(B), FIG. 16(C), and FIG. 16(D), the density of coloring in the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C is expressed by the density of hatching in order to facilitate understanding of the drawings. ing. Specifically, the darker the color, the denser the hatching.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16(A), on the inner peripheral side of each reel main body R corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, there is a heat source as well as a heater 650. Functional heaters 650A, 650B, 650C are provided. More specifically, the heater 650A is provided at a position that overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the upper line L3 when viewed from the front, and the heater 650B overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the middle line L2 when viewed from the front. The heater 650C is provided at a position that overlaps the main symbol 621A located on the lower line L1 when viewed from the front.

The heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C are configured as heaters that heat (heat) at different temperatures, respectively. Specifically, the heater 650A is a heater that can be heated to the highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C, and the heater 650A is a heater that can be heated to the second highest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C. The heater 650C is a heater that can heat to the lowest temperature among the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C. Note that the heating by the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row Z1, Z2, Z3 includes patterns that are difficult or impossible to see under normal conditions, but become visible when heated or warmed. 741A, 741B, and 741C are provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the pattern 741A is a main pattern that includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the left pattern row Z1. It is a ring-shaped pattern surrounding the periphery of the pattern 621A.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the pattern 741B is a main pattern 621A that includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2. It is a ring-shaped pattern surrounding the . Moreover, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the pattern 741C is a main pattern 621A that includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the middle pattern row Z3. It is a ring-shaped pattern surrounding the .

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pattern sheet 601 is configured such that the decorative portion 622 (see FIG. 13) is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611 (see FIG. 13), and the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are , is formed on the surface side of the base material 611 using ink that changes from colorless to a predetermined color (for example, pink or orange) when heated or heated. The ink forming the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C is configured to develop a darker color as the temperature of heating or heating is higher.

Therefore, the main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and the numerical value in the middle symbol column Z3. When the main pattern 621A including the numerical information corresponding to "8" is displayed as confirmed on the upper line L3 and heating (warming) is performed by the heater 650A, the pattern 741A , 741B, and 741C are darker in color than when heated by the heater 650B or 650C with the main design 621A placed on the middle line L2 or the lower line L1, as shown in FIG. 16(B). is displayed.

In addition, when the main symbols 621A are placed on the middle line L2 and the final display is performed and they are heated (warmed) by the heater 650B, the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C are displayed as shown in FIG. 16 ( As shown in C), the main symbols 621A are thinner than those heated by the heater 650A when placed on the upper line L3, and the main symbols 621A are heated by the heater 650A when placed on the lower line L1. It is displayed in a darker color than when heated at 650C.

In addition, if heating (warming) is performed by the heater 650C when these main symbols 621A are placed on the lower line L1 and the final display is performed, the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C are As shown in FIG. 16(D), these main symbols 621A are displayed in a lighter color than when they are heated by the heater 650A or the heater 650B while being arranged on the upper line L3 or the middle line L2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the setting of the ball exit rate (change of the setting of the game mode) can be changed by operating the rear setting switch 905 (see FIG. 9) and the initialization switch 907 (see FIG. 9). The currently set game mode is suggested by the color density of the patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C.

Specifically, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball payout rate that provides the highest profit rate for the player (i.e., the top type , middle type, and bottom type), the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C are the darkest colors (i.e., when no other game mode is set). It is configured so that it appears in a darker color than when it is present.

More specifically, when the first stage probability game mode for each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub control board 940 controls the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery). In a unit game related to a special symbol when the special symbol lottery is not won, the main symbol 621A that includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol row Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%) , a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol row Z2, and a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the upper line L3. The confirmation is displayed, and the heater 650A is heated or heated. This allows the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C to appear in darker colors than when other game modes are set.

Also, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball output rate that has the lowest profit rate for the player (i.e., top type, middle type, 3rd stage probability game mode for each type (type, bottom type) is set, the symbols 741A, 741B, 741C are the lightest color (i.e., when other game modes are set) It is configured to appear in a lighter color).

More specifically, when the third stage probability game mode for each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type is set, the sub control board 940 controls the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery). In a unit game related to a special symbol when the special symbol lottery is not won, the main symbol 621A that includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol row Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%) , a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol row Z2, and a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the lower line L1. The final display is displayed, and the heater 650C is heated or heated. This allows the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C to appear in lighter colors than when other game modes are set.

Furthermore, among the nine types of game modes that can be set by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907, the game mode corresponding to the ball payout rate that has the second highest profit rate for the player (i.e., the top type , middle type, and bottom type) are set, the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C are set as the game mode of the first stage probability for each type. It is configured to appear in a lighter color than in the case where the game mode is set, and in a darker color than in the case where the game mode of the third stage probability in each type is set.

More specifically, when the second stage probability game mode is set for each type of top type, middle type, and bottom type, the sub control board 940 controls the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery, In a unit game related to a special symbol when the special symbol lottery is not won, the main symbol 621A that includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol row Z1 with a predetermined probability (for example, approximately 10%) , a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol row Z2, and a main symbol 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8" in the middle symbol row Z3 are arranged on the middle line L2. The display is confirmed and the heater 650B is heated or heated. As a result, the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C are made lighter in color than when the first stage probability game mode for each type is set, and darker than when the third stage probability game mode is set for each type. It can be made to appear.

In addition, the appearance probability of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is not won is a fixed value of 1 (for example, approximately 10%). It may be a variable value that changes depending on the situation. For example, the appearance probabilities of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C may change depending on the number of times the rights to the unit games related to the special symbols are reserved. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the greater the number of times the right of a unit game related to a special symbol is reserved, the higher the probability of appearance of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C may be changed depending on the length of the game time. For example, the longer the playing time, the higher the probability of appearance of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C. The playing time is, for example, a so-called "customer waiting effect" (i.e., a gaming state such as a title display or a demo display that is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 100 is not played by a player). It may be the time measured from the timing when the effect display unrelated to the above is finished, or it may be the time when the firing handle 252 is continuously operated.

Alternatively, the appearance probability of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C may be changed depending on the game mode. For example, the appearance probability of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C may be higher in the variable probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state.

In addition, the main symbol 621A includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" in the left symbol column Z1, the main symbol 621A includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" in the right symbol column Z2, and the numerical value in the middle symbol column Z3. Heating or warming of the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C starts when the main pattern 621A containing the numerical information corresponding to "8" is displayed on the lines L1, L2, and L3 of each stage and is confirmed. If so, the sub-control board 940 ends the heating by the heaters 650A, 650B, and 650C when the variable display of the special symbol is started.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the patterns 701, 702, 703 (see FIG. 14) provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row Z1, Z2, Z3 are difficult or impossible to see under normal conditions. However, it is constructed as a pattern that becomes visible when illuminated with a black light. That is, the patterns 701, 702, and 703 in this embodiment are formed on the surface side of the base material 611 using ink that emits light in a predetermined color (for example, black or green) when irradiated with a black light.

On the front side of each reel (reel main body R and symbol sheet 601) corresponding to each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, there is a luminous body as a light emitting means capable of irradiating a black light to the display area of the decorative symbols. 690 (eg, black light LED). For example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), black light LEDs as light emitters 690 are provided at the upper front side and lower front side of each reel, respectively, and are directed toward the display area of the decorative symbols on each reel in the width direction of each reel. They are arranged in rows (in the left-right direction).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the main symbol 621A including numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "7" is located on the middle line L2 in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z2, the symbols 701, 702, 703, etc. In a situation where the picture is completed, the sub-control board 940 is configured to cause the light emitter 690 to emit light (that is, emit black light). Thereby, when the predetermined main symbol 621A is placed on the middle line L2 in the final display, the player can visually recognize the symbols 701, 702, 703, etc.

Note that in a configuration in which patterns such as the patterns 701, 702, 703 are formed on the pattern sheet 601 using ink that emits light in a predetermined color when irradiated with a black light, it is not necessarily necessary to provide the light emitting body 690 that can irradiate the black light. Alternatively, the player may display the patterns 701, 702, 703, etc. using a light-emitting means that the player owns or is loaned and is capable of emitting black light.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is not won, the symbol becomes visible by heating or warming at a predetermined probability. 741A, 741B, and 741C are heated or heated at a temperature corresponding to the currently set game mode. The patterns 741A, 741B, and 741C are configured so that the higher the temperature of heating or heating, the darker the color. The type of game mode, that is, the ball launch rate (machine rate, payout rate) can be determined.

Therefore, it is possible to add a gameplay feature in which the player guesses probability information about the gaming machine being played based on the difference in the color density of the symbols 741A, 741B, and 741C. For example, one of the selection factors is whether the pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that suits your tastes or a different gaming machine, and whether you want to continue playing or move to another gaming machine. Since the estimated probability information can be used, it is possible to improve the playability of a gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in multiple stages.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, a light-emitting decorative body 780 with improved decorativeness on the peripheral side (edge side) is provided to increase the attention of players.

In addition, in the following description, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure same as the structure in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from 1st Embodiment to 3rd embodiment mentioned above, and description is abbreviate|omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fourth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to third embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the third embodiment.

FIG. 17 is a front view of the game board 400 of the fourth embodiment. 18(A) is a front view of the light-emitting decorative body 780, and FIG. 18(B) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the light-emitting decorative body 780 taken along line BB in FIG. 18(A).

In addition, in FIG. 18(A), for reference, a rough boundary line G between the direct light transmission area X1 and the reflected light transmission area X2 in the peripheral side decoration part 788 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. There is. Further, in FIG. 18(B), for reference, an example of the path along which the light output from the light emitting body 782 as the light emitting means travels is shown as arrows J1 and J2.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a light-emitting decoration 780 is provided approximately in the center of the upper portion of the central structure 420, and is configured in a star shape when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 18(A) and 18(B), the light-emitting decorative body 780 includes light-emitting bodies 781 and 782, a substrate 783, an inner lens 784, a reflector 785, a decorative lens portion 786, and a protruding portion. 787, a peripheral side decorative portion 788, a decorative sheet 789, and a reflective component 790.

The light emitters 781 and 782 include light sources capable of expressing full color (for example, full color LEDs). The light emitters 781 and 782 emit light in a predetermined color under light emission control by the sub-control board 940. Note that the light sources constituting the light emitters 781 and 782 do not necessarily have to be a light source capable of displaying full color, and may be a light source that emits light in a single color (for example, a white LED).

The light emitter 781 is a light emitting means arranged inside the inner lens 784. The light-emitting body 782 is a light-emitting means arranged outside the inner lens 784 and on the rear side (lower side in FIG. 18B) with respect to the peripheral-side decorative part 788 so as to overlap the peripheral-side decorative part 788 when viewed from the front. It is. The light emitters 781 and 782 are arranged on the front side of the substrate 783 (upper side in FIG. 18(B)). The board 783 is a circuit board such as a printed circuit board on which the light emitters 781 and 782 and electronic components such as resistors for operating the light emitters 781 and 782 are provided.

The inner lens 784 is made of a transparent resin or other resin (for example, acrylic resin), and transmits (guides) the light output (emitted) from the light emitter 781 . The inner lens 784 includes a top surface portion 784A that overlaps the front side of the light emitting body 781 when viewed from the front, and a side surface portion 784B that is connected to the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 784A, and is provided so as to surround the front side of the light emitting body 781. It will be done.

As shown in FIG. 18(B), in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the inner lens 784 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section. More specifically, the top surface portion 784A is configured in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface portion 784B is configured in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The outer shape of the top surface portion 784A side of the inner lens 784 (the outer shape of the front side of the inner lens 784) is the inner surface of the decorative lens portion 786 (more specifically, the inner surface of the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A and the side surface portion 786B). It is configured in a shape that can be fitted to the

The reflector 785 is a light-opaque component having a color that can reflect light (for example, white), and is adjacent to the outside of the rear side of the inner lens 784 (more specifically, the rear side of the side surface portion 784B). It will be established. The reflector 785 reflects the light emitted outward from the rear side (the side closer to the light emitter 781) of the side surface 784B of the inner lens 784 toward the inner lens 784. Thereby, the light output from the light emitter 781 can be suitably guided to the front side (that is, to the side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784).

Further, the reflector 785 is located between the light emitting body 782 and the side surface portion 784B of the inner lens 784, and preferably directs the light output from the light emitting body 782 to the front side (that is, the side of the peripheral decorative portion 788). can be induced to

Therefore, by disposing the reflector 785 between the light emitter 781 and the light emitter 782, the light output from the light emitter 781 can be made to enter the decorative lens section 786 via the inner lens 784, The light output from the light emitting body 782 can be made to enter the peripheral side decoration part 788. Note that a reflector similar to reflector 785 may be provided on the side of reflective component 790 with respect to light emitter 782 (on the side opposite to reflector 785).

The reflector 785 does not necessarily have to be a light-opaque component with a color capable of reflecting light, but may be mirror-finished (for example, chrome plated, etc.) on each surface on the inner lens 784 side and the light emitting body 782 side. In this case, it may be configured to have a light-opaque surface.

The decorative lens portion 786 is made of a resin (for example, acrylic resin) that has light transmittance such as a transparent resin, and is used when the light emitter 781 is lit (when light is output from the light emitter 781). Then, the light transmitted through the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 is transmitted (light guided).

The decorative lens portion 786 includes a top surface portion 786A that overlaps the front side of the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784 when viewed from the front, and a side surface portion 786B that is connected to the peripheral edge side of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative lens portion 786 is configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross-section, as shown in FIG. 18(B). More specifically, the top surface portion 786A is configured in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the side surface portion 786B is configured in a flat plate shape extending in a substantially vertical direction.

The front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A is exposed so that the player can directly see it in an area where a protrusion 787, which will be described later, is not provided. Therefore, when the light emitter 781 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light transmitted through the top surface portion 786A and emitted from the front surface 786A1.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 has a star shape when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 18(A). Therefore, in this configuration, by lighting the light emitting body 781, the player can visually recognize the light emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape due to the light emitted from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. The decorative lens portion 786 functions as a first decorative portion constituting the main body portion of the decoration in the light-emitting decorative body 780.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is configured in a plate shape with the front surface 786A1 being substantially flat, the light emitting decorative body 780 is formed by the decorative lens portion 786 as the first decorative portion. A decorative shape (in this embodiment, a star shape) can be illuminated in a planar manner.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is configured to have a flat plate shape extending substantially horizontally, but it is inclined in a predetermined direction (for example, when viewed from the front, it is tilted downward). It may also be plate-shaped (slanting backward as the shape increases). Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top surface 786A of the decorative lens section 786 has a flat plate shape, that is, the front surface 786A1 (the front surface visible to the player) and the rear surface (facing the inner lens 784 side). However, either the front surface 786A1 or the rear surface, or each of these surfaces may be a curved surface, or may be a flat or curved surface with fine irregularities. It's okay.

The protruding portion 787 is made of a resin having the same light transmittance as the decorative lens portion 786, and protrudes forward from the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the protruding portion 787 is integrally molded with a decorative lens portion 786 and a peripheral side decorative portion 788, which will be described later, so as to be connected to the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A. Note that the protruding portion 787 may be configured as an independent component from the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788.

The protruding portion 787 is provided at least along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18(A), the protruding portion 787 is provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A configured in a star shape. It is provided in a substantially straight line connecting adjacent recesses.

The front end surface 787A of the protrusion 787 is subjected to a light diffusion process such as a rough surface process (for example, a texture process). As a result, natural light is diffused at the end surface 787A, making the end surface 787A appear white. Note that instead of roughening the end surface 787A, a color that easily reflects light, such as white or a metallic color (for example, silver or gold), may be printed on the end surface 787A.

The peripheral edge decorative part 788 is made of a resin having the same light transmittance as the decorative lens part 786, and is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral edge (outer side) of the decorative lens part 786. More specifically, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is provided to protrude outward from the side surface portion 786B over the entire circumference of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the peripheral side decoration part 788 is integrally molded with the decoration lens part 786 and the protrusion part 787, and is connected to the side surface part 786B. Note that the peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be configured as an independent component from the decorative lens portion 786 and the protruding portion 787.

The front surface 788A (the front surface visible to the player) of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 is formed into a substantially horizontal plane. Note that the front surface 788A does not necessarily have to be a substantially horizontal, substantially flat plane, but may be a plane that is inclined in a predetermined direction (for example, a plane that is inclined rearward as it goes outward in front view) or a substantially plane. Good too. Further, the front surface 788A of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 may be a curved surface, or may be a flat surface or a curved surface including fine irregularities.

In the example shown in FIG. 18(B), the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is configured to be located on the rear side of the front surface 786A1 of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. Note that the front surface 788A does not necessarily need to be located on the rear side of the front surface 786A1, and may be located on the front side of the front surface 786A1, or may have a configuration in which its position in the front-rear direction substantially coincides with the front surface 786A1. .

On the other hand, the rear surface 788B (the surface facing the light emitting body 782 side) of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes away from the substrate 783 as it goes outward. As a result, part of the light output (emitted) from the light emitter 782 toward the front enters from the rear surface 788B and is transmitted to the front side (the front surface 788A side), and a portion is reflected at the rear surface 788B. Then, as shown in FIG. 18(B), it advances backward and outward.

Although the details will be described later, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 receives light corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782 (directly incident light, or light that is reflected at the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 after being reflected at the rear surface 788B). light). Therefore, in the light-emitting decorative body 780, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 has an edge portion as a second decorative portion with respect to the shape (in this embodiment, a star shape) in front view of the decorative lens portion 786 as the first decorative portion. functions as

The decorative sheet 789 is made of a resin sheet having a light transmittance of 1 and configured in the outer shape of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 (in this embodiment, a star shape). It is disposed between the top surface portion 786A of the lens portion 786 and the top surface portion 784A of the inner lens 784. The decorative sheet 789 may be attached to the rear surface of the top surface portion 786A (the surface facing the inner lens 784 side) or the front surface of the top surface portion 784A (the surface facing the decorative lens portion 786 side). However, it may be sandwiched between the rear surface of the top surface section 786A and the front surface of the top surface section 784A.

Note that the decorative sheet 789 does not necessarily have to be one resin sheet configured to have the outer shape of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, but may be a plurality of resin sheets divided into the shape of the top surface portion 786A surrounded by the protrusion portion 787. It may also be a resin sheet. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 18(A), the decorative sheet 789 includes resin sheets corresponding to five approximately triangular shapes formed on the convex portion side on the star side, and one approximately pentagonal sheet formed on the center side. The configuration may be such that it is divided into a resin sheet corresponding to the .

The decorative sheet 789 is configured as a light-transmissive sheet that is entirely colored in a single color (for example, each single color such as yellow or blue) or in multiple colors. Thereby, when the light emitter 781 is turned on, the light emitted from the front surface 784A1 of the decorative lens portion 786 can have a color corresponding to the color of the decorative sheet 789. Thus, for example, in a configuration in which both the inner lens 784 and the decorative lens portion 786 are made of transparent resin, the player can visually recognize the color of the light-emitting decorative body 780 that shines in a star shape with the color of the decorative sheet 789.

In addition, when the decorative sheet 789 is colored with multiple colors, the configuration may be such that the multiple colors are colored as independent areas, or the multiple colors may be colored in a gradation. Further, the decorative sheet 789 may have a configuration in which a predetermined pattern (a pattern, a picture, a character, etc.) is drawn.

The reflective component 790 is a resin component that is provided outward from the light emitting body 782 and has a function of reflecting the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788 so as to proceed forward and outward. be.

The reflective component 790 is spaced downward from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788, and has a front surface 790A that is an inclined surface that slopes away from the substrate 783 toward the outside like the rear surface 788B.

In the example shown in FIG. 18(B), the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is configured as an inclined surface that is substantially parallel to the rear surface 788B of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788. Note that the front surface 790A does not necessarily have to be approximately parallel to the rear surface 788B, and may be configured such that the front surface 790A and the rear surface 788B are non-parallel (that is, a configuration in which the angle of inclination of the front surface 790A is different from the angle of inclination of the rear surface 788B). ).

In the reflective component 790, a part of the front surface 790A overlaps with the peripheral side decorative part 788 when viewed from the front, and the rest of the front surface 790A does not overlap with the peripheral side decorative part 788 when viewed from the front (that is, it is directly visible when viewed from the front). It is arranged like this. The width of the region (non-overlapping region X3) that does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front on the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is preferably approximately 3 mm or more, and approximately 5 mm or more, for example. It is preferable.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting body 782 toward the front is transmitted to the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 (more specifically, to the reflective component 790, which will be described later). A portion of the light reflected at the front surface 790A enters from the rear surface 788B (for example, arrow J1), and a portion of the light travels outward while being reflected between the film portion 790B) and the peripheral decorative portion. Each inclination angle of the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative part 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790, so that the peripheral side decorative part 788 can proceed outward from the peripheral side decorative part 788 (for example, arrow J2) without entering the peripheral side decorative part 788, Further, the amount of overlap (overlap width) between the rear surface 788B and the front surface 790A when viewed from the front is set.

On the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790, a reflective film portion 790B that is not light-transparent and can reflect light is formed. The reflective film portion 790B is a coating film with a substantially uniform thickness formed by, for example, vapor depositing, coating, or printing a glittering pigment such as a metallic pigment.

The reflective film portion 790B may be composed of a single color or may be composed of a plurality of colors. The color of the reflective film portion 790B may be the same as or similar to the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789, and by configuring it in this way, the color of the light-emitting decorative body 780 is given a sense of unity. This allows you to prevent the color scheme from becoming unnatural or too flamboyant.

As described above, the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 is an inclined surface that slopes away from the substrate 783 as it goes outward. The light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the decoration part 788 can be reflected so as to travel forward and outward by being received by the reflective film part 790B.

Note that in the following, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B based on the light from the light emitting body 782 (that is, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the light reflected by the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788) is referred to as “ Also referred to as "specific reflected light."

According to the light-emitting decorative body 780 configured as described above, the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786) of the area that overlaps with the rear side (substrate 783 side) of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front. Since the light emitting body 782 is provided on the periphery, the light outputted from the light emitting body 782 directly enters the inner side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (the side closer to the decorative lens portion 786).

On the other hand, the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 (more specifically, the reflective film portion 790B part of the inner side) is located. As described above, a portion of the light reflected at the reflective film portion 790B (specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B) enters the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 from the rear surface 788B. Therefore, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film part 790B can be made to enter the peripheral side decoration part 788 outward from the area where the light output from the light emitting body 782 directly enters. can.

Therefore, among the light incident from the rear surface 788B of the peripheral decorative portion 788, the direct light from the light emitter 782 is transmitted through the inward direct light transmission region X1, and the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B is The light is transmitted through the reflected light transmitting region X2 located outward from the direct light transmitting region X1.

Note that in FIG. 18(A), a straight boundary line G is illustrated as a boundary between the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2, but the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region There is no need for a clear division between X2 and X2 at the boundary line G, and the configuration is such that there is a region near the boundary line G through which both the direct light from the light emitter 782 and the specific reflected light from the reflective film section 790B are transmitted. There may be.

Further, the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative part 788 and the front surface 790A of the reflective component 790 are arranged so that a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film part 790B does not enter the peripheral side decorative part 788, and is directed outward from the peripheral side decorative part 788. Since it is set so that it can travel on the side (that is, on the outer side of the reflected light transmitting region It can be transmitted through the air as a light that can be directly seen by people.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reflector 785 is provided between the light emitter 781 and the light emitter 782, so that the decorative lens portion 786 and Each of the peripheral side decoration parts 788 can be made to shine independently. Therefore, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be made to shine independently as an edge portion of the shape of the decorative lens portion 786 when viewed from the front (in this embodiment, a star shape).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a peripheral side decorative part 788 that can transmit the light output from the light emitter 782 is provided on the peripheral side of the decorative lens part 786. In the peripheral side decorative part 788, direct light from the light emitter 782 passes through the direct light transmission area X1 on the inner side (the side closer to the decorative lens part 786), and the reflective film part of the reflective component 790 on the outer side. The configuration is such that the light reflected at 790B (specific reflected light) is transmitted through the reflected light transmission region X2.

As a result, the player can It is possible to change the appearance of light (for example, brightness and color). Therefore, in the peripheral side decoration part 788 that appears to shine based on the light output from the light emitting body 782 (direct light and specific reflected light by the reflective film part 790B), it is possible to change the way the light shines on the inner side and the outer side. Therefore, the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 (the decorative quality of the light transmitted through the peripheral side decorative portion 788) can be improved.

In addition, since the intensity of reflected light is generally smaller than the intensity of incident light, the direct light from the light emitting body 782 passes through the direct light transmission area X1 on the inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 788, and On the side, in a configuration in which the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 is transmitted through the reflected light transmitting region X2, the intensity of the light transmitting through the reflected light transmitting region can be made weaker than the strength of Thereby, the outer side of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 can appear to be shining weaker than the inner side. Therefore, the brightness of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 can be varied, and in this respect as well, the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral edge decorative portion 788 can be improved.

As the decorativeness of the light emitted from the front surface 788A of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is improved as described above, the light is clearly differentiated from the decorative lens portion 786 that shines in a planar shape due to the light from the light emitting body 781. Therefore, the degree of attention to the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 can be improved. Thereby, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmission area X1 and the reflected light transmission area X2 both correspond to the light output from the light emitter 782 (direct light or specific reflected light). Therefore, there is no need to separate the light source that supplies light for passing through the direct light transmission region X1 and the light source that supplies light for passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 (i.e. In this respect, manufacturing costs can be reduced and the arrangement of the light sources can be prevented from becoming complicated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film part 790B of the reflective component 790 enters (enters) the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decoration part 788, and a part of the specific reflected light enters the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decorative part 788. The light is configured so that it does not enter the decoration part 788 and travels as light that can be directly viewed by the player on the outside of the peripheral decoration part 788 (that is, on the outside of the reflected light transmission area X2). Depending on whether the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B passes through the peripheral decorative portion 788 (more specifically, the reflected light transmitting region X2) or travels on the outside of the peripheral decorative portion 788, the game Since the way the light is seen (for example, brightness, glitter, etc.) can vary depending on the person, the decorativeness of the light-emitting decorative body 780 made by the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a part of the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not overlap the peripheral side decorative portion 788 on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front (i.e., Since the player is exposed to the reflected light of natural light (hereinafter referred to as "reflected light") by the reflective film part 790B on the outer side of the peripheral decorative part 788, A mixture of light (also referred to as "naturally reflected light") and specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to give a different impression from the case where the light visible to the player on the outer side of the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is only naturally reflected light, for example, it is possible to give an impressive glittering feeling (metallic feeling). Become.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, since the decorative sheet 789 is disposed on the rear side of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and the protruding portion Even if 787 is integrally molded using transparent resin, it is possible to make only the decorative lens portion 786 (top portion 786A) shine in the color of the decorative sheet 789. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately manufacture the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788, and in this respect, manufacturing costs can be suppressed. Further, there is no need to directly print a predetermined color, a predetermined pattern, etc. on the rear surface side of the top surface portion 786A.

Note that when the color of a light-transmitting decorative sheet 789 (described later) or the main color of the decorative sheet 789 is a relatively dark color such as blue, the light-emitting body 781 is a color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789. It is preferable to emit light in the same color or similar color (for example, in the case where the decorative sheet 789 is blue, a blue color such as light blue). This can prevent the color of the decorative sheet 789 or the main color of the decorative sheet 789 from appearing lighter than the original color compared to the case where the light emitter 781 emits a single white color.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18(A) and 18(B), a protruding portion 787 is provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786. It is provided. Since the decorative sheet 789 is provided on the back side of the decorative lens portion 786, the protruding portion 787 can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative sheet 789. Thereby, the decorative appearance of the protrusion 787 can be improved.

In particular, since the front end surface 787A is subjected to light diffusion treatment, it appears whitish due to the diffusion of natural light. As a result, by configuring the main color of the decorative sheet 789 (for example, the color that colors the largest area of the decorative sheet 789) to a color that reflects less light than white, the decoration of the protrusion 787 that makes the end surface 787A appear whitish. The feeling can be suitably improved.

Further, since a protruding portion 787 that protrudes forward with respect to the decorative lens portion 786 is provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786, when the decorative lens portion 786 is viewed from the front, The shape (in this embodiment, a star shape) can be three-dimensionally decorated by the protrusion 787. Thereby, the decorativeness of the decoration of the light-emitting decoration body 780 can be improved.

Further, a protruding portion 787 provided along the peripheral edge of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 is located between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788. Therefore, the protruding portion 787 has a shape in front view of the decorative lens portion 786 which is the first decorative portion in the decoration of the light-emitting decorative body 780, and a peripheral side which is the edge portion as the second decorative portion with respect to the first decorative portion. This provides a clear boundary between the decorative portion 788 and the decorative portion 788. Thereby, when the first decoration part and the second decoration part (edge part) in the decoration of the light-emitting decoration body 780 are made to light up independently, each part can be clearly illuminated separately.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, an image that corresponds to (corresponds to) an image including a part of the character that appears in the suggestion effect that is displayed after a predetermined reach display is displayed, is displayed in the reach display. By displaying this in a suggestive effect that is displayed after a different reach display is displayed, the player's attention is improved.

In addition, "suggestive performance" refers to the degree of possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the end of the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (hereinafter referred to as "expectations for transition to the special game state"). In other words, it is an effect that suggests the degree of possibility that the decorative pattern 1621 variably displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 will stop at a stop pattern that becomes a jackpot pattern.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fifth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to fourth embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the fourth embodiment.

FIGS. 19(A) to 19(D) are screen diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the fifth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 479 is configured as an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) that can display images. Note that in FIG. 19(B), the moving direction of the image 822 is illustrated by an arrow for reference.

In the decorative pattern display device 479 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed as an image, as shown in FIG. 19 (FIG. 19(A) to FIG. 19(D)). Similar to the decorative pattern 621 (see FIG. 13), the decorative pattern 1621 is a decorative pattern that includes a stop pattern (jackpot pattern, loss pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery). This is a decorative pattern to be displayed on the display device 479.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern 1621 is composed of a main pattern that can constitute a jackpot pattern, similar to the main pattern 621A (see FIG. 13). Note that the decorative pattern 1621 may include a main pattern and a sub-symbol that cannot constitute a jackpot pattern, similar to the sub-symbol 621B.

The main pattern constituting the decorative pattern 1621 is configured, for example, as a pattern including numerical information indicating a plurality of types of numerical values (for example, each numerical value from "1" to "9"). In addition, the main pattern constituting the decorative pattern 1621 may be configured as a pattern that includes not only numbers indicating numerical values but also both numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers as numerical information.

The decorative pattern 1621 is displayed variably on the decorative pattern display device 479 in the unit game related to the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern), and then is permanently displayed as a stop pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery. (stop display). Note that the display position of the decorative pattern 1621 does not necessarily have to be approximately at the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, and the decorative pattern 1621 may be displayed at various positions within the display area. For example, the decorative pattern 1621 may be displayed on the corner side (for example, the upper right corner side) of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, as shown in FIG.

The decorative pattern display device 479 of this embodiment is configured such that when a ready-to-reach display occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern 1621, a predetermined suggestive effect using a moving image or an image can appear after the variable display ends.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an odd numerical value is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 (for example, a reach display consisting of "7"), after the display of the reach display, a predetermined probability is set. The system is configured such that a suggestive effect in which a predetermined character appears (hereinafter, this suggestive effect is also referred to as a "first suggestive effect") is executed. Note that the first suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only in a specific ready-to-reach display such as a so-called super reach.

An appropriate value greater than 0% may be adopted as the probability of executing the first suggestion effect when the reach display consisting of an odd number is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 (i.e., the above-mentioned "predetermined probability"). For example, the probability may be smaller than 100% (for example, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the first suggestion effect will always be displayed (that is, 100%) may be used. Note that the selection of whether or not to execute the first suggestion effect is executed under the control of the sub-control board 940.

In addition, whether the reach display by the decorative pattern 1621 is composed of odd numbers or even numbers is determined by the main control board 920, for example, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) start winning. Depends on the jackpot symbol random number obtained. More specifically, when the stop symbol determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot symbol random number is a jackpot symbol, the sub control board 940 selects an odd number or an even number depending on the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot symbol. Determine the configured reach display. On the other hand, if the stop symbol determined by the main control board 920 based on the jackpot symbol random number is a loss symbol constituting a loss reach, the sub control board 940 starts from a predetermined value, regardless of whether it is an odd number or an even number. Determine the configured reach display.

For the first suggestion performance, a plurality of types of performance patterns are prepared depending on the degree of expectation (or confidence) regarding the transition to the special game state. The degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state set for each production pattern is based on the probability of winning in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) and when winning in the special symbol lottery. The selection probability in the selection table (hereinafter also referred to as "win selection table") and the selection in the selection table (hereinafter also referred to as "loss selection table") that is referred to when the special symbol lottery does not win. Determined by probability.

Each moving image data (image data) corresponding to each presentation pattern of the first suggested presentation is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each presentation pattern. The sub-control board 940 selects a production pattern of the first suggestion production, and causes the decorative pattern display device 479 to display (execute) the first suggestion production of the selected production pattern.

Note that the timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the performance pattern of the first suggestion performance corresponds to the unit game related to the target special symbol (that is, the variable display of the special symbol) by the sub-control board 940 from the main control board 920. The timing may be the timing at which a variation pattern command is received from the main control board 920, or the timing may be a predetermined timing between when the variation pattern command is received and when the reach display by the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed. . Furthermore, in a configuration in which a period in which an operating device such as the press operation device 261 can be operated is provided for displaying the first suggestion effect, the sub control board 940 controls the first suggestion effect at the timing when the period ends. It may also be configured to select a performance pattern.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each performance pattern in the first suggestion performance is a character that appears in accordance with the expectation level (or confidence level) for transition to a special gaming state set for that performance pattern. are configured so that the types are different. The player can relatively recognize the level of expectation regarding the transition to the special game state based on the type of character that appears in the first suggestion presentation.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the characters that can appear in the first suggestion effect include, for example, short-haired characters holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands, as shown in FIGS. 19(A) and 19(C). Characters CA1 and CA2, and a character CA3 with a ponytail holding flags 801A and 801B in both hands as shown in FIG. 19(D) are prepared. Note that the difference between the characters CA1 and CA2 is the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B. That is, the characters CA1 and CA2 differ in whether the pattern drawn on the flags 801A and 801B is a cat or a star.

For the first suggestion performance in which the character CA1 appears, the expectation level for transition to the special game state is set to, for example, 50%, and for the first suggestion performance in which the character CA2 appears, the expectation level for transition to the special game state is set to 50%. The expectation level for transition to the state is set to 10%, for example. Further, for the first suggestion effect in which the character CA3 appears, the expectation level for transition to the special game state is set to, for example, 30%.

The player can recognize the level of expectation set for each character from the instruction manual distributed to the pachinko machine 100, or recognize the relative level of the level of expectation set for each character. can be recognized empirically. As a result, for example, among the characters CA1, CA2, and CA3, when the character CA1 appears in the first suggestion effect, the player can expect the transition to the special game state the most, and when the character CA3 When it appears, it cannot be expected as much as the character CA1, but it can be expected more than the character CA2.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a reach display consisting of an even number is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 (for example, a reach display consisting of "6"), after the display of the reach display, a predetermined probability is determined. In the first suggestion production, an image including a part of the character that suggests the level of expectation (reliability) for the transition to the special gaming state appears (hereinafter, the suggestion production is also referred to as the "second suggestion production"). is configured to perform the following:

An appropriate value greater than 0% may be adopted as the probability of executing the second suggestion effect when the reach display consisting of an even number is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621 (i.e., the above-mentioned "predetermined probability"). For example, the probability may be smaller than 100% (for example, 30% or 60%), or the probability that the second suggestion effect will always be displayed (that is, 100%) may be used. Note that the selection of whether or not to execute the second suggestion effect is executed under the control of the sub-control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 19(B), after the reach display consisting of "6" is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, images 821, 822, and 823 including a part of the character CA1 appear simultaneously (displayed). ) The second suggestion effect is executed. More specifically, the image 821 is an image that includes the left eye of the character CA1 in FIG. 19(A), and the image 822 is an image that includes the left hand of the character CA1 and a part of the flag 801A held in the left hand. Yes, and the image 523 is an image including the button part of the jacket of the character CA1.

In the second suggestion effect in which an image including a part of the character (for example, image 821, etc.) appears, the degree of expectation (high degree of expectation) for the transition to the special game state is determined by the image that appears. The player can be relatively recognized according to the type of character corresponding to the character.

In addition, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state for the character corresponding to the image that appears in the second suggestion effect is the same as the degree of expectation when the character appears in the first suggestion effect. are made the same. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), the player who visually recognized the images 821, 822, and 823 that appeared in the second suggestion effect is able to see the images 821, 822, and 823 that correspond to these images in the first suggestion effect. The same level of expectation as when the character CA1 appears can be recognized.

Images such as images 821, 822, and 823 to appear in the second suggestion effect, that is, images including a part of the character that suggests the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state in the first suggestion effect, are displayed on the sub control board 940. It is generated based on an image cut out from moving image data (image data) corresponding to the performance pattern of the first suggested performance stored in the ROM. Here, the image cut out from the video data (image data) is a part of the video or image selected in advance from the video or image constituted by the video data or image data, and the expression of cutout is selected in advance. , or may be expressed in other ways, such as extracting, and the same applies below.

More specifically, the image to be displayed in the second suggestion effect is one of the frames constituting the video data corresponding to the effect pattern in which a character that suggests the level of expectation for transition to the special game state appears in the first suggestion effect. Of these, a corresponding area is cut out from an image of a predetermined frame including the character, and the image is generated based on the cut out image (for example, by processing the cut out image such as deformation or scaling).

For example, the image 821 is generated based on an image obtained by cutting out a portion of the area AR1 from an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19(A) in the video data corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character CA1 appears. Ru. Similarly, images 822 and 823 are generated based on images obtained by cutting out areas AR2 and AR3, respectively, from the image of the frame. Although details will be described later, images 821, 822, and 823 are generated by performing processing such as deformation and scaling on images that are cut out from areas AR1, AR2, and AR3.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, regarding the performance pattern in which the character CA2 appears, an image of a frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19(C) in the video data corresponding to the performance pattern in which the character CA2 appears. An image to be displayed in the second suggestion effect is generated based on the images cut out from each part of the areas AR1, AR2, and AR3. Similarly, regarding the effect pattern in which the character CA3 appears, areas AR1, AR2, An image to be displayed in the second suggestion effect is generated based on the image obtained by cutting out each part of AR3.

Note that it is preferable that the area to be cut out of the image in the video data of the first suggestive effect is an area where an image obtained by cutting out a portion of the area can suggest the type of character. For example, it is preferable that the areas include the eyes of the character, the pattern of the flag 801A held in the left hand of the character, the jacket worn by the character, the buttons of the jacket, etc., such as areas AR1, AR2, and AR3.

In the following, an image (for example, an image cut out of area AR1) that includes a part of a character that suggests the level of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is cut out from the video data corresponding to the production pattern of the first suggestion production. ) is also called a "cutout image" or the like.

The cutout image is generated under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 selects one performance pattern from among the performance patterns prepared for the first suggested performance, and selects one performance pattern from among the performance patterns prepared for the first suggestion performance, and selects one performance pattern in the video data stored in the ROM in association with the selected performance pattern. A cutout image is generated from an image of a predetermined frame.

In addition, to select the performance pattern used to generate the cutout image, select the performance pattern for the first suggestion performance using the hit selection table or miss selection table prepared for selecting the performance pattern for the first suggestion performance. The case is done with reference as well. This control is executed by the sub control board 940.

The frame used to generate the cutout image (that is, a predetermined frame including a character indicating the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state) is specified in advance by the frame number, time, etc. in the video data. Furthermore, a clipping area such as area AR1 in the image of the frame to be clipped is specified in advance by coordinates on the image or the like.

Note that the cutout region does not necessarily have to be a rectangular region such as the region AR1, and may be a region other than a rectangle such as a circle. Furthermore, the number of cutout areas may be one or more. When a plurality of cutout regions are provided, the shape of each cutout region does not necessarily have to be the same shape (for example, all rectangular shapes) like the regions AR1 to AR3, and two or more types of shapes are not necessarily required. It is also possible to have a configuration in which regions having shapes of .

The sub-control board 940 generates a cut-out image by cutting out a pre-specified area from a pre-specified frame image. The timing at which the sub-control board 940 generates the cut-out image is determined by the sub-control board 940 receiving the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 920 corresponding to the unit game related to the target special symbol (that is, the variable display of the special symbol). It may be the timing received from the board 920, or it may be a predetermined timing between when the variation pattern command is received and when the ready-to-reach display by the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a period during which an operating device such as the press operating device 261 can be operated is provided for displaying the second suggestion effect, the sub-control board 940 generates a cutout image at the timing when the period ends. It may be a configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, an image cut out from the video data corresponding to the production pattern of the first suggestion production (i.e., a cutout image) is subjected to processing such as deformation and enlargement/reduction, and the processed cutout image (For example, image 821, etc.) is displayed in the second suggestion effect. Note that processing of the cut-out image (for example, deformation, scaling, etc.) and display of the processed cut-out image are controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), images 821, 822, and 823 that appear (displayed) in the second suggestion effect have rectangular shapes corresponding to the shapes of the cutout areas AR1, AR2, and AR3. When viewed from the front, the image is displayed as a diamond-shaped image that appears to be facing downward and to the right. In this way, by displaying the images 821, 822, and 823 so that they all face substantially the same direction, which is different from the front direction, the display orientation of at least one of these images 821, 822, and 823 is changed. This can give a more orderly impression than when the image is displayed in a direction different from that of other images.

In the example shown in FIG. 19(B), images 821, 822, and 823 that appear in the second suggestion effect are enlarged or This is a reduced image. Specifically, while the size (size) of the cutout images increases in the order of the image cut out from the area AR1, the image cut out the area AR3, and the image cut out the area AR2, these The cutout images are enlarged or reduced in the order of image 822, image 822, and image 823.

Note that it is not necessarily necessary to enlarge or reduce all the cut out images, but it is possible to enlarge or reduce some of the cut out images at different scaling ratios or at the same scaling ratio. Good too. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which some or all of the plurality of cut-out images are enlarged or reduced in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction at different scaling ratios.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of processed cutout images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) appear (display) simultaneously in the second suggestion effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), images 821, 822, and 823 based on images cut out from the image of the frame corresponding to the display content shown in FIG. 19(A) (cut out images) are all shown in the lower right corner. The image 823, image 821, and image 822 are displayed so as to appear lined up from front to back in this order.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a plurality of processed cutout images appear simultaneously in the second suggestion effect, at least one processed cutout image and another processed cutout image appear at the same time. They are displayed so that they partially overlap (that is, appear to overlap). Note that the display is also controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19B, a portion of the image 822 and a portion of the image 821 are displayed to overlap, and a portion of the image 821 and the image 823 are displayed to overlap. As a result, the content drawn (drawn content) in the area where the image 821 overlaps in the image 822 and the area where the image 823 overlaps in the image 821 becomes difficult to see (not visible).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the first processed cutout image and the other processed cutout image are displayed so as to overlap at least in part, the drawn content becomes difficult to see due to the overlap. The display position of the other image is moved, thereby making the drawn content that was difficult to see visible. Note that the display is also controlled by the sub-control board 940.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 19(B), after a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 are displayed to overlap, some of the drawn content becomes difficult to see because the images 821 overlap. The display position of the image 822 is moved to the left (in the direction of arrow M). As the overlap between image 822 and image 821 becomes smaller, the area in image 822 where the drawn content becomes visible increases. As a result, the player can recognize, for example, that the image 822 is an image that includes the left hand and a part of the flag 801A held in the left hand, or that the flag 801A has a cat pattern drawn on it. It becomes like this.

Here, since the character CA1 has the same configuration as the character CA2 except for the pattern drawn on the flag 801A, the player recognizes that the pattern drawn on the flag 801A is a cat by moving the image 822. If this is possible, it becomes possible to infer that the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is the character CA1. Therefore, by being configured so that it is easy to estimate the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state according to the passage of time after the processed cutout image appears in the second suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect can be easily estimated. The game performance of estimating the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the special game state is improved in the performance.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, an image including a part of a character that indicates the level of expectation for transition to a special gaming state in the first suggestion effect, which is displayed in the second suggestion effect, is displayed in the first suggestion effect. A configuration generated based on an image cut out from the video data corresponding to the presentation pattern, that is, the video data corresponding to the presentation pattern of the first suggestion presentation is used to generate the image that appears in the second suggestion presentation. Because of this configuration, it is possible to suppress the storage amount of video data (image data), and it is easier to reduce the need to develop effect images for the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, thereby reducing the development cost. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the image corresponds to an image including a part of a character that indicates the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state, which is cut out from the video data corresponding to the performance pattern of the first suggestive performance. Since the configuration is such that an image (specifically, an image that has been processed such as deformation, scaling, etc. on a cut out image) is displayed in the second suggestion production, the character that appeared in the first suggestion production The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state suggested by can be similarly suggested in the second suggestion performance. In addition, since the suggestion of the expectation level by the first suggestion production and the suggestion of the expectation degree by the second suggestion production are realized with different appearances, it is necessary to develop a production image for each of the second suggestion production. It is possible to increase the variety of suggestive effects while suppressing costs.

Here, the image displayed in the second suggestion effect is an image that includes a part of the character that suggests the level of expectation for the transition to the special game state that appears in the first suggestion effect, so The amount of information included in the image is smaller than when the entire character is displayed, and it is difficult to make the user guess the character corresponding to the image from the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

As a result, the degree of difficulty in estimating the level of expectation for transition to the special gaming state from the content of each suggestion effect is different depending on whether the first suggestion effect is displayed or the second suggestion effect is displayed. When the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is displayed, it is possible to improve the playability of inferring the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state from the contents of each suggestion effect, thereby increasing the attention level to the gaming machine. can be improved.

In particular, since the configuration is such that an image that has been processed such as deformation or scaling on a cut-out image from the video data corresponding to the performance pattern of the first suggestion performance is displayed in the second suggestion performance. It is possible to suitably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image displayed in the image. In this respect as well, when the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is displayed, it is possible to suitably improve the gameplay in which the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is estimated from the contents of each suggestion performance.

In addition, since each image corresponding to a plurality of cut out images cut out from a plurality of regions is displayed simultaneously in the second suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect is more effective than when one cut out image is displayed. It is easy to guess the character corresponding to the image displayed in the image. This can prevent it from becoming too difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestion effect.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of processed cutout images appear simultaneously in the second suggestion effect, at least one processed cutout image and another processed cutout image appear at the same time. Since the images are displayed so as to partially overlap (that is, appear to overlap), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the overlapping image. In this respect, it is possible to suitably make it difficult to guess the character corresponding to the image displayed in the second suggestion effect, so when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is displayed. It is possible to suitably improve the gameplay in which the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is estimated from the content of each suggestion performance.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when one processed cutout image and another processed cutout image are displayed so as to overlap at least in part, the drawn content becomes difficult to see due to the overlap. The structure is such that the display position of the image that has been changed is moved, thereby making the drawn content that was difficult to see visible, so when multiple processed cutout images appeared simultaneously in the second suggestion effect The degree of difficulty in estimating the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state from the content of the second suggestion performance can be varied depending on the elapse of time from . Thereby, when the second suggestion performance is displayed, it is possible to improve the gameplay in which the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is estimated from the content of each suggestion performance.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, instead of the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) included in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, a pressing operation mechanism 860 whose stroke amount by a pressing operation is variable is used. An operating device 1261 is provided.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the sixth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to fifth embodiments described above, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram for explaining the configuration and operation of the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the appearance of the pressing operation device 1261 depending on the operating position. In addition, in FIG. 20, for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the internal structure of the press operation device 1261, the base body 851 and the operated section 852 of the button operation section 850, the operation cover member 870, and the bottom member 880 are shown in cross section. Illustrated in shape. Hatching is omitted for these cross sections.

In addition, in FIGS. 20 and 21, for reference, the position of the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the surface that the player can touch around the operation cover member 870 in the front block 102) is indicated by a dashed-dotted line. Illustrated by Q. That is, the area above the dashed-dotted line Q indicates that a part of the operating device 1261 (operation cover member 870) is exposed (projects) upward from the surface of the front block 102, and the area below the dashed-dotted line Q shows that This shows that the operating device 1261 is buried below the surface of the front block 102.
In addition, in FIG. 21 , for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the drawing, illustration of the bottom member 880 is omitted, and the area below the dashed line Q in the operating device 1261 (i.e., the area below the surface of the front block 102 The area buried in the area) is shown by dotted lines.

The pressing operation device 1261, like the pressing operation device 261, is a device that can be pressed by the player. As shown in FIG. 20, the press operation device 1261 includes a button operation section 850, an actuation mechanism 860, an operation cover member 870, and a bottom member 880.
The button operation section 850 includes a base body 851, an operated section 852, and a spring member 853. The base body 851 has a cylindrical shape with a bottom surface on the lower end side. The operated portion 852 has a cylindrical shape that can be accommodated on the inner peripheral side of the base body 851. The spring member 853 is, for example, a coil spring, and is interposed between the base body 851 and the operated part 852 to support the operated part 852 with respect to the base body 851. The spring member 853 functions as a biasing device that biases the operated portion 852 upward.

A protrusion 851A that protrudes inward is provided on the upper end of the base 851, and a protrusion 852A that protrudes outward is provided on the lower end of the operated portion, overlapping the protrusion 851A in top view. located at the location.

As a result, the operated part 852, which is urged upward by the spring member 853, is maintained in a state where the protruding part 852A contacts the protruding part 851A from below, with the protruding part 851A of the base body 851 acting as a stopper. Ru. In the button operation section 850, the position where the protrusion 852A abuts the protrusion 851A of the base 851 from below is the initial position of the operated section 852.

When the operated part 852 is pressed (that is, when the operated part 852 is pressed downward), the operated part 852 resists the biasing force of the spring member 853 (that is, when the operated part 852 is pressed downward). (while deforming it) move downward. Thereafter, when the pushing operation on the operated part 852 is completed (that is, when the operated part 852 becomes unloaded), the operated part 852 returns to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring member 853.

The button operation section 850 includes a detection sensor 854 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the operated section 852 that has been moved downward by the push operation is located at a predetermined position. . The detection sensor 854 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. In the following, the position of the operated part 852 detected by the detection sensor 854 is also referred to as the "maximum pressing position of the operated part 852 by the spring member 853." The detection sensor 854 outputs a high level signal when the operated part 852 reaches the maximum pressed position by the spring member 853, and outputs a low level signal when the operated part 852 moves from the maximum pressed position by the spring member 853. Output.

The sub-control board 940 determines that the operated part 852 has reached the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal, and when the signal falls to a low level signal. In this case, it is determined that the operated portion 852 has moved from the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853.

When the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal, the sub control board 940 sets the maximum press position flag (part of the RAM) to ON. The sub control board 940 sets the maximum press position flag to OFF when the signal received from the detection sensor 854 falls to a low level signal. Thereby, the sub-control board 940 determines that the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 when the maximum pressing position flag is set to ON.

The actuation mechanism 860 is provided below the button operation section 850. As shown in FIG. 20, the actuation mechanism 860 includes a rack 861 that is a rod-shaped body on a flat plate with gears, a pinion (gear) 862 that meshes with the teeth of the rack 861, and a motor for rotating the pinion 862. 863. Motor 863 is, for example, a DC motor.

The actuating mechanism 860 rotates the pinion 862 by rotating (driving) the motor 863, thereby changing the position of the button operating section 850 to the position of the rack 861 without the player's operation on the operated section 852. It can be moved in a direction along the tooth trace direction that corresponds to the rotational direction of the motor 863.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the actuating mechanism 860 moves the button in substantially the same direction (i.e., up and down direction) in which the operated part 852 moves due to the deformation (restoration due to compression or urging) of the spring member 853. The operation unit 850 can be moved. The button operation unit 850 can be moved in the vertical direction within the movement range of the rack 861 relative to the pinion 862 in the actuation mechanism 860.

The actuation mechanism 860 includes an encoder (not shown) that can detect the rotational direction, rotational position, and rotational speed of the motor 863. When controlling the movement (positional change) of the button operation section 850 by the actuation mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 detects the detection result by the encoder and controls the operation of the motor 863 in accordance with the current arrangement position.

The actuating mechanism 860 is configured to be able to hold (maintain) the button operating section 850 at a predetermined position by controlling the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 so that the detection result by the encoder is constant. As a result, the unloaded button operating section 850 (button operating section 850 in a state where the operated section 852 is not operated) where the player is not touching the operation cover member 870 is moved within the movement range of the button operating section 850 by the actuating mechanism 860. can be held (maintained) in a predetermined position. Note that the position where the unloaded button operation section 850 is held by the actuation mechanism 860 is also referred to as a "neutral position."

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating mechanism 860 is moved to a position corresponding to the satisfied condition among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions of the button operation section 850. The button operation section 850 is configured to be held without any load. In other words, the neutral position of the button operation unit 850 is configured to change depending on the established conditions.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the height of the button operation unit 850 at the neutral position (more specifically, the height from the surface of the pachinko machine 100) is different from the special symbol (the first special symbol, It is configured such that the higher the number of times the unit game is held for the second special symbol (second special symbol) increases.

Note that when the button operation unit 850 is located at the neutral position, the push operation device 1261 is also located at the neutral position, so in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the height of the push operation device 1261 at the neutral position is also specially adjusted. The higher the number of times the unit game related to the symbol is held is increased.

Furthermore, as described above, the actuating mechanism 860 is configured to be able to hold the button operating section 850 in a predetermined position by the torque (holding force) of the motor 863, so it does not apply a force exceeding the torque to the button operating section 850. When applied, the actuating mechanism 860 is operated by the force without electrically driving the motor 863, thereby making it possible to move the button operating section 850 in the direction of the force.

For example, if a downward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operation section 850 (that is, when the button operation section 850 is pressed down with a force exceeding the torque), the button operation section 850 is pushed downward by the force. It can be moved to the side. Furthermore, when an upward force exceeding the torque is applied to the button operation section 850 (that is, when the button operation section 850 is pulled up with a force exceeding the torque), the button operation section 850 is moved upward by the force. It can be moved to the side.

As a result, in the push operation device 1261 of this embodiment, the stroke amount due to the push operation of the push operation device 1261 is changed to the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853 (that is, the stroke amount caused by the push operation of the button operation portion 850). The stroke amount S2 of the button operation section 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 (the movement range of the button operation section 850 by the operation mechanism 860 from the neutral position of the button operation section 850) (the amount of movement to the lower end position).

The operation cover member 870 is a member that covers (covers) the button operation section 850 from the outside, and is configured in a cylindrical shape with an operation surface on the upper end surface. The operation cover member 870 has translucency and transmits light emitted by a light emitting body (not shown) such as an LED disposed inside the operation cover member 870 (for example, the base 851 of the button operation section 850). Transparently configured.

The surface of the operation cover member 870 on the back side with respect to the operation surface (that is, the surface facing the button operation section 850 side) is in contact with the operated section 852 of the button operation section 850, so that the player can easily operate the operation cover member 870. When a pushing operation is performed on the operation surface, the operation cover member 870 and the operated portion 852 move downward together.

As a result, the pushing operation performed by the player on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870 becomes a pushing operation on the operated part 852, and the operated part 852 is pushed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 853. At the same time, the button operating section 850 can be moved downward by the operation of the operating mechanism 860.

As shown in FIG. 21, a suspension count display section 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870. The pending number display section 870A displays numbers from "0" to "8" corresponding to the number of pending units of the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and numbers corresponding to each of these numbers. A line segment is drawn as a scale.

In the hold count display section 870A, numbers corresponding to the hold count of unit games related to special symbols are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom, and the numbers corresponding to the hold count of the button operation unit 850 according to the current hold count are arranged in ascending order from top to bottom. At the neutral position, numbers corresponding to the number of holds are drawn in such a way that they are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100 (dotted chain line Q).

As a result, for example, when the number of holds of a unit game related to a special symbol is zero, as shown in FIG. By being placed in the corresponding neutral position, only the number "0" corresponding to the number of holds drawn on the number of holds display section 870A is exposed from the surface of the Pachinko machine 100.

Further, for example, if the number of pending times of the unit game related to the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pachinko machine 100 being placed in the neutral position, the number "3" corresponding to the number of holds drawn on the number of holds display section 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers "0" to "3" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Further, for example, when the number of holds of the unit game related to the special symbol is 8, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pachinko machine 100 being placed in the neutral position, the number "8" corresponding to the number of reservations drawn on the number of reservation display section 870A is exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100. As a result, the numbers "0" to "8" are exposed from the surface of the pachinko machine 100.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the button operation section 850 increases as the number of pending unit games related to the special symbol increases, the player can select the number drawn on the number of pending display section 870A of the pachinko machine. By visually checking the number displayed on the part exposed from the surface of the 100, it is possible to grasp the current number of reservations. In other words, the pressing operation device 1261 can function as a display device that displays the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is reserved, similar to the special symbol reservation display devices 476 and 477.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 20. The bottom member 880 is a member that constitutes the bottom portion of the pressing operation device 1261. The bottom member 880 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and a groove 880A that can accommodate the side surface of the operation cover member 870 is provided on the peripheral edge thereof. The groove 880A also functions as a guide that guides the operation cover member 870 in the vertical direction. Note that the operation cover member 870 is configured to be vertically movable only within a certain range, and includes a stopper mechanism that restricts upward movement beyond a certain amount, but this is not shown. ing.

The push operation device 1261 includes a detection sensor 890 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the sub-control board 940 when the button operation section 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range of the actuation mechanism 860. . The detection sensor 890 is, for example, an optical proximity sensor. This detection sensor 890 does not necessarily need to be provided, and the detection position by the detection sensor 890 may be detected using information from a sensor (encoder) that can detect the upper and lower positions of the button operation section 850.

The detection sensor 890 outputs a high level signal when the button operation section 850 reaches the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860, and the detection sensor 890 outputs a high level signal when the button operation section 850 reaches the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860. Outputs a low level signal when moving.

When the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal, the sub control board 940 determines that the button operation unit 850 has reached the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860, and the signal becomes low level. If the signal falls, it is determined that the button operation unit 850 has moved from the position that is the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860.

The sub control board 940 sets the lower end position flag (part of the RAM) to ON when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 rises to a high level signal. The sub control board 940 sets the lower end position flag to OFF when the signal received from the detection sensor 890 falls to a low level signal. Thereby, the sub-control board 940 determines that the button operation section 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860 when the lower end position flag is set to on.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured in a situation where the button operating section 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the actuating mechanism 860 and the operated section 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853. If this occurs, it is determined that the press operation device 1261 has been operated.

More specifically, when the sub control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 has risen to a high level signal and the lower end position flag is set to on, the sub control board 940 determines that the push operation device 1261 has been operated. judge. Similarly, if the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 890 has risen to a high level signal and the maximum press position flag is set to on, it determines that the press operation device 1261 has been operated. do.

When the push operation device 1261 (button operation section 850) is in the neutral position at a position where the button operation section 850 is above the lower end of the movement range of the actuation mechanism 860, the sub control board 940 If it is determined that the button operation unit 850 has been operated, the actuation mechanism 860 is controlled so that the button operation unit 850 returns to the neutral position. Thereby, the pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position.

Note that when the button operating section 850 is moved by applying a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operating section 850, the motor 863 rotates due to the rotation of the pinion 862, so the direction of rotation, the rotational position, and The rotational speed can be detected by an encoder (not shown) included in actuation mechanism 860. When the sub-control board 940 determines that the signal received from the detection sensor 854 rises to a high level signal in a situation where the lower end position flag is off, the sub-control board 940 determines that the rotational speed of the motor 863 detected by the encoder is zero. If so, the actuating mechanism 860 is controlled to return the button operating section 850 to the current neutral position.

As a result, even if the button operating section 850 is operated (pushing operation) with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the operation is performed before the button operating section 850 reaches the lower end of the movement range of the operating mechanism 860. Even if this is completed, the pressing operation device 1261 can be returned to the current neutral position.

Note that when returning the push operation device 1261 to the current neutral position, the movement speed of the button operation unit 850 toward the neutral position within the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the actuating mechanism 860 is a constant movement speed. Alternatively, the moving speed may be different depending on the state at that time.

Next, the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 configured as described above will be explained. When the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 is a position where the button operation section 850 is at the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20(A)), a push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 at the neutral position. is performed (that is, when a pushing operation is performed on the operation surface of the operation cover member 870), the pressing operation device 1261 is pushed down by a change in the position of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853. .

Therefore, the stroke amount when the push operation device 1261, whose neutral position is the lower end of the movement range of the button operation unit 850 by the actuation mechanism 860, is pushed down to a state where it is determined that the operation has been performed by the sub-control board 940. corresponds to the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853, as shown in FIG. 20(B).

On the other hand, when the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 is a position where the button operation section 850 is above the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20(C)), the neutral position When a pushing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, if the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is larger than the biasing force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the pressing operation device 1261 first After the operated part 852 is pushed down to the maximum pressing position due to the deformation of the button 853 (see FIG. 20(D)), it is pushed down by the position change of the button operating part 850 by the actuating mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20(E)).

Therefore, when the push operation device 1261, whose neutral position is a position where the button operation unit 850 is above the lower end of the movement range of the actuation mechanism 860, is pushed down to a state where it is determined that the operation has been performed by the sub-control board 940. As shown in FIGS. 20(D) and 20(E), the stroke amount is determined by the stroke amount S1 of the operated portion 852 due to the deformation of the spring member 853, and the stroke amount S2 of the button operating portion 850 due to the actuating mechanism 860. , that is, (stroke amount S1+stroke amount S2).

The stroke amount S2 of the button operation section 850 by the actuation mechanism 860 is the amount of movement of the button operation section 850 from the neutral position to the lower end position of the movement range of the button operation section 850 by the operation mechanism 860. This is a value that changes depending on the change in the neutral position of 850. More specifically, the stroke amount S2 is a value that increases as the neutral position of the button operation section 850 becomes higher. Therefore, in the pressing operation device 261 of this embodiment, the stroke amount due to the pressing operation increases as the neutral position of the button operation section 850 becomes higher.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 and the reaction force to the pressing operation when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed. More specifically, FIG. 22 is a graph in which the horizontal axis represents the operating position of the pressing operation device 1261 when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis represents the reaction force against the pressing operation.

In this embodiment, the position of the operation surface of the operation cover member 870 in the press operation device 1261 is referred to as the "operation position of the press operation device 1261." The position of the operated section 852 of the button operating section 850 may be set as the "operating position of the pressing operation device 1261."

When the button operation unit 850 performs a push operation on the push operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20(A)) whose neutral position is at the lower end of the movement range of the actuating mechanism 860, From the operation position A1 of the press operation device 1261 until reaching the operation position Amin of the press operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20(B)) in a situation where the sub control board 940 determines that an operation (push operation) has been performed. The reaction force against the pushing operation in the section (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) increases as the spring constant of the spring member 853 approaches the operating position Amin from the operating position A1, as shown by the straight line J1 shown in FIG. 21(A). Increases linearly with slope.

Next, when the neutral position of the press operation device 1261 rises and the operation position of the press operation device 1261 at the neutral position moves from the operation position A1 to the operation position A2 (see FIG. 20(C)), the neutral A case where a push operation is performed on the position push operation device 1261 will be described.

In such a case, if the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is larger than the biasing force of the spring member 853 at the maximum pressing position, the operated part 852 moves from the operating position A2 of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position to the maximum pressing position. The reaction force against the pushing operation in the section up to the operating position A2x of the pushing operation device 1261 (see FIG. 20(C)) (that is, the section of the stroke amount S1) is expressed by the straight line J2 shown in FIG. 21(A). As shown, the slope of the spring constant of the spring member 853 increases linearly as it approaches the operation position Ax from the operation position A1.

The interval (i.e., the stroke) from the operation position A2x to the operation position Amin of the push operation device 1261 (see FIG. The reaction force against the pushing operation in the section of amount S2 has a value corresponding to the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 in the section.

Since the torque of the motor 863 depends on the current value energized to the motor 863, the relationship between the operating position of the push operation device 1261 and the reaction force against the pushing operation to the push operation device 1261 can be determined by the current value energized to the motor 863. It is possible to control the game in various ways, and it is possible to make a plurality of settings so that the operation feels different depending on the game situation and lottery results.

For example, if the torque of the motor 863 is constant regardless of the operating position of the push operation device 1261, the reaction force to the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is expressed as a straight line J3 shown in FIG. A certain pattern can be included in the section from position A2x to operation position Amin.

Alternatively, if the torque of the motor 863 is increased linearly as the operating position of the pushing operating device 1261 approaches the operating position Amin, the reaction force against the pushing operation on the pushing operating device 1261 is shown in FIG. 21(A). As shown by a two-dot chain line J4, the configuration may include a pattern that increases linearly as the operating position Amin approaches the operating position A2x.

Note that the pattern is not limited to increasing the torque of the motor 863, but may include a pattern of decreasing the torque of the motor 863. In such a case, the reaction force against the pushing operation on the pushing operation device 1261 can be reduced as the operating position A2x approaches the operating position Amin. Further, a pattern may be included in which increases and decreases in the torque of the motor 863 are combined. Further, the increase or decrease in the torque of the motor 863 does not necessarily have to be linear, and may include a pattern in which the torque of the motor 863 increases or decreases in a curved manner, or a pattern in which the torque increases and then decreases to a maximum. The pattern may include a portion where the torque decreases and then increase, or a pattern where the torque decreases and then increases to a minimum.

Also, a pattern in which the change in the torque of the motor 863 is discontinuous in the section between the operating position A2x and the operating position Amin (more specifically, a pattern in which the torque change includes a step and is discontinuous before and after a predetermined position) It may be. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the reaction force against the pushing operation on the pushing operation device 1261 rapidly increases at the operating position X without any change in the operating position, and becomes discontinuous. The change in the reaction force against the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 in the section from the operating position X to the operating position Amin may be constant in the section, as shown in the straight line J5 shown in FIG. 21(B), a pattern that increases as the position approaches the operating position Amin may be included.

Also, the manner in which the reaction force against the push operation on the push operation device 1261 changes in the section from operation position A2x to operation position X, and the reaction force against the push operation on the push operation device 1261 in the section from operation position X to operation position Amin is also shown. Patterns with the same variation may be included, or patterns with different variation may be included.

In addition, the operation position at which the reaction force against the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is made discontinuous does not necessarily have to be one as shown in FIG. 21(B). A pattern may include a plurality of (that is, two or more) operation positions where the reaction force is discontinuous.

Furthermore, it is not necessarily necessary to discontinuously change the torque of the motor 863 at the operating position In the patterns in which the reaction force to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 changes in different manners, a pattern in which each change manner changes continuously at the operation position X may be included.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the encoder (not shown) included in the actuating mechanism 860 applies a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863 to the button operating section 850 to move the button operating section 850, It is configured to be able to detect the rotational direction, rotational position, and rotational speed of the motor 863. The sub-control board 940 can detect the pushing speed (moving speed of the pushing operating device 1261) in the pushing operation of the pushing operating device 1261 and the amount of movement of the pushing operating device 1261 based on each value detected by the encoder.

Here, a target value is set in advance for the moving speed and moving amount of the pushing operating device 1261 that has been pressed (in other words, the moving speed and moving amount of the pushing operating device 1261 that are the target values are set on the sub control board 940. (stored in the ROM, RAM, etc.), and the movement speed or movement amount of the press operation device 1261 detected by the sub-control board 940 based on each value detected by the encoder is the movement speed stored in advance as a target value. Alternatively, a pattern may be included in which a predetermined effect or display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 or a predetermined accessory provided on the game board 400 operates when the amount of movement is exceeded.

Specifically, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 (button operation unit 850) with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the sub control board 940 controls the direction of rotation of the motor 863 detected by the encoder, Detecting the moving speed or amount of movement of the pressing operation device 1261 based on the rotational position and rotational speed, and comparing the detected moving speed or amount with a moving speed or amount stored in advance as a target value, When it is determined that the detected movement speed or movement amount exceeds the movement speed or movement amount stored as a target value in advance, a predetermined effect or display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, or a predetermined effect or display is displayed on the game board 400. A pattern for operating a predetermined accessory may also be included.

According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows the player to operate the pressing operation device 1261 in accordance with a predetermined target value, thereby increasing the attention to the pachinko machine 100. .

Note that the target value may be set by either the moving speed or the moving amount, or a combination of both, or by setting the target value for the button operation unit 850 held at a constant height. The push-in operation force may be the same. Furthermore, the target value may be set based on a threshold such as whether or not it exceeds a predetermined target value, or it may be set based on a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range for a certain period of time or more. The operation may be accompanied by a target for which the operation time is set.

Furthermore, it is preferable to set a plurality of types of target value settings, neutral position height positions, and reaction force magnitudes and change patterns in the pressing operation device 1261. Then, depending on the conditions of the game (for example, the number of holds, the playing time, the number of times a predetermined effect (for example, displaying a specific character) is performed), you can select one of several types, or select a jackpot lottery. Select one of multiple types according to conditions based on the lottery results of a predetermined lottery such as ) is preferably used as an effect to suggest to the player.

For example, the sub-control board 940 can detect the amount of movement of the pressed operation device 1261 based on each value detected by the encoder, so that the height of the neutral position of the press operation device 1261 depends on the special symbol. In a configuration that changes depending on the number of times a unit game is held, the sub-control board 940 controls the pressing operation device 1261 when a pressing operation is performed with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, and when the speed is below a certain level. (For example, when a pushing operation is performed with a target value of movement speed of 0.5 seconds or less per stroke for one scale), a special symbol lottery (first special If a unit game that has been won in the special symbol lottery (symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is included, the number of pending games corresponding to the unit game that has been won in the special symbol lottery has a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). The configuration may be such that the actuation mechanism 860 is controlled to discontinuously change the torque of the motor 863 at a corresponding position.

In addition, if the unit games that are currently on hold include a unit game that has won a special symbol lottery, the motor 863 is moved at a position corresponding to the number of times of suspension that corresponds to the unit game that has won the special symbol lottery. The probability of discontinuously changing the torque of may be greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%.

In this way, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 with a force exceeding the torque of the motor 863, the contents of each unit game that is on hold (for example, whether or not you have won a special symbol lottery) A configuration in which the movement mode of the push operation device 1261 (i.e., a change in the operating feeling due to a discontinuous change in the torque of the motor 863 during the movement of the push operation device 1261, a pattern of reaction force against the movement) changes depending on the movement of the push operation device 1261. , it is possible to provide a game feature in which the contents of the lottery results and the like of each pending unit game are inferred based on the movement mode of the pressing operation device 1261.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a press operation device 1261 that can be pressed by a player includes a button operation section 850 whose operated section 852 is supported by a base 851 via a spring member 853, and a button operation device 1261 that can be operated by a player. The actuating mechanism 860 allows the button operating part 850 to move in the vertical direction, and the actuating mechanism 860 can hold the button operating part 850 at a predetermined neutral position. By applying a downward force (push operation force) exceeding the holding force to the button operation section 850, the button operation section 850 can be moved in the direction of the force.

Thereby, the stroke amount due to the push operation of the push operation device 1261 can be changed in accordance with the change in the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 (that is, the neutral position of the button operation section 850). As a result, compared to the case where the amount of movement of the operated section 852 is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the spring member 853, it is possible to diversify the operational feeling when the player operates the operated section 852. Therefore, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 (the neutral position of the button operation unit 850) is configured to increase as the number of times unit games related to special symbols are suspended increases. . Therefore, the player can recognize the number of holds by visually checking the push operation device 1261, and can recognize the number of holds by the height of the button operation unit 850 even when the player is playing the game with his/her eyes facing down. It can be made easier.

Further, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 becomes longer as the number of times of holding is increased. As a result, when the player operates the operated section 852, the operational feeling can be made different depending on the number of holds, so that the player can experience the held hold by pressing the push operation device 1261. Can estimate (recognize) the number of times. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the number of times of holding of a unit game related to a special symbol can be estimated (recognized) by pressing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 without visually confirming the information regarding the number of holdings. can.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, by changing the current value supplied to the motor 863, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value, so the operating mechanism 860 allows the operational feel of the operated section 852 (the operational feeling of the button operational section 850) to be varied in a range in which the button operational section 850 can move in the vertical direction.

For example, if the torque of the motor 863 is kept constant regardless of the operation position of the push operation device 1261 (the amount of operation of the push operation device 1261) within the movement range of the button operation section 850 by the actuation mechanism 860, the push operation device Since the reaction force against the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 can be made constant within the movement range, the player can perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 with a constant force within the movement range.

Furthermore, when the torque of the motor 863 is increased or decreased linearly or non-linearly as the amount of operation (the amount of pushing) of the push operation device 1261 increases within the movement range of the button operation section 850 by the actuation mechanism 860, Since the reaction force to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 can be increased or decreased linearly or non-linearly within the movement range, the player can increase or decrease the force for pressing the pressing operation device 1261 ( The pressing operation device 1261 can be operated while increasing or decreasing the pressing force linearly or non-linearly.

As a result, the operating feeling of the push operating device 1261 in the section where the button operating section 850 can be moved in the vertical direction by the actuating mechanism 860 can be changed to an operating feeling that allows the pushing operation to be performed with a constant force, or an operating feeling that increases as the amount of pushing increases. Various changes can be made, such as an operation feeling that requires a pushing operation to be performed with a decreasing force. This makes it possible to diversify the operational feeling when the player operates the operated section 852. In this respect as well, the degree of attention paid to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved.

In addition, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 is changed by controlling the current value supplied to the motor 863 in accordance with the content of a predetermined effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, thereby controlling the operated portion 852. The feeling of operation can be changed to match the content of the performance.

For example, when the effect of filling a balloon with air using a manual air pump is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during a variable display, the torque of the motor 863 is constant in accordance with the depiction of operating the manual air pump. By controlling the current value so as to achieve this, it is possible to make the operating feeling of the pushing operation on the pushing operation device 1261 constant, as if operating a manual air pump. Then, if the display result of the fluctuating display is a win, or if the fluctuating display is a highly anticipated fluctuating display that suggests to the player, a reaction force is generated until the end of the performance, and the balloon is pushed to the maximum by the pushing operation. While it depicts that the balloon has grown larger, in the case of a loss or to suggest to the player that the fluctuating display has low expectations, a hole is made in the balloon and the balloon shrinks, along with the display of the balloon shrinking. You can reduce the torque to minimize the reaction force and depict the balloon as not inflating.

In addition, when a scene in which a character tries to push open a door that is firmly closed is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during variable display, the character pushes the door in an attempt to open it. By controlling the current value so that the torque of the motor 863 sharply decreases at the moment the door opens, the operating feeling of the push operation on the push operation device 1261 can be suddenly lightened, as if the door were opened. . If the displayed result of the fluctuating display is a win, or if the fluctuating display is a highly anticipated fluctuating display that suggests to the player, at the end of the performance, the torque is reduced to minimize the reaction force, and the door opens. The character is shown behind the door, which indicates a lucky state, while the reaction force is applied until the end of the performance in case of a loss or to suggest to the player that the fluctuating display has low expectations. It is also possible to create a scene where the door does not open.

The effect corresponding to the display result of the fluctuating display is not limited to the above, but the button operation unit 850 is maintained at the lower end position depending on the level of expectation or whether it is appropriate or not after continuing for a certain period of time in a state where it is pushed all the way to the bottom. The position after the operation may be different, such as changing whether the object moves or rises, the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force) may be different, or a combination of these may be used. good.

In this way, the current value applied to the motor 863 is controlled so that the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 changes according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. The operating feeling of the pressing operation on the operating device 1261 can be made to match the effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. This allows the player to feel as if he or she is participating in a predetermined performance displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 can be changed according to the current value supplied to the motor 863. The torque of the motor 863 can be changed discontinuously (or in a stepwise manner, or in a sudden manner) at a predetermined position within the range in which the motor 863 can be moved.

As a result, when the player operates the operated part 852 with a force exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the actuating mechanism 860, the button operating part 850 can be moved in the vertical direction by the actuating mechanism 860. At a predetermined position, the operational feeling for the operated part 852 (press operation device 1261) changes discontinuously. Since the feeling of operating the pressing operation device 1261 changes discontinuously at a predetermined position, the feeling of operating the pressing operating device 1261 is less likely to be monotonous, and thereby the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can be suitably improved. .

In addition, in the push operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the position of the button operation section 850 is configured to be changeable by the actuation mechanism 860, and as a control of the sub-control board 940, the elastic body is The configuration may include control for moving the button operation unit 850 at a speed that generates an inertial force of 1. That is, by moving the button operating section 850 in a predetermined direction (upward or downward) using the actuation mechanism 860 and then suddenly stopping the movement, the button operating section 850 is moved to the base 851 via the spring member 853. The supported operated section 852 can be moved along a predetermined direction (for example, upward) by the inertia force received by the operated section 852 due to the sudden stop of the button operating section 850. It is also possible to perform a reciprocating vibration movement (reciprocating movement) in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, downward).

As a result, the pressing operation device 1261 functions not only as a device that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation (specifically, a pressing operation), but also as a device that can provide effects using the vibrations of the operated section 852. can be done. Since the press operation device 1261 can form part of the performance, interest in the press operation device 1261 can be increased, and thereby, the degree of attention to the Pachinko machine 100 can be improved.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. The pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment is devised so that the user can suitably experience the operation feeling and the feel of the operation (motion feeling) of the pressing operation device 1261 of the sixth embodiment.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the seventh embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to sixth embodiments described above, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the pressing operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. More specifically, FIG. 24(A) is a top view schematically showing the vicinity of the pressing operation device 1261, and FIG. 24(B) is a top view of the pressing operation device 1261 viewed from the direction of arrow A in FIG. 24(A). It is a side view of the vicinity.

In addition, in FIG. 24 (FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B)), for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the drawing, the pressing operation device 1261, the case 893 housing the pressing operation device 1261, and the hand rest are shown. 895 is illustrated. Further, in each of FIGS. 24(A) and 24(B), for reference, arrows representing the front-rear direction, left-right direction, or up-down direction with respect to the illustrated content are illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 24(A), for reference, the position of the front plate 222 with respect to the pressing operation device 1261 and the like is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. In addition, in FIG. 24(B), for the purpose of facilitating understanding of the drawing, partial cross sections of the upper end sides of the case 893 and the hand rest 895 are shown, and hatching for each of these cross sections is omitted. There is. Further, in FIG. 24(B), a dashed dotted line QA indicating the position of the opening R in the vertical direction on the opening surface is shown for reference.

In addition, in FIG. 24, for reference, two examples of the player's hand that operates the pressing operation device 1261 (performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B) and a portion of the forearm part continuous with the hand are shown. It is illustrated by the dotted chain line TE. In this embodiment, the "hand" refers to the part on the distal side of the wrist, which consists of the palm and fingers, and the "forearm part" refers to the part that is continuous with the hand, from the wrist to the elbow. Indicates the part.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the input operation device 260 is configured to include a pressing operation device 1261 and a selection operation device 263. The input operation device 260 may include a rotary operation device 262 in addition to the push operation device 1261 and the selection operation device 263.

The pressing operation device 1261 is arranged approximately at the center of the upper protrusion 217, as shown in FIG. On the side closer to the player than the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, on the front side with respect to the pressing operation device 1261), there is a hand rest 895 on which the player can place the hand (for example, right hand) for operating the pressing operation device 1261. It is provided. The hand rest stand 895 is a stand that extends forward from the case 893 that houses the pressing operation device 1261.

The pressing operation device 1261 is housed in the case 893 through an opening R that faces upward. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 is located on the upper end surface of the operation cover member 870 and is an operation that the player touches when performing a pressing operation, as shown in FIG. 24(B). The neutral position is such that the surface 870B is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening R that accommodates the pressing operation device 1261 (the opening surface located on the dashed line QA) and the vertical direction, which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261. configured.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the opening R is arranged at a position that coincides with a plane is illustrated, the opening R may be arranged at a height position that does not coincide with a plane. For example, the operating surface 870B may be configured such that the neutral position is a position where at least a portion of the periphery of the opening is substantially equal to at least a portion of the periphery of the opening in the movement direction of the operating surface 870B. The neutral position may be a position that is substantially equal to a part of the player's side that is closer to the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the hand rest 895 is operated by a player who operates the pressing operation device 1261 (performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B), as shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to place at least a part of a part of the hand (more specifically, a part of the hand excluding a part of the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B) and a forearm part continuous with the hand. Ru.

In other words, the hand rest 895 serves as a support base that supports at least a portion of a part of the hand and a forearm portion continuous with the hand from below, so that the player can push the operation surface 870B with his or her hand. It has the following functions. In the example shown in FIG. 24, as indicated by a two-dot chain line TE, a part of the player's hand on the wrist side and a part of the forearm on the wrist side are supported by a hand rest 895.

Therefore, the player places and supports the part of his hand that performs the pressing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 and at least part of the forearm part that is continuous with the hand on the hand rest 895. The user can operate the operation surface 870B while moving the user. For example, as shown in FIG. 24(B), the upper surface of the operation surface 870B and the hand rest 895 are both substantially equal in the vertical direction to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 (the opening surface located on the dashed line QA). In the configuration where the palm is placed on the hand rest 895, by moving the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) up and down using the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum, the palm is placed on the hand rest 895, and the hand is moved up and down against the operation surface 870B. A push operation can be performed. In addition, by placing the hand on the operation surface 870B using the wrist side of the palm as a fulcrum, the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side) can be easily moved up and down by moving the operation surface 870B. Therefore, the operation surface 870B can be easily moved, and the movement of the operation surface 870B can be easily felt.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is located at approximately the same position in the vertical direction as the opening surface of the opening R, so that the pressing operation device 1261 can be pressed. It is difficult for the player who performs the operation to perform a forceful pushing operation (pressing operation) such as hitting the operation surface 870B, compared to when the operation surface 870B protrudes upward from the opening surface of the opening R. I can do it.

Therefore, in a configuration where the neutral position is the position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction, such as the push operation device 1261 included in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the push operation device 1261 When a player performs a pushing operation on the operation surface 870B, the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the actuating mechanism 860 (see FIG. ), it is possible to perform a pushing operation in which the operating surface 870B is pushed in carefully.

Therefore, when a downward force (push operation force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the actuation mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the push operation device 1261 is moved from the neutral position to the corresponding push operation (push operation). ) In a pachinko machine 100 having a configuration movable in the direction of ), a player can suitably experience the operating feeling of a pushing operation (pressing), which is difficult to experience due to the force of a pushing operation with force. Thereby, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the player who operates the press operation device 1261 (performs a push operation on the operation surface 870B) is placed on the side closer to the player than the press operation device 1261. At least part of the part of the hand that performs the operation (more specifically, the part of the hand excluding the part on the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B) and the forearm that is continuous with the hand can be placed. A hand rest 895 (which can be supported from below) is provided.

As a result, at least a part of the forearm part of the player's hand that is continuous with the part of the player's hand excluding the part of the finger that operates the operation surface 870B can be supported by the hand rest 895. The hand can be stabilized, and the player can be prevented from performing a pressing operation at an inappropriate position on the operation surface 870B.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the forearm continuous with the player's hand excluding a portion of the finger side that operates the operation surface 870B can be supported by the hand rest 895, the hand and Compared to the case where the forearm part moves freely, the strength of the pushing operation on the operation surface 870B can be suppressed. Therefore, it is difficult for a player who performs a push operation on the operation surface 870B (operating the press operation device 1261) to perform a forceful operation on the operation surface 870B (for example, hitting the operation surface 870B). I can do it.

This allows the player who performs a pushing operation on the operating surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 to perform a pushing operation of slowly pushing the operating surface 870B against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the actuating mechanism 860. be able to. In this respect, when a downward force (push operation force) exceeding the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the actuating mechanism 860 is applied to the operation surface 870B, the push operation device 1261 is moved from the neutral position to the corresponding push operation. In a pachinko machine 100 having a configuration movable in the direction of operation (pressing), to suitably allow a player to experience the operating feeling of a pushing operation (pressing), which is difficult to experience due to the momentum of a forceful pushing operation. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24(A), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is The length excluding the length (length WA) in the front-rear direction from the front end of the operation surface 870B (press operation device 1261) to the rear end of the hand rest 895 in the area including the hand rest 870B and the hand rest 895 (i.e., The length WB) is configured to be shorter than the length (length W2) of the operation surface 870B (press operation device 1261) in the front-rear direction. That is, the area including the operation surface 870B and the hand rest 895 in the pressing operation device 1261 occupies a relatively large area in the front-rear direction of the area on the front side of the front plate 222.

In such a configuration, the size of the operation surface 870B is configured to be relatively large in the area in front of the front plate 222, thereby making it easier for the player to operate the operation surface 870B. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 24(A), the operation surface 870B has a size that occupies approximately half of the area in front of the front plate 222 in the front-rear direction, or the operation surface 870B has a size that occupies approximately half of the area in front of the front plate 222, or the operation surface 870B has a size that occupies approximately half of the area in front of the front plate 222, or a It is large enough to be operated with four fingers (excluding 4 fingers), and is relatively large.

In this way, even if the operation surface 870B (press operation device 1261) is configured to be relatively large in the area in front of the front plate 222, the support portion is configured so that at least a part of the operation surface 870B is on the front side of the press operation device 1261. This makes it possible to perform a suitable operation on the operation surface 870B (that is, the relatively large operation surface 870B), and also allows the player to feel the operation of the push operation device 1261 provided with the operation surface 870B. It is possible to give a suitable experience.

Further, as described above, the pressing operation device 1260 of this embodiment allows the hand (more specifically, the fingertip side of the hand) to be placed on the operation surface 870B using the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum. By placing it there, it is possible to experience the motion of the movement of the pressing operation device 1260 (movement of the operation surface 870B) by the movement of the hand accompanying the movement of the operation surface 870B.

Therefore, for example, the push operation device 1260 of this embodiment, like the push operation device 1260 described in the sixth embodiment, has the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 equal to the number of holds of the unit game related to the special symbol. In a configuration that changes depending on the number of holds (more specifically, the number of holds increases as the number of holds increases), the player places the hand placed on the operation surface 870B with the wrist side of the palm placed on the hand rest 895 as a fulcrum. By moving the , it is possible to visually understand the increase or decrease in the number of suspensions.

Further, in the configuration in which the height of the neutral position of the pressing operation device 1260 of the embodiment changes depending on the number of times of holding the unit game related to the special symbol (more specifically, the height increases as the number of holdings increases), , the neutral position where the operation surface 870B is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is determined for a predetermined number of reservations (e.g., zero) that is smaller than the maximum number of times (e.g., eight) among the number of reservations. When allocating the special symbol, it is also possible to intuitively grasp whether the number of suspensions of the unit game related to the special symbol is greater or less than the predetermined number of suspensions by moving the hand placed on the operation surface 870B. It is possible.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment is designed to attract more attention from players even during a non-gaming state in which no variable display is performed.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment described above will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the eighth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to seventh embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the seventh embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 479 displays the decorative pattern during a non-gaming state (standby) in which the player is waiting for a game to be played and no variable display is performed. The so-called "customer waiting performance" is composed of a moving image or an image obtained by utilizing moving image data (image data) prepared in advance for various performances displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display. Note that the animation data for presentation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in association with each presentation pattern.

Specifically, for example, targeting some or all of the multiple types of performances prepared in advance, a partial series of videos ( Construct a customer-waiting performance by cutting out continuous frame images) and connecting the clipped videos or, if there are multiple targeted performances, each of the clipped videos in a predetermined order for each targeted performance. do.

For example, if a plurality of types of suggestive effects, which are one of the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during variable display, are prepared, some or all of the plurality of types of suggestive effects (that is, at least one )), a partial series of videos (continuous frame images) in the relevant suggestive performance is cut out from each video data corresponding to each target suggestive performance, and the clipped video or the target When there are a plurality of suggestive performances, a video is constructed by connecting the cut out videos in a predetermined order for each target suggestive performance as a customer waiting performance.

The "partial series of moving images" cut out from the effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display may be any range of moving images in the effect. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a portion of a partial moving image (continuous frame images) including at least a range where a characteristic display is performed in the target performance is cut out.

For example, when the target performance is a suggestive performance, the range in which a characteristic display is performed in the performance is a predetermined video that can suggest the level of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state in the suggestive performance. part (video in a predetermined range), more specifically, for example, a video part where a character appears that suggests the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state, or a video part whose background color is a color that suggests the degree of expectation. etc. For example, in the first suggestive presentation in the fifth embodiment described above, a video portion where predetermined characters such as characters CA1 to CA3 (see FIG. 19) appear is cut out as a "range where a characteristic display is performed in the presentation". It may be a configuration that is targeted for.

Alternatively, for example, if the target performance is a performance that prompts an operation on the press operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the press operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a variable display, there are characteristics in the performance that prompts the operation. The video portion showing the content may be defined as the "range where characteristic display is performed in the performance." For example, the video portion corresponding to the ``effect of inflating a balloon with a manual air pump'' or ``the effect of a character trying to push open a tightly closed door'' as exemplified in the sixth embodiment above may be changed to `` It may be configured to be a target for cutting out as a range in which a characteristic display is performed in a performance.

In addition, the ``range in which a characteristic performance is performed in a performance'' is a characteristic video part that cannot be seen in other performances (suggestion performance, etc.), regardless of the level of expectation for transition to a special game state (for example, , a video portion in which a character that cannot be seen in other presentations appears).

Note that the customer waiting performance does not necessarily have to be a partial video cut out from the target performance, or a video made by connecting the cut out videos in a predetermined order. For example, the customer waiting performance may be a video of the entire range of the target performance, or a video of the entire range of videos connected in a predetermined order, or a part of the video may be cut out from the target performance. The customer-waiting performance may be a video in which a video containing a video of the customer and a video of the entire range of the target performance are mixed.

The customer waiting performance does not necessarily need to be composed of a partial video clipped from the performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, or a video of the entire range of the performance, as described above. For example, for some or all of the multiple types of performances prepared in advance, one or more frame images from among the frame images constituting each video data corresponding to each target performance may be used. Images or videos of one or more regions may be cut out, and an image or video including one or more images cut out from each performance may be configured as a customer waiting performance.

Specifically, for example, as a performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, a character suggesting the level of expectation for transition to the special game state, similar to the first suggestion performance in the fifth embodiment described above. When multiple types of suggestive performances that appear are prepared, some or all (i.e., at least one) of the multiple types of suggestive performances are targeted, and each of the target suggestive performances is supported. Among the frame images constituting each video data, images of one or more areas are cut out from one or more frame images, and images or videos containing the one or more images cut out from each production are waiting for customers. It may also be configured as a performance.

In this case, for example, one or more cut out images may be displayed on a predetermined background image, and all images (cut out images) may appear at once, or all cut out images may be displayed multiple times. Images or videos that are divided and displayed one after another are configured as a customer waiting performance.

The frame image from which the image is cut out may be any of the frame images forming the target effect. For example, if the target effect is a suggestion effect similar to the first suggestion effect of the fifth embodiment described above, the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is determined from among the frame images that constitute the suggestion effect. The structure may be such that an image of a predetermined area is cut out from a frame image including the suggested character.

Alternatively, if the target effect is an effect that prompts an operation on the press operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the press operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during a variable display, one of the frame images constituting the effect is , a configuration in which an image of a predetermined area is cut out from a frame image corresponding to an image containing characteristic content in the performance (for example, a predetermined image including a manual air pump in a performance of inflating balloons with a manual air pump); It may be.

Alternatively, in the target production (suggestive production, etc.), images containing characteristic content that cannot be seen in other productions (for example, images that cannot be seen in other productions, regardless of the level of expectation for transition to the special game state) The configuration may be such that an image in a predetermined area is cut out from a frame image corresponding to a frame image (such as an image in which a character who cannot play a character appears).

Furthermore, the image cutout area in the frame image may be any area in the target frame image. For example, if the target frame image is a frame image that includes a character that indicates the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state, a configuration may be adopted in which a region including a part of the character is cut out.

In addition, the customer waiting performance includes an image or video that includes one or more images cut out from each performance, and a video of the entire range of the target performance or a partial video cut out from the relevant performance, as described above. It may be a combination of

When it is determined that the pachinko machine 100 has not been played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the sub control board 940 controls the pachinko machine 100 to indicate that the pachinko machine 100 is in a state where it is waiting for a player to play a game and is not displaying a variable display. Assuming that the player is in a gaming state (waiting), the display of the customer waiting effect of this embodiment described above is started.

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 determines that the firing handle 252 is not operated based on the command received from the main control board 920, and the decorative pattern display device 479 displays a variable display of decorative symbols or a jackpot effect. A timer or counter included in the sub-control board 940 measures the period during which the game is not played, and if the period exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player. It is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed.

It should be noted that the customer waiting effect does not necessarily have to be of one type; the combination of effects that appear in the customer waiting effect (effects used to cut out videos and images) may be changed, or even the same effect may appear in the customer waiting effect. It may be possible to prepare a plurality of customer waiting effects by changing the positions of the cut out videos and images, or by changing the order in which the cut out videos and images appear.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a predetermined push operation is performed on the push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) or the push operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) during the non-gaming state (standby). is performed, the mode is selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts winning during gaming (that is, during a period not in a non-gaming state). A variable display (variable effect) according to (contents of variable display, variable pattern) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. Specifically, during the non-gaming state, on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, predetermined information prompting the player to start a fluctuating display for demonstration purposes (for example, "If you want to see a sample of the fluctuating display, , "Press the button!") is displayed, and in this situation, when a push operation is performed, a variable display starts.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment having such a configuration includes a pseudo winning random number counter for demonstration, a pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demonstration, a pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demonstration, and a first pseudo fluctuation type counter for demonstration. The sub control board 940 is provided with a demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counter of No. 4.

These counters included in the sub-control board 940 (demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and first demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counter to fourth demonstration pseudo The variation type counters function similarly to the winning random number counter, jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and first to fourth variation type counters related to special symbols included in the main control board 920, respectively. This is a counter for

The above-mentioned counter included in the sub-control board 940 will be specifically explained. The winning random number counter for special symbols provided on the main control board 920 functions as a counter for special symbol lottery, whereas the pseudo winning random number counter for demonstration (a part of the RAM in the sub-control board 940) , functions as a counter for performing a pseudo-demonstration winning lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery. The demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter generates a demonstration pseudo-winning random number (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo-winning random number") corresponding to the winning random number related to the special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter produces a demonstration pseudo-jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "demonstration pseudo-jackpot") with the same winning probability as the winning probability of the jackpot by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. '') can be selected (can be drawn by lottery). Therefore, the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter is configured in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol included in the main control board 920, for example.

While the jackpot symbol random number counter provided on the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting the jackpot symbol, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter (a part of the RAM in the sub control board 940) functions as a counter for selecting the jackpot symbol. It functions as a counter for selecting a demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol") corresponding to the jackpot symbol. The demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter generates a demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo jackpot pattern random number") corresponding to the jackpot pattern random number.

In addition, types of pseudo jackpot symbols for demonstration are prepared that correspond to the types of jackpot symbols, and the pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demonstration is configured to be able to select any type of pseudo jackpot symbol for demonstration. .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demo pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter selects jackpot symbols that correspond to each type of demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol and are selectable in the jackpot symbol random number counter. It is configured such that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter is configured to be the same as the jackpot symbol random number counter provided in the main control board 920, for example.

While the stop pattern selection counter included in the main control board 920 functions as a counter for selecting a stop pattern, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter (a part of the RAM in the sub control board 940) functions as a counter for selecting a stop pattern. It functions as a counter for selecting a pseudo-stop pattern for demonstration (hereinafter also referred to as "pseudo-stop pattern for demonstration") corresponding to the stop pattern. The demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter generates demonstration pseudo stop pattern random numbers (hereinafter also referred to as "demonstration pseudo stop pattern random numbers") corresponding to the stop pattern random numbers.

In addition, types of demonstration pseudo stop patterns are prepared that correspond to each type of stop pattern, and the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured to be able to select one of the types of demonstration pseudo stop patterns. .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter selects each type of demonstration pseudo stop pattern as a stop pattern that corresponds to each type and is selectable in the stop pattern selection counter. It is configured such that it can be selected with the same selection probability as the selection probability of the type. Therefore, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter is configured in the same manner as the stop pattern selection counter included in the main control board 920, for example.

The first to fourth variation type counters included in the main control board 920 select the variation time, variation pattern, etc. of the variation display of decorative symbols performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol starts winning ( On the other hand, the first demonstration pseudo variation type counter to the fourth demonstration pseudo variation type counter (all are part of the RAM in the sub control board 940), A counter for selecting the fluctuation time, fluctuation pattern, etc. of the fluctuating display of pseudo decorative symbols performed for demonstration purposes on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state. functions as The various demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counters each generate various demonstration pseudo fluctuation pattern random numbers corresponding to the various fluctuation pattern random numbers.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the various demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counters each type the variation time, variation pattern, etc. of the variation display of the pseudo decorative symbols performed for the demonstration, respectively. The corresponding type is configured to be selectable with the same selection probability as the selection probability of a type such as a variation time or a variation pattern that can be selected in various variation type counters. Therefore, the first demonstration pseudo variation type counter to the fourth demonstration pseudo variation type counter have the same configuration as the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter included in the main control board 920, respectively. be done.

In addition, the pseudo winning random number counter for demonstration, the pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demonstration, the pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demonstration, and the first pseudo fluctuation type counter for demonstration to the fourth pseudo fluctuation type counter for demonstration are all , each counter of the main control board 920 corresponding to each of these counters (that is, a winning random number counter related to special symbols, a jackpot symbol random number counter, a stop pattern selection counter, and a first variation type counter to a fourth variation type) It is sufficient that the configuration is the same as the various winning probabilities or selection probabilities in the respective counters, and does not necessarily need to be the same configuration as each counter of the main control board 920 corresponding to each of these counters.

The sub control board 940 includes a demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, a demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, a demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and a first demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counter to a fourth demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counter. are updated in the same way as the winning random number counter, jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and first to fourth variation type counters related to the special symbols provided in the main control board 920. Ru.

In other words, the sub-control board 940 controls the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter, the demonstration pseudo-jackpot symbol random number counter, and the demonstration pseudo-stop pattern selection counter when the main control board 920 uses a special symbol in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process). The winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, and the stop pattern selection counter are updated at the same intervals as the intervals at which the processing for updating the winning random number counter, the jackpot symbol random number counter, and the stop pattern selection counter (that is, the random number updating processing S1203 (see FIG. 12)) is executed.

Further, the sub control board 940 controls the first to fourth demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counters, and the main control board 920 controls the first to fourth fluctuation type counters in the main process. In addition, the main control board 920 performs the first variation counter update process in the timer interrupt process (main control interrupt process). The type counter to the fourth variation type counter are updated at the same intervals as the processing to update the variation counter (that is, the variation counter update process S1205 (see FIG. 12)).

Specifically, the sub-control board 940 controls each of these counters (i.e., a pseudo winning random number counter for demonstration, a pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demonstration, a pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demonstration, and a first pseudo fluctuation counter for demonstration). If the value of each counter is different from the specified maximum value of each counter (for example, "576") at each update timing of the type counter to the fourth pseudo fluctuation type counter for demonstration, the current value will be changed. Change the value to a higher value by "1". On the other hand, if the value of each counter is the specified maximum value of each counter, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0") of each counter.

In addition, the above-mentioned pseudo winning random number counter for demonstration, pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demonstration, pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demonstration, and various pseudo fluctuation type counters for demonstration (first to fourth pseudo fluctuation type counter for demonstration) The demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counter) does not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter may have another configuration.

For example, in the above configuration, the demonstration pseudo winning random number counter, the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, and the various demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counters are configured to be updated from a fixed initial value. However, the configuration may be such that the initial value (cyclic initial value) is set each time using an initial value counter, or the configuration may be configured using a random number generation IC without using a program and refer to the value as necessary. It's good as well.

Specifically, for example, a configuration in which the sub control board 940 includes two types of random number initial value counters that function similarly to the winning random number initial value counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbols provided in the main control board 920, respectively. Using these random number initial value counters, set the circulating initial values of the demonstration pseudo winning random number counter and the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, and set the cyclic initial value counter of the winning random number initial value counter and jackpot symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol. It is also possible to perform the same configuration as when setting the circulation initial values of the winning random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number counter related to special symbols.

The sub-control board 940 controls the main control board 920 to generate a winning random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a winning random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc. when a special symbol starts winning when a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during a non-gaming state. And similarly to the case of obtaining the stop pattern random number, from the demo pseudo winning random number counter, the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number counter, and the demo pseudo stop pattern selection counter, the demo pseudo winning random number, the demo pseudo jackpot pattern random number, and a demonstration pseudo-stop pattern random number are obtained and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940.

The sub-control board 940 performs a drawing (pseudo-winning lottery) based on the obtained demonstration pseudo-winning random number to make a pseudo-winning determination in the same way as when the main control board 920 performs a special symbol lottery.

If the demonstration pseudo jackpot is won in the pseudo lottery, the sub control board 940 controls the main control board 920 to select the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number based on the obtained demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number. Similar to the case of determining the type, the type of the demonstration pseudo stop symbol (demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol) corresponding to the winning of the demonstration pseudo jackpot is determined. The types of pseudo jackpot symbols for demonstration in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment correspond to the types of jackpot symbols determined based on the jackpot symbol random numbers, respectively.

On the other hand, if the demonstration pseudo jackpot is not won in the pseudo lottery, the sub control board 940 generates a demonstration pseudo stop symbol (demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol) that is different from the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol. A pseudo losing symbol) is set as a stopping symbol.

The sub-control board 940 performs a demonstration based on the result of the random lottery, the value of the demonstration pseudo stop pattern random number, and the value of various demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counters after the pseudo success/failure lottery. The variation time of the pseudo decorative pattern variation display is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the variation display is selected.

The sub-control board 940 is configured to randomly determine the virtual number of holds corresponding to the number of holds of the unit game related to the special symbol and the virtual gaming state, and to randomly determine the drawing result of the pseudo win/fail drawing, the demonstration In addition to the value of the pseudo stop pattern random number and the value of various pseudo fluctuation type counters for demonstration, the determined virtual hold count and virtual gaming state are used to create a pseudo decorative pattern for demonstration. A configuration may be adopted in which the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display and the fluctuating pattern of the decorative pattern in the fluctuating display are determined.

The sub-control board 940 determines the variation time of the variable display of the pseudo decorative pattern to be performed for demonstration and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the variable display, and then decorates the variable display of the pseudo decorative pattern. The process starts at the symbol display device 479. As a result, the display on the decorative pattern display device 479 is switched from the customer waiting presentation to the variable display of decorative patterns.

After starting the variable display of the pseudo decorative pattern for demonstration, the sub control board 940 causes the variable display of the decorative pattern to be displayed for the variable display at the variable time determined for the variable display. Continue according to the determined variation pattern. The sub-control board 940 definitively displays the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number as the variable time determined for the variable display passes.

In addition, when the determined variation pattern is a specific reach display (for example, super reach, etc.) using a decorative pattern, the sub-control board 940 selects a production pattern of the suggestion production. As a result, during the variable display of decorative symbols, the suggested performance of the selected performance pattern is displayed after the ready-to-reach display.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is similar to various counters used to determine the content of the variable display performed on the decorative pattern display device 479 based on the starting winning of the special symbol. It is equipped with counters for pseudo demonstrations (pseudo winning random number counter for demonstrations, pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter for demonstrations, pseudo stop pattern selection counter for demonstrations, and various pseudo fluctuation type counters for demonstrations) that function as When a press operation device such as the press operation device 261 is pressed during the gaming state, using these pseudo demonstration counters, the same selection conditions (i.e., each The variation pattern and the performance pattern in the suggestion performance are selected based on the same winning probability or selection probability by the counters and the same method of obtaining random numbers from each counter.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the player presses the press operation device such as the press operation device 261 during the non-gaming state, and the same effect as when a special symbol starts winning occurs. A fluctuating display (fluctuation effect) according to the mode selected in the selection condition is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and the fluctuating display can be visually recognized.

In addition, if the display of the decorative pattern display device 479 is switched from a customer waiting presentation to a variable display due to a predetermined push operation being performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, the said change display If neither the pressing operation device nor the firing handle 252 is operated even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the completion of the above, the display on the decorative pattern display device 479 switches to a customer waiting presentation.

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the so-called "customer waiting effect" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the non-gaming state is different from the so-called "customer waiting effect" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display. It is composed of videos or images that utilize previously prepared video data.

As a result, in the customer waiting performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the non-gaming state, the video or image included in the customer waiting performance is selected from the relevant video or image included in the customer waiting performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display. A player who visually recognizes the customer waiting performance can recognize or guess the content of the performance part corresponding to the video or image. For example, it is possible to make a player recognize the contents of a performance portion corresponding to a video cut out from a video, and a performance corresponding to the video can be made based on images cut out from frame images that make up the performance. It is possible to have the player guess the content of the part. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the performance displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, since the configuration is such that the video data prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display is used for the customer waiting effect, the video data dedicated for the customer waiting effect is used. There is no need to prepare , and the amount of memory can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, since there is no need to prepare dedicated video data for the customer waiting performance, development costs can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, if you prepare dedicated video data for the customer waiting effect, it may be necessary to lower the resolution of the customer waiting effect due to storage capacity limitations of the storage unit, but Since the configuration utilizes the video data for the customer waiting performance, it is possible to display the customer waiting performance at the same high resolution as the relevant performance.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, special symbols (first special symbol, first special symbol, Since a variable display (fluctuating effect) in a mode selected under the same selection conditions as when a starting winning of the special symbol (2 special symbol) occurs is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, it appears based on the starting winning of the special symbol. It is possible to display a variable display during a non-gaming state with the same probability of appearing at the time of winning the starting prize.

As a result, the player can check, during the non-gaming state, in the actual game (that is, during the game), for example, what kind of fluctuating display will appear with what frequency (probability), or the special game state. You can experience in a simulated manner the content of the variable display depending on the level of expectation for the transition to . Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the gameplay brought about by the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, during the period from when a press operation device such as the press operation device 261 is pressed during the non-gaming state until the end of the variable display (variable performance), the sub control board 940 controls the operation after the special symbol starts winning. It may be configured to stop (not execute) some of the functions executed during the period when the variable display based on the starting prize ends.

For example, when the push operation device is operated during a non-gaming state, the sub-control board 940 controls the function to be executed during the period from when a special symbol starting winning occurs to when the variable display based on the starting winning ends. Among these, at least the operation of a predetermined electric accessory that operates during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, the fixed display of stop symbols (for example, jackpot symbols) using decorative symbols, and the fluctuating display based on the starting winning of special symbols. A configuration may be adopted in which one function is stopped, thereby causing at least a portion of the effects to be not executed.

In addition, when the input operation device 260 (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 23) is configured to allow an input operation during the fluctuating display, and a button effect is executed in which the performance changes as the fluctuating display is executed depending on the presence or absence of the input operation. Additionally, button effects associated with the input operation may be disabled. For example, if a display prompting an input operation such as "Press the button" is displayed during a variable display, by disabling the input operation on the input operation device 260, the start winning of the special symbol will occur and then the start It may also be configured to stop some of the functions executed during the period when the variable display based on winnings ends.

In addition, when stopping the fixed display of the stop symbol using the decorative pattern (that is, not executing the fixed display of the stop symbol), the sub control board 940 replaces the jackpot symbol that indicates that a jackpot has occurred. Decorate the display (for example, a character string such as "Atari?" or "Lucky" that can remind you of the occurrence of a jackpot, or a display with a pattern or image (for example, a character doing a fist pump) that can remind you of the occurrence of a jackpot) It may be configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 479, and may be a display in place of a losing symbol that indicates a loss (for example, a character string such as "Unfortunate" that can remind you of the occurrence of a loss, or a display that indicates the occurrence of a loss). The decorative pattern display device 479 may be configured to display a conceivable pattern or image (for example, a character bowing its head).

In this way, by disabling some performances, the period from when the pressing operation device is pressed during the non-gaming state to the end of the relevant variable display, and from the time when the special symbol starts winning to the time when the relevant start is The difference in appearance from the period in which the variable display based on winnings ends is that some of the functions executed in the latter period are not executed in the former period. As a result, the variable display (variable effect) that is displayed when a press operation device such as the press operation device 261 is operated during the non-gaming state is changed from the variable display that is displayed based on the occurrence of a special symbol starting winning. On the basis of this difference, it is possible to appropriately make the player recognize that this is a pseudo variable display in which there is no possibility that a special gaming state will occur after the end of the variable display.

That is, when a player operates a push operation device during a non-gaming state, the player or a clerk at a game parlor can, for example, change the variable display (variable display) displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 based on the operation. It is possible to suppress the misunderstanding of an event that cannot occur after a pseudo-variable display, such as a special game state occurring after the variable display (for a performance). As a result, a player or a clerk at a game parlor may misunderstand the situation after the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 by operating the press operation device during a non-gaming state, and as a result, an error that should not have occurred may occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of unfavorable situations for players and game parlor staff, such as expectations for the occurrence of special gaming conditions.

In addition, as a variable display (fluctuating effect) that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special symbol starts winning, a push operation device (for example, the push operation device 1261 (see FIG. 23) may be displayed during a predetermined operable period. )) in which a variable display is provided that can display a predetermined suggestive effect by performing a push operation (hereinafter, the variable display is also referred to as a "variable display configured to allow operation input"). When a variable display (a variable display configured to allow operation input) is displayed during a non-gaming state by pressing the push operation device 1261, the variable display is displayed under the control of the sub-control board 940 during the operable period of the variable display. , the press operating device 1261 automatically moves up and down (i.e., without any player's operation) as if it were pressed by the player (i.e., the appearance of the fluctuating display is the same as if it had been pressed). It is also possible to have a configuration in which

Specifically, when a variable display configured to allow operation input is displayed during a non-gaming state (standby), the sub control board 940 controls the motor 863 (see FIG. 20) during the operable period of the variable display. The actuation mechanism 860 is operated under the control of the press operation device 1261, whereby the push operation device 1261 automatically moves downward from the neutral position, which is the push direction (operation direction) of the push operation device 1261, and then, It may be configured to move upward and return to the neutral position. As a result, when a variable display configured to allow operation input is displayed by pressing the push operation device 1261 during a non-gaming state, the player operates the push operation device during the operable period in the variable display. Such a situation can be simulated without the player actually operating the push operation device.

In such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to automatically move the press operation device 1261 up and down, and then display a predetermined suggestion effect that can be displayed by pressing the press operation device 1261. As a result, when a variable display configured to allow operation input is displayed by pressing the push operation device 1261 during a non-gaming state, the player can operate the push operation device during the operable period in the variable display. Then, the user can experience in a simulated manner what kind of suggestion effect will appear without actually operating the push-in operation device.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variable display configured to allow operation input is provided as a variable display that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol starts winning, the player may Since the fluctuating display (fluctuating display configured to allow operation input) can be experienced in a simulated manner, the fluctuating display allows a predetermined suggestive performance to appear through the player's participation such as operating the push-in operation device. Since it is possible to increase the player's interest in the gaming experience provided, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 can thereby be increased.

Further, the predetermined suggestion effect that can be displayed by pressing the pressing operation device 1261 may be executed based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 only when a special symbol starts winning. I can do it. For this reason, it is possible to add to the actual game that is executed based on the firing of the game ball the gameplay in which a suggestive effect appears in response to the pushing operation, which cannot be obtained with a simulated experience, and the non-gaming state. The player who visually recognizes the variable display inside can be prompted to start playing the game.

Furthermore, if the player performs a pressing operation on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 while a variable display is being displayed based on the player performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 1261 while in a non-gaming state, The control board 940 may be configured to end the non-gaming state. In such a case, after the non-gaming state ends, the sub control board 940 changes the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 to the content displayed before the start of the non-gaming state (for example, the final display by the decorative symbol 1621). ) is redisplayed.

When the non-gaming state ends, the variable display displayed during the non-gaming state will also end, so the player may change the variable display that was displayed by pressing the push operation device during the non-gaming state. can be easily terminated by pressing the press operation device during the variable display.

As a result, for example, while a variable display is being displayed based on a push operation on the push operation device in a non-gaming state, the player operates the push operation device when he sees the part he wanted to see in the variable display. By doing so, the variable display that is being displayed can be forcibly terminated, so that the game can be started quickly without having to wait until the display of parts that are not necessary for the player is finished.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25. The pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment described above, and more specifically, the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) and the When a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 1261 (see Fig. 23), the same effect occurs as when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts winning during the game. An example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 479 during a non-gaming state in a configuration in which a variable display according to the mode selected by the selection condition is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is shown.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the ninth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to eighth embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 25(A) is a screen transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the variable display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts winning. 25(B) is a screen in a variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state. It is a screen transition diagram showing an example of transition.

As shown in FIG. 25(A), when a starting winning of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, it corresponds to the unit game right related to the special symbol generated based on the starting winning. A reservation display 1622 indicating the reservation of the right is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 before the start of the unit game related to the special symbol based on the starting prize (that is, before the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the starting prize). be done. For example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), the pending display 1622 is stopped and displayed on the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 479, specifically, before the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start winning of the special symbol. It is displayed below the decorative pattern 1621. Note that display control of the hold display 1622 is executed by the sub control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after the start condition is satisfied until the start of the variable display (unit game), after the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends, It has a function of suggesting to the player the degree of possibility (expectation level) of transition to the special gaming state, and as an example of this function, a case will be explained using the hold display 1622.

The pending display 1622 indicates, depending on its shape, the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state set for the shape. For example, when the shape of the pending display 1622 is a star shape as shown in FIG. 25(A), the expectation level ( This indicates that the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state based on the starting prize is a predetermined value (for example, approximately 70%) set for the star shape.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a plurality of types of hold displays 1622 having different shapes are prepared to be displayed, and the expectation level (expectation level for transition to the special gaming state) varies depending on the shape of the hold display 1622. configured as shown.

For example, when the hold display 1622 is star-shaped, it has the highest expectation level (for example, approximately 70%) among all the shapes of the hold display 1622 that can be displayed, and when the hold display 1622 is in the shape of an equilateral triangle, indicates a lower expectation level (for example, about 50%) than when the pending display 1622 is in the shape of a star, and when the pending display 1622 is in the shape of an inverted triangle, it is lower than when the pending display 1622 is in the shape of an equilateral triangle. When the pending display 1622 has a circular shape (round shape), the expectation level is lower (for example, approximately 10%) than when the pending display 1622 has an inverted triangular shape. It is also possible to have a configuration that shows. The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation regarding the transition to the special gaming state based on the difference in the shape of the pending display 1622.

Note that the expectation level for transition to the special gaming state by the hold display 1622 does not necessarily have to be indicated by the shape of the hold display 1622, and may be indicated instead of or in addition to the shape of the hold display 1622. , the configuration may use elements other than the shape, such as the color of the hold display 1622 and the display mode (for example, blinking) of the hold display 1622.

The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each shape of the pending display 1622 is based on the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, Based on the winning probability in the second special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to in the case that you do not win in the special symbol lottery. It is determined.

Note that the configuration may include a pending display 1622 in a shape that indicates the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the special gaming state, and a pending display 1622 in a shape that does not indicate the degree of expectation (unrelated to the degree of expectation). In such a case, the sub-control board 940 selects by a predetermined lottery whether or not to suggest the level of expectation through the pending display 1622, and if it is selected not to indicate the level of expectation, the level of expectation is If it is selected to display a pending display 1622 of a shape that is not shown (for example, a star shape or an equilateral triangle shape) to suggest the degree of expectation, a shape (for example, a star shape, an equilateral triangle, etc.) according to the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the special gaming state is selected. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a circular (circular) pending display 1622 is displayed.

Further, the type of the hold display 1622 may have a function of changing the shape from a hold display 1622 having a shape with low expectations to a hold display having a shape with high expectations.

In FIG. 25(A), when the number of pending unit games related to the special symbol is zero, a starting winning of the special symbol occurs, and a pending display 1622 of 1 is displayed based on the occurrence of the starting winning. An example is shown below. One pending display 1622 is displayed for each right of a unit game related to a special symbol.

In addition, if a new start winning of the special symbol occurs when the number of holds of the unit game related to the special symbol is 1 or more, the shape of the pending display 1622 corresponding to the new starting win is changed to the above-mentioned expectation level. For example, the shape of the pending display 1622 corresponding to the new starting winning may be changed temporarily (for example, for a predetermined period such as 30 seconds, or when a starting winning of a special symbol occurs next). The configuration may be such that the display is displayed in a shape according to the expectation level during the period until the game is completed, the period until one unit game right related to the pending special symbol is exhausted, etc.

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the starting winning of the special symbol starts, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the pending display 1622 corresponding to the starting winning disappears and becomes invisible, and the decorative symbol 1621 Fluctuation display starts. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The probability may be smaller than 100, such as %, or may be 100%) and is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

Similar to the pending display 1622, the suggestion display 1623 functions as a display indicating the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state after the end of the unit game related to the special symbol (the degree of expectation for the transition to the special game state). That is, the suggestion display 1623 functions as a display that suggests the degree of possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 1621 that is being executed ends. Note that display control of the suggestion display 1623 is executed by the sub control board 940.

In the example shown in FIG. 25(A), the suggestion display 1623 is configured in the shape of a speech bubble that includes a comment such as "Very hot!". The suggestion display 1623 in the shape of a speech bubble indicates the expectation level (reliability level) of transitioning to the special game state after the fluctuating display during execution, depending on the content of the comment in the speech bubble (for example, "Very hot!" or "Chance!"). ) is shown. For example, if the content of the comment included in the speech bubble that constitutes the suggestion display 1623 is "Very hot!" as shown in FIG. This indicates that the value is a predetermined value (for example, approximately 80%) set for the content of the comment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestion displays 1623 with different comment contents are prepared to be displayed, and the expectation level (expectation for transition to a special gaming state) varies depending on the content of comments in the suggestion display 1623. degree). The player can relatively recognize the high degree of expectation regarding the transition to the special gaming state based on the difference in the contents of the comments in the suggestion display 1623.

The level of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state that is set for the content of the comment in the suggestion display 1623 is based on the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) conducted based on the starting winning of the special symbol corresponding to the suggestion display. , the second special symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery is not won. determined by

Note that the level of expectation (the level of expectation) of transitioning to the special game state indicated by the suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the suggestion display 1623. The level of expectation for transitioning to the special gaming state indicated by the pending display 1622 (that is, the pending display 1622 based on the starting winning of the same special symbol as the suggestion display 1623) may be the same, or may be different. good.

Furthermore, if the level of expectation (the level of expectation for transition to a special gaming state) indicated by the suggestion display 1623 is different from the level of expectation indicated by the pending display 1622 corresponding to the suggestion display 1623, the former The value may be larger than the latter, or the former may be smaller than the latter.

Note that the suggestion display 1623 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display of the decorative pattern 1621 (during the variable display of the special pattern) does not necessarily have to be in the shape of a speech bubble as shown in FIG. 25(A). , it may be a character, etc. that indicates the degree of expectation of transitioning to a special game state that differs depending on its type, it may be a combination of the character and the above-mentioned speech bubble, or it may be a display using a still image. It may also be a video in which character movements or text in speech bubbles are gradually displayed.

When a reach display occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern 1621, similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment described above, after the display of the reach display, a predetermined probability (for example, 100% such as 30% or 60%) is determined. A suggestion effect is executed in which a predetermined character appears with a smaller probability or 100%. The display control of the suggestion effect is executed by the sub control board 940. Note that the suggestive effect in which a predetermined character appears may be an effect that is executed (displayed) only in a specific reach display such as a so-called super reach display, or may be displayed before the reach display. Often, it may be displayed after the starting winning and before the unit game is started.

As with the first suggestion performance of the fifth embodiment, a plurality of types of performance patterns are prepared for the suggestion performance after the reach display, depending on the degree of expectation (reliability) for transition to the special gaming state. The degree of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state set for each production pattern is determined by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery, It is determined by the winning probability in the symbol lottery), the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when winning in the special symbol lottery, and the selection probability in the selection table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery is not won.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each performance pattern in the suggested performance after the reach display is configured to differ depending on the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state set for that performance pattern. Examples of patterns include a plurality of types of characters with different character types, clothes, belongings, movements, and the like.

For example, when the character CA11 with a sword in his right hand appears in the suggestion effect after the reach display, the expectation level for transitioning to the special game state will be set to a predetermined value set for the character CA11 (for example, , approximately 90%). The player can relatively recognize the level of expectation regarding the transition to the special game state based on the type of character that appears in the suggested presentation.

In the variable display of decorative symbols 1621, if a suggestive effect is executed after the reach display is displayed, after the end of the suggestive effect, it corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery conducted based on the starting prize of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display. The final display of the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. For example, if the lottery result of a special symbol lottery conducted based on the starting winning of the special symbol corresponding to the reach display is a jackpot, the decorative symbol 1621 may be "777" as shown in FIG. 25(A). Confirmation will be displayed.

When a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts winning during the game, the variable display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponding to the variable pattern selected based on the values of various variable type counters, etc. The variable display time (variation time) corresponding to the selected variation pattern is displayed from the beginning to the end (confirmed display). In other words, when a special symbol starts winning during a game, the period (time) from the start to the end of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol 1621 corresponds to the fluctuating pattern of the fluctuating display (i.e., the selected fluctuating pattern). It is said to be a variable time.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if a push operation is performed on the push operation device such as the push operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during the non-gaming state (standby), the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment Similarly, a variable display selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starts winning during a game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a pseudo variable display for demonstration.

Furthermore, the conditions for selecting a variable display when a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, and the selection conditions for a shift display when a special symbol starts winning during a game. are not necessarily the same or nearly the same, and the selection conditions for the variable display may differ depending on whether a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-gaming state or when a special symbol starts winning during a game. It may have a different configuration.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state, a variation pattern is selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starts winning during a game. The variable display of the decorative pattern 1621 (pseudo variable display for demonstration) corresponding to The period (time) is shorter than the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 25(B), if a push operation is performed on the push operation device during the non-gaming state, after the hold display 1622 is displayed, a pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration using decorative patterns 1621 is displayed. , and during the period from the start of the fluctuating display to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display, the fluctuating display is applied to the period corresponding to the fluctuating display based on the start winning of the special symbol (i.e., the start of the special symbol By displaying the video at a higher speed (in other words, by increasing the video playback speed) than the period from the start of the fluctuating display based on winning until the suggestive effect appears after the reach display, a pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration purposes can be created. The time from start to end can be made shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display.

In addition, the time from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state (i.e., the pseudo variable display for demonstration) until the suggestion effect appears after the reach display is calculated based on the special symbol. As a specific example of making the period shorter than the corresponding period in the variable display based on the starting winning, for example, if a push operation is performed on the push operation device during the non-gaming state, the variable display based on the push operation (i.e. The content displayed during the period from the start of the pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration purposes until the suggestive effect appears after the reach display is changed from the start of the fluctuating display based on the start winning of the special symbol to the time after the reach display. The configuration may be such that the moving image is displayed at a higher speed than the variable display during the period until the suggestion effect appears (that is, the video playback speed is faster than when the special symbol starts winning).

Alternatively, for example, if a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, among the variable displays based on the push operation, the suggested effect after the reach display is displayed from the start of the shift display. A configuration may be adopted in which the content that should be displayed until the content appears is omitted (that is, the suggestive effect after the reach display is displayed after the start of the variable display).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when displaying a suggestive effect after the reach display is displayed in a pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration (that is, a fluctuating display based on a pressing operation on a pressing operation device during a non-gaming state). In addition, two or more suggestive performances that have different expectations for transition to the special gaming state depending on the display content (i.e., a variable display that is executed separately depending on two starting wins as a variable display based on a starting prize) It is configured such that two or more suggestive effects that can be displayed are simultaneously displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. Note that the control of the display is executed by the sub control board 940.

For example, if multiple types of characters with different expectations regarding transition to a special game state are prepared as characters that can appear during a suggestion effect, at least some of these multiple types of characters may It is configured such that two or more suggested effects that appear are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 at the same time.

Specifically, for example, if a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected due to a pressing operation on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state, a suggestion after the reach is displayed in the fluctuation display corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern. When four types of characters CA11 to CA14 are prepared as characters that can appear in the performance, each with different expectations for transition to the special game state, as shown in FIG. 25(B), these four types of characters Suggestive performances including each of CA11 to CA14 are displayed in respective display areas 479D to 479G, which are obtained by dividing the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 into approximately four vertically and horizontally.

As a result, two or more suggestive performances that have different expectations for the transition to the special game state depending on the type of character that appears, each constitute a variable display such as a variable display based on the starting prize of the special symbol. The images (frame images) are displayed simultaneously in each of the display areas 479D to 479G in a reduced size compared to the case where the images (frame images) are displayed on the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479.

Note that the suggestion effects (post-reach suggestion effects) that can appear in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern and that have different expectations for the transition to the special gaming state are not necessarily limited to the four types of characters mentioned above. It is not necessary that there are four types corresponding to , and there may be three or less types, or five or more types.

In addition, the number of suggestive performances (post-reach suggestive performances) that can appear in the variation display corresponding to the selected variation pattern and have different expectations for transition to the special gaming state is displayed in the decorative pattern display device 479. If the number of display areas divided to display each subsequent suggestion effect is larger than the number of display areas (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. 25(B)), among the suggestion effects that can appear, It may also be configured to select and display only the number that can be displayed in the displayed display area.

In addition, the number of display areas divided to display each suggestive effect after reach in the decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, and may be three or less, or five or more. It's okay. In addition, the number of display areas to be divided in order to display each suggestive effect after reach in the decorative pattern display device 479 is determined according to the selected variation pattern (that is, the number of display areas that are divided into The configuration may be variable (according to the number of possible post-reach suggestion performances).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state, the screen shown in FIG. 25(B) is displayed before starting the pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration. As shown, a hold display 1622 is displayed as a pseudo hold display corresponding to the pseudo fluctuation display. More specifically, the pending display 1622 has two or more shapes, which is at least a part of the pending display 1622 that has a plurality of shapes that differ depending on the level of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state (the level of expectation). (Two or more types of pending display 1622) are configured to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 at the same time. Note that the control of the display is executed by the sub control board 940.

For example, four types of shapes (for example, a star shape, an equilateral triangle shape, an inverted triangle shape, and a circular shape) are prepared as the shape of the hold display 1622 depending on the level of expectation for transition to the special gaming state. 25(B), these four types of pending displays 1622 are displayed by dividing the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, respectively, before starting the pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration. They are simultaneously displayed in areas 479D to 479G.

As a result, a display image including two or more types of pending displays 1622 with different expectations for transition to a special gaming state depending on their shapes, respectively, is changed to a variable display based on a starting prize of a different symbol. The images (frame images) constituting the decorative pattern display device 479 are displayed simultaneously in each of the display areas 479D to 479G in a reduced size compared to the case where they are displayed on the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479.

Note that the number of different-shaped hold displays 1622 is equal to the number of display areas divided to display hold displays 1622 of each shape in the decorative pattern display device 479 (for example, four in the example shown in FIG. ), the configuration may be such that only the number of hold displays 1622 of different shapes that can be displayed in the divided display area is selected and displayed.

Further, the number of display areas to be divided in order to display different shapes of reservation displays 1622 in the decorative pattern display device 479 does not necessarily have to be four as described above, and may be three or less, or five or more. It's okay. In addition, the number of display areas to be divided in order to display different shapes of the reserved display 1622 in the decorative pattern display device 479 and the number of display areas to be divided to display each character that can appear in the suggestion effect are as follows: They do not necessarily have to be the same, and the former number and the latter number may be different.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during the non-gaming state, a variable display (demonstration) based on the push operation is shown as shown in FIG. 25(B). A pseudo fixed display for demonstration by the decorative pattern 1621 displayed after the completion of the pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration (more specifically, a pattern corresponding to the stop symbol determined based on the pseudo jackpot symbol random number for demonstration) The final display of the decorative pattern 1621 consisting of a combination of (see FIG. 25A)) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in a smaller size than the final display of the decorative pattern 1621 (see FIG. 25A) that is displayed after the end of the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol. Is displayed. Display control of the size of the finalized display is executed by the sub control board 940.

Furthermore, if a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, as shown in FIG. A display 1624 containing information that can be recalled is displayed. Display control of display 1624 is performed by sub-control board 940.

The player who visually recognized the display 1624 can confirm the final display of the decorative pattern 1621 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 based on the content of the display 1624 (that is, the information that makes it possible to recall that the player is in a non-gaming state). , it can be recognized that this is not a final display that is displayed after the end of the variable display based on the start winning of the special symbol, but a pseudo-final display for demonstration purposes.

In the example shown in FIG. 25(B), the display 1624 is configured to include the character string "Demonstration in progress" as information that can be recalled that the non-gaming state is in progress. It may be a character string different from "demonstration in progress" as long as it is a character string that can be remembered as being "demonstrating". Furthermore, the information included in the display 1624 that can remind you that you are in a non-gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-mentioned character string such as "Demonstration in progress", but can remind you that you are in a non-gaming state. It may be a picture or a design (for example, a picture such as a cross mark).

In addition, if a push operation is performed on the push operation device during the non-gaming state, after the fluctuating display based on the push operation (pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration) is completed, a pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration using the decorative pattern 1621 is displayed. Instead of the final confirmation display, a pseudo confirmation display for demonstration purposes may be performed using an alternative display 1625 that does not include the decorative pattern 1621, as shown in FIG. 25(B). Note that display control of the alternative display 1625 is executed by the sub control board 940.

The alternative display 1625 is configured to include a display in place of a jackpot symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred, and a display in place of a losing symbol that suggests a loss.

As the alternative display 1625 that is a substitute for the jackpot symbol that suggests that a jackpot has occurred, for example, a character string such as "Atari?" or "Lucky" that can remind you of the occurrence of a jackpot, or a string that can remind you of the occurrence of a jackpot Examples include a pattern or an image (for example, a character doing a fist pump as shown in FIG. 25(B)).

On the other hand, as an alternative display 1625 for a losing pattern that suggests a loss, for example, a character string such as "Unfortunate" that can remind you of the occurrence of a loss, or a pattern or image that can remind you of the occurrence of a loss. (For example, a character bowing its head, etc.).

Next, the functions and effects of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, by performing a push operation on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, a hold display that can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state by its shape. 1622, and the variable display including the suggestive effect after the reach display can be displayed as a pseudo variable display for demonstration purposes, so even if the starting winning of the special symbol does not occur (the starting winning of the special symbol does not occur) (even if there is no game), the player can visually confirm what kind of display is possible to suggest the level of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, such as the suggestive effect after reach and the pending display 1622. .

Therefore, it is possible to display a variable display that includes a display that can suggest the above-mentioned expectation level, such as a suggestive display after reach, as a variable display based on a starting winning of a special symbol, or when a starting winning of a special symbol occurs. In a configuration in which the degree of expectation can be suggested by the pending display 1622 for the starting winning, an event that can be expected after the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol (for example, the degree of ease of transition to the special gaming state) is indicated. It is possible to improve the gameplay that can be estimated from the contents of the variable display, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. The time from the start of the pseudo fluctuating display to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display is calculated from the start of the variable display to the appearance of the suggestive effect after the reach display in the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol. By displaying the pseudo fluctuation display for the demonstration in a shorter time than the time of the fluctuation display, it is possible to display the pseudo fluctuation display for the demonstration in a time shorter than the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. can.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a variable pattern corresponding to a variable display including a display (effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state, such as a suggestive effect after reach, is prepared as a selectable variable pattern. By operating the pressing operation device (pushing operation) during a non-gaming state, the player can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state, which is included in the fluctuation display corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern. A display (for example, a suggestive effect after a reach display) can be efficiently viewed in a time shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern (i.e., the variable time for the variable display including the display). .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. Before the start of the display, a pending display 1622 whose shape can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is displayed. Therefore, by pressing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state, the player can change the display image including the hold display 1622 of a predetermined shape before (at the start of) the pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration. Can be visually recognized. As mentioned above, the pseudo fluctuating display for the demo is configured to be shorter than the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display based on the starting winning of the special symbol, so the special game state is set before the pseudo fluctuating display for the demo starts. By displaying a display image that includes a display that can suggest the degree of expectation regarding the transition to (for example, the pending display 1622), the display that can suggest the degree of expectation can also be efficiently made visible to the player. becomes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when displaying a suggestive effect after the reach display is displayed in a variable display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) based on a pressing operation on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state, The decorative pattern display device 479 is configured to simultaneously display two or more suggestive effects having different expectations for transition to the special game state depending on the display contents.

As a result, players can increase their expectations for the transition to a special gaming state that can appear in the variable display corresponding to the same pattern (for example, super reach) by pressing the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state. Two or more suggestible displays (for example, a suggestive effect after a reach display) can be visually recognized at the same time. Therefore, during a non-gaming state, a player can efficiently recognize the difference between two or more displays that can suggest the level of expectation for transition to a special gaming state that can appear in variable displays corresponding to the same pattern. Therefore, during the game, it becomes possible to play the game while being aware of the difference in the degree of expectation corresponding to the difference in the display that can suggest the degree of expectation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state, a special It is configured such that two or more types of pending display 1622 having different expectations regarding the transition to the gaming state are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 at the same time.

Thereby, the player can view the two or more types of pending display 1622 at the same time by pressing the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state. Therefore, during the non-gaming state, it is possible to efficiently recognize the difference in the shape of the pending display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the pseudo fluctuating display for demonstration, so during the game, the difference in the shape of the special symbol It becomes possible to play the game while being aware of the difference in the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state according to the difference in the shape of the pending display 1622 included in the display image before the start of the variable display based on the starting winning.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, within the period from the start to the end of the variable display (pseudo variable display for demonstration) based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state (that is, the fluctuation During execution of the display) or before the start of the variable display (at the start), it suggests the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state, such as a display image including a suggestive effect after reach or a display image including a hold display 1622. The possible display is reduced to a smaller size than in the case where the image (frame image) forming the variable display is displayed over the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, such as a variable display based on the start winning of a special symbol. displayed in the correct size.

As a result, the level of expectation for the transition to the special gaming state, such as the display image of the suggestive effect after reach and the display image including the pending display 1622, which are displayed based on the push operation on the push operation device during the non-gaming state. The display that can suggest the above is a display that has no possibility of a special gaming state occurring after the display (more specifically, after the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state). The player can be appropriately recognized based on the display size.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-gaming state, the variable display based on the push operation (pseudo variable display for demonstration) is terminated. A pseudo final display for demonstration using the decorative pattern 1621 that will be displayed later is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in a smaller size than the final display using the decorative pattern 1621 that will be displayed after the end of the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol. be done.

Therefore, in this respect as well, there is a possibility that a special gaming state will occur after a variable display based on a pressing operation on the pressing operation device during a non-gaming state (more specifically, after a pseudo final display for demonstration purposes is displayed). The player can suitably be made aware of the fact that there is no confirmation based on the display size of the pseudo-decision display for demonstration.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment, the display modes of the variable display and fixed display that are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts winning occurs. We are making some improvements.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment described above will be given the same reference numerals and the description will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the tenth embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to ninth embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the ninth embodiment.

FIG. 26 (FIGS. 26(A) and 26(B)) is a screen diagram showing an example of a variable display and a fixed display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a gaming machine image 1701 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 as shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to display a variable display that appears as if it were displayed on the display screen of a pachinko machine (hereinafter, the variable display will also be referred to as a "variable display using gaming machine images").

A variable display using a gaming machine image is executed at a predetermined selection probability set for the variable display when a variable pattern corresponding to the variable display is selected when a special symbol starts winning. (display) is selected. The selection probability may be a value greater than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%. Note that the variable display using gaming machine images is configured to be selected (displayed, executed) with a predetermined selection probability only when the variable pattern is accompanied by a specific reach display (for example, super reach). It may be.

The variable display using gaming machine images includes a gaming machine image 1701 and a player image 1702, as shown in FIG. Note that display control of the variable display using gaming machine images including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 is performed by the sub control board 940.

The gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 played by a player). The gaming machine image 1701 is preferably displayed in a reduced form of an image of a pachinko machine having the same shape as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 etc. In the example shown in FIG. It is shown in Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 26, a gaming machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to a pachinko machine viewed from the diagonally forward left side. Note that the pachinko machine shown by the gaming machine image 1701 does not necessarily have to be a pachinko machine seen diagonally from the front side, but may be a pachinko machine seen from the front.

The variable display using the gaming machine image is displayed in the gaming machine image 1701 on the display screen of the display device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26, if the game machine image 1701 is an image corresponding to a pachinko machine seen from the diagonally front side (for example, from the left diagonally front side), the variable display using the game machine image The variable display is diagonally displayed in a substantially parallelogram area 1701A corresponding to a substantially rectangular display screen on a display device (a display device corresponding to the decorative pattern display device 479) of the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701 in the machine image 1701. Displayed as if viewed from the front.

Note that the variable display that can be displayed (can appear) for the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display using the gaming machine image may be a configuration in which only the variable display using the gaming machine image is used. The structure may include not only a variable display using images but also another variable display that does not display the gaming machine image 1701 (for example, the variable display shown in FIG. 25(A)). In the following, other variable displays that do not display the gaming machine image 1701 are also simply referred to as "other variable displays."

The player image 1702 is an image corresponding to a player located in front of the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701. Note that the player image 1702 (image corresponding to the player) may be an image of a drawn character representing the player, as shown in FIG. The image may be a photographed image of a person photographed by a camera or the like included in the pachinko machine 100.

When a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts winning, and execution of a variable display using a gaming machine image is selected, a decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 26(A). In the area 1701A of the gaming machine image 1701 displayed on the symbol display device 479 (the area corresponding to the display screen of the display device of the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701), a variable display using the gaming machine image is started. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 26(A), a state in which the decorative pattern 1621 is changing is illustrated.

In the variable display using gaming machine images, after the variable display starts, a fixed display is displayed after a variable display time (fluctuating time) for a variable pattern corresponding to the variable display has elapsed. Even if the confirmed display is configured to display a combination of decorative symbols 1621 corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery), the lottery results are displayed by the alternative display 1625. The configuration may be such that In the example shown in FIG. 26(B), an alternative display 1625 (specifically, an alternative display 1625 of a character doing a fist pump) that is a substitute for the jackpot symbol indicating that a jackpot has occurred is set as the confirmed display. The displayed state is illustrated.

The variable displays that can be displayed for the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display using gaming machine images are variable displays using gaming machine images, and other variable displays (that is, other variations that do not display the gaming machine image 1701). display), the gaming machine can reuse video data corresponding to other variable displays without preparing dedicated video data (image data) corresponding to variable displays using gaming machine images. It may also be configured to display a variable display using images. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which dedicated video data corresponding to variable display using gaming machine images is prepared.

Specifically, the image of each frame (unit image) constituting the video data corresponding to other variable display is deformed or reduced so that the image matches the shape of the area 1701A, which is a substantially parallelogram. After performing the processing, a series of moving images (images) made up of the processed images are sequentially displayed in the area 1701A. As a result, it is possible to display a variable display using gaming machine images in the area 1701A without preparing dedicated video data corresponding to the variable display using gaming machine images. The sub-control board controls the processing (transformation, reduction, etc.) of the image of each frame mentioned above and the display control of the video composed of the processed images (that is, the variable display using the gaming machine image). 940.

When displaying a variable display using gaming machine images by diverting video data corresponding to another variable display, the content of the variable display using gaming machine images will be changed from that of the other variable display corresponding to the original video data. The contents are the same as above, but variable displays using gaming machine images (including fixed displays) are processed such as deforming or reducing the images of frames that make up the video data corresponding to other variable displays. Since it is composed of images, it is a variable display with a display mode different from other variable displays.

Therefore, by displaying a variable display using gaming machine images by reusing video data corresponding to other variable displays, the amount of storage of video data (image data) can be suppressed, and the mode of the variable display (display mode ) variations can be increased. In addition, it is possible to easily reduce the need to develop multiple types of variable displays, such as variable displays using gaming machine images and other variable displays, and suggestive effects that appear in each of these multiple types of variable displays. Development costs can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when performing a final display in a variable display using gaming machine images, the player image 1702 shows the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final display. The structure is suggested by the appearance of

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win, when performing the confirmation display corresponding to the lottery result, as shown in FIG. A player image 1702 corresponding to the player (who is smiling, doing a fist pump, etc.) is displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (not a jackpot win), when the confirmation display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed, a state that can remind you of the occurrence of a loss (for example, a player with his or her head down) is displayed. A player image 1702 corresponding to the player (such as player) is displayed.

In addition to the configuration in which, when performing a confirmed display in a variable display using gaming machine images, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the confirmed display is suggested by the appearance of the player shown by the player image 1702, Alternatively, in place of this configuration, after the reach display in a variable display using gaming machine images, the degree of possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state after the end of the variable display (the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state), The configuration may be suggested based on the appearance of the player shown by the player image 1702. For example, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the special gaming state may be changed depending on the facial expressions of the players shown in the player images 1702.

Further, for example, a configuration is configured in which the level of expectation (the level of expectation for transition to a special gaming state) in the suggestive performance displayed on the pachinko machine shown in the gaming machine image 1701 is varied depending on the state of the player shown in the player image 1702. It may be. For example, a player image 1702 may be displayed that corresponds to a player who makes a larger fist pump (height of raising his hand is higher) as the level of expectation in the suggestive effect is higher. A configuration may be adopted in which a player image 1702 corresponding to a player whose head is lowered by a larger amount is displayed as the amount is lower. As a result, it is possible to clearly suggest a highly anticipated performance that will lead to a transition to a special gaming state using the player image 1702.

In addition, in a variable display in which operations can be inputted using various input operation devices 260 including a press operation device such as the press operation device 1261, depending on the player's movements and state shown by the player image 1702, the variable display is displayed. The configuration may be such that it suggests the method of operating the input operating device 260, the timing of the operation, and the results of the operation (for example, the appearance of a character or a change in display content).

Further, the variable display including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 is a part of the variable display executed in the non-gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment (for example, displaying stopped symbols). It may be used to display a part (including the final part of the fluctuating display) or the entire fluctuating display, so that the player or player knows that the fluctuating display is different from the case where a special symbol starts winning. It can be clearly shown to the staff at the game parlor.

Further, the variable display including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 may be displayed together with the suggestive effect when the suggestive effect is displayed in the customer waiting effect in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. In this case, effects that are advantageous to the player can be clearly suggested by the player's actions in the player image 1702.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 controls the game machine image 1701, which is an image corresponding to the pachinko machine, and the game machine image 1701 when a special symbol starts winning. The player image 1702, which is an image corresponding to the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine indicated by , is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and the pachinko machine indicated by the gaming machine image 1701 in the gaming machine image 1701 is equipped. In the area corresponding to the display screen of the display device, the contents of other variable displays that can be displayed when a special symbol starting winning occurs are displayed.

Therefore, a player playing a game on the pachinko machine 100 can see the actions and state of the player (player image 1702) playing a game on the pachinko machine (gaming machine image 1701) displayed in the decorative pattern display device 479. , the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state regarding the current variable display displayed based on the start winning of the special symbol, the player's emotions according to the degree of expectation indicated by the suggestive effect, and the operation method for the pachinko machine. It is possible to convey various information to the player, such as:

In the tenth embodiment described above, when a special symbol starts winning, a variable display using a gaming machine image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, during a non-gaming state ( When a press operation device such as the press operation device 261 is pressed during (standby) and execution of a variable display using a gaming machine image is selected, the game is started in the same way as when a special symbol starts winning. A configuration may also be adopted in which a variable display using a machine image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

By displaying a variable display using a gaming machine image (a variable display including a gaming machine image 1701 and a player image 1702) during a non-gaming state, a player who visually recognizes the variable display can display the decorative symbol display device 479. Changes in behavior and feelings toward the game when playing the game on the pachinko machine 100 through the actions and state of the player (player image 1702) playing the game on the pachinko machine (game machine image 1701) displayed in the . In addition to being able to experience the pachinko machine, it is also possible to learn how to operate the pachinko machine before playing.

In addition, when displaying the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702 on the decorative pattern display device 479, the sub-control board 940 displays at least one of the gaming machine image 1701 or the player image 1702 as a result of a special symbol lottery. The configuration may be such that control is performed to display at least a portion of the winning jackpot differently depending on whether or not the winning jackpot is a jackpot. According to this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player by a difference in at least a portion of at least one of the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 displays the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in a predetermined manner (for example, a combination of three symbols) when a special symbol starts winning. A first lottery result display control to perform the first lottery result display control, and a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, deformation or reduction of the combination of three symbols corresponding to the lottery result including the gaming machine image 1701 and the player image 1702) Displaying the lottery results of the special symbol lottery in a display mode that has undergone processing such as A second lottery result display control that displays an alternative display 1625) of a posed character is configured to be executable.

Therefore, the lottery results displayed by the second lottery result display control may have a different display format or contents from the lottery results displayed by the first lottery result display control, so that the lottery results may be different from the lottery results displayed by the first lottery result display control. It is possible to increase variations in display, and it is also possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results by deforming, reducing, etc., or by using images with different contents. Thereby, when the lottery results are displayed, it is possible to provide a gameplay experience in which the lottery results are closely watched.

In particular, as exemplified in this embodiment, when the game machine image 1701 corresponding to the pachinko machine seen from the diagonally front side is used, the lottery results of the special symbol lottery are also displayed as seen from the diagonally front side. Therefore, the display of the lottery results can be suitably made difficult to understand.

In addition, when a press operation device such as the press operation device 261 is pressed during a non-gaming state (standby) and execution of a variable display using a gaming machine image is selected, the special symbol will start winning. If the configuration is such that a variable display using a gaming machine image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in the same way as in the case where the pachinko machine 100 displays a lottery result, the pachinko machine 100 performs a game in which the lottery result is watched closely when the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to know in advance, such as before playing the game, that the game is equipped with the characteristics of the player.

Note that in the tenth embodiment, all of the contents of other variable displays are displayed in a variable display using gaming machine images, but all of the contents of other variable displays are displayed using gaming machine images. In addition to being displayed in a variable display using a gaming machine image, only a part of the content of another variable display (for example, only a suggestion effect) may be displayed in a variable display using gaming machine images.

In addition, when a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 is pressed during a non-gaming state (standby), a variable display is executed by lottery result display control using the gaming machine image and player image, and a special When a starting winning of a symbol occurs, the lottery result may be displayed by normal lottery result display control using a combination of three symbols.

In addition, when displaying the gaming machine image and the player image together with the variable display image, the portion where the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed (for example, the portion where the number symbol is displayed) is It may be displayed in the same place and in the same manner (appearance) as when the gaming machine image is not displayed, without changing the direction of the symbol and deforming it. Control may be performed by the sub-control board 940 so that the image is displayed in an oblique direction according to the orientation of the image.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment, a variable display configured to allow operation input (i.e., In a configuration in which a variable display is provided in which a predetermined effect can be displayed by performing a push operation on the push operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period, the player can suitably operate the push operation device. We are making some improvements.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the tenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the eleventh embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to tenth embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the tenth embodiment.

FIG. 27 (FIGS. 27(A) and 27(B)) shows what is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment during the operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input. FIG. 3 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents.

In addition, in FIG. 27(A), for reference, the right hand 1712C is illustrated by a chain line as the hand touching the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1712A with the operating surface located at the neutral position.

Here, the "operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A" is a surface corresponding to the surface that the player touches when operating the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1712A. Therefore, in the press operation device 1712A, which is an image corresponding to the press operation device 1261 that can perform a downward press operation, the upper surface (upper end surface) of the press operation device 1712A becomes the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a predetermined effect appears by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 during an operable period in a variable display configured to allow operation input. (for example, a performance in which a predetermined change occurs in response to the pressing operation); a performance image 1712 corresponding to a performance related to the movement of the pressing operation device 1261; and information regarding the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261. Display information 1713 corresponding to (for example, character information based on character strings such as “Continuous Push!” and “PUSH!”) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

The effect image 1711 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) that includes images corresponding to a character 1711A, a balloon 1711B, and a foot pump 1711C for feeding air into the balloon 1711B. The effect image 1711 is a moving image corresponding to an effect in which the character 1711A steps on the foot pump 1711C in response to a push operation on the push operation device performed during the operable period, thereby inflating the balloon 1711B. Note that the moving image data corresponding to the effect image 1711 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940, and the display control of the effect image 1711 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the performance using the performance image 1711 is configured as a suggestive performance that indicates the degree of expectation for the subsequent transition to the special game state based on the size of the balloon 1711B that gradually inflates until it bursts. be done. For example, the larger the size of the balloon 1711B when it bursts, the higher the expectation for transition to the special game state.

The effect image 1712 includes images (in more detail , moving images).

More specifically, the effect image 1712 changes from the state in which the left hand 1712B touches the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A where the operation surface is located at the neutral position (see FIG. 27(A)) to the movement of the left hand 1712B (downward side). After pushing the push operation device 1712A downward by the push operation (pushing operation) (see FIG. 27(B)), the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A moves upward (raises) until it reaches the neutral position. This is a moving image corresponding to a performance in which a reciprocating motion is performed at least once (repeated multiple times).

If the effect image 1712 is an image corresponding to the case where the left hand 1712B pushes down the pressing operation device 1712A with the operation surface located at the neutral position, as shown in FIG. 27(A), "Continuous press! " and "(PUSH!)" character strings are displayed as display information 1713, and the effect image 1712 is in a state where the push operation device 1712A is pushed downward, as shown in FIG. 27(B). If the image is a corresponding image, character information consisting of the character strings "Press repeatedly!" and "(Once again)" is displayed as display information 1713.

As a result, when the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A is located at the neutral position, the player can refer to the character information "(PUSH!)" in the display information 1713 to control the operation surface of the push operation device 1712A. If the player is able to recognize that it is necessary to press the button, and then the pressing operation device 1712A is pushed downward, the player refers to the character information "(again)" in the display information 1713. This allows the user to recognize that it is necessary to repeatedly press the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A.

Therefore, the player can recognize that it is necessary to repeatedly perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1712A in response to the character information "Continuous press!" displayed as the display information 1713.

Note that when the reaction force to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is outputted by the electric power of the motor 863 or the like, the degree of change in the operational feeling in the pressing operation is determined by the player's ability to control the button operation section 850 of the pressing operation device 1261. By pressing the button operation section 850 while touching it, rather than pressing the button operation section 850, the player can control the difference in operation feel by the sub-control board 940. This is preferable because it can be easily sensed. For this reason, it is preferable to display the operation method for the pressing operation device 1261 on the screen using the display information 1713, etc., so that the player can experience the effect intended by the developer in an easy-to-understand manner. can.

In this way, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed to display the performance image 1712 in which the left hand 1712B touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A moves downward and performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1712A. Since the device 479 is controlled to display, it is possible to suggest to the player how to operate the press operation device 1261 corresponding to the press operation device 1712A, depending on the content of the displayed effect image 1712.

In addition, in the effect image 1712, the left hand 1712B does not necessarily have to touch (contact) the operation surface of the press operation device 1712A, but may be close to the operation surface of the press operation device 1712A so that the operation surface can be operated. It may also be a configuration where

Further, when the reaction force to the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is configured to be changeable, depending on the magnitude of the reaction force, only the left hand 1712B is touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. It may be configured to switch between the effect image 1712 corresponding to the case and the effect image 1712 corresponding to the case where both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C (dotted chain line) are touching the operation surface of the press operation device 1712A. .

For example, in a configuration in which the reaction force is increased as the expectation level for transition to the special gaming state is higher, the larger the reaction force (that is, the higher the expectation level), the more the user touches the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. By increasing the number of hands (that is, increasing the number of hands from only the left hand 1712B to both the left hand 1712B and the right hand 1712C), a special game state is entered according to the number of hands touching the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1712A. It is possible to clearly indicate the level of expectation regarding the transition of

Note that the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above may be applied when the press operation device 261 is used as the press operation device instead of the press operation device 1261.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, a variable display configured to allow operation input (i.e., Similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment described above, in a configuration in which a variable display that can display a predetermined effect by performing a push operation on the push operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period, The game is designed to allow players to conveniently operate the press operation device.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the twelfth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to eleventh embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the eleventh embodiment.

28 (FIGS. 28(A) and 28(B)) are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment during the operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input. FIG. 3 is a screen diagram showing an example of display contents.

In addition, in FIG. 28(A), for reference, the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A drawn as an image in the effect image 1715 is compared to the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A that is actually provided in the pachinko machine 100. The position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 corresponding to the operation device 1715A is illustrated by a dashed line XA.

Here, the "operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A" is a surface corresponding to the surface that the player touches when operating the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the pressing operation device 1715A. Therefore, in the press operation device 1715A, which is an image corresponding to the press operation device 1261 that can perform a downward press operation, the upper surface (upper end surface) of the press operation device 1715A becomes the operation surface.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Display information 1713 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and a performance image 1715 corresponding to the performance related to the movement of the pressing operation device 1261 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

The effect image 1715 is an image (more specifically, a moving image) that includes an image corresponding to the press operation device 1715A corresponding to the press operation device 1261. More specifically, the effect image 1715 shows a state in which the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A is located at the neutral position (see FIG. 28(A)), after the press operation device 1715A has moved downward (see FIG. 28(B)). ) is a moving image corresponding to a performance in which a series of reciprocating movements of moving (rising) upward until the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1715A reaches the neutral position are performed at least once (repeated multiple times). .

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1715A drawn as an image in the performance image 1715 is moved from the position Q1 of the operating surface when it is located at the neutral position to the reference position Q0 (for example, the pressing operation The distance LA to the opening R (the position of at least a part of the periphery of the opening corresponding to the opening R (see FIG. 24) that accommodates the device 1261) is the pressing operating device actually provided in the pachinko machine 100 and the pressing operating device 1715A. The distance LB is longer than the distance LB from the position Q2 of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 corresponding to the reference position Q0 when the operating surface is located at the neutral position. Note that the ratio of the distance LA to the distance LB is, for example, preferably approximately 1.2 times or more, preferably approximately 1.5 times or more, and preferably approximately twice or more.

In a configuration in which the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at a predetermined neutral position, the image corresponding to the pressing operating device 1715A whose operating surface is at the neutral position Q1 corresponding to the neutral position (position Q2) is the sub-image. The image is prepared in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM of the control board 940, and the sub-control board 940 executes display control of the effect image 1715 using the image.

In addition, in a configuration in which the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can be positioned in multiple types of neutral positions, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can be placed in multiple types of press operation devices 1715A whose neutral positions are different positions Q1 according to each neutral position (position Q2). A configuration may also be adopted in which corresponding images are prepared. In this configuration, the sub-control board 940 determines the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 when the operation surface is located at the neutral position based on the detection result by the encoder included in the actuation mechanism 860 of the push operation device 1261. It may be configured to detect this and control the display of the effect image 1715 using the image of the pressing operation device 1715A corresponding to the detected position.

Alternatively, when the neutral position changes, the sub-control board 940 detects the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at the neutral position at any time, and the position corresponding to the detected position becomes the neutral position of the operation surface. The configuration may be such that the pressing operation device 1715A is drawn in the effect image 1715.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed when the press operation device 1715A (more specifically, the operation surface of the press operation device 1715A) reciprocates in the vertical direction in the production image 1715 is It is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed when the actual pressing operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261) corresponding to 1715A reciprocates in the vertical direction. Note that the ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operating device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operating device 1261 is, for example, preferably approximately 1.5 or more, preferably approximately 2 or more, and preferably approximately 3 or more. suitable.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reciprocating speed when the pressing operation device 1261 moves in the vertical direction under the control of the sub-control board 940 and the ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 A ratio larger than approximately 1 is set in advance, and the sub-control board 940 allows the push operation device 1715A to move in the vertical direction at a reciprocating speed according to a predefined reciprocating speed of the push operation device 1261 and the ratio. Display control is performed on the effect image 1715 so that the effect image 1715 moves back and forth.

Alternatively, a ratio of the reciprocating speed of the pressing operating device 1715A to the reciprocating speed of the pressing operating device 1261, which is larger than approximately 1, is predefined, and the control board 940 is configured to control the reciprocating speed of the pressing operating device 1261 when the pressing operation is performed. In this case, the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261 is detected based on the detection result by the encoder included in the actuation mechanism 860 of the pressing operation device 1261, and in the effect image 1715, the pressing operation device 1715A detects the reciprocating speed of the pressing operation device 1261. The display control for the effect image 1715 may be performed so that the effect image 1715 reciprocates in the vertical direction at a reciprocating speed according to the ratio defined in advance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the performance image 1715, a part of the side surface of the pressing operation device 1715A (for example, a part of the side surface of the pressing operation device 1715A that is visible to the player when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is located at the neutral position) Expectation level information 1715B that can suggest the level of expectation regarding the transition to the special gaming state is displayed at a predetermined probability on the lower end side of the area.

The expectation level information 1715B may be, for example, information including a character string that can suggest the level of expectation for transition to the special game state (for example, "hot!" or "maybe hot!?") It may be an image that can suggest the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the state (for example, an image of a character with various facial expressions depending on the degree of expectation). A plurality of types of expectation level information 1715B are prepared depending on the level of expectation level suggested. In the example shown in FIG. 28(A), the expectation level information 1715B is composed of a character string "Hot!" that can suggest that the level of expectation for transition to the special gaming state is relatively high.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1715A is located at a predetermined neutral position, the distance from the position of the operation surface (position Q1) to the reference position (position Q0) is The distance LA is configured to be longer than the distance LB from the position of the operation surface (position Q2) to the reference position when the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is located at the predetermined neutral position, and the press operation device The reciprocating speed when the operating surface of 1715A reciprocates in the vertical direction is configured to be faster than the reciprocating speed when the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the sub-control board 940 controls the push operation device 1261 during the operable period for the push operation when a special symbol starts winning and a variable display configured to allow operation input is selected. The position of the operation surface of 1715A is in a manner in which the amount of displacement is different from the amount of displacement of the push operation device 1261 under the control of the sub-control board 940, or the reciprocating speed is different from the reciprocating speed of the push operation device 1261 under the control of the sub-control board 940. A moving image (effect image 1715) including at least one speed aspect can be displayed. Thereby, the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Note that the sub-control board 940 controls to operate the press operation device 1261 to change the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 in a situation where the effect image 1715 (moving image) is displayed on the display section. It may also be configured to do so. According to this configuration, the operation mode of the press operation device 1261 can be changed by making the player visually recognize the effect image 1715 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 while the press operation device 1261 is operating in which the position of the operation surface changes. It is possible to have a concrete understanding of the

<13th embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29. In the pachinko machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, a variable display configured to allow operation input (i.e. , a variable display in which a predetermined effect can be displayed by performing a push operation on the push operation device 1261 during a predetermined operable period), the player can suitably grasp the remaining amount of the operable period. We are working hard to make it possible.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the twelfth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the thirteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of any one of the first to twelfth embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining amount of the operable period and the state of the press operation device 1261 in the variable display configured to allow operation input. More specifically, FIG. 29(A) is a diagram showing the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 479 and the state of the press operation device 1261 at the start timing of the operable period, and FIG. It is a diagram showing the display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 and the state of the press operation device 1261 at a predetermined timing within the period, and FIG. 29(C) shows the display content of the decorative pattern display device 479 at the end timing of the operable period. It is a figure which shows the content and the state of the press operation device 1261.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the operable period in the variable display configured to allow operation input, display information 1721 that can suggest that it is an operable period and remaining period that can notify the remaining amount of the operable period. amount information 1722 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. During this operable period, when the player operates the press operation device 1261, a performance corresponding to the success or failure of the special symbol lottery and the expectation level of transition to the special game state is executed in synchronization with the operation.

The display information 1721 may be, for example, information that includes a character string (such as "PUSH!" or "Press!") that can prompt a push operation on the push operation device 1261, and corresponds to an operation on the push operation device 1261. The information may also include an image that shows a press operation device corresponding to the press operation device 1261 being pressed repeatedly. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the display information 1721 is composed of a character string "PUSH!" that can prompt a push operation on the push operation device 1261.

The period remaining amount information 1722 may be, for example, a progress bar representing a decrease in the remaining amount of the operable period as time passes, or a numerical value that changes according to changes in the remaining amount of the operable period. good. In the example shown in FIG. 29, display information 1721 and period remaining amount information 1722 are configured by a progress bar.

Specifically, at the start timing of the operable period, the progress bar as the period remaining amount information 1722 indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period is the entire amount of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29(A). show. Once the operable period starts, the progress bar gradually becomes shorter as shown in FIG. 29(B) to indicate that the remaining amount of the operable period decreases as time passes. Then, at the end timing of the operable period, the progress bar indicates that the remaining amount of the operable period has become zero, as shown in FIG. 29(C).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, during the period from the start to the end of the operable period, the press operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261) is moved downward from the neutral position to the position below the neutral position. It is configured to descend (move) at a substantially constant speed to a predetermined end point position set on the side. Movement control of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

Specifically, at the start timing of the operable period, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29(B), the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 gradually lowers at a substantially constant speed as the remaining amount of the operable period decreases over time. Then, at the end timing of the operable period, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 reaches a predetermined end point position.

Note that the sub-control board 940 determines the speed at which the push operation device 1261 descends during the operable period based on the position Q11 of the operation surface when the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is located at the neutral position and the operation of the push operation device 1261. This is determined based on the distance between the operating surface and the position Q10 when the surface is located at the end point position, and the length of the operable period.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the content (mode) of the variable display selected by the sub-control board 940 is such that the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 during the period of the variable display according to the mode. A specific variable display including possible operable periods is provided, and in the specific variable display, the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is controlled by the sub-control board 940 from the start to the end of the operable period. In the period, it is displaced downward from the neutral position. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining time of the operable period through the height position of the operation surface. For example, even when playing a game without visually recognizing the decorative symbol display device 479, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the operable period and the length of the remaining time through the operation surface of the press operation device 1261. I can do it.

Note that the period remaining amount information 1722 does not necessarily need to be displayed and may be omitted. That is, the player may be made to recognize the length of the remaining operable period only by the height of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261.

Furthermore, the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 may be made to operate during a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. For example, when the remaining time is less than half, the operation surface is gradually operated. The control of the sub-control board 940 may be configured so that the surface moves.

Further, when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 protrudes from the surrounding area, characters (scales) corresponding to the time may be placed on the protruding portion.

Further, the period from the start to the end of the operable period may include a period in which the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 gradually rises, for example, the operation surface rises from the start of the operable period to a predetermined neutral position, and then The player may be informed of the end of the period, or the control may be configured to rise once and then gradually fall, indicating the operable period depending on the situation where the position is higher than the initial position.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 30. The pachinko machine 100 of the fourteenth embodiment is designed to allow the player to appropriately grasp the remaining time of the variable display being executed.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the thirteenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fourteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to thirteenth embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time of the variable display and the state of the press operation device 1261. As shown in FIG. 30, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the press operation device 1261 (more specifically, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261) is in the neutral position during the period from the start to the end of the variable display. It is configured to descend (move) at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to a predetermined end point position set below the neutral position. Movement control of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed by the sub-control board 940.

Specifically, at the start timing of the variable display, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is located at a predetermined neutral position (position Q11), and after the start of the operable period, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is located at a predetermined neutral position (position Q11). The position gradually descends at a substantially constant speed as the remaining time of the variable display decreases over time. Then, at the end timing of the variable display, the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 reaches a predetermined end point position set in advance.

The sub-control board 940 determines the speed at which the press operation device 1261 descends during the variable display based on the position Q11 of the operation surface when the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is located at the neutral position and the operation of the press operation device 1261. This is determined based on the distance between the operating surface and the position Q10 when the surface is located at the end point position, and the length of the operable period.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a special symbol starts winning and a variable display is executed, the sub control board 940 causes the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 to change. According to the progress of the variable display during the period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display (variation period), control is executed to gradually displace the display from the neutral position downward. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming experience in which the player can recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing changes in the height of the operating surface or by feeling the touch of the operating surface.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 940 controls the operation surface to gradually descend at a substantially constant speed as the remaining time of the variable display decreases with the passage of time, so that the operating surface can be adjusted to determine the degree of progress of the variable display and the remaining time. , it can be made easier for players to understand.

Note that the operation in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends (moves) from the neutral position to the end point position at a substantially constant speed does not necessarily need to be set from the start to the end of the variable display, and the reach state is reached. It may be a later period, or it may be another period, such as a period from the start of variable display until reaching reach.

Further, the advancing speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be approximately constant, but may be different depending on the situation. For example, the speed before reaching the ready-to-reach state and the speed after reaching the ready-to-reach state may be made different.

Further, the advancing speed of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be a substantially constant speed, and instead of or in addition to this, it may include sections in which the operating surface advances stepwise. For example, the height may be lowered by a certain amount (for example, 5 mm) every time a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses.

Furthermore, the control related to the remaining time of the fluctuating display and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 may be performed by lottery at the start of the fluctuating display, or the player may perform the fluctuating display. In the case where the function of the pressing operation device 1261 is made selectable, one function may be settable by the player.

Further, as a control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, an operation is performed in which the operation surface of the press operation device is raised (moved) from the neutral position to the end point position at a substantially constant speed. You can do it like this.

In addition, as a control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, when a predetermined operation is performed during the above-mentioned non-gaming state (standby), a special symbol is activated during the game. The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that a variable display (variable effect) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 in a manner (contents of the variable display, variable pattern) selected under the same selection conditions as when a winning occurs. The operating surface may operate in response to the remaining time of the variable display.

<15th embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fifteenth embodiment, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 during a fluctuating display, the time required for a part of the fluctuate display to elapse is longer than the time when the push operation was not performed. It is constructed so that it is shorter than the actual case.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the fourteenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the fifteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the first to fourteenth embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the fourteenth embodiment.

FIG. 31 is a time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when a pressing operation is performed on the press operation device 1261 during the variable display. More specifically, FIG. 31(A) is a time chart of the variable display when the push operation device 1261 is not pressed during the variable display, and FIG. 31(B) is a time chart of the variable display when the push operation device 1261 is not pressed during the variable display. 12 is a time chart of a fluctuating display when a push operation is performed on 1261.

As shown in FIG. 31(A), when the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is not performed during the fluctuating display (that is, when the fluctuating display ends without the push operation on the push operation device 1261 being performed), time T0 The variable display started at time T1 ends (a fixed display is displayed). In the variable display, content A appears at time T2, content B appears at time T3 after time T2, and content C appears at time T4 after time T3. Examples of the contents A to C include the occurrence of a ready-to-reach state, the execution of a performance by the appearance of a character or text, and the actions of a character (for example, victory or defeat after a battle, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 31(B), in the variable display started at time T0, if a push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 at time T2 when content A appears, the sub control board 940 The progress of the variable display is advanced according to the amount of operation of the pressing operation device 1261 until the pressing operation is completed.

As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 31(B), when the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is performed with a predetermined first operation amount (displacement amount or movement speed) during the period from time T2 to time T5. In this case, the content B that appears at time T3 when the pushing operation is not performed appears at time T5 when the pushing operation ends.

In other words, if the push operation device 1261 is pushed with the first operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5, the display will be displayed during the period from time T2 to time T3 when the push operation is not performed. The content of the variable display (i.e., a series of display contents from content A to content B) is the period from the start to the end of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., from time T2 to time T5). period), it progresses in fast forward (plays in fast forward).

Therefore, if the push operation device 1261 is pushed with the first operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5, the display will be displayed during the period from time T2 to time T3 when the push operation is not performed. Since the content of the variable display progresses in a period shorter than the relevant period (that is, the period from time T2 to time T5), the timing at which content C appears is also earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31(B), when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 ends at time T5, content C appears at time T6, which is earlier than time T4. Note that the interval from time T5 to time T6 at which content C appears is equal to the interval from time T3 to time T4 (the difference between time T4 and time T3).

After the content C appears at time T6, at time T7, when a time equal to the interval from time T4 to time T1 (the difference between time T1 and time T4) has elapsed, the fluctuation result is displayed by a stop display, and then, The stop display continues until time T1, at which time a confirmed display is displayed (the fluctuating display ends).

In this way, even if a part of the variable display is played back in fast forward by a push operation on the push operation device 1261, by continuing the stop display displayed at time T7 until time T1, it is possible to suppress the pressure during the shift display by continuing the stop display displayed at time T7. The variable display period when a push operation is performed on the operating device 1261 (that is, the period from the start of the variable display until the end of the variable display is the same as when the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is not performed during the variable display) It can be a display period.

Therefore, even if a part of the variable display is played back in fast forward by pressing the push operation device 1261, the main control board 920 can change the pattern of the symbol without changing the control of the variable display of the symbol by the main control board 920. It is possible to synchronize the variable display with the variable display of the pattern (decorative pattern) by the sub-control board 940.

On the other hand, during the period from time T2 to time T5, the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is a predetermined second operation amount different from the first operation amount (for example, a displacement amount larger than the displacement amount corresponding to the first operation amount). , or at a movement speed faster than the movement speed corresponding to the first operation amount), the content C that appears at time T4 after time T3 when the push operation is not performed. It can be made to appear at time T5 when the pressing operation ends.

As a result, if the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is operated with the second operation amount in the period from time T2 to time T5, the content A to content in the variable display in the period from time T2 to time T5. The series of display contents from B to content C is displayed when the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is operated with the first operation amount during the period from time T2 to time T5 (that is, from time T2 to time T5). The content is progressed (played) at faster forward speed than in the case where a series of display contents from content A to content B are displayed during the period of .

Note that when a push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 during a variable display, the progress of the shift display is advanced according to the amount of operation of the push operation device 1261 until the push operation is completed, and then the push operation is performed. The configuration may be such that the progress of the variable display is returned to the timing when the variable display progresses without the pressing operation being performed at the timing when the push operation is completed.

FIG. 32 is a time chart for explaining the configuration, and is a time chart for explaining an example of the progress of the variable display when a pressing operation is performed on the press operation device 1261 during the variable display. More specifically, FIG. 32(A) is a time chart of the variable display when no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 1261 during the variable display, and FIG. 32(B) is a time chart of the variable display when the pressing operation device 1261 is not pressed during the variable display 12 is a time chart of a fluctuating display when a push operation is performed on 1261.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), when the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is not performed during the fluctuating display (that is, when the fluctuating display ends without the push operation on the push operation device 1261 being performed), time T0 The variable display started at time T1 ends (a fixed display is displayed). In the variable display, content A appears at time T2, content B appears at time T3 after time T2, and content C appears at time T4 after time T3.

As shown in FIG. 32(B), in the variable display started at time T0, if a push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 at time T2 when content A appears, in the case of FIG. Similarly, the sub-control board 940 advances the progress of the variable display according to the operation amount of the press operation device 1261 until the press operation is completed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 32(B), when the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is performed with a predetermined first operation amount (displacement amount or movement speed) during the period from time T2 to time T5, Content B that appears at time T3 when the push operation is not performed appears at time T5 when the push operation ends.

As a result, the content of the variable display displayed during the period from time T2 to time T3 when no push operation is performed on the push operation device 1261 (that is, the series of display contents from content A to content B) is changed. , during the period from the start to the end of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., the period from time T2 to time T5), is proceeded in fast forward (fast forward reproduction is performed).

When the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is finished at time T5, the playback position of the variable display changes from the position corresponding to content B (the position corresponding to time T3 in the variable display) as shown in FIG. 32(B). , the variable display is rewound to a position corresponding to a time Tm before time T3. Then, the progress of the variable display progresses (is reproduced) as usual from time Tm.

Therefore, when the pressing operation with the first operation amount on the pressing operation device 1261 is finished at time T5, as shown in FIG. After content B reappears at time T3, content C appears at time T4, and thereafter, the variable display ends at time T1 (the final display is Is displayed).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated to control the variable display performed on the decorative pattern display device 479 by the sub-control board 940, the sub-control board 940 The control is configured such that the state of the variable display, which ends after a predetermined period of time if the operation is not performed, advances from the state when the operation was performed in accordance with the amount of operation caused by the operation. Therefore, when the player wants to advance the progress of the variable display, the player can easily advance the progress to the section he or she wants to advance to, and provides a gameplay experience in which performances that were scheduled to be viewed later can be viewed in advance. be able to.

Note that in the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the progress of the variable display is advanced according to the amount of push operation on the push operation device 1261 has been exemplified. ) may be configured to advance in accordance with the amount of push operation performed on the push operation device 1261.

Further, under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variable display progresses from the timing when the operation on the press operation device 1261 is performed, according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation. When the process ends, the progress of the variable display is configured to return to the timing when it progressed without the relevant operation being performed (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the control of the progress of the variable display on the main control board 920 and the control of the progress of the variable display on the sub-control board 940 are synchronized, and the player can fast-forward the variable display and recognize events that will occur later in advance. can be added.

Note that when the push operation device 1261 is operated, the sub control board 940 controls the state of the event that will end after a predetermined time if no operation is performed on the push operation device 1261. The target is a production using a timer with a set remaining time (for example, if a mission (instruction) such as a jackpot occurs if a reach with a "6" symbol occurs within 3 minutes) occurs. In , the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to a height corresponding to the remaining time of the command, and the player performs an operation of pushing the operating surface, thereby determining whether a reach occurs in the next and subsequent variable displays. may be made visible.

Further, under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variable display progresses from the timing when the operation on the press operation device 1261 is performed, according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation. When the operation is completed, the progress of the variable display may be configured to return to the timing when the operation was performed. For example, when a predetermined operation is performed during a non-gaming state (standby), the mode selected under the same selection conditions (contents of fluctuation display, fluctuation Regarding the fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) executed by a pattern), the progress of the fluctuating display may be configured to return to the timing when the relevant operation was performed, and this allows some effects to be performed at high speed. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the player misses the game because the game only progresses.

Further, as a control related to the remaining time of the variable display and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, an operation is performed in which the operation surface of the press operation device is raised (moved) from the neutral position to the end point position at a substantially constant speed. Under the control of the sub-control board 940, the progress of the variable display is returned from the timing when the operation on the press operation device 1261 is performed to the previous one according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation. You may also add a function to rewind the video. In this case as well, after the push operation is performed, the height position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises to approach the original state, and for the amount of time that has progressed, the variable display is resumed in the state in which it has progressed. Alternatively, the variable display may be started by returning to the original timing before the operation.

Further, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 may be configured to fast-forward and return to the original height position when there is no operation after visually confirming the variable display, or the operation surface may be configured to return to the original height position when no operation is performed, or a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 If you perform an operation corresponding to fast forwarding (times), the fast forwarding function may be disabled, and if you use the fast forwarding function a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the remaining time on the variable display and the pressing operation may be disabled. Control related to the operation surface of the device 1261 may be terminated.

In addition, when fast-forwarding the variable display, the variable display of decorative symbols that are displayed in response to the variable display of special symbols (for example, the part where the number symbol is displayed) can be identified without fast-forwarding. For example, the variable display of decorative patterns may be displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the display screen, and the variable display may be continued without fast forwarding, and at the timing (time Tm) when the display returns to the original state. The sub control board 940 may perform control so that the display is returned to its original size.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35. The pachinko machine 100 of the sixteenth embodiment is configured to associate the plurality of height positions of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with the performance executed in the variable display.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the 16th embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of any of the above-described first to 15th embodiments, or It may be provided instead of a part of the configuration of any of the pachinko machines 100 of the fifteenth embodiment.

33 and 34 show control in which the height position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is set to multiple types of positions displaced from the initial position to different height positions as a trigger for the performance executed in the variable display. It is a figure for explaining.

FIG. 33(A) shows two cases in which the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises to the height of position Q1 as the initial position and then moves to position Q11, which is lowered by a distance LC, and another case in which the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is lowered by a distance LD during variable display. 12 is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the robot is displaced to a position Q12. The displacement from the position Q1 to the downward position may be due to a pushing operation by the player, or alternatively or in addition to this, the position may be changed under the control of the sub-control board 940. It may also be something that performs control.

33(B) and 33(C) are diagrams illustrating a situation in which the same effect is started when the operating surface of the press operating device 1261 is displaced from position Q1 to either position Q11 or position Q12. This example illustrates a case where the execution of the same performance is determined by the sub control board 940 in a situation where different starting winnings occur and different variable displays are started.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), during the fluctuating display, for example, there is a case where the number "7" reaches the reach state, and then the characters "PUSH!" are displayed to prompt the player to press the button. This indicates that the operation valid period in which the operation on the press operation device 1261 is valid has occurred. Here, the display of "PUSH!" may be used to prompt the player to place his/her hand on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 and perform the push operation, such as "push", "PRESS", "slowly", etc. It may be displayed using other expressions such as "Hold it!", or may display a plurality of expressions by switching them at short intervals, or may display expressions indicating a plurality of operation methods at the same time.

The operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises to the height of position Q1, and in this situation, if the player pushes the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, the position corresponds to about half of the area where the push operation is possible. When Q11 is reached, a school of fish effect is displayed, indicating to the player that a variable display with a high expectation level (for example, 50%) for transition to the special game state is to be executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(C), even if the variable display is such that a school of fish effect is displayed, the effect of a school of fish may not be displayed even if the operation amount of the push operation reaches position Q11. When the pushing operation continues beyond position Q11 and reaches position Q12, a school of fish effect may be displayed, and this control is performed by the sub-control board 940. The height position at which this effect is executed is selected from a plurality of types as one of the aspects of the effect for the variable display to be executed. As a result, it is difficult for the player to understand how far the pushing operation has to be performed to execute the performance, and the opportunity to perform the same performance is provided in a way that is associated with a plurality of types of operation amounts. I can do it.

Note that when the same effect is displayed for variable displays with different amounts of push operations, the level of expectation for transition to the special gaming state due to the occurrence of that effect may be set to be the same level of expectation. , may have different expectations.

Furthermore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be configured to be displaced by the player's operation; instead, or in addition to this, the position of the operation surface can be controlled by the sub-control board 940. may be changed. That is, an effect image is displayed to prompt the player to place his/her hand on the operating surface of the press operation device 1261 (for example, displaying the words "PUT!" or displaying a state in which the player's hand is lightly placed on the operating surface) is displayed. The player's hand on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is detected by the power of the pressing operating device 1261 (motor 863) and the amount of displacement of the encoder, and the operating surface is displayed. , by controlling the movement in the pushing direction with a predetermined movement pattern (for example, at a constant speed), and performing the performance that was determined to be executed when the position Q11 or position Q12 is reached. Good too.

FIG. 34 illustrates a case where different effects are performed depending on the amount of displacement of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 from the initial position. Similar to FIG. 33(A), FIG. 34(A) shows a case where the operating surface of the press operation device 1261 rises to the height of the initial position Q1 during variable display and then moves to a position Q11 lowered by a distance LC. 34(B) and 34(C) are diagrams illustrating a situation in which the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is moved from position Q1 to position Q11 and position Q12. It is a diagram illustrating a situation in which different effects are started depending on each displacement position when the object is displaced in either direction.

As shown in FIG. 34(B), during the fluctuating display, for example, there is a case where "7" reaches the reach state, and then the characters "PUSH!" are displayed to prompt the player to press the button. This indicates that the operation valid period in which the operation on the press operation device 1261 is valid has occurred. At this time, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises to the height of position Q1. In this situation, when the player presses the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, when the player reaches position Q11, which corresponds to about half of the area where the press operation is possible, character CA13 with a clenched fist appears, and the player , it is shown that the degree of expectation of transition to the special gaming state is a variable display with a medium level (for example, 10%).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34C, even in a variable display in which a character is displayed, the character may not be displayed yet even if the operation amount of the push operation reaches position Q11. If the pushing operation continues beyond position Q11 and reaches position Q12, character CA11 holding a sword may be displayed, and this control is performed by sub-control board 940. This combination of height position and character is selected from a plurality of types as one of the effects for the variable display to be performed. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming experience in which different types of effects are executed depending on the amount of the push operation.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a plurality of types of control when the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is pressed and the operation surface is lowered and then returned to its original state as a performance executed in the variable display.

FIG. 35(A) shows a case in which the operation feeling becomes lighter and becomes easier to operate after a certain amount of operation from the initial position during the operable period of the press operation device 1261, and a case in which the operation becomes easier after the same fixed amount of operation. It is a figure which illustrated the case where a feeling becomes heavy. This operation feeling is controlled by the sub-control board 940 detecting the height position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 using an encoder, and controlling the power of the push operation device 1261 (motor 863) according to the height position. carried out by.

By providing a certain section from the initial position where the operation feeling is the same, the player can feel how much force he or she needs to press the pressing operation device 1261 to make it work. . It is preferable that the section where the same operational feeling is provided is set to less than half of the total movable range. Furthermore, after a section where the same operational feeling is provided, it is preferable to provide a case where the operational feeling (strength of reaction force) becomes higher (heavier) and a case where it becomes lower (lighter). It is possible to make the player more clearly aware that a plurality of types of operational sensations are set.

After the operation surface has progressed over a certain period, the sub-control board 940 executes control to vary the strength of the operation feeling depending on the level of expectation. FIG. 35A shows an example of a case where the variable display with a higher degree of expectation has a heavier operational feel. It is preferable that this fluctuating display with a heavy operational feel is set to appear less frequently than the fluctuating display with a light operational feel, thereby reducing the chance that an excessive load is input to the press operation device 1261. . Note that it is not necessary to make the operation feel heavier when the level of expectation is high, and the level of expectation may be indicated to the player by other controls. For example, by varying the length of the sections with a heavy operational feel, or by indicating the level of expectation to the player based on the pattern of the operational feel (the number of heavy sections in a pattern where the heavy sections occur intermittently). Good too.

FIG. 35(B) is a diagram illustrating the return position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 after the pushing operation in FIG. The figure exemplifies the height position (return position) at which the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 returns after operation.

After the press operation device 1261 is operated, the height at which the operation surface returns changes depending on the degree of expectation. FIG. 35(B) illustrates a case where the return position is higher in the variable display with higher expectation. It is preferable that the frequency of appearance of the variable display with a high return position is set to be lower than that of the variable display with a low return position. Note that it is not necessarily necessary to control the return position to be high when the expectation level is high, and the expectation level may be indicated to the player by other controls. For example, when the operation surface moves up and down after a push operation, the number of movements can be varied, or the faster the return to a predetermined height position (for example, the initial position), the higher the expectation level. You may also suggest it to others.

Here, the control of the operating feel of the pushing operation shown in FIG. 35(A) and the control of the return position shown in FIG. 35(B) do not necessarily need to be executed in combination. In the sub control board 940, the control may be such that only the operating feel of the pushing operation is different and the operation after the pushing operation is the same, or the pushing operation may be made possible with the same operating feeling, and the subsequent return position may be controlled. Alternatively, the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be made to protrude from a lowered state without being raised to the initial height position, and the difference in the expectation level may be indicated depending on the height position. Even if the weight of the player's hand changes due to the pressure operation device 1261, the height position can be adjusted according to the expectation level by controlling the power of the pressure operation device 1261 (motor 863). The operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be displaced so that the following occurs.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even when a player performs a push operation on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 that is disposed at an elevated position as a predetermined neutral position, , when a variable display accompanied by a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) is executed on the decorative pattern display device 479 by the sub-control board 940, and then a combination of symbols according to the lottery result is stopped and displayed as a result display. A predetermined performance is executed when the operation surface is displaced to a different height position. That is, the sub-control board 940 controls to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is displaced to the first position, which is a small amount of movement relative to the neutral position, and the control that causes the position of the operation surface to Control is executed to display a predetermined effect when the robot moves to a second position, which is a larger distance than the first position (see FIG. 33). For this reason, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the effect to be executed, and it is difficult to provide gameplay in which the trigger for executing the same effect is associated with multiple types of amounts of operation. can.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to control the displacement of the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, and using the displacement control, a variable display accompanied by a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) is executed. In a variable display, a control that displays a predetermined effect when the operation surface is displaced to a first position with a smaller amount of movement than the neutral position, and a control that moves the operation surface to a second position different from the first position. Control is executed to cause a predetermined effect to appear when the object is displaced (see FIG. 33). In this case, the player visually checks the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 to recognize the height position, or places his or her hand on the operation surface to feel the change in height position and determine the amount of operation and the executed amount. It is possible to provide a gaming experience in which it is difficult to understand the correspondence with the triggers of the performance, and the triggers for executing the same performance are associated with the height positions of a plurality of types of operation surfaces.

The sub-control board 940 also performs control to display a predetermined first effect when the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is displaced to a first position with a small amount of movement relative to the neutral position, and control for displaying a predetermined first effect. Control is executed to display a second effect different from a predetermined first effect when the position is displaced to a second position which is moved a lot different from the first position (see FIG. 34). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming experience in which the player expects to perform different effects set according to the amount of operation.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to control the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 to be displaced, and using the displacement control, the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is changed relative to the neutral position. Control to display a predetermined first effect when the operation surface is displaced to a first position with a small amount of movement, and display a predetermined effect when the position of the operation surface is displaced to a second position different from the first position. (See FIG. 34). In this case, the player can visually check the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 to recognize the height position, or place his or her hand on the operation surface and feel the change in height position while setting the respective settings according to the amount of operation. It is possible to provide a gaming experience in which players can expect to perform different performances.

In addition, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period in which the press operating device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variable display, and a special symbol starting winning occurs. When a specific variable display is selected and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is operated to move downward by a certain amount during the operable period, the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the certain amount of movement is reduced. control to increase the magnitude of the reaction force to a first magnitude, and control to increase the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the certain amount of movement to a second magnitude larger than the first magnitude, for separate fluctuation displays. Execute. For this reason, the player is given a tactile experience in advance of how much force the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 must be pressed to make the operating surface operate, and then the player is asked to experience the degree of operating sensation that is different from that tactile sensation. It can be made easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the difference in the operational feel when multiple types of operational feel are provided, and to accurately convey the information that is desired to be conveyed to the player based on the difference in the operational feeling, such as a change in the level of expectation. .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player performs a push operation on the operation surface (operated part) of the push operation device 1261 disposed in an elevated position, after the operation, the secondary Under the control of the control board 940, the height of the operation surface is changed according to the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of transition to the special game state).

That is, after the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is pressed, the sub control board 940 is configured so that the position (height) of the operation surface is opposite to the operation direction of the push operation (downward in this embodiment). control that causes a predetermined first effect (for example, a fluctuating display or character display indicating a predetermined degree of expectation) to appear when the controller is displaced to a first position in the direction of (that is, upward in this embodiment) When the position of the operation surface is displaced in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the push operation to a second position different from the first position (for example, a return position higher than the first position), the first Control is performed to display a predetermined second performance different from the first performance (for example, a variable display or character display that is more anticipated than the first performance) (see FIG. 34). Therefore, after operating the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the player is provided with a gaming experience in which he or she can expect to perform different performances that are respectively set according to the return position (return amount) of the operation surface. I can do it.

Further, the configuration is such that control for displacing the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is possible, and by using the displacement control, after a push operation is performed on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, the position of the operation surface is changed according to the push operation. Control that causes a predetermined first effect to appear when the operation surface is displaced to a first position in a direction opposite to the operation direction, and a control that causes the operation surface to move in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the push operation. When the robot moves to a second position different from the first position, control is executed to display a predetermined second effect different from the first effect (see FIG. 34). In this case, the player visually recognizes the return position by visually checking the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or by placing his/her hand on the operation surface and feeling the change in the return position, the player can check the respective settings according to the return amount. It is possible to provide a gaming experience that expects the execution of separate performances.

In addition, in FIG. 35(B), a variable display is executed in which the expectation level (the expectation level of transition to the special gaming state) differs depending on the difference in the return position of the operation surface after the push operation on the push operation device 1261. Although the case is illustrated, there is a case where the return position of the operation surface after the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is a predetermined first position, and a case where the return position of the operation surface after the push operation on the push operation device 1261 is a predetermined first position, and a case where the return position is a second position different from the first position (for example, a return position higher than the first position). In either case, a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) may be performed.

That is, in a configuration in which the sub-control board 940 executes a variable display with a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) on the decorative pattern display device 479, and then stops and displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result as a result display. , after the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is pressed, the sub-control board 940 determines that the position (height) of the operation surface is opposite to the operation direction of the push operation (downward in this embodiment). control that causes a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) to appear when the operation surface is displaced to the first position in the direction of (that is, upward in this embodiment), and that the position of the operation surface It may also be configured to execute a control that causes a predetermined effect to appear when the object is displaced in the opposite direction to a second position different from the first position (for example, a return position higher than the first position). (For example, see FIG. 33). In this case, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the return position (return amount) of the operation surface after the push operation on the push operation device 1261 and the effect to be executed, and the opportunity to execute the same effect is made difficult for the player. It is possible to provide gameplay associated with a plurality of types of return positions.

Further, when the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to control the displacement of the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, the sub-control board 940 can operate the push operation device 1261 using the displacement control. Control that causes a predetermined effect (for example, a school of fish) to appear when the surface is displaced to a first position in a direction opposite to the operating direction of the pushing operation after a pushing operation on the operating surface, and a control that causes the position of the operating surface to appear A configuration may also be adopted in which a control is executed to cause a predetermined effect to appear when the object is displaced to a second position different from the first position in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the push operation (for example, see FIG. 33). . In this case, the player visually recognizes the return position by visually checking the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, or places his/her hand on the operation surface, feels the change in the return position, and determines the amount of return and the effect to be performed. It is possible to provide a game experience in which the correspondence relationship with the trigger is difficult to understand, and the trigger for executing the same performance is associated with a plurality of types of return positions of the operation surface.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 42. In the pachinko machine 100 of the seventeenth embodiment, the operation of the push operation device 1261 is controlled in accordance with a predetermined pattern set as a control condition for the operation mechanism 860 in a push operation device 1261 that includes an actuation mechanism 860 (see FIG. 20). It is configured like this.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the sixteenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the 17th embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 by combining with any configuration or multiple configurations of the above-described first to 16th embodiments. However, it may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in any one of the first to sixteenth embodiments described above. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventeenth embodiment, a case will be described in which a plurality of types of patterns shown in FIGS. 36 to 42 are set as control conditions for the operating mechanism 860, but all of these patterns It is not necessary for the pachinko machine 100 to be configured to include this, and the pachinko machine 100 may be provided with a control that corresponds to one or more of some patterns.

36 to 42, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a predetermined pattern set as a condition for controlling the operating mechanism 860 (more specifically, controlling the motor 863). It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to change. Each figure will be specifically explained below.

FIG. 36(A) is a graph showing an example of a pattern set as a condition for controlling the actuation mechanism 860 (hereinafter, the pattern is also referred to as a "condition pattern"). The horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36(A) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. That is, the condition pattern shown in FIG. 36(A) is defined by the relationship between the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. In the following description, a pattern in which the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled by defining the position and operating force of the operating surface will be described as a position versus operating force control pattern.

Note that the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is an operating force that acts in the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation (pressing direction) with respect to the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (i.e., in the pressing direction on the pressing operation device 1261). (reaction force that resists) and an operating force that acts in the same direction as the direction of the pushing operation (hereinafter, the operating force is also referred to as "escape force").

In the pressing operation device 1261, the reaction force is generated by driving the motor 863 of the actuating mechanism 860 in a predetermined rotational direction. On the other hand, the escape force is generated by driving the motor 863 in a rotation direction opposite to that in which the reaction force is generated. Therefore, by changing the rotation direction of the motor 863 of the actuation mechanism 860, the sub-control board 940 can switch the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a reaction force or an escape force.

Furthermore, the magnitude of each of the reaction force and escape force increases as the electric power supplied to the motor 863 increases. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can change the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 by changing the electric power supplied to the motor 863.

Furthermore, the magnitude of each of the reaction force and escape force increases as the electric power supplied to the motor 863 increases. Therefore, the sub-control board 940 can change the magnitude of the operating force (reaction force, escape force) of the pressing operation device 1261 by changing the electric power supplied to the motor 863.

In the graph shown in FIG. 36(A), the vertical axis has zero (0) as the origin, positive values larger than zero indicate reaction force of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and negative values smaller than zero represents the escape force of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. The larger the absolute value of the reaction force and escape force (that is, the farther away from the origin in the positive or negative direction), the larger the reaction force and escape force are.

On the other hand, on the horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. The position of the operation surface when 861 is located is shown. The position Bmin indicates the position of the operating surface when the rack 861 is located at the lowermost side (the end handle in the pressing direction by the pressing operation) within the movement range of the rack 861 with respect to the pinion 862 in the actuating mechanism 860.

FIG. 36(A) illustrates condition patterns JA11, JA12, JA13, and JA14 as four types of position versus operating force control patterns. Note that these condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are only examples of condition patterns, and condition patterns of various shapes may be applied.

The plurality of condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are each associated with a predetermined situation (type of effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479). When one of the situations associated with each of the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 occurs, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the situation.

For example, the condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are respectively associated with effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and when one of the effects associated with the condition pattern is selected as an execution target, the sub control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the performance.

Condition pattern JA11 (solid line) indicates that at position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1, or from reaction force Ma1 to zero, and in the section between position Bmax and position Bmin, the operation force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1, or from reaction force Ma1 to zero. This is a pattern in which the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at a substantially constant reaction force Ma1, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from the reaction force Ma1 to zero or from zero to the reaction force Ma1 at the position Bmin.

Condition pattern JA12 (dotted chain line) is such that at position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1, or from reaction force Ma1 to zero, and the position Bmax and the lower side of the position Bmax (position Bmax side) ), the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant by the reaction force Ma1, and in the section between position B3 and position B2 below the position B3, the operating force at position B3 is kept constant. becomes a reaction force Ma1, and the reaction force changes approximately linearly as the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 changes so that the operating force becomes a reaction force Ma2 larger than the reaction force Ma1 at position B2. In the section between and position B1 below the position B2, the operating force is kept substantially constant as reaction force Ma2, and in the section between position B1 and position Bmin, the operating force becomes reaction force Ma2 at position B1. , the reaction force changes approximately linearly as the position of the operating surface of the push operation device 1261 changes so that the operating force becomes the reaction force Ma1 at the position Bmin, and the operating force of the push operation device 1261 changes at the position Bmin. This is a pattern in which the reaction force Ma1 changes from zero to zero, or from zero to reaction force Ma1.

Condition pattern JA13 (dot-dash line with a wider pitch than condition pattern JA12) shows that at position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1, or from reaction force Ma1 to zero, and the position Bmax and position B3 change. In the section, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is kept substantially constant at the reaction force Ma1, and in the section between the position B3 and the position Bmin, the operating force becomes the reaction force Ma1 at the position B3, and the operating force becomes the reaction force Ma1 at the position Bmin. This is a pattern in which the reaction force changes approximately linearly so that the value becomes zero.

Condition pattern JA14 (double-dashed line) shows that at position Bmax, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1, and in the section between position Bmax and position B3, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from zero to reaction force Ma1. The force Ma1 is kept substantially constant, and at position B3, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from the reaction force Ma1 to the escape force Mb1, and in the section between position B3 and position Bmin, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from the reaction force Ma1 to the escape force Mb1. This is a pattern in which the relief force Mb1 is kept substantially constant, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from the relief force Mb1 to zero at the position Bmin.

36(B) to FIG. 36(D), in a situation where the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is lowered from the initial position (neutral position) position Bmax by the player's operation, the sub control board 940 is A case will be illustrated in which the operating force (reaction force, relief force) of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled according to a set condition pattern (conditions under which the sub-control board 940 controls the operating mechanism 860).

FIG. 36(B) is a graph showing an example of a displacement pattern of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the position of the operating surface descends over time. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36(B) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. In the position vs. operating force control pattern, it is the player who lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the displacement speed and displacement amount differ depending on the player's intention.

Displacement pattern JB11 (solid line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface descends at a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1. , and reaches position Bmin at time te. More specifically, in the displacement pattern JB11, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to descend from position Bmax at time t1, reaches position B3 at time t2, and returns to position B2 at time t3. In this pattern, the displacement speed is such that the displacement speed reaches position B1 at time t4, and position Bmin is reached at time te.

Displacement pattern JB12 (two-dot chain line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface has a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1. In this pattern, after descending to time t2, the descending displacement speed increases and reaches position Bmin at time t3.

FIG. 36(C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a change over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a set condition pattern. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36(C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Specifically, the operating force pattern JC11 (solid line) is the case where the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. This is the operational force pattern when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed to lower the displacement pattern JB11 (that is, the pattern of lowering from position Bmax to position Bmin at a substantially constant displacement speed) shown in B).

According to the operating force pattern JC11, when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11, the sub-control board 940 operates at the time t0 in the period from time t0 to time t1 according to the condition pattern JA11. From time t1 to time t1, the operating force of the push operation device 1261 is set to zero, at time t1, reaction force MaA is generated, reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time te, and at time te, the operation force of the push operation device 1261 is set to zero. Reduce the operating force to zero.

Note that since a force in the direction of gravity (downward) is applied to the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 due to the weight of the press operation device 1261, it is necessary to maintain (hold) the operation surface at a predetermined height. Since it is necessary to generate a reaction force that balances the own weight, even if the operating force on the pressing operating device 1261 is zero, the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 that balances the operating force is not zero and is positive. must be the value of In the following explanation, for ease of understanding, the weight of the push operation device 1261 is not taken into account, and when the operating force of the push operation device 1261 is zero, the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is maintained. It will be explained as if it is done.

Operation force pattern JC12 (dotted chain line) is a case where condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. This is an operating force pattern when the pressing operation device 1261 is pressed in order to lower it according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown.

According to the operating force pattern JC12, the sub control board 940 is not pressed between time t0 and time t1 according to the condition pattern JA12 when the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11. The operating force of the operating device 1261 is set to zero, reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time t2, and pressing operation is performed from reaction force Ma1 to reaction force Ma2 from time t2 to time t3. The operating force of the device 1261 is increased approximately linearly, the reaction force Ma2 is maintained from time t3 to time t4, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is increased approximately linearly from reaction force Ma2 to reaction force Ma1 from time t4 to time te. At time te, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is reduced to zero.

Operation force pattern JC13 (dotted chain line with a wider pitch than operation force pattern JC12) is a case where condition pattern JA13 shown in FIG. This is a pattern of operating force when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed to lower the position according to the displacement pattern JB11 shown in FIG. 36(B).

According to the operating force pattern JC13, when the position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11, the sub control board 940 disables the push operation device from time t0 to time t1 according to the condition pattern JA13. 1261 is set to zero, reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time t2, and reaction force Ma1 is reduced to zero from time t2 to time te. The operating force is reduced approximately linearly.

Operation force pattern JC14 (two-dot chain line) is a case where condition pattern JA14 shown in FIG. This is a pattern of operating force when the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is performed to lower the displacement pattern JB12 shown in FIG.

According to the operation force pattern JC14, when the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB12, the sub control board 940 operates the press operation device from time t0 to time t1 according to the condition pattern JA14. The operating force of 1261 is set to zero, reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and reaction force Ma1 is maintained from time t1 to time t2.

The sub-control board 940 generates escape force Mb1 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (displaces it in the pressing direction) and is a force that causes the player to place his/her hand on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261. In a state where the operating surface is lightly placed (that is, the operating surface is pressed with the operating force MpX), the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t2 to time t3. It's the size. As a result, when escape force Mb1 is generated at time t2, the operation surface of press operation device 1261 reaches position Bmin at time t3, as shown in displacement pattern JB12.

Therefore, the escape force Mb1 is generated at time t2, and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t3. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is made zero.

FIG. 36(D) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing changes over time in the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36(D) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JD11 (solid line) is the displacement pattern JB11 shown in FIG. 36(B) when the player moves the position of the operating surface on the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set. (That is, a pattern of descending at a substantially constant displacement speed from position Bmax to position Bmin) when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated (pushing operation) to descend according to the pattern of descending at a substantially constant displacement speed from position Bmax to position Bmin. .

In the operating force pattern JD11, the operating force during the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes (increases) from zero to operating force Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force during the period from time t1 to time te. is the operating force Mp1, and is a pattern in which the operating force becomes zero at time te.

Note that the case where "the operating force of the player's operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is zero" is not limited to the case where the player is not touching the operation surface, but also when the pressing operation device 1261 is moved to the initial position (for example, position Bmax). ), including cases where it is not possible to push it in.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 36(B) to 36(D), the operating force Mp1 has a value larger in absolute value than the reaction force Ma1. Therefore, at time t1, the operating force by the player becomes the operating force Mp1, which is greater than the reaction force Ma1, so that the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to be displaced in the pressing direction (pushing direction).

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA11 is set, the player makes sure that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JB11 (i.e., a substantially constant pressing speed (positional speed of the operation surface in the pressing direction). When the player performs a push operation such that the operating surface of the push operation device 1261 descends from the initial position Bmax, the player feels the operating feeling corresponding to the change in operating force according to the operating force pattern JD11. From the beginning until reaching the position Bmin, which is the end point of the pushing operation, one can feel the feeling of operating with a substantially constant operating force.

The operating force pattern JD12 (dotted chain line) is the displacement pattern shown in FIG. 36(B) when the player moves the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set. This is an example of a change over time in the operating force of the pushing operation when the pushing operation device 1261 is operated (pushing operation) to descend according to JB11.

In the operating force pattern JD12, the operating force in the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force in the period from time t1 to time t2 is maintained at Mp1. , the operating force increases approximately linearly from Mp1 to Mp2 from time t2 to time t3, the operating force during the period from time t3 to time t4 is maintained at Mp2, and the operating force increases from Mp2 to Mp1 from time t4 to time te. This is a pattern in which the operating force decreases approximately linearly to , and the operating force becomes zero at time te.

Note that the operating force Mp2 has a value larger in absolute value than the reaction force Ma2. Therefore, the operating force in the period from time t2 to time te is larger than the reaction force at each time, and as a result, from time t2 to time te, the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is pressed by the player's operation (push operation). It can be moved in the direction.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA12 is set as a control condition and the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 at a substantially constant pressing speed, the player will respond to the change in operating force according to the operating force pattern JD12. In other words, after the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 starts to descend from the initial position Bmax, it can be operated up to a certain position with the first operation force, but at a certain position, the operation surface becomes lower than the first operation force. A large second operating force is required, and while operating with the second operating force, you can feel a series of operating sensations such as being able to operate again with the first operating force at a certain position.

Operation force pattern JD13 (dot-dash line with a wider pitch than operation force pattern JD12) indicates that when condition pattern JA13 is set as a control condition, the player lowers the position of the operation surface of press operation device 1261 according to displacement pattern JB11. This is an example of how the operating force changes over time when the pushing operation device 1261 is pressed in an attempt to do so.

In the operating force pattern JD13, the operating force in the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force in the period from time t1 to time t2 is maintained at Mp1. , the operating force decreases approximately linearly from Mp1 to zero from time t2 to time te.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA13 is set as a control condition and the player operates the pressing operation device 1261 at a substantially constant pressing speed, the player will respond to the change in operating force according to the operating force pattern JD13. In other words, after the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 starts to descend from the initial position Bmax, it can be operated with a predetermined operating force up to a certain position, but the push operation from the certain position to the position Bmin is difficult. You can feel a series of operational sensations in which the operating force required for the operation gradually decreases.

Operation force pattern JD14 (double-dashed line) is the pressure applied by the player in an attempt to lower the position of the operation surface of press operation device 1261 according to displacement pattern JB11 until time t2 when condition pattern JA14 is set as a control condition. This is an example of how the operating force changes over time when the operating device 1261 is pressed and then changed to a state where the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface.

In the operating force pattern JD14, the operating force in the period from time t0 to time t1 is zero, the operating force changes from zero to Mp1 at time t1, and the operating force in the period from time t1 to time t2 is maintained at Mp1. , the operating force changes (decreases) from Mp1 to MpX at time t2, and is maintained at MpX from time t2 to time te. Note that the operating force in a state where the player lightly places his/her hand on the operating surface is MpX.

Therefore, when condition pattern JA14 is set as a control condition, if the player performs a push operation on push operation device 1261 in an attempt to lower the position of the operation surface of push operation device 1261 according to displacement pattern JB11 until time t2. After that, when the player changes the state to resting his/her hand lightly on the operating surface, the player feels the operating feeling corresponding to the change in operating force according to the operating force pattern JD13, that is, the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is in the initial position. After starting to descend from a certain position Bmax, at a certain position it suddenly descends at a descending speed higher than the descending speed up to that point. Users can feel that their hands on the operating surface may not be able to keep up with the downward movement of the operating surface and move away from the operating surface.

Note that in the operating force pattern JD14, the case where the hand is placed on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 even after time t3 when the operating surface reaches the position Bmin is exemplified. It may be a pattern of letting go of the hand.

36(E) and 36(F) show a situation in which the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the initial position (neutral position) position Bmin (that is, the hand operating the operating surface is pushed back upward). is possible), the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a set condition pattern (conditions under which the sub-control board 940 controls the actuation mechanism 860). do.

FIG. 36E is a graph showing an example of a displacement pattern of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a situation where the position of the operation surface rises over time. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36(E) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Displacement pattern JE11 (solid line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface rises at a substantially constant displacement speed from time t1. In this pattern, the position Bmax is reached at time te. More specifically, in the displacement pattern JE11, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1, reaches position B1 at time t2, reaches position B2 at time t3, and reaches position B2 at time t4. This is a pattern in which the displacement reaches position B3 and rises at a displacement speed such that it reaches position Bmax at time te.

FIG. 36(F) is a graph showing an example of a movement force pattern showing a change over time in the movement force of the pressing operation device 1261, which is controlled according to a condition pattern set for the pressing operation device 1261. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 36(F) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Specifically, the operating force pattern JF11 (solid line) is the case where the condition pattern JA11 shown in FIG. This is a pattern of the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG.

According to the operation force pattern JF11, when the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JE11, the sub control board 940 performs the press operation in the period from time t0 to time t1 according to the condition pattern JA11. The operating force of the device 1261 is controlled to zero, at time t1, an operating force of reaction force Ma1 is generated, the operating force is maintained at reaction force Ma1 during the period from time t1 to time te, and at time te, a pressing operation is performed. The operating force of device 1261 is reduced to zero.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA11 is set and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), when the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is raised with the hand placed on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, The player presses the operation surface with an operation force smaller than the generated reaction force, and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is moved to the initial position by the operation force (reaction force) generated according to the operation force pattern JF11. From the time the robot starts rising from Bmin to the end point of the movement destination, ie, the position Bmax, the user can experience the sensation of being pushed back by a substantially constant reaction force.

The operating force pattern JF12 is a case where the condition pattern JA12 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set, and the player moves the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG. 36(E). This is a pattern of the operating force of the push operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the push operation device 1261 is pushed in order to raise it according to the above.

According to the operating force pattern JF12, when the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JE11, and according to the condition pattern JA12, the sub-control board 940 operates during the period from time t0 to time t1, according to the condition pattern JA12. Control the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero, generate an operating force of reaction force Ma1 at time t1, and increase the operating force approximately linearly from time t1 to time t2 from reaction force Ma1 to reaction force Ma2. The operating force is maintained at reaction force Ma2 during the period from time t2 to time t3, and the operating force is decreased approximately linearly from reaction force Ma2 to reaction force Ma1 from time t3 to time t4, and from time t4 to time t4. The operating force is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 during the period up to te, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is made zero at time te.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA12 is set and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), if you place your hand on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261. The player presses the operating surface with an operating force smaller than the generated reaction force, and the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is at the initial position due to the change in the operating force (reaction force) generated according to the operating force pattern JF12. After starting to rise from a certain position Bmin, a predetermined first reaction force is felt that pushes the operating surface back up to a certain position, but after that, the feeling of being pushed back gradually becomes stronger, and the operating surface is larger than the first reaction force. Experience a series of changes in the feeling of the operating surface being pushed back, such as feeling pushed back by a predetermined second reaction force, and as you feel the second reaction force pushing the operating surface back, the feeling of being pushed back becomes weaker again. I can do it.

The operating force pattern JF13 is a case where the condition pattern JA13 shown in FIG. 36(A) is set, and the player moves the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 to the displacement pattern JE11 shown in FIG. 36(E). This is a pattern of the operating force of the push operation device 1261 controlled by the sub-control board 940 when the push operation device 1261 is pushed in order to raise it according to the above.

According to the operating force pattern JF13, when the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the displacement pattern JE11, the sub-control board 940 performs the pressing operation in the period from time t0 to time t1 according to the condition pattern JA13. The operating force of the device 1261 is controlled to zero, the operating force is increased approximately linearly from zero to the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t4, and the operating force is increased to the reaction force Ma1 during the period from time t4 to time te. The operation force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero at time te.

Therefore, when the condition pattern JA13 is set and the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 rises at a substantially constant speed (displacement speed of the operation surface), when the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 is raised with the hand placed on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, The player presses the operating surface with an operating force smaller than the generated reaction force, and the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is at the initial position due to the change in the operating force (reaction force) generated according to the operating force pattern JF13. After starting to rise from a certain position Bmin, the feeling of being pushed back gradually becomes stronger until a certain position, and then the feeling of being pushed back with a substantially constant pushing force can be experienced.

FIG. 37(A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 37(A) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in FIG. 37(A) is such that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is in a direction opposite to the pressing direction (pushing direction) (hereinafter, the direction is This is a pattern in which the operation surface moves in the pressing direction after moving in the "return direction" (also referred to as the "return direction"). In the following description, a pattern in which the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled by specifying the elapsed time and the position of the operating surface will be described as a time versus position control pattern. Note that the control for moving the operation surface using the time versus position control pattern is not limited to the case where it is applied to the control of a device that operates the operation surface as an operated part that can be operated by the player. The present invention may be applied to the control of an effect device that performs an effect in which a player moves a part of his or her body in contact with an operation surface through the operation surface as an operation section that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body.

FIG. 37A illustrates condition patterns JA21 and JA22 as two types of time versus position control patterns. Note that these condition patterns JA21 and JA22 are only examples of condition patterns, and condition patterns of various shapes according to control conditions may be applied.

The plurality of condition patterns JA21 and JA22 are each associated with a predetermined situation (the type of effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479). When one of the situations associated with each of the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 occurs, the sub-control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the situation.

For example, the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 are respectively associated with effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and when one of the effects associated with the condition patterns is selected as an execution target, the sub control board 940 controls the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition pattern corresponding to the performance.

Condition pattern JA21 (solid line) is such that when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface starts rising from position Bmin at time t1, This pattern is such that after reaching position B2 at time t2, it begins to descend from position B2, and reaches position Bmin at time t3.

In other words, the condition pattern JA21 is such that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 changes from time t1 to time t2 regardless of whether the player's hand touches the operation surface or not. In this pattern, after being displaced in the return direction during the period, the moving direction of the operating surface changes to the pressing direction at time t2.

Condition pattern JA22 (dotted chain line) is such that when the initial position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface starts to rise from position Bmin at time t1. , reaches position B2 at time t2, is maintained at position B2 during the period from time t2 to time t3, begins to descend from position B2 at time t3, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

In other words, the condition pattern JA2w is such that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is in a state where the operation surface is touched by the player's hand or not, from time t1 to time t2. In this pattern, after being displaced in the return direction during a period, the position of the operation surface at time t2 (position B2) is maintained for a predetermined period, and then at time t4, the moving direction of the operation surface changes to the pressing direction.

FIG. 37(B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a change over time in the operating force of the player's operation on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 37(B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37(B), the player becomes able to perform a push operation on the push operation device 1261 at time t0, and then at time t1, the player presses the operation surface of the push operation device 1261. Press with the operating force MpX corresponding to a state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continue to keep the hand lightly on the operating surface until time te, and at time te, press the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Release the hand. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

FIG. 37(C) is a graph showing an example of a working force pattern showing a change over time in the working force of the pressing operation device 1261 according to the condition patterns JA21 and JA22 shown in FIG. 37(A). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 37(C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC21 (solid line) is the case when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37(B) when the condition pattern JA21 shown in FIG. 37(A) is set. This is the movement force pattern.

According to the operating force pattern JC21, when the condition pattern JA21 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB21, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 37, the reaction force Ma1 is larger than the operating force MpX in absolute value, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX, the operating surface is moved at time t1. The size is such that the operation surface can be raised at the same raising speed as the raising speed at which it is displaced from position Bmin to position B2 from time t2 to time t2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t2, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA21. rises to.

The sub-control board 940 generates escape force Mb2 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 37, the escape force Mb2 increases from time t2 when the player lightly places his/her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, presses the operation surface with the operation force MpX). The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin over time t3. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t2 to time t3 according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA21.

In addition, since the escape force Mb2 is generated at time t2, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t3, so that the sub-control board 940 operates at time t3 as shown in the operating force pattern JC21. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is made zero.

The operating force pattern JC22 (dotted chain line) indicates that when the condition pattern JA22 shown in FIG. 37(A) is set, the operation on the pressing operation device 1261 is performed with the operating force pattern JB21 shown in FIG. 37(B). This is the movement force pattern in case.

According to the operating force pattern JC21, when the condition pattern JA22 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB21, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t2, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA22. rises to.

The sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a reaction force MaX at time t2, and maintains the reaction force MaX from time t2 to time t3. Note that the reaction force MaX has a magnitude approximately equal to the operating force MpX. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at position B2 during the period from time t2 to time t3.

The sub-control board 940 generates escape force Mb1 at time t2. In the example shown in FIG. 37, the escape force Mb1 is smaller in absolute value than the escape force Mb1, and the escape force Mb1 is in a state where the player lightly places his/her hand on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, when the operation surface is The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which the operating surface is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time te when the operating surface is pressed with operating force MpX. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from time t3 to time te, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

FIG. 38(A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38(A) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261. The condition pattern shown in FIG. 38(A) is such that when the position (height) of the operation surface reaches a predetermined position (height), the operating force is maintained at that position (height). This is a pattern that includes control to output (hereinafter also referred to as constant position control), and is defined by the relationship between the position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 and the operating force of the press operation device 1261.

Condition pattern JA31 shown in FIG. 38(A) is that at position Bmax, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force (operating force) of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero, and in the section between position Bmax and position B2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force (operating force) of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero. The control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a predetermined reaction force MaA. The control pattern in the section between position Bmax and position B2 may be control based on a position versus operating force control pattern or control based on a time versus position control pattern. A case will be described in which control based on the action force control pattern is combined.

Condition pattern JA31 is a pattern in which constant position control is performed at position B2, in which the sub-control board 940 sets the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a value within the range from zero to Ma2 and against the pressing operation device 1261. Controls so that the reaction force corresponds to the operating force. This constant position control only needs to be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and the termination condition may include the elapse of time for which the constant position is maintained, the elapse of the progress time from the start of the effect in the variable display, Alternatively, various settings can be made, such as requiring an operating force above a certain level, inputting a predetermined operating pattern, or satisfying any of a plurality of conditions. Note that constant position control does not necessarily require control to be maintained at a single point such as position B2, but a reaction according to the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261 so that the position is maintained within a certain range. It may also be controlled to output force.

As condition pattern JA31, if the constant position control end condition is satisfied after constant position control is performed at position B2, the subsequent control pattern will not be consistent with time vs. position even if control based on the position vs. operating force control pattern is combined. Control using control patterns may be combined. In the following description, a case will be described in which control based on a position versus operating force control pattern is combined.

Regarding the control of the reaction force when the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is at position B2 in condition pattern JA31, more specifically, the sub control board 940 controls the reaction force when the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is zero or more and When it is less than Ma2, the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled to have the same magnitude as the operation force, and when the operation force on the pressing operation device 1261 exceeds Ma2, the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled to have the same magnitude as the operation force. The reaction force of the operating device 1261 is reduced to Ma2 and the operating surface is controlled to descend. This Ma2 is set, for example, as the maximum allowable operating force that is preset to prevent failure of the pressing operating device 1261, and when an excessive operating force is input, the increase in reaction force is suppressed. to release the constant position control and lower the operating surface to protect the pressing operating device 1261.

FIG. 38(B) is a graph showing an example of a displacement pattern showing a change over time in the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the condition pattern JA31 is set. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38(B) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

As shown in displacement pattern JB31 (solid line), the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and lowers from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t2. . When the operation surface reaches position B2, the height position is maintained at position B2 by constant position control.

After the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 reaches position B2 and at time t4, which is the end condition for constant position control, the sub-control board 940 controls the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 using a plurality of types of time vs. position control patterns. Move the control surface. Specifically, the sub-control board 940 performs control to generate a reaction force so that it descends at a predetermined descending speed as shown in the three types of displacement patterns JB31A to JB31C, or rises as shown by a dashed-dotted line JB31D. .

Here, the control of the pressing operation device 1261 by the sub-control board 940 other than during the constant position control (times t2 to t4) is controlled by the position vs. operating force control pattern and the time vs. position control pattern. 38 and 39, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

At time t2, the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the height position B2 where constant position control is performed, and from this time on, the sub-control board 940 performs constant position control and performs an operation of zero or more and less than Mp2. Generates a reaction force with the same magnitude as the operating force.

FIG. 38(C) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing changes over time in the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38(C) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JC31 shown in FIG. 38(C), the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with operating force MpA from time t0 to time t1, and then presses with operating force MpA. This continues until time t2a. If the player continues to press the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with the operation force MpA until time t2a even after time t2 when the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position B2, the sub-control board 940 controls the operation after time t2. The reaction force is increased so that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 remains at position B2.

FIG. 38(D) shows a change over time in the operational force of the pressing operating device 1261 that occurs according to the condition pattern JA31 when the pressing operating device 1261 is operated with the operating force pattern JC31 shown in FIG. 38(C). It is a graph showing an example of a motion force pattern. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38(D) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

As shown in FIG. 38(D), the sub-control board 940 increases the reaction force from the current value of the reaction force MaA to the same value as the operating force MpA after time t2. As a result, even if the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force MpA during the period from time t2 to time t2a, the operating surface remains at position B2.

After time t2a has elapsed, the operating force pattern JC31 is exemplified in which the player performs a pushing operation with a force greater than the operating force MpA because the player was unable to lower the operating surface by time t2a. Specifically, a case is illustrated in which the operating force of each push at time tA, time tB, and time tC increases as the operation time becomes later.

At each time tA, tB, and tC, when the player performs a push operation (an operation of briefly pressing the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 and immediately releasing the hand), a constant position control by the sub-control board 940 generates a force equal to the operation force. A reaction force is generated. As a result, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 cannot be lowered, and the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 remains at position B2, as shown in FIG. 38(B).

Here, after time t2, if a pushing operation is performed using an excessive operating force exceeding a certain level (for example, operating force Mpe) exceeding operating force Mp2, the sub-control board 940 cancels the fixed position control. control to lower the operating surface. This control can protect the pressing operation device 1261 from damage.

In addition, in condition pattern JA31, when the player stops the pushing operation (that is, takes his hand off the operating surface of the pushing operation device 1261), the reaction force is applied by a different operating force pattern than when the player continues the pushing operation. The sub-control board 940 may perform control so as to cause this to occur. For example, at time t1, if the player starts to lower the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, but stops the push operation before it descends to position B2, constant position control is not performed. Alternatively, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be configured to return to position Bmax, or if the player stops the pressing operation before descending to position B2, the operation surface may be moved to that position. Control may also be included to change the height position at which the constant position control is performed so that the height remains constant.

FIG. 38(E) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 38(E) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the vertical axis shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261.

The condition pattern JA32 shown in FIG. 38(E) is a pattern in which the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 operates according to the displacement pattern JB32 shown in FIG. 38(B), from the initial position toward the position where constant position control is performed. This is a pattern in which control is performed to raise the operating surface.

In condition pattern JA32, at position B2, the sub-control board 940 sets the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a value within the range from zero to Ma2 and corresponding to the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261. In the section between position B2 and position Bmin, the sub control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to a predetermined reaction force MaA.

In condition pattern JA32, reaction force control when the position of the operation surface of press operation device 1261 is position B2 is the same as in condition pattern JA31. In other words, when the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is greater than or equal to zero and less than Ma2, the sub-control board 940 controls the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 to be the same reaction force as the operating force. However, when the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is Ma2, the reaction force of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled to Ma2.

When the condition pattern JA32 is set, the sub-control board 940 controls the position of the operation surface in the press operation device 1261 so that the initial position of the operation surface (the position of the operation surface at time t0) becomes the position Bmin. After that, if the player continues to lightly place his/her hand on the operation surface (for example, press it with the operation force MpX) until time t2a, the sub-control board 940 will control the operation between time t0 and time t1. The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and a reaction force is generated in the interval from time t1 to t2 to raise the position of the operation surface.

When the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 reaches position B2, the sub-control board 940 starts constant position control. Regarding the control after starting this constant position control, the same control as in condition pattern JA31 can be performed, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 39(A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 39(A) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in FIG. 39(A) is such that after the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 pushes back the player's hand that is in contact with the operating surface, a predetermined time (in the example shown in FIG. 39(A) , time t4), the operation surface automatically moves in a predetermined direction when the user releases the hand from the operation surface, and is an example of a time versus position control pattern.

Condition pattern JA41 (solid line) is such that when the initial position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from position Bmax at time t1, This is a pattern in which after reaching position B2 at time t4, it begins to descend from position B2, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

Condition pattern JA42 (dotted chain line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from position Bmax at time t1 and reaches position B2 at time t4. This is a pattern in which it later starts descending from the position B2 and reaches the position Bmin at time t4b, which is before time te.

Condition pattern JA43 (double-dashed line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is position Bmax, the operation surface starts to descend from position Bmax at time t1 and reaches position B2 at time t4. This is a pattern in which the robot starts to rise from the position B2 after that, and reaches the position B3 at time te.

FIG. 39(B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing changes over time in the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 39(B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B), the player becomes able to perform a push operation on the push operation device 1261 at time t0, and then operates the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 at time t1. The user presses (pushes in) with the force Mp1, and then continues to press with the operating force Mp1 until time t4, and at time t4, the hand is released from the operation surface of the press operation device 1261. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time t4.

FIG. 39(C) shows the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 that occurs according to the set condition pattern when the operating force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B) is performed on the pressing operating device 1261. It is a graph which shows an example of the movement force pattern which shows. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 39(C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC41 (solid line) in FIG. 39(C) is the operating force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B) when the condition pattern JA41 shown in FIG. 39(A) is set. This is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC41, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB41, the sub-control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and then the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t4.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the reaction force Ma1 is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp1, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1, the reaction force Ma1 increases from time t1 to time t4. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same lowering speed as the displacement from position Bmax to position B2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t4, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA41. descend to.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates escape force Mb1 as shown in the operating force pattern JC41 when the player releases his hand from the operation surface, and performs the pressing operation from time t4 to time te. The operating force of the device 1261 is maintained at the escape force Mb1.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (displaces it in the pressing direction), and the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is zero. In some cases, the size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time te. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface to time te according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA41.

The operating force pattern JC42 (dotted chain line) in FIG. 39(C) is the operating force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B) when the condition pattern JA42 shown in FIG. 39(A) is set. This is the movement force pattern when an operation is performed on the .

According to the operating force pattern JC42, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB41, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA42 in the same behavior as when the condition pattern JA41 is set. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and lowers from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates escape force Mb2 as shown in operating force pattern JC42, triggered by the player's removal of his hand from the operation surface. In the example shown in FIG. 39, escape force Mb2 is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is zero, the escape force Mb2 is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261. The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin over time t4b (time before time te).

That is, the descending speed of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the relief force Mb2 is set is faster than the descending speed of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the escape force Mb1 is set. The greater the magnitude of the escape force generated after time t4 under the control of sub-control board 940, the faster the descending speed of the operation surface of press operation device 1261 from time t4 to time te.

Since the escape force Mb2 is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t4b, which is before time te, so that the sub-control board 940 operates as shown in the operating force pattern JC42. At time t4b, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is reduced to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface to time t4b according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA42.

The operating force pattern JC43 (double-dashed line) in FIG. 39(C) is the operating force pattern JB41 shown in FIG. 39(B) when the condition pattern JA43 shown in FIG. 39(A) is set. This is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed on 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC43, when the condition pattern JA41 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB41, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA43 in the same behavior as when the condition pattern JA41 is set. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and lowers from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force Ma1A as shown in the operating force pattern JC43, triggered by the player's removal of his hand from the operation surface. In the example shown in FIG. 39, the reaction force Ma1A increases at the same rate as the upward movement from position B2 to position B3 from time t4 to time te when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. The size is such that the operation surface can be raised at a speed.

As the reaction force Ma1A is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches position B3 at time te, so that the sub-control board 940 performs the pressing operation at time t4b, as shown in the operating force pattern JC42. The operating force of the operating device 1261 is set to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position B3 from time t4 when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface to time te according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA43.

Note that in a condition pattern similar to condition pattern JA43, in which the vehicle starts rising from position B2 after reaching position B2 at time t4, various rising speeds may be applied as the rising speed from time t4 to time te. . As a result, depending on the slope of the line segment from time t4 to time te in the condition pattern, the magnitude of the reaction force generated during the period from time t4 to time te in the operating force pattern may change, for example, before time t4 (more details). Ma1 may be the same as the reaction force during the period from time t1 to time t4), or may be a value greater than 0 and smaller than Ma1. The larger the magnitude of the reaction force generated by the control of the sub-control board 940 after time t4 is, the faster the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from time t4 to time te.

FIG. 40(A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 40(A) shows the position (height) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time. The condition pattern shown in FIG. 40(A) is such that after the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves in the direction of pushing back (that is, upward) the player's hand that is in contact with the operating surface, a predetermined time (FIG. 40(A) In the example shown in A), when the player releases his or her hand from the operation surface at time t4), the operation surface automatically moves in a predetermined direction. This is an example.

Condition pattern JA51 (solid line) is such that when the initial position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface starts rising from position Bmin at time t1, This is a pattern in which after reaching position B2 at time t4, it begins to descend from position B2, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

Condition pattern JA52 (dotted chain line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface in the push operation device 1261 is position Bmin, the operation surface starts rising from position Bmin at time t1 and reaches position B2 at time t4. This is a pattern in which it later begins to descend from the position B2 and reaches the position Bmin at time t4c, which is before time te.

Condition pattern JA53 (two-dot chain line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface in the push operation device 1261 is position Bmin, the operation surface starts rising from position Bmin at time t1 and reaches position B2 at time t4. This is a pattern in which the robot starts to rise from the position B2 after that, and reaches the position B3 at time te.

FIG. 40(B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing changes over time in the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 40(B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B), after the player becomes able to perform a pressing operation on the pressing operating device 1261 at time t0, the player presses the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 at time t1. Press with the operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continue to keep the hand lightly on the operating surface until time t4, and at time t4, press from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Release the hand. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time t4.

FIG. 40(C) shows the change over time in the operating force of the pressing operating device 1261 that occurs according to the set condition pattern when the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B) is performed on the pressing operating device 1261. It is a graph which shows an example of the movement force pattern which shows. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 40(C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC51 (solid line) in FIG. 40(C) is applied to the pressing operation device 1261 with the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B) when the condition pattern JA51 shown in FIG. 40(A) is set. This is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed.

According to the operating force pattern JC41, when the condition pattern JA51 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB51, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the reaction force Ma1 is larger than the operating force MpX in absolute value, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX, the operating surface is moved at time t1. The size is such that the operation surface can be raised at the same raising speed as the raising speed at which it is displaced from position Bmin to position B2 from time t4 to time t4. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t4, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA51. rises to.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates escape force Mb1 as shown in operating force pattern JC51 when the player releases his hand from the operation surface, and during the period from time t4 to time te, The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the relief force Mb1.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (displaces it in the pressing direction side), and the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is zero. In some cases, the size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time te. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface to time te according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA51.

The operating force pattern JC52 (dotted chain line) in FIG. 40(C) is the operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B) when the condition pattern JA52 shown in FIG. 40(A) is set. This is the movement force pattern when an operation is performed on the .

According to the operating force pattern JC52, when the condition pattern JA52 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB51, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA52 in the same behavior as when the condition pattern JA51 is set. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates escape force Mb2 as shown in operating force pattern JC52, triggered by the player's removal of his hand from the operation surface. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the relief force Mb2 is a force that lowers the operation surface of the push operation device 1261, and is larger in absolute value than the escape force Mb1, and the escape force Mb2 is a force that lowers the operation surface of the push operation device 1261. The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time t4c (time before time te) when the operating force is zero. be. That is, the descending speed of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the relief force Mb2 is set is faster than the descending speed of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 when the escape force Mb1 is set.

As the escape force Mb2 is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t4b before time te, so the sub-control board 940 operates as shown in the operating force pattern JC52. At time t4c, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is reduced to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface to time t4c according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA42.

The operating force pattern JC53 (double-dashed line) in FIG. 40(C) is the pressing operating force pattern JB51 shown in FIG. 40(B) when the condition pattern JA53 shown in FIG. 40(A) is set. This is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed on 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC53, when the condition pattern JA53 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB51, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, a reaction force Ma1 is generated at time t1, and the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 for a period from time t1 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA53 in the same behavior as when the condition pattern JA51 is set. That is, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and rises from position Bmin to position B2 from time t1 to time t4.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force Ma1A as shown in the operating force pattern JC53, triggered by the player's removal of his hand from the operation surface. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the reaction force Ma1A increases at the same rate as the displacement from position B2 to position B3 from time t4 to time te when the operating force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is zero. The size is such that the operation surface can be raised at a speed.

Since the reaction force Ma1A is generated at time t4, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position B3 at time te, so that the sub-control board 940 performs the pressing operation at time t4c, as shown in the operating force pattern JC52. The operating force of the operating device 1261 is set to zero. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position B3 from time t4 when the player releases his/her hand from the operation surface to time te according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA53.

Note that in a condition pattern similar to condition pattern JA53, in which the vehicle starts rising from position B2 after reaching position B2 at time t4, various rising speeds may be applied as the rising speed from time t4 to time te. . As a result, depending on the slope of the line segment from time t4 to time te in the condition pattern, the magnitude of the reaction force generated during the period from time t4 to time te in the operating force pattern may change, for example, before time t4 (more details). Ma1 may be the same as the reaction force during the period from time t1 to time t4), or may be a value greater than 0 and smaller than Ma1. The larger the magnitude of the reaction force generated by the control of the sub-control board 940 after time t4 is, the faster the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from time t4 to time te.

FIG. 41(A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41(A) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Condition pattern JA61 (solid line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmax, the operation surface descends substantially constant from time t1 to time te. This pattern descends at a speed and reaches position Bmin at time te, and is an example of a time versus position control pattern.

Condition pattern JA62 (dotted chain line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface in the press operation device 1261 is position Bmax, the operation surface descends at a substantially constant descending speed from time t1 to time t3, and then at time t3. This is a pattern in which it descends at a substantially constant descending speed that is different from the descending speed during the period from time t1 to time t3, and reaches position Bmin at time te.

FIG. 41(B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing changes over time in the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41(B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB61 (solid line), after the player becomes able to perform a push operation on the push operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1, the player presses the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 with the operation force Mp1. Thereafter, the pressing with the operating force Mp1 is continued until time te, and the hand is released from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 at time te. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operating force pattern JB62 (two-dot chain line), after the player becomes able to perform a push operation on the push operation device 1261 at time t0, the player moves the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 to the corresponding operation surface at time t1. is pressed with the operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface is continued until time te, and at time te, the hand is removed from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261. Let go. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operation force pattern JB63 (dotted chain line), after the player becomes able to press the push operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1, the maximum operation force is in the approximately isosceles triangular shape of Mp1A. After performing a pushing operation with a time width Wp1 (a pushing operation corresponding to the pushing pattern FA1) on the pushing operation device 1261, the hand is once removed from the operating surface, and at time t2, the maximum operating force is reached. After performing a substantially rectangular pushing operation Mp0A with a time width Wp2 (pushing operation corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2) on the pressing operation device 1261, the hand is once removed from the operation surface, and at time t3, After performing a pushing operation in a substantially isosceles trapezoid shape with a maximum operating force of Mp1A and a time width Wp3 (pushing operation corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3) on the pressing operation device 1261, the hand is moved to the operating surface. , and at time t4, a trapezoidal pushing operation with a maximum operating force of Mp2 and a time width Wp3 (a pushing operation corresponding to the pressing pattern FA4) was performed on the pressing operation device 1261. Then remove your hand from the operating surface.

FIG. 41(C) shows that when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the operation force pattern JB61, JB62, or JB63 shown in FIG. 41(B) is performed on the pressing operation device 1261, the condition 12 is a graph showing an example of a movement force pattern showing a change over time in the movement force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to pattern JA61. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41(C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC61 (solid line) shown in FIG. 41(C) is the operating force pattern JB61 shown in FIG. 41(B) when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set. This is the movement force pattern when an operation is performed on the .

According to the operating force pattern JC61, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB61, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , after setting the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero and generating a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time te, and at time te, The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1 is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp1, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1, the reaction force Ma1 increases from time t1 to time t3. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same lowering speed as the displacement from position Bmax to position B2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmax to position Bmin from time t1 to time te, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA61. descend to.

The operating force pattern JC62 (double-dashed line) shown in FIG. 41(C) is a pressing operation using the operating force pattern JB62 shown in FIG. 41(B) when the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set. This is an operating force pattern when an operation is performed on the device 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC62, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB62, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and at time t1, a relief force Mb1 is generated, and then, from time t1 to time te, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the relief force Mb1, and at time te, The operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb1 is a force that lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (displaces it in the pressing direction side), and when the operation force on the operation surface is MpX, The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA61. It further descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time te.

When the condition pattern JA61 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set, the operating force pattern JC63 (dotted chain line) shown in FIG. 41(C) is the operating force pattern JB63 shown in FIG. This is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed on 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC63, when the condition pattern JA61 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB63, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmax from time t0 to time t1 according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA61.

At time t1, after generating the escape force Mb0A, the sub-control board 940 generates the operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB1) corresponding to the pressing pattern FA1, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1A and the time width is Wp1. The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0A during the period from the time when the time width Wp1 has elapsed since the time t1 to the time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0A is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (displaces it in the pressing direction), and the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is zero. In some cases, the size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1A is the same descending speed as the descending speed of the displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1A. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at a speed.

Since the pressing pattern FA1 and the reaction force pattern FB1 have shapes that correspond to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves from the position Bmax to the position B3 from time t1 to time t2 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61. descend.

At time t2, the sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB2) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma0A and the time width is Wp2, and from time t2 The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0A during the period from the time when the time width Wp2 has elapsed to the time t3.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma0A is the same descending speed as the displacement from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp0A. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at a speed. Since the pressing pattern FA2 and the reaction force pattern FB2 have shapes that correspond to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves from position B3 to position B2 from time t2 to time t3 according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA61. descend.

At time t3, the sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB3) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1A and the time width is Wp3, and from time t3 The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0A during the period from the time when the time width Wp3 has elapsed to the time t4. Since the pressing pattern FA3 and the reaction force pattern FB3 have shapes that correspond to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves from the position B2 to the position B1 from time t3 to time t4 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA61. descend.

At time t4, the sub-control board 940 generates an operating force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FB4) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA4, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma2 and the time width is Wp4, and from time t4 After the relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0A from the time when the time width Wp4 has elapsed to the time te, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is made zero at the time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma2 is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp2, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp2, the reaction force Ma2 increases from time t1 to time t3. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same lowering speed as the displacement from position Bmax to position B2. Since the pressing pattern FA4 and the reaction force pattern FB4 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated from position B2 to position Bmin from time t4 to time te according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA61. descend.

FIG. 41(D) shows that when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with any of the operating force patterns JB61, JB62, and JB63 shown in FIG. 41(B), It is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a change over time in operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to condition pattern JA62. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 41(D) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JD61 (solid line) shown in FIG. 41(D) is the operating force pattern JB61 shown in FIG. 41(B) when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set. This is the movement force pattern when an operation is performed on the .

According to the operating force pattern JD61, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB61, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , after setting the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero and generating a reaction force Ma1 at time t1, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma1 from time t1 to time t3, and at time t3, After changing the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to the reaction force Ma0B, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force Ma0B from time t3 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma0B is smaller in absolute value than the operating force Mp1, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is the operating force Mp1, the reaction force Ma0B changes from time t3 to time The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin over time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA62. It further descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time t4. Note that in the operating force pattern JD61, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t4, so the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4. Make it.

The operating force pattern JD62 (double-dashed line) shown in FIG. 41(D) is a pressing operation using the operating force pattern JB62 shown in FIG. 41(B) when the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set. This is an operating force pattern when an operation is performed on the device 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JD62, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB62, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and the relief force Mb1 is generated at time t1, and then the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the relief force Mb1 from time t1 to time t3, and at time t3, After changing the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to the relief force Mb1A, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the relief force Mb1A from time t3 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb1A is a force that lowers (displaces in the pressing direction) the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and when the operating force on the operating surface is MpX, The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time t4.

As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA62. It further descends from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time 4. Note that in the operating force pattern JD61, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t4, so the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4. Make it.

When the condition pattern JA62 shown in FIG. 41(A) is set, the operating force pattern JD63 (dotted chain line) shown in FIG. 41(D) is the operating force pattern JB63 shown in FIG. This is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed on 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JD63, when the condition pattern JA62 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB63, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmax from time t0 to time t1 according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA62.

At time t1, after generating the relief force Mb0B, the sub-control board 940 operates a pattern (reaction force pattern FC1) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA1, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1B and the time width is Wp1. The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0B during the period from the time when the force is generated and the time width Wp1 has elapsed from the time t1 to the time t2.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0B is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and when the operating force on the operating surface is MpX, the escape force Mb0B is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261, and when the operating force on the operating surface is MpX, the escape force Mb0B is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at the same lowering speed as the lowering speed at which the operation surface is displaced from the position Bmin to the position Bmin. Since the pressing pattern FA1 and the reaction force pattern FC1 have shapes that correspond to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves from the position Bmax to the position B3 from time t1 to time t2 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62. descend.

At time t2, the sub-control board 940 generates a reaction force of a pattern (reaction force pattern FC2) having a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA2, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma0C and the time width is Wp2, and from time t2 The relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0B during the period from the time when the time width Wp2 has elapsed to the time t3.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0B is a force that lowers the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (displaces it in the pressing direction), and the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is zero. In some cases, the size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position Bmax to position B2 from time t1 to time t3.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 41, the reaction force Ma1A is the same descending speed as the descending speed of the displacement from the position Bmax to the position B2 from time t1 to time t3 when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1A. The size is such that the operation surface can be lowered at a speed. Since the pressing pattern FA2 and the reaction force pattern FC2 have shapes that correspond to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves from the position B3 to the position B2 from time t2 to time t3 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62. descend.

At time t3, after changing the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to the relief force Mb0C, the sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to the escape force Mb0C, and then generates a shape corresponding to the pressing pattern FA3, in which the maximum reaction force is Ma1B and the time width is Wp3. A reaction force of the pattern (reaction force pattern FC3) is generated, and the relief force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at Mb0B during a period from the time when a time width Wp3 has elapsed from time t3 to time t4.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the escape force Mb0C is a force that lowers the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 (displaces it in the pressing direction), and when the operation force on the operation surface is zero, The size is such that the operating surface can be lowered at the same descending speed as the descending speed at which it is displaced from position B2 to position Bmin from time t3 to time t4.

Since the pressing pattern FA3 and the reaction force pattern FC3 have shapes corresponding to each other, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves from the position B2 to the position B1 from time t3 to time t4 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA62. descend. Note that in the operating force pattern JD63, the position of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 reaches the position Bmin at time t4, so the sub-control board 940 sets the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to zero at time t4. Make it.

FIG. 42(A) is a graph showing an example of a condition pattern set as a control condition for the actuation mechanism 860. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 42(A) shows the position (height) of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

Condition pattern JA71 (solid line) indicates that when the initial position of the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 (the position of the operation surface at time t0) is position Bmin, the operation surface rises approximately constant from time t1 to time te. This is a pattern of rising at a speed and reaching position Bmax at time te, and is an example of a time versus position control pattern.

FIG. 42(B) is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing changes over time in the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 (that is, the pressing force on the operating surface). The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 42(B) shows the operating force applied to the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

According to the operating force pattern JB71 (solid line), after the player becomes able to perform a push operation on the push operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1, the player places his or her hand on the operation surface of the push operation device 1261. is pressed with the operating force MpX corresponding to the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface (that is, the pressing with the operating force MpX) is continued until time te, and the operating surface is pressed at time te. Let go of your hand. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operating force pattern JB72 (dotted chain line), after the player becomes able to press the push operation device 1261 at time t0, at time t1, the player moves the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 to the operation surface. Press with an operating force MpX corresponding to a state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then continue to maintain the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface until time t3, and at time t3, the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is increased to Ma1. Thereafter, pressing with the operating force Mp1 is continued until time te, and the hand is released from the operating surface at time te. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

According to the operating force pattern JB73 (two-dot chain line), after the player becomes able to perform a push operation on the push operation device 1261 at time t0, the player moves the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 to the operation surface at time t1. is pressed with the operating force MpX corresponding to a state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface, and then the state in which the hand is lightly placed on the operating surface is continued until time t2, and at time t2, the pressure on the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 is strengthened. , from time t2 to time te, the operating force on the pressing operation device 1261 is increased substantially linearly from MpX to Mp1, and at time te, the hand is released from the operating surface. Therefore, the operating force becomes zero at time te.

FIG. 42(C) shows that when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with any of the operating force patterns JB71, JB72, and JB73 shown in FIG. 42(B), It is a graph showing an example of an operating force pattern showing a change over time in operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 generated according to condition pattern JA71. The vertical axis of the graph shown in FIG. 42(C) shows the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261, and the horizontal axis shows the elapsed time.

The operating force pattern JC71 (solid line) shown in FIG. 42(C) is the operating force pattern JB71 shown in FIG. 42(B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42(A) is set. This is the movement force pattern when an operation is performed on the .

According to the operating force pattern JC71, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB71, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero, and after generating a reaction force MaX at time t1, the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is maintained at the reaction force MaX from time t1 to time te.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, the reaction force MaX is larger in absolute value than the operating force MpX, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is MpX, the reaction force MaX increases from time t1 to time te. The size is such that the operating surface can be raised at the same raising speed as the raising speed at which it is displaced from position Bmin to position Bmax. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at position Bmin from time t0 to time t1, and from position Bmin to position Bmax from time t1 to time te, according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA71. rises to.

When the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42(A) is set, the operating force pattern JC72 (dotted chain line) shown in FIG. 42(C) is the operating force pattern JB72 shown in FIG. This is a movement force pattern when an operation is performed on 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC72, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB72, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from time t0 to time t1 according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA71.

After generating the reaction force MaX at time t1, the sub-control board 940 maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force MaX from time t1 to time t3. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position Bmin to the position B2 from time t1 to time t3 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The sub-control board 940 changes the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 to Ma1 at time t3, and then maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force Ma1 from time t3 to time te. In the example shown in FIG. 42, the reaction force Ma1 is larger in absolute value than the operating force Mp1, and when the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is Mp1, the reaction force Ma1 increases from time t1 to time te. The size is such that the operating surface can be raised at the same raising speed as the raising speed at which it is displaced from position Bmin to position Bmax. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position Bmax from time t3 to time te according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA71.

The operating force pattern JC73 (two-dot chain line) shown in FIG. 42(C) is a pressing operation using the operating force pattern JB73 shown in FIG. 42(B) when the condition pattern JA71 shown in FIG. 42(A) is set. This is an operating force pattern when an operation is performed on the device 1261.

According to the operating force pattern JC73, when the condition pattern JA71 is set and the pressing operation device 1261 is operated using the operating force pattern JB73, the sub control board 940 will not operate from time t0 to time t1. , the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 is set to zero. Therefore, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is located at the position Bmin from time t0 to time t1 according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA71.

After generating the reaction force MaX at time t1, the sub-control board 940 maintains the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 at the reaction force MaX from time t1 to time t2. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from the position Bmin to the position B2 from time t1 to time t2 according to the conditions set as the condition pattern JA71.

The sub-control board 940 increases the operating force of the pressing operation device 1261 approximately linearly from MpX to Ma1 from time t2 to time te. As a result, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 rises from position B2 to position Bmax from time t2 to time te according to the conditions set as condition pattern JA71.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36(A) to 36(D), the sub-control board 940 allows the player to When the operating surface can be moved downward, which is the direction of the pushing operation, in a situation where a pushing operation (pressing) is performed, the reaction force in the pushing operation direction is under a predetermined first condition (for example, if Control that is controlled based on pattern JA11) and, when this control is the first control, control the reaction force in a part of the section (for example, the section from position B3 to position Bmin) with respect to the first control. The push operation direction (for example, condition pattern JA12) is based on a predetermined second condition (for example, condition pattern JA12) that includes a common control condition and a different control section (for example, a section from position Bmax to position B3) with respect to the first control. It is configured to be able to execute at least a control (for example, a second control different from the first control) in which the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled.

Here, the sub control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display that includes an operable period in which the push operation device 1261 can be operated during the period of the variable display, and A plurality of performances with different expectations (expectations of transition to a special gaming state) are configured to appear when the push operation device 1261 is operated during the operable period, and each of these multiple performances with different expectations Condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are associated with each other, and the sub control board 940 executes the first control when the first effect is to be executed among the plurality of effects with different expectations, and executes the control as the first effect. The configuration may be such that the second control is executed when a second performance with a different degree of expectation is executed.

According to this configuration, when the first effect or the second effect is executed in a specific variable display, in at least some sections of each effect (i.e., sections where the conditions for controlling the reaction force are common), the push Since the player can feel the same reaction force as the reaction force in the operation direction, in this section, the player can determine whether the performance being executed is the first performance or not based on the feeling of the reaction force. It is difficult to determine whether this is a second performance with a different level of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player can expect the level of expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of performances with different levels of expectation.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36(A), 36(E), and 36(F), the sub-control board 940 allows the player to In a situation where the operation surface is pressed downward, or when the player's hand (part of the body) is in contact with the operation surface, the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation (i.e. , upward), the reaction force in at least a portion of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition (for example, condition pattern JA11). When the control and the first control are set as the first control, the conditions for controlling the reaction force in a part of the section (for example, the section from the position B3 to the position Bmin) are common, and the first control Control refers to control (e.g., second control different from the first control) that is controlled based on a predetermined second condition (e.g., condition pattern JA12) in which the reaction force in the part of the section is different. At least configured to be executable.

Here, the configuration is such that condition patterns JA11 to JA14 are associated with each of a plurality of performances with different expectations, and the sub-control board 940 executes the first performance among the multiple performances with different expectations. The second control may be executed when the first effect is executed, and the second control is executed when a second effect having a different degree of expectation from the first effect is executed.

According to this configuration, in the first performance and the second performance that can be executed in a specific variable display, the reaction force is different in at least a part of the section in the opposite direction (the direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation). Therefore, in a situation where the player's hand (part of the body) is in contact with the operating part, or in a situation where the player is pressing the operation surface in the direction of the push operation, the said one In the second section, it is difficult for the player to determine from the feeling of the reaction force whether the performance being executed is the first performance or the second performance with a different level of expectation from the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player can expect the level of expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of performances with different levels of expectation.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36(A) to 36(D), the sub-control board 940 allows the player to move the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in a predetermined direction. When a push operation (movement operation) is performed along a certain downward direction, a reaction force acting in the opposite direction to the direction of the push operation (reaction force resisting the push operation device 1261) is generated according to condition pattern JA14. A control in which the operation surface advances downward, and a control in which the operation surface advances downward (in the direction of the movement operation) after the first control is performed when the control is set as the first control. ) and a control for controlling the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 (for example, a second control different from the first control).

Therefore, after the player feels a reaction force resisting the pushing operation while moving the operating surface of the pushing operation device 1261 downward by the pushing operation (moving operation), the operating surface is moved downward by the second control. By moving downward, which is the direction of the push-in operation, the reaction force feels smaller, and in some cases, the movement (movement in the direction of the push-in operation) causes the operation surface to move downward. If the moving speed is too fast, a situation may arise in which the hand that performs the pushing operation on the operating surface becomes detached from the operating surface. Thereby, it is possible to add surprise to the player's pressing operation on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, and it is possible to provide various gaming features using the pressing operation device 1261.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , control to generate a reaction force that can move the operation surface upward, which is the opposite direction to the direction of the push operation on the push operation device 1261 (for example, from time t1 to time t2 performed according to condition pattern JA21). control in the section), and when the control is set as the first control, the operation surface is moved in the direction of the push operation (i.e., downward) after the first control is performed. It is configured to be able to execute at least a control that controls operations (for example, a second control different from the first control, and a control in the period from time t2 to time t3 performed according to condition pattern JA21).

Therefore, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, the player can move the operation surface upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation). After feeling the reaction force, the second control causes the operation surface to move in the direction of the pushing operation, making it feel like the reaction force has become smaller, and in some cases, the operation surface moves in the direction of the pushing operation. A situation may arise in which the downward movement speed of the operating surface due to the sideward movement is too fast, causing the hand (part of the player's body) that has been in contact with the operating surface to separate from the operating surface. This makes it possible to add surprise to the feel that the player receives from the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, which can move upward in the opposite direction to the direction of the pressing operation when the player's hand is in contact with the pressing operation device 1261. , it is possible to provide a variety of games using the press operation device 1261.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38(A) to 38(D), the sub-control board 940 allows the player to move the operating surface of the pressing operating device 1261 in a predetermined direction. When a pushing operation (moving operation) is performed along a certain downward direction, a reaction force acting in the opposite direction to the direction of the pushing operation (reaction force resisting the pressing operation device 1261) is generated while moving along the downward direction. Control in which the operation surface advances (for example, control in the section from position Bmax to position B2 performed according to condition pattern JA31), and when the control is set as the first control, the operation surface is activated after the first control is performed. Control (for example, the first control) that controls the operation of the push operation device 1261 to generate a reaction force that is held at a constant position (for example, position B2) in the downward direction (in the direction of the push operation) It is configured to be able to execute at least a different second control (control at position B2 performed according to condition pattern JA31).

Therefore, after the player feels a reaction force resisting the pressing operation while moving the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 downward through the pressing operation, the player feels the reaction force generated by the control by the second control. Because the operating surface is held in a fixed position downward (in the direction of the pushing operation), the user feels that the operating surface, which was being moved in a predetermined direction by the user's pushing operation, suddenly stops moving. Thereby, it is possible to add surprise to the player's movement operation on the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, and it is possible to provide various gaming features using the press operation device 1261.

Note that in the condition pattern JA31 shown in FIG. 38(A), the sub-control board 940, in the second control performed after performing the first control, maintains the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 at a fixed position downward. The operation of the push operation device 1261 is controlled so as to generate a reaction force that is maintained, but in the second control, the reaction force that causes the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 to be maintained within a certain range in the downward direction is controlled. The configuration may be such that the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled so as to generate this. According to this configuration, the player can perform the pressing operation by his or her own pressing operation because the operating surface is held within a certain range in the downward direction by the reaction force generated by the second control. Since the user feels that the movement of the operating surface that was previously moving downward has suddenly deteriorated, it is possible to similarly give a sense of surprise to the player's movement operation of the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. In a situation where the operation surface is pressed upwardly (in the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261), a control (for example, according to condition pattern JA31) that generates a reaction force that can move the operation surface control in the section from position Bmin to position B2), and when this control is set as the first control, the operation surface is held at a predetermined position (for example, position B2) after performing the first control. It is possible to perform at least a control that controls the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 to generate a reaction force (for example, a second control different from the first control and a control at position B2 performed according to condition pattern JA32). It is composed of

Therefore, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, after feeling a reaction force that allows the player to move the operation surface upward, the second control The user feels that the operating surface suddenly stops moving because the operating surface is held in a predetermined position by the reaction force generated by the control. As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the player, the feeling that the player receives from the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 that can move upward (in the opposite direction of the push operation) is unexpected. It is possible to provide various playability using the press operation device 1261.

Note that in the condition pattern JA32 shown in FIG. 38(D), the sub-control board 940 performs the second control after performing the first control such that the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is held at a predetermined position. Although the configuration is such that the operation of the push operation device 1261 is controlled so as to generate a reaction force that A configuration may also be adopted in which the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 is controlled. According to this configuration, the player can maintain the operation surface within a predetermined range by the reaction force generated by the second control, so that in a situation where the player's hand is in contact with the operation surface, It is possible to add surprise to the feel that the player receives from the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 that is movable upward, which is the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the sub-control board 940 controls the player's hand (part of the body) and the pressing operation device 1261 that is pressed by the hand. Operation control for operating the operating surface in a first manner when a predetermined moving operation is performed in which the operating surface moves downward, which is the direction of the pushing operation, and the user's hand is removed from the operating surface ( For example, the control in the period from time t4 to time te performed according to condition pattern JA41) and the operation of operating the operating surface in a second mode different from the first mode when the predetermined movement operation is performed. The controller is configured to be able to at least execute control (for example, control in the period from time t4 to time t4 performed according to condition pattern JA42).

Therefore, when the former motion control (for example, the first motion control) is performed and when the latter motion control (for example, the second motion control) is performed, the player's hand and the pushing operation by the hand are different. When a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand leaves the operation surface after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 moves downward, the mode of operation of the operation surface can be made different. .

For example, if a predetermined situation occurs where the player's hand leaves the operating surface after the player's hand and the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 on which the pushing operation is performed by the hand move downward. , as in condition pattern JA41 and condition pattern JA43, the operation surfaces may be moved to different positions (for example, different positions in the height direction such as position Bmin or position B3), or condition pattern JA41 and condition As in pattern JA43, the moving speed of the operation surface can be made different. This makes it possible to add surprise to the player's operation of moving the operation surface of the press operation device 1261, and to provide a variety of gaming features using the press operation device 1261.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. When a predetermined situation occurs in which the hand leaves the operating surface after the device is displaced upward, which is the direction opposite to the direction of the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 1261, the operating surface is moved in the first mode. Operation control to operate (for example, control in the interval from time t4 to time te performed according to condition pattern JA51), and when the predetermined situation occurs, the operation surface is controlled in a second mode different from the first mode. The controller is configured to be able to at least execute operation control (for example, control in the period from time t4 to time t4c performed according to condition pattern JA52).

Therefore, when the former motion control (for example, first motion control) is performed and when the latter motion control (for example, second motion control) is performed, the player's hand contacts the hand. When a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand leaves the operation surface after the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is displaced upward (in the direction opposite to the direction of the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 1261). The mode of operation of the operation surface can be made different.

For example, if a predetermined situation occurs in which the player's hand leaves the operation surface after the player's hand and the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 with which the hand comes into contact move upward, the condition pattern As with JA51 and condition pattern JA53, the operation surfaces may be moved to different positions (for example, different positions in the height direction, such as position Bmin or position B3), or condition pattern JA51 and condition pattern JA53 The speed of movement of the operating surface can be changed as shown in FIG. As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the player, the feeling that the player receives from the operation surface of the push operation device 1261 that can move upward (in the opposite direction of the push operation) is unexpected. It is possible to provide various playability using the press operation device 1261.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The operation surface generates a predetermined reaction force that moves downward in the direction of the pushing operation in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA61, which is a combination of movement speed and movement amount), and When the operating force of the player on the operation surface is different from the above-mentioned magnitude, the operation surface operates in the movement movement pattern, or the movement of the operation surface approaches the movement movement pattern. It is configured to be able to at least execute control to generate a reaction force having a magnitude different from a predetermined reaction force.

Therefore, even if the player operates the operating surface of the push operation device 1261 with a predetermined operating force, even if the player operates the operating surface with an operating force that is different from the predetermined magnitude. Even if there is, the operation surface is moved downward (in the direction of the push operation) in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA61) or in a pattern that is similar to or substantially the same as the movement operation pattern. It can be operated as follows. As a result, even if the operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 varies due to individual differences among players, each player can perform the same or similar (substantially the same) movement operation pattern as the predetermined movement operation pattern. Since the operation surface can be moved downward, it is possible to provide all players with the ability to operate the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 in the same or substantially the same pattern.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. If the contact force with which the operating surface contacts the operating surface (a part of the A predetermined reaction force that operates in a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA71, which is a combination of movement speed and movement amount) in the direction opposite to the direction of movement) is generated, and the contact force is When the magnitude is different from the magnitude, the operation surface operates in the pattern of the movement motion, or the motion of the operation surface approaches the pattern of the motion motion, or when the magnitude of the operation force is different from the magnitude. control for generating a reaction force having a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force so that the operation surface moves according to the movement movement pattern, or so that the movement of the operation surface approaches the movement movement pattern; be configured to be at least executable.

Therefore, even if the contact force on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 by the player or the operation force on the operation surface is a predetermined magnitude or a magnitude different from the predetermined magnitude, the operation surface cannot be moved. , a predetermined movement operation pattern (for example, condition pattern JA71), or a pattern similar to or substantially the same as the movement operation pattern in the upward direction (opposite direction to the predetermined direction). can. As a result, even if the contact force and operating force on the operating surface of the pressing operation device 1261 vary due to individual differences among players, each player can perform the same or similar (approximately the same) movement operation pattern to the predetermined movement operation pattern. ) Since the operating surface can be moved upward in a pattern, it is possible to provide all players with the gameplay of operating the operating surface of the press operating device 1261 in the same or substantially the same pattern.

Note that the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display that includes an operable period during which the press operation device 1261 can be operated during the variable display period, and to perform operations on the specific variable display. In a case where a plurality of performances with different expectations (expectations for transition to a special game state) can appear when the push operation device 1261 is operated during the possible period, the sub control board 940 When a predetermined first effect is executed as a effect in the variable display, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can be moved downward (in the direction corresponding to the push operation) at a predetermined movement speed. The control for controlling the operation, and when a second performance with a different expectation level from the first performance is executed as a performance in the specific variable display, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 is set at the predetermined movement speed. It may be configured to be able to at least execute control for controlling the operation of the pressing operation device 1261 so as to be able to move downward at different speeds.

According to this configuration, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 moves downward (in the direction corresponding to the push operation) when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed in a specific variable display. Since the moving speed of the operating surface can be made different, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows the player to guess the degree of expectation of the effect to be performed in a specific variable display based on the moving speed of the operating surface.

Further, the sub-control board 940 is configured to be able to select and execute a specific variable display including an operable period in which the push operation device 1261 can be operated during the variable display period, and to perform operations on the specific variable display. In a case where a plurality of performances with different expectations (expectations for transition to a special game state) can appear when the push operation device 1261 is operated during the possible period, the sub control board 940 When a predetermined first effect is executed as a effect in the variable display, the operation surface of the press operation device 1261 can move upward at a predetermined movement speed (direction corresponding to the direction opposite to the push operation). Control for controlling the operation of the press operating device 1261, and when a second effect having a different expectation level from the first effect is executed as the effect in the specific variable display, the operation surface of the press operating device 1261 is set to the predetermined level. It may be configured to be able to at least control the operation of the press operation device 1261 so as to be able to move upward at a speed different from the movement speed of the press operation device 1261 .

According to this configuration, the pressing operation moves upward (corresponding to the direction opposite to the pressing operation) when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed in a specific variable display. Since the moving speed of the operation surface of the device 1261 can be varied, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the player can estimate the degree of expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display based on the movement speed of the operation surface.

Next, as the control of the above-mentioned sub-control board 940, a control example will be described in which the control for the press operation device 1261 and the control for the decorative pattern display device 479 are combined. Each control described below may be combined with one or more of the controls described in each embodiment above, and among all controls that combine each control described below and the control described in the above embodiments. , some of them may be set in the pachinko machine 100, or all controls may be set in the pachinko machine 100.

First, the control of the sub-control board 940 may include control to vary the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 according to a plurality of types of gaming states.

Specifically, in a normal gaming state and a gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a variable probability gaming state), the operating force (reaction) of the pressing operation device 1261 for the same display performance is They may be configured to have different forces. For example, as shown in FIG. 33, the operating force required when a "school of fish" is displayed may be controlled so that it is low in the normal game state, high in the time-saving game state, and even higher in the variable probability game state. good.

Further, the control of the sub-control board 940 may include a control that operates in relation to the pattern displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 and the height position of the operation surface of the press operation device 1261. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 7, when the decorative symbol display device 479 is composed of three rows of reels, during the variable display, the left and right symbols are the same except for the center symbol row (reach symbols). The center symbol row that reaches the ready-to-reach state and finally stops and the height position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may be operated in relation to each other. In this case, in the ready-to-reach state, the ready-to-reach symbol may move up and down near the position aligned with the left and right symbols, and in synchronization with this, the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 may move up and down. In a situation where this reach symbol moves up and down near the position where the left and right symbols line up, when the player presses down on the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261, it is synchronized with (or linked to) the pressing operation. The reach symbol may be controlled to move downward.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the pressing operation device 1261, an operation section capable of transmitting a reaction force to the player is configured to be able to be operated in the rotational direction, and the reach symbols are arranged on the left and right sides. In a situation where the symbols are moved up and down in the vicinity of the positions lined up with the symbols, when the player rotates the operating unit, the ready-to-reach symbols may be controlled to move up and down in synchronization with the rotational operation.

Further, the sub-control board 940 may be configured to perform control including other conditions as conditions for differentiating the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261 (operation amount difference conditions). Other operating force difference conditions may be the number of times non-winning fluctuating displays have been executed since winning the previous special symbol lottery (jackpot win), or the number of times the non-winning fluctuating display has been executed since the previous special symbol lottery (jackpot win) was won. It may also be the magnitude of the gaming value given to the player (for example, the number of rounds in a special gaming state set in a plurality of types).

In addition, as the operating force difference condition, the operating force may be varied depending on the type of symbol set to multiple types used for the variable display (for example, numbers from "1" to "9"), or the operating force may be varied depending on the type of symbol set to multiple types used for the variable display (for example, numbers from "1" to "9"), The operating force may be varied depending on the type, such as whether it is an even number or an even number. Further, as the operating force difference condition, the operating force may be varied depending on the types of characters set to a plurality of types that are displayed along with the variable display or the items that the characters have.

Furthermore, as a control of the sub-control board 940, instead of or in addition to the control that varies the operating force (reaction force) of the pressing operation device 1261, the operation (operation) of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 is It may be configured to include control for varying speed (operation speed), operation amount (operation amount), operation availability (operation presence/absence), etc. For example, when a performance in which a character imitating an adult male is displayed is executed in conjunction with a variable display, a large hand is displayed together with the reach symbol on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and the reach symbol is moved. When the effect in which a character imitating a girl is displayed is executed in conjunction with the variable display, a small hand is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 together with the reach pattern, The reaction force may be controlled to be large so that it is impossible to move the reach symbol.

<18th embodiment>
Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. The pachinko machine 100 of the 18th embodiment is designed to suitably increase the attention to the pachinko machine 100, which is configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages.

In the following description, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 100 of each embodiment from the first embodiment to the seventeenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the configuration described below as the 18th embodiment may be added to the configuration included in the pachinko machine 100 by combining with any configuration or multiple configurations of the above-described first to 17th embodiments. However, it may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in any one of the first to seventeenth embodiments described above.

The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured to be able to set one stage among a plurality of types of stages prepared in advance as a stage for variable display effects that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. This stage setting corresponds to control that causes the sub-control board 940 to store information corresponding to the stage in a storage area that stores information corresponding to the stage. In this embodiment, as an example, a pachinko machine 100 will be described in which three types of stages consisting of stage A, stage B, and stage C are prepared as stages for variable display effects that can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. do.

In addition, "stage" refers to the type of decorative pattern 1621 (see FIG. 44) in the variable display of the special pattern, the type of background 1631 (see FIG. 44) that becomes the background image of the decorative pattern 1621 in the variable display of the special pattern, and the special The melody of the fluctuating sound that is output in synchronization with the fluctuating display of symbols, the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261 (e.g., neutral position, operating force pattern, etc.), the symbols that appear in the fluctuating display of special symbols, suggestive effects, etc. (e.g., (characters, etc.), and one stage is configured by one component or a combination of multiple components. Differences in stages are created by differences in at least a portion of one or more components constituting the stages.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the player can change these three types of stages by pressing the pressing operation device 1261 during a predetermined period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a "stage changeable period"). One stage to be set in the pachinko machine 100 (that is, used by the player) can be selected from among them, and the selected stage can be set. Note that the stage changeable period is, for example, during a non-gaming state (standby) and during variable display.

Specifically, each time the player presses the press operation device 1261 during the stage changeable period, if the stage being set (currently set) is stage A, the sub control board 940 If the stage B selected by the push operation is switched to and set, and the stage being set is stage B, the stage C is switched to and set selected by the push operation, and if the stage being set is stage C. , the stage A selected by the pressing operation is switched and set. Note that the pachinko machine 100 does not need to be configured to allow the player to select a stage, and may be configured such that the stages are set or switched only by the settings of the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, among the variable displays that can be displayed on the stage being set, the variable display time (variable time) is a variable display (normal game) with a predetermined length (for example, 10 seconds). This is a short-term fluctuating display that is selected with the highest probability in the state, and is a fluctuating display that does not involve a reach display; hereinafter, this fluctuating display is also referred to as a "loss fluctuating"). Control of the pachinko machine 100 (in more detail is configured such that another stage is selected by the control of the sub-control board 940) and set in the pachinko machine 100.

Specifically, if the stage being set (currently set) is stage A, the sub-control board 940 controls the control board 940 to control the control board 940 when the loss fluctuation corresponding to the stage A occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in a row. , the stage is switched to the selected stage B under the control of the sub-control board 940. Further, if the stage being set is stage B, if the loss fluctuation corresponding to the stage B occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in succession, the stage is switched to the selected stage C under the control of the sub-control board 940. Set. Further, if the stage being set is stage C, if the loss fluctuation corresponding to the stage C occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in succession, the stage A is switched to the selected stage A under the control of the sub-control board 940. Set.

Note that the number of losing fluctuations as a condition for switching the stage being set by the sub control board 940 to another stage does not necessarily have to be the same for all stages, and the number of losing fluctuations as the condition is The configuration may be different for each stage, or even in the same stage, the number of losing changes as the condition is not constant and fluctuates, for example, a stage change lottery with a predetermined probability of winning. The configuration may be such that the condition is satisfied.

FIG. 43(A) is a screen diagram showing an example of a variable display screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and FIG. 43(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of each of the three types of stages. It is. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display executed at each stage.

As shown in FIG. 43(A), the variable displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 are arranged in the left-right direction so that the lottery results of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) can be displayed. The decorative pattern 1621 includes a decorative pattern 1621 and a background 1631 that is a background image of the decorative pattern 1621. Each data of the decorative pattern 1621 and the background 1631 is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub-control board 940, and the sub-control board 940 displays the decorative pattern 1621 and the background 1631 in combination on the decorative pattern display device 479.

As shown in FIG. 43(B), the three types of stages (stage A, stage B, and stage C) prepared in a configurable manner have different symbol types for the decorative patterns 1621 in the variable display, and The background types of the backgrounds 1631 are different.

Specifically, the pattern type of the decorative pattern 1621 in the variable display for stage A is set to pattern type A. Symbol type A is a symbol that includes both a number indicating a numerical value (for example, 1) and a character corresponding to the number (for example, an octopus character corresponding to 1) as numerical information, as shown in FIG. 44(A). Constructed as.

The background type of the background 1631 in the variable display for stage A is set to background type A. Background type A is configured as a "daytime" background image when the sun has risen in the sky, as shown in FIG. 44(B).

The pattern type of the decorative pattern 1621 in the variable display for stage B is set to pattern type B. The symbol type A is configured as a symbol including a number indicating a numerical value (for example, 1) as numerical information, as shown in FIG. 44(C). That is, in stage B, a symbol that looks different from the symbol type A symbol set in stage A is set.

Background type B is set as the background type of the background 1631 in the variable display for stage B. Background type B is configured as an "evening" background image when the sun is sinking below the horizon, as shown in FIG. 44(D). That is, in stage B, the background 1631, which is a display portion unrelated to the appearance of the decorative pattern 1621 in the variable display, is set to a different type of content from the content of background type A set in stage A.

The symbol type of the decorative symbol 1621 in the variable display for stage C is set to symbol type C. The symbol type C is configured as a symbol including a number indicating a numerical value (for example, 1) as numerical information, as shown in FIG. 44(E). That is, in stage C, a symbol that looks different from both the symbol type A symbol and the symbol type B symbol is set.

Background type C is set as the background type of the background 1631 in the variable display for stage C. Background type B is configured as a "night" background image with the moon rising in the sky, as shown in FIG. 44(F). That is, in stage C, the background 1631, which is a display portion that is not related to the appearance of the decorative pattern 1621 in the variable display, is set to a type of content that is different from the content of background type A and the content of background type B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 43(B), in Stage A, Stage B, and Stage C, among the fluctuation displays that can be displayed in each stage, the music that is output as the background sound of the losing fluctuation is the image of each stage. Each one is set to different music. In addition, even if you win in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery), or in the case of a non-winner in the special symbol lottery and in a fluctuating display with a reach display, from the start of the fluctuating display, During a certain period of time, such as the period until the reach display, background sounds corresponding to each stage are output, similar to the loss fluctuations.

In addition, below, the music output as a background sound of a fluctuation display is also called a "fluctuation sound," and especially the fluctuation sound output as a background sound of a loss fluctuation is also called a "lose fluctuation sound."

Specifically, the loss fluctuation sound in stage A is set to loss fluctuation sound A, which is music with a melody that matches the "daytime" image indicated by background pattern A. As the loss fluctuation sound in stage A, loss fluctuation sound B is set, which is music with a melody that matches the image of "evening" shown by background pattern B and has a different taste from loss fluctuation sound A. The loss fluctuation sound in stage C is music with a melody that matches the image of "night" shown by the background pattern C, and the loss fluctuation sound C is music that has a different flavor from both the loss fluctuation sound A and the loss fluctuation sound B. Ru.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the loss fluctuation sound in each stage is composed of multiple types of loss fluctuation sounds that have the same image melody for each stage but have different atmospheres due to differences in tone, melody, etc. .

Specifically, the losing fluctuating sound A includes three types of losing fluctuating sounds (losing fluctuating sound A1, It consists of a loss fluctuation sound A2 and a loss fluctuation sound A3). Each musical tone data of the losing fluctuating sound A (losing fluctuating sounds A1 to A3) is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub control board 940.

The losing fluctuating sound B is composed of three types of losing fluctuating sounds (losing fluctuating sound B1, losing fluctuating sound B2) that have the melody of the "evening" image shown by the background pattern B (for example, a bright jazz-like sound), but each with a different atmosphere. , and loss fluctuation sound B3). Note that each musical tone data of the losing fluctuating sound B (losing fluctuating sounds B1 to B3) is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub control board 940.

The losing fluctuating sound C is composed of three types of losing fluctuating sounds (lose fluctuating sound C1, losing fluctuating sound C2) that have the melody of the "night" image shown by the background pattern C (for example, a dark minor key sound), but each with a different atmosphere. , and loss fluctuation sound C3). Note that each musical tone data of the losing fluctuating sound C (losing fluctuating sounds C1 to C3) is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the sub control board 940.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in a situation where loss fluctuations occur consecutively multiple times (that is, a situation where unit games that have not won the special symbol lottery are continuously suspended), the sub control board 940 controls the loss change. Each time the variation is executed, control is executed to sequentially switch and output a plurality of types of loss variation sounds corresponding to the loss variation of the stage being set.

For example, when the stage being set is stage A, the sub control board 940 switches the current loss fluctuation sound to the loss fluctuation sound A2 if the current loss fluctuation sound is A1 every time the loss fluctuation is executed once, If the current loss fluctuation sound is the loss fluctuation sound A2, it is switched to the loss fluctuation sound A3, and if the current loss fluctuation sound is the loss fluctuation sound A3, it is switched to the loss fluctuation sound A1 and output.

Note that the condition for switching multiple types of loss fluctuation sounds corresponding to the loss fluctuation of the stage being set does not necessarily have to be every time the loss fluctuation is performed, but may be a predetermined number of times of 2 or more. Alternatively, the sub-control board 940 may perform a losing change a number of times less than the number of losing changes (for example, 20 times) as a condition for switching the stage being set to another stage. Further, it is not necessarily necessary to switch the losing variation sound within the same stage by a fixed number of times, and the losing variation sound within the stage may be switched by performing the losing variation two or more types of times. For example, a different number of times may be set depending on the type of loss fluctuation sound, such as the loss fluctuation sound A1 means that the loss fluctuation is performed once, and the loss fluctuation sound A2 means that the loss fluctuation is performed twice. , For example, in the same losing variation sound, switching of the losing variation sound that is established with a predetermined lottery probability (for example, 1/2) is performed so that the losing variation sound is switched by executing two or more types of losing variation sounds. The losing fluctuating sound may be switched when the player wins the lottery.

When the first stage is set and the decorative pattern display device 479 displays a variable display of the decorative pattern 1621, the sub control board 940 controls the variable display of the display target in the stage being set (the first stage). A fluctuating sound based on musical tone data corresponding to is outputted from the audio devices 281 and 282 (see FIG. 10) in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the display target. As a result, each time the stage settings are switched, a fluctuating sound corresponding to the switched stage is output in synchronization with the fluctuating display.

In particular, in a situation where loss fluctuations occur multiple times in succession, each time loss fluctuation is executed, the sub control board 940 selects the current loss fluctuation sound among multiple types of loss fluctuation sounds corresponding to the loss fluctuation of the stage being set. The fluctuation sound based on the fluctuation sound data of the loss fluctuation sound different from the loss fluctuation sound is changed to the loss fluctuation corresponding to the stage (for example, if the stage being set is stage A, the symbol type of the decorative pattern 1621 is symbol type A). is output from the audio devices 281 and 282 in synchronization with the loss variation in which the background type of the background 1631 is background type A).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the sub-control board 940 controls the push operation device 1261 (from Specifically, control is executed to operate the actuation mechanism 860).

More specifically, when a stage is set, the sub control board 940 determines that the neutral position of the press operation device 1261, which is one of the elements constituting the specifications of the press operation device 1261, is the stage (set stage). Control is executed to operate the pressing operation device 1261 so that the position corresponds to . As a result, when the stage is switched by the control of the player or the pachinko machine 100, the specifications of the press operating device 1261 are switched to a different specification at the neutral position of the press operating device 1261.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(B), different neutral positions BN of the pressing operation device 1261 are set for each stage, stage A, stage B, and stage C. Note that the neutral position BN indicates the position of the operation surface of the pressing operation device 1261 in the neutral position. The neutral position BN is a position equal to or lower than the position Bmax described in the seventeenth embodiment, and is a position above the position Bmin. In other words, position Bmin<neutral position BN≦position Bmax.

The neutral position BN of the pressing operation device 1261 in stage A is set to a position Bmax. The neutral position BN of the pressing operation device 1261 in the stage B is set to a position BH2. Position BH2 is a position below position Bmax and above position Bmin. The neutral position BN of the pressing operation device 1261 in the stage C is set to a position BH1. Position BH1 is a position below both position Bmax and position BH2, and above position Bmin. That is, the neutral position BN corresponding to stage A is located at the uppermost side (highest), and the neutral position BN corresponding to stage C is located at the lowest side (lowest).

The sub-control board 940 controls the pressing operation device when one stage is selected and set under the control of the player or the Pachinko machine 100 (that is, when the stage is switched under the control of the player or the Pachinko machine 100). The electric power of the pressing operation device 1261 (motor 863) is controlled so that the neutral position BN of the controller 1261 is at a position (height position) corresponding to the stage concerned. As a result, the neutral position of the press operation device 1261 is changed (switched) to the neutral position BN corresponding to the set (switched) stage, and thereby the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are switched.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in a situation where loss fluctuations occur consecutively multiple times (that is, a situation where unit games that have not won the special symbol lottery are continuously suspended), the sub control board 940 , Control is executed to operate the press operation device 1261 (more specifically, the actuation mechanism 860) so that the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are changed every time the loss variation is performed once.

More specifically, the sub control board 940 controls the operation force pattern, which is one of the elements constituting the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261, in a situation where the loss fluctuation occurs multiple times in succession, for each loss fluctuation. Then, control is executed to operate the pressing operation device 1261 so that the operating force pattern is switched to another operating force pattern. As a result, each time the loss variation is executed once in the stage being set, the specifications of the pressing device 1261 are switched to a different specification in terms of the operating force pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(B), in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a plurality of types of pressing operation devices 1261 are provided for each stage (stage A, stage B, and stage C). Operating force patterns (that is, patterns of changes in the magnitude of operating force over time) and condition patterns for obtaining each operating force pattern (patterns set as conditions for controlling the actuation mechanism 860) are set.

Three types of operating force patterns (operating force pattern A1, operating force pattern A2, and operating force pattern A3) each having different pattern contents are set for stage A, and three types of operating force patterns are set to obtain each operating force pattern. Condition patterns (condition pattern A1, condition pattern A2, and condition pattern A3) are set. The condition patterns A1 to A3 are, for example, position versus operating force control patterns as shown in FIG. 36(A).

Note that the condition patterns A1 to A3 do not necessarily have to be position versus operating force control patterns, but may also be time versus position control patterns, or combinations of position versus operating force control patterns and time versus position control patterns. It may be a pattern. Furthermore, all of the condition patterns A1 to A3 do not necessarily have to be the same control pattern (for example, a position vs. operating force control pattern), and some of the condition patterns A1 to A3 may be the control patterns of other condition patterns. Different control patterns may be used.

Three types of operating force patterns (operating force pattern B1, operating force pattern B2, and operating force pattern B3) each having different pattern contents are set for stage B, and three types of operating force patterns are set to obtain each operating force pattern. Condition patterns (condition pattern B1, condition pattern B2, and condition pattern B3) are set. The condition patterns B1 to B3 are, for example, position versus operating force control patterns. Note that the condition patterns B1 to B3 do not necessarily have to be different from the condition patterns A1 to A3, and may be the same as some or all of the condition patterns A1 to A3.

The condition patterns B1 to B3 do not necessarily have to be position versus operating force control patterns, but may be time versus position control patterns, or patterns that are a combination of position versus operating force control patterns and time versus position control patterns. There may be. Furthermore, all of the condition patterns B1 to B3 do not necessarily have to be the same control pattern (for example, position vs. operating force control pattern), and some of the condition patterns B1 to B3 may be the control patterns of other condition patterns. Different control patterns may be used.

Three types of operating force patterns (operating force pattern C1, operating force pattern C2, and operating force pattern C3) each having different pattern contents are set for stage C, and three types of operating force patterns are set to obtain each operating force pattern. Condition patterns (condition pattern C1, condition pattern C2, and condition pattern C3) are set. The condition patterns C1 to C3 are, for example, position versus operating force control patterns. Note that the condition patterns C1 to C3 do not necessarily have to be different from any of the condition patterns A1 to A3 and the condition patterns B1 to B3, and may be the same as some or all of the condition patterns A1 to A3 or the condition patterns B1 to B3. It may be.

The condition patterns C1 to C3 do not necessarily have to be position versus operating force control patterns, but may be time versus position control patterns, or patterns that are a combination of position versus operating force control patterns and time versus position control patterns. There may be. Furthermore, all of the condition patterns C1 to C3 do not necessarily have to be the same control pattern (for example, a position vs. operating force control pattern), and some of the condition patterns C1 to C3 may be the control patterns of other condition patterns. Different control patterns may be used.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in a situation where loss fluctuations occur consecutively multiple times (that is, a situation where unit games that have not won the special symbol lottery are continuously suspended), the sub control board 940 controls the loss change. Each time variation is executed, multiple types of condition patterns set for the stage being set are sequentially switched. As the condition pattern changes, the operating force pattern changes, so if the same stage continues, the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261 change every time the loss variation is performed.

For example, if the stage being set is stage A, the sub control board 940 switches the current condition pattern to condition pattern A2 if the current condition pattern is A1 every time the loss variation is executed once, and switches the current condition pattern to condition pattern A2. If the pattern is condition pattern A2, it is switched to condition pattern A3, and if the current condition pattern is condition pattern A3, it is switched to condition pattern A3.

When the press operation device 1261 is operated, the sub-control board 940 controls the actuation mechanism 860 in the same manner as in the seventeenth embodiment described above according to the condition pattern set at that time. Thereby, the pressing operation device 1261 can be operated with the operating force pattern corresponding to the specifications set by switching. For example, in stage A, when the pressing operation device 1261 is operated, the pressing operation device 1261 is operated with an operating force pattern corresponding to the condition pattern (any of condition patterns A1 to A3) set at that time. can be operated.

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub control board 940 is configured to operate when one stage selected by the player or the pachinko machine 100 (sub control board 940) is set. If there is, and the loss variation is executed (displayed) continuously in that one stage, each time the loss variation is executed, the current loss variation sound is changed to correspond to the loss variation in the stage being set. Among the plurality of types of loss fluctuation sounds, a loss fluctuation sound (another loss sound) different from the current loss fluctuation sound is switched and output.

For example, if the stage being set is Stage A, the current fluctuation display is a loss fluctuation, the current loss fluctuation sound is a loss fluctuation sound A1, and the next fluctuation display is also a loss fluctuation, After executing the loss fluctuation, the control board 940 switches the loss fluctuation sound to the loss fluctuation sound A2, and outputs the loss fluctuation sound A2 in the next loss fluctuation.

Therefore, in the stage that is being set, if the loss variation is executed continuously, the type of loss variation sound will change each time the loss variation is executed, so the atmosphere of the stage will change due to the successive loss variation. It can prevent monotony. Thereby, it is possible to suitably increase the attention to a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the loss variation is continuously executed (displayed) in the stage being set, the sub control board 940 controls Switch the stage being set to another stage and set it. For example, when the stage being set is stage A, the sub-control board 940 switches the stage to stage B when the loss variation is performed 20 times in succession.

When the stage is switched, the variable sound is also switched to a variable sound corresponding to the stage, so that it is possible to prevent the atmosphere of the stage from becoming monotonous. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in this respect as well, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to perform a pressing operation when one stage selected by the player or the pachinko machine 100 (sub-control board 940) is set. a first control for operating the pressing operation device 1261 so that the specifications of the device 1261 become a first specification corresponding to the one stage (for example, a specification corresponding to stage A in which the neutral position BN is Bmax); When a stage different from the first stage is set, the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are set to a second specification different from the first specification (for example, a specification corresponding to stage B where the neutral position BN is BH2). ) is configured to be able to execute at least a second control for operating the pressing operation device 1261 so as to achieve the following.

Therefore, when the stage is switched, the specifications of the push operation device 1261 are switched to different specifications depending on the stage, and the specifications of the push operation device 1261 are changed to the specifications (for example, specifications that are different in terms of the neutral position BN). , the press operation device 1261 is operated, so the player can operate the press operation device 1261 with different specifications depending on the stage. As a result, the difference between each stage can be emphasized and shown to the player by the difference in the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261, so that the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 configured to be able to set multiple types of stages can be appropriately increased. can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when one stage selected by the player or the control of the pachinko machine 100 (sub-control board 940) is set, the loss variation is executed once. For each stage, the specification of the pressing operation device 1261 is switched to another specification among multiple types of specifications (for example, multiple types of specifications that are different in the operating force pattern) that are preset corresponding to the one stage in question. It is configured to be able to at least execute control for operating the operating device 1261 (specification-based operation control).

Therefore, in a situation where the same stage continues, the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are switched to another specification every time the loss variation is executed once, and the press operation device 1261 is operated to achieve the specified specification. Even in a situation where the same stage among multiple types of stages continues, it is possible to prevent the specifications of the press operation device 1261 from becoming constant, and thereby it is possible to prevent the atmosphere of the stage from becoming monotonous. . Thereby, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages can be suitably increased.

Furthermore, even in a situation where loss fluctuations are continuous, the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are changed every time loss fluctuation is executed, so it is possible to prevent the stage atmosphere from becoming monotonous due to successive loss fluctuation displays. . In this respect as well, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to a gaming machine configured such that a plurality of types of stages can be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, each variable display executed in each of the three types of stages (stage A, stage B, and stage C) prepared in a configurable manner has a different pattern type of the decorative pattern 1621. Although the case where the symbol types (design type A, symbol type B, and symbol type C) have been described, the symbol type of the decorative symbol 1621 in each variable display executed in a plurality of stages prepared in a configurable manner is as follows. It does not necessarily have to be different for each stage, and the same type of symbol can be used in two or more stages, provided that decorative symbols 1621 of multiple types of symbols (that is, multiple types of decorative symbols 1621 with different appearances) are used. A configuration using a type may also be used.

In the configuration of such a modification, a different neutral position BN may be set in advance for each decorative pattern 1621 of a plurality of pattern types. In such a case, the sub-control board 940 sets one stage selected by the control of the player or the pachinko machine 100 (sub-control board 940), and displays the variable display in the decorative pattern 1621 of the predetermined first pattern type. When executed, the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261 are the first specifications corresponding to the variable display by the decorative symbol 1621 of the first symbol type (for example, the specifications corresponding to the symbol type A where the neutral position BN is Bmax). ), and a stage different from the first stage is set so that the decorative pattern 1621 is of a second pattern type different from the first pattern type. When the variable display is executed, a second specification that operates the pressing operation device 1261 so as to have a second specification different from the first specification (for example, a specification corresponding to symbol type B in which the neutral position BN is BH2); 2 control may be configured to be executable at least.

As a result, when the stage is switched and the type of pattern of the decorative pattern 1621 (that is, the type of appearance of the decorative pattern 1621) changes in the variable display for the stage, the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261 are changed to those of the decorative pattern 1621. Since the push operation device 1261 is operated so that the specifications of the push operation device 1261 are switched to different specifications depending on the type of symbol type (for example, specifications that are different in terms of the neutral position BN), the player can operate the press operation device 1261 having different specifications depending on the type of the decorative pattern 1621. As a result, in a configuration that includes multiple types of stages and can set multiple types of symbol types, it is possible to emphasize and show to the player the differences between the stages with different symbol types based on the differences in the specifications of the press operation device 1261. Therefore, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages can be suitably increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, one stage selected by the player or under the control of the pachinko machine 100 (sub-control board 940) is set to the decorative pattern 1621 of the predetermined first pattern type. When the variation display is executed, each time the loss variation is executed, multiple types of specifications (for example, operation The configuration may be such that at least control for operating the pressing operating device 1261 by switching the specification of the pressing operating device 1261 to another specification (specification-compatible operation control) among multiple types of specifications that each differ in force pattern may be executed. .

As a result, in a situation where the same stage continues, when a variable display is performed with the decorative pattern 1621 of the pattern type corresponding to the stage, the pressing operation device 1261 is displayed every time a loss variation is performed. The specifications of the press operation device 1261 are switched to another specification, and the push operation device 1261 is operated so as to meet the specifications, so even if the same stage continues among multiple types of stages, the specifications of the push operation device 1261 remain constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the atmosphere of the stage from becoming monotonous. Thereby, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages can be suitably increased.

Furthermore, even in a situation where loss fluctuations are continuous, the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are changed every time loss fluctuation is executed, so it is possible to prevent the stage atmosphere from becoming monotonous due to successive loss fluctuation displays. . In this respect as well, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to a gaming machine configured such that a plurality of types of stages can be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, each variable display executed in each of the three types of stages (stage A, stage B, and stage C) that are prepared in a configurable manner is performed on a background in which the background type of the background 1631 is different. (background type A, background type B, and background type C), the background type of the background 1631 in each variable display executed in a plurality of configurably prepared stages is not necessarily as follows. It does not have to be different for each stage, and the same background type may be used in two or more stages, provided that backgrounds 1631 of multiple types are used.

In such a modified configuration, a different neutral position BN may be set in advance for each of the plurality of background types. In such a case, the sub-control board 940 sets one stage selected under the control of the player or the pachinko machine 100 (sub-control board 940) and changes the background 1631 of the predetermined first background type to the variation of the decorative pattern 1621. When displayed together with the display, the press operation device 1261 is set so that the first specification corresponding to the background 1631 of the first background type (for example, the specification corresponding to the background type A where the neutral position BN is Bmax) is set. When a first control to be operated and a stage different from the first stage are set and a background 1631 of a second background type different from the first background type is displayed together with a fluctuating display of the decorative pattern 1621. , a second control that operates the pressing operation device 1261 so as to have a second specification different from the first specification (for example, a specification corresponding to background type B in which the neutral position BN is BH2). may be configured.

As a result, when the stage is switched and the background type of the background 1631 in the variable display for the stage (that is, the display part that is not related to the appearance of the decorative pattern 1621 in the variable display) changes, the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are changed. is switched to a different specification according to the background type of the background 1631, and the press operation device 1261 is operated so that the specification of the press operation device 1261 becomes the corresponding specification (for example, a specification that is different in terms of the neutral position BN). Therefore, the player can operate the pressing operation device 1261 with different specifications depending on the background type of the background 1631. As a result, in a configuration that includes multiple types of stages and can set multiple types of background types, it is possible to emphasize and show to the player the differences between the stages with different background types based on the differences in the specifications of the press operation device 1261. Therefore, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages can be suitably increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, one stage selected by the player or under the control of the pachinko machine 100 (sub-control board 940) is set, and the background 1631 of the predetermined first background type is decorated. When displayed together with the variation display of the symbol 1621, each time the loss variation is executed, multiple types of specifications (for example, The configuration may also be configured to at least be able to execute control (specification-compatible operation control) that switches the specification of the press operation device 1261 to another specification and operates the press operation device 1261 among multiple types of specifications that differ in operating force patterns. good.

As a result, in a situation where the same stage continues, when a variation display is performed on the background 1632 of the background type corresponding to the stage, the pressure operation device 1261 is changed every time a losing variation is performed. The specifications are switched to another specification, and the push operation device 1261 is operated to achieve the specification, so even if the same stage continues among multiple types of stages, the specifications of the push operation device 1261 remain constant. As a result, the atmosphere of the stage can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Thereby, the degree of attention to the pachinko machine 100 configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages can be suitably increased.

Furthermore, even in a situation where loss fluctuations are continuous, the specifications of the press operation device 1261 are changed every time loss fluctuation is executed, so it is possible to prevent the stage atmosphere from becoming monotonous due to successive loss fluctuation displays. . In this respect as well, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to a gaming machine configured such that a plurality of types of stages can be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, three different operating force patterns are provided for each of the three types of stages (stage A, stage B, and stage C) that are prepared in a configurable manner. Although the configuration is such that different types of condition patterns are set in advance, a configuration may also be adopted in which each of a plurality of types of condition patterns is associated with a different type of losing fluctuation sound in advance.

In the configuration of such a modified example, while the first stage is set based on the player's selection, the sub control board 940 generates a sound every time the loss variation sound is switched due to one loss variation being executed. Then, the actuating mechanism 860 is controlled according to the post-switching condition pattern to perform a pressing operation so that the current condition pattern corresponds to the post-switching condition pattern that is associated with the post-switching loss fluctuation sound. Control for operating the device 1261 may be configured to be executable.

As a result, when the losing fluctuating sound changes on the stage set by the player, the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 switches to a different type, so that the atmosphere of the stage becomes less monotonous. This can be suitably suppressed, and the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be more suitably improved.

In addition, each of the characteristic configurations of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above may be applied to the variable display that is displayed when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts winning. Alternatively, the present invention may be applied to a variable display for demonstration purposes that is displayed during a non-gaming state (standby).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and may be implemented with modifications as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment In the first embodiment described above, the configuration according to the first embodiment is applied to the symbol sheet 601, but the configuration according to the first embodiment The configuration may be such that the method is applied to resin products. For example, a transparent resin plate, a layer containing a predetermined pattern or pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern 621 formed on or placed on one side (back side) of the transparent resin plate, and the transparent resin A resin product according to the first embodiment includes a layer corresponding to the decorative portion 622 formed with a coating film or placed on the other side (front side) of the board and on the peripheral edge side of the predetermined picture or design. The structure may be a resin product to which the structure is applied.

In the first embodiment, the decorative portion 622 of the pattern sheet 601 does not overlap the periphery of the decorative pattern 621 when viewed from the front, but the decorative portion 622 overlaps the periphery of the decorative pattern 621 when viewed from the front. There may be.

In the first embodiment, the decorative portion 622 is formed in almost the entire area of the pattern sheet 601 except for the area where the decorative pattern 621 is formed on the surface side of the base material 611. It is not necessary to form the decorative portion 622 in almost all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a band-shaped decorative portion 622 is formed along the entire or part of the periphery of the decorative pattern 621.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the pattern sheet 601 has the decorative pattern 621 using the decorative part 622. However, the decoration by the decorative part 622 is not limited to the design, but also the characters used in the model and the model name. The decorative portion 622 may be used to decorate other patterns such as a display, and the decorative portion 622 may be formed not only from a thin sheet but also from a thick resin component that can be molded with a mold. In addition, the decorative portion 622 is configured using ink that becomes visible when the predetermined situation described in the second embodiment occurs, and the peripheral side of the pattern reflects light when the predetermined situation occurs. It may be configured so that it is easy to do so.

In the first embodiment described above, in the pattern sheet 601, only the decorative pattern 621 (main pattern 621A, sub-pattern 621B) is formed as a coating film on the back side of the base material 611, but not only the decorative pattern 621 but also A coating film may be formed on the back side of the base material 611 including the background portion of the decorative pattern 621.

(2) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment In the second embodiment, a pattern (for example, the pattern 701) that becomes visible under a predetermined light such as a flash light, and a pattern that is heated Alternatively, the design sheet 601 is provided with a pattern that becomes visible under heated conditions (for example, the pattern 721A), but even if one of the patterns is provided in the pattern sheet 601, good.

In addition, either a pattern that becomes visible under a situation where a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, or a pattern that becomes visible under a situation where it is heated or warmed, and a pattern that is exemplified in the third embodiment. The pattern sheet 601 may be provided with a pattern that becomes visible under the irradiation of a black light. Additionally, there are some patterns that are visible under certain light conditions such as flashlight, some patterns that are visible under heated conditions, and some that are visible under black light conditions. A configuration may also be adopted in which the patterns are provided on the pattern sheet 601.

In the second embodiment, the pattern becomes visible (that is, changes from an invisible state to a visible state) under a situation where a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied or under a situation where the image is heated or warmed. is provided on the pattern sheet 601, but under a situation where a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied or under a situation where the image is heated or warmed, the pattern will change in a manner (for example, color or reflectivity) according to the situation. The configuration may be such that it is visible. For example, a pattern is formed using ink that changes from a first color (e.g., blue) to a second color (e.g., red) when heated or heated, and under the heated or heated condition, The configuration may be such that a pattern in a mode (that is, a second color) corresponding to the situation can be visually recognized.

In the second embodiment, the surface side of the base material 611 has a pattern (for example, the pattern 701) that becomes visible under a situation where a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied, or a situation where the surface side is heated or heated. Although the configuration is such that a pattern (for example, the pattern 721A, etc.) that is visible below is formed, these patterns may be formed on the back side of the base material 611. When these patterns are formed on the back side of the base material 611, the decorative pattern 621 may be formed on the pattern after forming the pattern on the back side of the base material 611.

In the second embodiment, the configuration according to the second embodiment is applied to the pattern sheet 601 in which the decorative portion 622 is not formed on the surface side of the base material 611. The configuration according to the second embodiment may be applied to the pattern sheet 601 on which the portion 622 is formed. When applying the configuration according to the second embodiment to the pattern sheet 601 in which the decorative part 622 is formed on the front side of the base material 611, after forming the decorative part 622 on the front side of the base material 611, On the top, there is a pattern that becomes visible under a situation where a predetermined light such as a flash light is applied (for example, the pattern 701, etc.), or a pattern that becomes visible under a heated or heated situation (such as the pattern 721A, etc.). ).

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which a pattern that becomes visible in a predetermined situation (for example, the pattern 701) is applied to the pattern sheet 601, but the central structure attached to the game board 400 420, etc., or to other parts constituting the front side of the pachinko machine 100, such as at least a part of the opening periphery 211 of the front decoration body 210 in the front block 102. May be applied. That is, a pattern that becomes visible under a predetermined situation may be added as an appearance changing section that makes the appearance of a predetermined surface portion visible in a different manner depending on the situation. Further, it is not necessary to directly add a pattern (for example, pattern 701, etc.) that becomes visible under a predetermined situation to the pattern sheet 601; instead, a separate member overlapping the front side of the pattern sheet 601 A symbol (for example, symbol 701) that becomes visible when a predetermined situation occurs may be added to the symbol sheet 601. A rotating body is molded from transparent resin and placed on the outside of each reel, a pattern 701 etc. is added to the rotating body, a mechanism is provided to rotate the rotating body by the sub-control board 940, and the pattern sheet 601 The arrangement position of the pattern 701 etc. may be changeable with respect to the pattern displayed on the screen.

(3) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment In the third embodiment described above, among the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the left symbol row Z1, the number corresponding to the numerical value "7" A pattern 741A is provided around the main pattern 621A containing information, and a pattern 741A is provided around the main pattern 621A containing numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "9" among the main patterns 621A provided on the pattern sheet 601 corresponding to the right pattern row Z2. Of the main symbols 621A provided on the symbol sheet 601 corresponding to the middle symbol row Z3, a symbol 741C is provided around the main symbol 621A that includes numerical information corresponding to the numerical value "8". , the currently set game mode can be suggested by a combination of specific main symbols 621A.

Instead, a pattern similar to the pattern 741A etc. is provided around a predetermined sub-symbol 621B provided on each pattern sheet 601 corresponding to each pattern row Z1, Z2, Z3, thereby creating a sub-symbol corresponding to the pattern. It may be configured such that the currently set game mode can be suggested by the combination of symbols 621B.

In the third embodiment, the currently set gaming mode can be suggested by the combination of the specific main symbols 621A, but instead of or in addition to this, heated or heated By forming predetermined characters, patterns, etc. on the pattern sheet 601 as a pattern that can be visually recognized under certain conditions, and displaying the characters, patterns, etc. in a visible manner by heating or warming, the current A configuration that can suggest the set game mode may be adopted.

In the third embodiment, the currently set gaming mode is suggested using a pattern that becomes visible under heating or heated conditions. It may also be configured to suggest the currently set game mode using a pattern that becomes visible under a situation where the player is illuminated with a light or a pattern that becomes visible under a situation where a black light is irradiated. Alternatively, a pattern that becomes visible when heated or warmed, a pattern that becomes visible when exposed to a certain light such as a flash, or a pattern that becomes visible when exposed to a black light. Two or three of these symbols may be used to suggest the currently set gaming mode.

(4) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 of Fourth Embodiment In the fourth embodiment described above, the peripheral edge decoration part 788 is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral edge side (outer side) of the decorative lens part 786. However, if the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is provided on one side with respect to the decorative lens portion 786, the peripheral side decorative portion 788 is not necessarily provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral side of the decorative lens portion 786. It is not necessary, and for example, it may be provided in a partial section (for example, the lower half) on the peripheral edge side of the decorative lens portion 786.

In the fourth embodiment, the protrusion 787 is provided between the exposed portion of the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front, but the protrusion 787 is not provided. Accordingly, in a front view, the top surface portion 786A of the decorative lens portion 786 and the peripheral side decorative portion 788 may be adjacent to each other.

In the fourth embodiment, the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 are adjacent to each other, but the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 are adjacent to each other. There may be a configuration in which there is a region between the transmission region X1 and the reflected light transmission region X2 through which neither the direct light from the light emitter 782 nor the specific reflected light from the reflective film portion 790B passes.

In the fourth embodiment, a part of the specific reflected light by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790 does not enter the peripheral decorative portion 788 and is directed outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 (that is, the reflected light However, the specific reflected light does not travel outward from the peripheral decorative portion 788 (i.e., when the player directly A reflective component 790 may be provided to prevent the light from traveling as visible light.

In the fourth embodiment, the reflective component 790 is arranged so that a part thereof does not overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front (that is, arranged so that the non-overlapping region X3 exists). , the reflective component 790 may be arranged so that all of it overlaps the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front (that is, arranged so that the non-overlapping region X3 does not exist). Alternatively, all of the reflective film portion 790B may be provided so as to overlap the peripheral decorative portion 788 when viewed from the front.

In the fourth embodiment, the light passing through the direct light transmitting region X1 and the reflected light transmitting region X2 is both light (direct light or specific reflected light) corresponding to the light output from the light emitter 782. However, the light passing through the reflected light transmission region X2 corresponds to light output from a different light source (for example, a light source such as a full-color LED similar to the light emitter 782) than the light passing through the direct light transmission region X1. It may be light. For example, the light emitting means different from the light emitter 782 is placed at a position above the reflective film portion 790B where the output light can be reflected on the reflective film portion 790B and the reflected light can pass through at least the reflected light transmission region X2. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is provided in

In the fourth embodiment, after being output from the light emitting body 782, the light reflected on the rear surface 788B of the peripheral side decoration part 788 and then reflected on the reflective film part 790B of the reflective component 790 passes through the reflected light transmission area X2. However, the light reflected by the reflective film portion 790B of the reflective component 790, which passes through the peripheral side decorative portion 788 without entering the peripheral side decorative portion 788, is transmitted through the reflective film portion 790B. A configuration may also be adopted in which a reflecting portion capable of reflecting toward the reflection portion is provided, and the reflected light from the reflecting portion is reflected at the reflective film portion 790B, and enters and passes through the reflected light transmission region X2.

(5) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment In the fifth embodiment, when a predetermined reach display (specifically, a reach display consisting of an odd number) is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, While the first suggestion effect in which a character that can suggest the degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state appears can be performed (selectable) with a predetermined probability, the reach that cannot be displayed with the predetermined reach display is possible. When a display (specifically, a reach display consisting of an even number of numerical values) is displayed, it corresponds to (corresponds to) a cut-out image including a part of the character cut out from the video data of the first suggestion effect. A configuration in which the second suggestion effect in which an image appears is executable (selectable) with a predetermined probability has been exemplified.

Instead of or in addition to this configuration, when a predetermined reach display (for example, a reach display consisting of odd numbers) is displayed by the decorative pattern 1621, a suggestive effect that can be executed is to enter a special gaming state. A suggestive effect in which an image including a part of a character that can suggest the degree of expectation for the transition of the character appears, and then the effect develops and finally the whole image of the character appears, or an image including a part of the character is The configuration may be such that one of the suggestive effects in which the entire image of the character appears without appearing is selected according to a selection probability that is set in advance for each suggestive effect.

Even in such a modified example, the video data corresponding to the suggestive effect in which the entire image of the character appears without an image including a part of the character appearing is used to suggest the character to be developed in the suggestive effect. Since it is possible to generate an image that can be used as an image (that is, an image that includes a part of the character in question), it is possible to increase the variety of suggestive performances while suppressing the cost of developing images that suggest the character to be developed. .

In addition, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, if the right to a unit game related to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is reserved, a special symbol will be drawn by lottery for the reservation. Based on the result, a performance that predicts and foretells a specific gaming state (for example, a special gaming state) that will occur after one or more variable displays have been executed (hereinafter, this performance is also referred to as a "pre-reading performance") In this case, an image may be displayed that includes a part of a character that can appear in a variable display that is subject to pre-reading and that can suggest the level of expectation for the occurrence of a specific gaming state. Even in such a modified example, video data corresponding to an effect in which a character that can suggest the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a specific game state appears (suggestive effect) is used to create an image used for the pre-read effect (i.e., the character Since it is possible to generate an image (including a portion of the image), it is possible to increase the variation of effects while suppressing the cost for developing images for pre-read effects.

In the fifth embodiment, the image generated based on the cut-out image from the video data of the first suggestion effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol appears in the second suggestion effect; The image appearing in the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be generated based on the video data of the effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol like the first suggestion effect. For example, an image that appears in a performance such as a second suggestion performance may be a jackpot performance that is displayed during a special gaming state, or a so-called demo that is displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by a player. The configuration may be such that it is generated based on an image cut out from video data of a performance or video that is displayed other than the variable display of a special symbol, such as a video on a screen.

In addition, images generated based on images cut out from the video data of the first suggestion effect, effects displayed other than variable display of special symbols such as jackpot effects, and images generated from the image cut out from the video data of the animation. The generated image does not necessarily have to appear in a performance executed during the fluctuating display of a special symbol such as a second suggestion performance, but for example, it may appear on a demo screen or in a special performance such as a jackpot performance. It may be configured to appear in an effect that is displayed other than the variable display of symbols.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, a plurality of cut out images (for example, each part of the areas AR1, AR2, AR3 are cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect). Although the configuration is such that an image corresponding to the image) is displayed, the number of images cut out from the image of the frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be plural, and may be one.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to the image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect appear. However, the cutout image used for the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect, but rather an image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance. The image may be cut out from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestion effect, images corresponding to images cut out from images of different frames may appear simultaneously.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion performance, images (for example, images 821, 822 , 823) appears, but background data common to the second suggestion effect is prepared regardless of the type of character, and an image including a part of the character is made to appear in the background data. Good too.

In the fifth embodiment, an image generated based on a cutout image from the video data of the first suggestion effect is displayed in the second suggestion effect, but an image corresponding to the cutout image is prepared in advance. The configuration may be such that the information is stored in the sub-control board 940. Even in such a modified example, it is possible to easily reduce the need to develop moving image data used for the second suggestion effect, and to suppress the development cost accordingly.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to the image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect appear. However, the cutout image used for the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be an image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect, but rather an image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion performance. The image may be cut out from each image. In such a case, in the second suggestion effect, images corresponding to images cut out from images of different frames may appear simultaneously.

In the fifth embodiment, in the second suggestion effect, all of the images (for example, images 821, 822, 823) corresponding to the image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect are simultaneously displayed. Although the configuration is such that images corresponding to all cut-out images appear at the same time, it is not necessarily necessary to make them appear at the same time. For example, it may be possible to have a configuration in which one or more images corresponding to a plurality of cutout images are sequentially displayed, or a configuration in which these images are divided into multiple groups and each group is sequentially switched and displayed. .

In the fifth embodiment described above, the cutout image is generated from the images of the frames constituting the video data of the first suggestion effect. There may be.

In the fifth embodiment described above, each area to be cut out in the image of the frame constituting the video data of the first suggestion effect is located at the same position regardless of the type of character (for example, characters CA1, CA2, CA3). Although the configuration is such that the sizes are set to be the same, the position and size of the region to be cut out in the frame image may be different for each type of character.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the image that appears in the second suggestion effect (the image that includes a part of the character that suggests the degree of expectation for transition to the special gaming state) is one in the video data of the first suggestion effect. An example is given of an image (for example, images 821, 822, 823) in which processing such as deformation and scaling is performed on an image cut out from a frame image. The image that appears in the second suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be a processed cutout image, but rather an unprocessed cutout image (i.e., an image cut out from the image of one frame in the video data of the first suggestion effect). image). Moreover, the image that appears in the second suggestion effect may have a configuration in which an unprocessed cutout image and a processed cutout image coexist.

In the fifth embodiment, image deformation and enlargement/reduction are exemplified as the processing applied to the cut-out image, but the cut-out image may be processed to have a predetermined effect such as a blur or a mosaic. In addition, when a cutout image to which a predetermined effect has been applied is made to appear in the second suggestion effect, the configuration is such that the effect fades over time (that is, returns to the original cutout image). It's okay.

In the fifth embodiment, when a plurality of processed cut-out images (images corresponding to cut-out images) are simultaneously configured in the second suggestion effect, one processed cut-out image and Although we have exemplified the case where the other processed cutout image partially overlaps (for example, a part of the image 822 and a part of the image 821 overlap), the other processed cutout image The configuration may be such that a plurality of processed cutout images overlap. Alternatively, at least one of the plurality of processed cutout images may be completely invisible due to overlapping with another image.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the case where the character appearing in the first suggestion effect suggests the level of expectation for transition to the special game state has been exemplified, but the content suggested by the character does not necessarily indicate the transition to the special game state. The expectation level does not necessarily have to be the level of expectation for the transition, but may be the level of expectation for the transition to another gaming state (for example, a variable probability gaming state).

In the fifth embodiment, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, which is an image display device capable of variably displaying the decorative pattern 1621, which is an image. In the configuration in which the variable display of is performed on the reel device, an image display device may be separately provided, and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be displayed on the image display device.

(6) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 of Sixth Embodiment In the sixth embodiment described above, the pressing operation device 1261 that can be pressed downward is exemplified as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device that can perform a pressing operation in a direction other than the downward direction. For example, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment can be applied to a push operation device that can be pushed in an upward direction, or a push operation device that can be pushed in a substantially horizontal direction such as rightward. The position of the operating section in the horizontal direction may be controlled, or the reaction force to a movement operation to the operating section may be controlled.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated section 852 includes a button operating section 850 supported by the base 851 via a spring member 853, and an actuating mechanism 860 that allows the button operating section 850 to move in the vertical direction. Although the provided press operation device 1261 is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, the input operation device is not limited to an input operation device capable of a push operation such as the press operation device 1261, and input operations other than the push operation can be performed. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to an input operation device.

For example, an input operation device such as a joystick that is equipped with an operation lever (rod-shaped body) that can perform input operations such as pushing or pulling with respect to a predetermined fulcrum, or a dial device that can be rotated approximately around the center. A configuration may be adopted in which the characteristic configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to the input operation device. In other words, when moved from the initial position in a predetermined direction (for example, in the operating direction of a lever around a fulcrum or in the circumferential direction around an axis), it can be returned to the initial position by the restoring force of the elastic body. The configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to the input operation device. Further, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is applied to an operating device that includes an operating section that can move in a plurality of directions (for example, downward movement and rotation operation around the moving direction). It's okay.

In the sixth embodiment, a coil spring is illustrated as the spring member 853, but it does not necessarily have to be a coil spring, and may be a plate spring or the like. Further, an elastic body other than a spring member (for example, rubber) may be interposed between the base body 851 and the operated part 852 to support the operated part 852 with respect to the base body 851.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated part 852 of the press operating device 1261 is a component of a button operating part 850 that can be moved in the vertical direction by an actuating mechanism 860, and in the button operating part 850, a spring member 853 851 is configured to be movable (vibration possible) in the vertical direction; however, an operated section similar to the operated section 852 may be provided on the upper end side of the rack 861 of the actuating mechanism 860. In other words, the stroke amount of the pressing operation device 1261 may be configured to be the same stroke amount as the stroke amount S2 by the actuating mechanism 860. Even in such a configuration, the stroke amount by the push operation can be configured to be variable, similar to the push operation device 1261 in which the operated section 852 includes the button operation section 850 exemplified in the sixth embodiment.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the case where the operated portion 852 of the pressing operation device 1261 is movable with respect to the base body 851 via the spring member 853 has been illustrated, but the spring member 853 is omitted and the operated portion The position and reaction force may be controlled by the actuating mechanism 860 in a state where the actuating mechanism 852 and the base body 851 are integrated.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated portion 852 of the press operation device 1261 is operated via the operation cover member 870, but by integrating the operated portion 852 and the operation cover member 870, The player may directly operate the operated section 852.

In the sixth embodiment, an example is given in which the button operating section 850 is moved in the vertical direction by the actuating mechanism 860 to generate a reaction force, but another mechanism for moving the button operating section 850 and generating a reaction force is described. A mechanism may also be used. For example, a cylindrical part having a central axis along the movement direction is provided on the base of the button operation part 850, a spiral groove is formed around the cylindrical part, and the button is fitted into the groove to maintain a constant An engaging portion that can be rotated at a height of Alternatively, a reaction force may be generated.

In the sixth embodiment, the height of the neutral position of the push operation device 1261 (the neutral position of the button operation section 850) is configured to change depending on the number of times unit games related to special symbols are held, but the push operation The condition for the neutral position of the device 1261 to change does not necessarily have to be a case where the number of pending unit games related to special symbols changes. For example, when the number of operations of the press operation device 1261 (operated section 852) that is operated during a predetermined production (for example, a production performed during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols) reaches a predetermined number, the press operation device 1261 The neutral position may be changed. In other words, the neutral position of the press operation device 1261 may be changed depending on the number of times the press operation device 1261 is operated during a predetermined performance.

In the sixth embodiment described above, a detection sensor 854 capable of detecting that the operated part 852 has reached the maximum pressing position and a detection sensor 854 that can detect that the button operating part 850 has reached the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860 are provided. A detection sensor 890 capable of detection is provided, and the sub-control board 840 determines whether or not the pressing operation device 1261 is operated based on each detection signal from the detection sensors 854 and 890.

Instead, the lower end of the operation cover member 870 that constantly moves with the operated part 852 can reach the lowest position (that is, the button operation part 850 is located at the lower end of the movement range by the actuation mechanism 860, In addition, a detection sensor capable of detecting the lower end position of the operation cover member 870 that can be reached when the operated portion 852 is located at the maximum pressing position by the spring member 853 is provided, and based on the detection signal from the detection sensor, It may be configured to determine whether or not the pressing operation device 1261 is operated.

In the sixth embodiment, the operated section 852 includes a button operating section 850 supported by the base 851 via a spring member 853, and an actuating mechanism 860 that allows the button operating section 850 to move in the vertical direction. Although the provided press operation device 1261 is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the sixth embodiment, the configuration according to the sixth embodiment may be applied to an accessory device that does not have an operation function. For example, for an accessory device including an accessory component in which the accessory is supported by the base via a spring member, and an actuation mechanism that allows the accessory component to move in the vertical direction, The configuration according to the embodiment may be applied.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number-of-retention display section 870A is provided on the surface of the operation cover member 870 has been exemplified, but instead of this, or in addition to this, information on whether the symbol lottery is correct or not and the special game state can be displayed. It is also possible to display an object whose display is switched depending on the degree of expectation of the transition. For example, if the letter "V" is printed below the number "8" on the number of reservations display section 870A, and the button operation section 850 is pressed in a state that is raised according to the number of reservations, the winner is determined. If there is a unit game, the operation cover member 870 rises for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) to a position where the character "V" can be seen by the player, and then returns to the original position and wins. If there is no unit game, the character "V" may be returned to the original position without being visible.

Further, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily need to change according to the number of reservations; for example, the number "8" may be at a height position that is visible to the player, no matter how many reservations there are. If the button operation unit 850 is arranged and the player presses the button in a situation where there is a fluctuating display indicating that the right to the unit game is on hold and it is waiting for execution, it is possible to win or have high expectations based on the result of the lottery. The reaction force is increased at a height position corresponding to the number of times the fluctuation display is performed (for example, the height position is lowered by one scale for the next fluctuation display), and the reaction force is generated. Depending on the height position of the screen, the player may be able to be told when to execute a fluctuating display that can give them a sense of success or failure or expectations, or set multiple types of reaction forces to increase expectations. It may be configured to suggest the player the following.

In addition, the height position of the button operation unit 850 does not necessarily need to change according to the number of reservations; for example, during a fluctuation display, the result of a winning/failure lottery during a fluctuation display, or a reservation waiting for execution of a fluctuation display. Based on the result of the lottery in the middle, the button operation unit 850 rises to one of multiple heights (neutral position) depending on the level of winning or expectation level, and the reaction force when pressed. It may be configured to suggest to the player that the larger the size of the variable display, the more highly anticipated a performance will be executed in the variable display.

(7) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 of Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, when the pressing operation device 1261 is in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is in contact with the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 in the vertical direction (pressing operation However, when the push operation device 1261 is in the neutral position, the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893. It may also be a configuration in which it is located. In the configuration of this modification, as well as the configuration illustrated in the seventh embodiment, the player who performs a pressing operation on the operation surface 870B of the pressing operation device 1261 is required to perform a forceful pressing operation such as hitting the operation surface 870B. Instead, it is possible to perform a pushing operation in which the operating surface 870B is slowly pushed in against the torque (holding force) of the motor 863 of the actuating mechanism 860.

In the seventh embodiment, the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a downward pressing operation on the operation surface 870B is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but when the operation surface 870B is pressed in a direction other than downward. The characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment may be applied to a pressing operation device similar to the pressing operation device 1261 that performs a pushing operation in the forward direction, leftward, or rightward direction (for example, in the forward direction, leftward, or rightward direction).

That is, for example, in a push operation device that performs a pushing operation in the front direction with respect to the operation surface, the operation surface is the opening surface of the opening that accommodates the push operation device, and the forward and backward movement direction of the push operation device. A configuration may be adopted in which the positions are approximately equal in the direction. Moreover, in such a press operation device, the operation surface thereof may be recessed in the front-rear direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening that accommodates the press operation device.

In the seventh embodiment, the push operation device 1261 whose neutral position is the position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment. As the position, a plurality of neutral positions including at least a position where the operation surface 870B is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening R in the vertical direction, or a position where the operation surface 870B is recessed in the vertical direction with respect to the opening surface of the opening R are taken. A configuration may be adopted in which the characteristic configuration according to the seventh embodiment is applied to the pressing operation device 1261 to be obtained.

In the seventh embodiment, as an example, FIG. 24 (FIG. 24(A) and FIG. 24(B)) shows a part of the player's hand on the wrist side (a part of the hand excluding a part on the finger side). ) and a part of the wrist side of the player's forearm. It is not necessary to have a structure that can support both the part of the forearm on the wrist side, and the part of the hand is connected to the hand so that the player can operate the operated part 852 with the hand. Any structure that can support at least a portion of the forearm may be sufficient.

Therefore, for example, the hand rest 895 may be configured such that only a part of the player's hand on the wrist side supports the operated part in an operable manner on the finger side of the hand, or a part of the player's forearm The structure may be such that only a part or all of the forearm part supports the operated part on the finger side of the hand corresponding to the forearm part so that the operated part can be operated.

In the seventh embodiment, the hand rest 895 has a substantially flat upper surface that can support a portion of the player's hand on the wrist side and a portion of the forearm on the wrist side from below. However, the form of the hand rest 895 does not necessarily have to be in the form of a table having an approximately flat upper surface in the horizontal direction; for example, it may have a shape that is raised to match the shape of the hand or forearm. It may be. Further, for example, it may be in a substantially U-shaped cuff shape capable of supporting the forearm from below, or may be in a form in which the forearm is suspended from above.

In the seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is located at approximately the same position as the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 in the vertical direction, which is the moving direction of the pressing operation device 1261 (the moving direction of the operated section 852). However, the upper surface of the hand rest 895 is located above the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893, so that the upper surface of the hand rest 895 and the opening surface of the opening R of the case 893 are different from each other. may be configured to have a step in the vertical direction.

In the seventh embodiment, the push operation device 1261 that can be pushed downward is illustrated as an example of the configuration according to the seventh embodiment, but input operations such as pushing or pulling with respect to a predetermined fulcrum A characteristic feature according to the seventh embodiment is applied to an input operation device such as a joystick having an operation lever (rod-shaped body) that can be rotated, or an input operation device such as a dial device that can be rotated approximately around the center. It may be a configuration that applies a configuration.

In other words, for example, with respect to an input operation device such as a joystick or a dial device, the part of the player's hand excluding the part of the finger that operates the operated part of the input operation device is A support section such as a hand rest 895 that supports at least a portion of the forearm part that is continuous with the hand so that the player can operate the operated section with the player's hand is provided to the player from the input operation device. It may also be configured to be provided on the closer side.

(8) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment In the eighth embodiment, the customer waiting effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the non-gaming state of waiting for the player to play the game is Although the case is illustrated in which the video or image is composed of video data (image data) that has been prepared in advance for various effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display, it is not necessarily the case that the customer waiting effect is used. It is not necessary that all of the scenes are composed of videos or images that utilize video data prepared in advance for various performances, and at least a part of the customer waiting performance is composed of videos or images that divert the video data that has been prepared in advance for various performances. It may be a configuration. For example, a video or image dedicated to a customer waiting performance is prepared, and the customer waiting performance is created from a video or image dedicated to the customer waiting performance and a video or image that utilizes video data prepared in advance for various performances. The configuration may be configured such that:

In the eighth embodiment, the customer waiting performance was constructed from videos and images cut out from the suggestive performance, but the videos and images that make up the customer waiting performance do not necessarily have to be videos and images cut out from the suggestive performance. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a video or an image cut out from a performance other than the suggestive performance (variable performance) displayed during the variable display is used as part of the customer waiting performance.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 (see FIG. 1) during a non-gaming state, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, Although the variable display (variable effect) selected under the same selection conditions as when a starting winning of a special symbol (special symbol) occurs is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the variable display is displayed during a non-gaming state. The trigger for displaying the variable display does not necessarily have to be an operation on the push operation device (specifically, a push operation), but an operation other than push operation on an input operation device other than the push operation device may be the trigger for displaying the fluctuation display. It may be configured as follows. For example, during a non-gaming state, a predetermined rotational operation (for example, one rotation clockwise or a rotation operation of 200 rpm or more) is performed on a rotational operation device that is capable of rotational operation such as the rotational operation device 262 (see FIG. 1). When a rotation operation based on the number of rotations) is performed, a variable display selected under the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starts winning during a game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Good too.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starting winning occurs during a game are applied. Although the selected variable display (variable effect) is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, the selection conditions for the variable display do not necessarily have to be the same as those in the case where a special symbol starting winning occurs, and non-gaming When a pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device during the state, a variable display selected under substantially the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starting winning occurs is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. It's okay.

For example, the selection probability of a demonstration pseudo-jackpot by the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter provided in the sub-control board 940 does not necessarily need to be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot by the winning random number counter related to the special symbol provided in the main control board 920. For example, the selection probability of a demonstration pseudo jackpot by the demonstration pseudo winning random number counter may be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot by the winning random number counter related to a special symbol. According to this configuration, the variable display (variable effect) that is displayed only when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery is displayed during the non-gaming state (more specifically, when the pressing operation on the pressing operation device is performed during the non-gaming state). When the game is played), it can be made to appear more easily than during the game. Thereby, a variable performance that is difficult to appear during a game depending on the winning probability of a jackpot can be made to appear during a non-gaming state, and the pachinko machine 100 can be easily appealed to players. In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot for a variable display executed during a non-gaming state is 100%, and only the variable display (variable performance) that is executed when a jackpot occurs is executed during a non-gaming state. In this case, the demonstration pseudo-winning random number counter may be omitted.

Alternatively, various selection probabilities in the demonstration pseudo jackpot symbol random number counter, the demonstration pseudo stop pattern selection counter, or the first to fourth demonstration pseudo fluctuation type counters provided in the sub-control board 940. However, the structure may be different from the jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, or various selection probabilities in the first to fourth variation type counters provided in the main control board 920.

In the eighth embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starting winning occurs during a game are applied. Although the selected variable display (variable effect) is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, if a push operation is performed on a push operation device such as the push operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, Among the variable displays that can be selected when a starting winning of a special symbol occurs in The variable display to be displayed during the non-gaming state may be selected based on the probability of selection of a pseudo jackpot for demonstration using a pseudo winning random number counter, etc.).

In the eighth embodiment, when a pressing operation is performed on a pressing operation device such as the pressing operation device 261 during a non-gaming state, the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starting winning occurs during a game are applied. Although the selected variable display (variable effect) is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, regardless of whether it is in a non-gaming state or during a game, it can be displayed on a predetermined input operation device such as a press operation device. A period is established during which a predetermined operation (for example, a push operation) can be input to display the variable display, and during the period (a state in which a predetermined operation can be input to the input operation device) When a predetermined operation is performed (input) on the operating device or input operating device, a variable display selected under the same or almost the same selection conditions as when a special symbol starts winning is a decorative symbol. It may also be configured to be displayed on the display device 479.

(9) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 of the ninth embodiment In the ninth embodiment described above, in the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state (that is, the pseudo variable display for demonstration) , an example has been given of a configuration in which four suggestive effects, each of which has a different degree of expectation for transition to a special gaming state depending on the display content, are simultaneously displayed in the divided display areas 479D to 479G in the decorative pattern display device 479, Instead of this, or in addition to this, two or more display images (for example, A configuration may also be adopted in which four display images each including different types of suggestion displays 1623 are simultaneously displayed in each display area (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) obtained by dividing the decorative pattern display device 479 into a plurality of parts.

In addition, in the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state (that is, the pseudo variable display for demonstration), two or more display images each containing different types of suggestion displays 1623 are displayed on the decorative pattern display device. In a configuration in which 479 is simultaneously displayed in each divided display area, the period from the start of the variable display based on the pressing operation on the pressing operation device during the non-gaming state until the display image including the suggestion display 1623 appears. In this case, the variable display may be displayed at a higher speed than the corresponding period in the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol.

As a result, as mentioned above, the time from the start of the variable display based on the push operation on the push operation device during the non-gaming state to the appearance of the suggested performance after the reach display is changed based on the start winning of the special symbol. In the same way as making the time shorter than the corresponding time in the display, it is possible to make the time from start to end in a pseudo fluctuation display for demonstration purposes shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. can.

In the ninth embodiment described above, a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects in which the level of expectation for transition to the special gaming state differs depending on the display content, and expectations for transition to the special gaming state depending on the shape of the display image. A display image including a plurality of types of pending display 1622 having different degrees of intensity was configured to be displayed simultaneously in a plurality of divided display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative pattern display device 479.

On the other hand, when a push operation is performed on the push operation device during a non-gaming state, it is not necessary to display display images including multiple types of suggestion effects or display images including multiple types of pending displays 1622 at the same time. Each time a predetermined operation is performed on an input operation device (for example, selection operation device 263) different from the press operation device such as the press operation device 261 during the period in which the display image is displayed, the display image is sequentially changed. It may also be configured to switch.

In the ninth embodiment, a display image including a plurality of types of suggestive effects and a display image including a plurality of types of pending displays 1622 are displayed in a plurality of divided display areas (for example, display areas 479D to 479G) in the decorative pattern display device 479. ) are displayed at the same time, so that these display images, like the variable display based on the start winning of a special symbol, the images (frame images) constituting the variable display occupy the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 479. The configuration was such that the image was displayed in a smaller size than when displayed on the screen.

Instead, the display images including the suggestive effect and the display images including the pending display 1622 are displayed one by one, and the images constituting the variable display are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, such as the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which the image is displayed in a smaller size than when it is displayed on the entire display area.

Furthermore, when there are multiple types of alternative displays 1625, a configuration may be adopted in which display images including each of the different types of alternative displays 1625 are simultaneously displayed in each display area in which the decorative pattern display device 479 is divided into a plurality of parts. Even in such a configuration, the display images including each of the alternative displays 1625 can be displayed in a smaller size than when displayed after the variable display based on the starting winning of the special symbol ends.

(10) Modification of the Pachinko machine 100 of the 18th embodiment In the 18th embodiment described above, in a situation where the loss fluctuation continues multiple times, each time the loss fluctuation is performed, the loss fluctuation sound and the pressing operation device Although the configuration is such that the operating force pattern (condition pattern) of the pressing operation device 1261 is switched, either the loss fluctuation sound or the operating force pattern (condition pattern) of the pressing operation device 1261 may be switched.

In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, in a situation where the loss fluctuation occurs multiple times in succession, the loss fluctuation sound and the operating force pattern (condition pattern) of the pressing operation device 1261 are changed every time the loss fluctuation is performed once. However, the configuration may be such that the loss fluctuation sound and the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 are switched every time two or more predetermined plurality of loss fluctuations are performed in succession.

In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, in a situation where the loss fluctuation occurs multiple times in succession, the loss fluctuation sound and the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 are changed each time the loss fluctuation is performed. The number of times of loss fluctuations as a condition for switching the sound and the number of times of loss fluctuations as a condition for switching the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 do not necessarily have to be the same, and may be different times.

In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, in a situation where the loss fluctuation occurs multiple times in succession, the loss fluctuation sound and the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 are changed each time the loss fluctuation is performed. The condition for switching the sound or the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 does not necessarily have to be the number of lose fluctuations, but may be the number of fluctuating displays other than lose fluctuations (for example, fluctuating displays including reach displays such as normal reach). There may be.

In addition, the condition for switching the loss fluctuation sound and the condition for switching the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 do not necessarily have to be the number of times of the same type of fluctuation display such as loss fluctuation, and the conditions for switching the loss fluctuation sound are not necessarily required. The condition and the condition for switching the operating force pattern of the pressing operation device 1261 may be different types of variable display times.

In the eighteenth embodiment, when one stage selected by the player or the pachinko machine 100 (sub-control board 940) is set, the specifications of the push operation device 1261 are set by the control by the sub-control board 940. The neutral position BN, which is one of the positions, is configured to change to a position according to the set stage. When set, the sub control board 940 controls a combination of two or more specifications of the push operation device 1261 (for example, the operation of the push operation device 1261 when the neutral position and the operation surface are removed). The combination with the pattern) may be configured to change in a manner set for a set stage.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, in a situation where loss fluctuations occur consecutively, each time the loss fluctuation is performed, the operation force, which is one of the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261, is controlled by the sub-control board 940. The pattern was configured to be sequentially switched to one of multiple types of operating force patterns set for the set stage, but in a situation where the loss fluctuation occurs multiple times in succession, each time the loss fluctuation is executed. Then, under the control of the sub-control board 940, a combination of two or more specifications of the push operation device 1261 (for example, a combination of the operating force pattern and the operation pattern of the push operation device 1261 when the hand is removed from the operation surface) is determined. The configuration may be such that the combination (combination) is sequentially switched to one of a plurality of combinations set for the set stage.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, in a situation where loss fluctuations occur consecutively, every time the loss fluctuations are executed 20 times, the stage is changed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the control of the sub-control board 940). Although the configuration is such that the stage can be switched, the condition for switching the stage by controlling the pachinko machine 100 does not necessarily have to be the number of fluctuation displays such as loss fluctuation, but rather the total data size of the fluctuating sounds played (for example, 20 gigabytes), or may be a case where a predetermined lottery is performed every time the variable display is executed, and the number of wins in the lottery reaches one or more predetermined times.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, in a situation where loss fluctuations occur consecutively, every time the loss fluctuations are executed 20 times, the stage is changed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the control of the sub-control board 940). Although the configuration is such that the stage can be switched, the condition for switching the stage by controlling the pachinko machine 100 does not necessarily have to be the number of loss fluctuations, but may be a fluctuation display other than the loss fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation display including a reach display such as normal reach). ) may be the number of times.

In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the number of consecutive non-winnings in the lottery related to special symbols is a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 times), a gaming state more advantageous than usual (for example, time saving state) is activated. When the time-saving state is started, another stage corresponding to the started time-saving state may be started, and the stage may include a fluctuating sound, a type of symbol, At least one of the aspects of the non-symbol parts such as the background of the symbols and the specifications of the pressing operation device 1261 may be configured to be different from the specifications in the normal gaming state.

(11) The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, twice or three times). Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a special gaming state with the necessary condition that the ball lands in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in an enclosed type pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as arranged ball type pachinko, mahjong ball, and the like. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or gaming machines such as Parrot, which is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be explained, indicating problems, effects, etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses. Furthermore, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A translucent light-transmitting member (base material 611) having a front surface and a back surface that is the back surface with respect to the front surface;
a pattern portion including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member and visible from the front side through the light-transmitting member;
A gaming machine comprising: a decorative portion (decorative portion 622) provided on the peripheral edge side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the transparent member on the front side of the transparent member; ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the decorative portion is colored with a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors that color the pattern.

<Feature 11>
A translucent light-transmitting member (base material 611) having a front surface and a back surface that is the back surface with respect to the front surface;
a pattern portion including a pattern (decorative pattern 621) provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member and visible from the front side through the light-transmitting member;
A gaming machine comprising: a decorative portion (decorative portion 622) provided on the peripheral edge side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the transparent member on the front side of the transparent member; ,
The decorative portion protrudes toward the surface from a portion where the pattern portion is provided on the surface side, and is colored with a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors that color the pattern. A gaming machine with special features.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature 10 or feature 11 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, a pattern portion including a pattern is provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member. The pattern of the pattern portion is visible from the surface side of the light-transmitting member through the light-transmitting member. On the other hand, a decorative portion is provided on the peripheral edge side of the pattern in the pattern portion provided on the back surface side of the light-transmitting member on the front side of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, while the pattern portion is provided on the back side of the light-transmitting member, the decorative portion is provided on the front side of the light-transmitting member, so that the decorative portion can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the pattern portion. Thereby, the decorative feel of the decorative portion can be improved.

In particular, the decorative part provided three-dimensionally with respect to the picture part is colored with a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors that color the picture part of the picture part. gaiety and brilliance are added to it, thereby making it possible to more suitably improve the decorative feel of the decorative portion.

By improving the decorative feel of the decorative portion, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the pattern (the pattern of the pattern portion) in which the decorative portion is provided on the peripheral side, thereby improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine. I can do it.

In the gaming machine described in feature 11, "at least some of the colors that color the symbols" may be, for example, a main color that colors each symbol (for example, a color that colors the largest area of each symbol). It may be the color that most easily reflects light among them (for example, the color with the highest brightness), or it may be the color that most easily reflects light among the colors that color all the patterns. Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in feature 11, the "color configured to easily reflect light" may be defined by the presence or absence of glitter, for example, and may be defined by the brightness of the color. There may be.

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 10 or feature 11,
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The pattern portion includes a pattern (decorative pattern 621) as the pattern, and a coating film is formed on the back surface side of the transparent member,
The decorative portion is formed with a coating film on the surface side of the light-transmitting member,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the transparent member is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the reel portion with the back side on which the pattern portion is formed facing the outer circumferential surface of the reel portion.

In the gaming machine according to feature 12, the light-transmitting member is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the reel with the back side on which the pattern is formed facing the outer circumferential surface of the reel, so that the symbols included in the pattern are attached to the reel. By rotating the part, the display can be displayed in a variable manner or stopped (determined display). Since the decorative portion is formed on the surface side of the light-transmitting member, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the variable display and stop display (determined display) of the symbols.

<Feature 20>
comprising an aspect changing part that makes the aspect of a predetermined surface part visible in different aspects depending on the situation,
The aspect changing section changes the color or display target or the combination of color and display target depending on the presence or absence of light irradiated onto the surface portion from the surface side (flash) or the color of the light (black light). A gaming machine characterized in that it can be visually recognized by a player.

<Feature 21>
Equipped with a pattern part provided within the game area where the game ball can flow down,
The pattern portion is different from the first pattern (pattern 701, pattern 702, pattern 703) that becomes visible in a manner corresponding to the first situation in a predetermined first situation. A gaming machine characterized by including a second pattern (patterns 721A, 721B) that becomes visible in a predetermined second situation in a manner corresponding to the second situation.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to feature 21, the pattern section provided within the gaming area where the game ball can flow can be visually recognized in a predetermined first situation in a manner corresponding to the first situation. and a second pattern that becomes visible in a predetermined second situation different from the first situation in a manner corresponding to the second situation. It is possible to visibly display different patterns (first pattern or second pattern) between the situation and the second situation. As a result, attention to the gaming machine can be increased by different patterns that become visible depending on the situation.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21,
Equipped with a cylindrical reel part (reel body) that can rotate in the circumferential direction,
The pattern portion is formed as a coating film on one side of a sheet-like translucent member,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light-transmitting member is attached to the reel portion on the back surface side.

In the gaming machine according to feature 22, the sheet-like translucent member with the picture part coated on one side is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the reel part, thereby increasing the attention to the reel part. I can do it. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which symbols are displayed variably or stopped (determined display) by rotating the reel, the first symbol may be displayed visibly in the first situation, and the first symbol may be displayed in a visible manner in the second situation. By visually displaying the second symbol, the degree of attention to the reel portion can be suitably improved.

<Feature 23>
The gaming machine according to any one of features 20 to 22,
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as a predetermined starting condition is met;
When the starting condition is satisfied, after the display section displays the identification information in a variable manner, the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is displayed in a variable manner. means (sub control board 940);
When the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops displaying the identification information (stop symbol indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. a game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is a special game state;
Among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery, the predetermined probability is selected. Setting storage means (main controller) for storing probability information corresponding to the probability that the first lottery result is selected in the lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery. RAM of the board 920) and an input means (rear side RAM) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities. setting switch 905, initialization switch 907),
a setting changing means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
At least one of the first pattern and the second pattern is variable in a predetermined variation range in the first situation or the second situation in a different manner depending on the situation within the variation range. It is said that it is visible in
at least one of the first situation or the second situation so that when a predetermined condition is met, the pattern becomes visible in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a situation generating means (sub-control board 940) that generates a situation within the variation range.

In the gaming machine according to feature 23, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution means variably displays the identification information on the display section, and then the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is displayed. The corresponding identification information is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result, the identification information corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, and then a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means. do.

The setting storage means stores a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery. Among them, probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that a first lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery is stored. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to any one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting changing means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to a probability that corresponds to the operation information input by the input means.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the situation generation means causes at least one of the first picture and the second picture to become visible in a manner corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means. , at least one of the first situation and the second situation is generated within a variation range of each situation (first situation, second situation).

This corresponds to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery. Information about the game can be suggested to the player based on the difference in the aspect of at least one of the first symbol and the second symbol. Therefore, the player can add the gameplay of estimating probability information about the gaming machine being played according to the difference in the aspect of at least one of the first symbol and the second symbol. For example, if you consider whether a gaming machine is suitable for your tastes or a different gaming machine, you can use estimated probability information as one of the selection factors, such as whether to continue playing or to move to another gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay of a gaming machine in which the lottery probability can be set in multiple stages.

<Feature 30>
a first decorative part (decorative lens part 786) provided at a predetermined position;
a second decorative part (periphery side decorative part 788) provided on one side with respect to the first decorative part;
a light-emitting unit (light-emitting body 782) that is provided on a side farther from the player than the second decorative part and outputs light;
The second decorative part is
a first transmitting section (direct light transmitting region X1) capable of transmitting a part of the light output from the light emitting means;
a reflecting means (reflection film section 790B) capable of reflecting a part of the light outputted from the light emitting means that does not enter the inside of the first transmitting section and returns to the light emitting means toward the player; A game machine characterized by comprising:

<Feature 31>
a first decorative part (decorative lens part 786) provided at a predetermined position;
a second decorative part (periphery side decorative part 788) provided on one side with respect to the first decorative part;
a light-emitting unit (light-emitting body 782) that is provided on a side farther from the player than the second decorative part and outputs light;
comprising a reflecting means (reflecting film portion 790B) capable of reflecting light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means,
The second decorative part is
a first transmitting section (direct light transmitting region X1) that can directly transmit the light output from the light emitting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transmitting section (reflected light transmitting region X2) adjacent to or close to the first transmitting section and capable of transmitting light reflected by the reflecting means.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, the first decorative part is provided at a predetermined position, and the second decorative part is provided on one side with respect to the first decorative part. The second decorative part includes a first transparent part and a second transparent part adjacent to or close to the first transparent part. The first transmitting section is configured to be able to directly transmit the light output from the light emitting means, whereas the second transmitting section is configured by a reflecting means capable of reflecting light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means. It is configured to be able to transmit reflected light. Therefore, the way the player visually recognizes the light (for example, brightness, color, etc.) can be made different between the first transparent part and the second transparent part. Thereby, in the second decorative part, the way the light shines can be made different between the first transparent part and the second transparent part, so that the decorative effect of the light transmitted through the second decorative part can be improved.

Additionally, since the intensity of reflected light is generally lower than the intensity of incident light, the intensity of light that passes through the second transmission section can be made weaker than the intensity of light that passes through the first transmission section. . Thereby, in the second decoration part, the second transparent part can appear to be shining weakly compared to the first transparent part. Therefore, since the intensity of the second decorative part can be adjusted, the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the second decorative part can be improved in this respect as well.

As described above, according to the gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31, since the decorativeness of the light transmitted through the second decorative portion is improved, the second decorative portion and the second decorative portion can be The degree of attention to the first decorative portion provided on the side can be improved, and thereby the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine described in feature 31, the "light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means" that can be reflected by the reflection means is direct light that directly reaches the reflection means after being output from the light emitting means. Alternatively, the light may be indirect light that is reflected by one or more planes different from the reflecting means after it is output from the light emitting means and before reaching the reflecting means.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31,
The second transparent part is adjacent to or close to the first transparent part, and is arranged on an end side of the second decorative part away from the first decorative part,
The reflecting means is provided below the second transmitting section, and reflects light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting section upward and away from the first decorative section. A part of the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transmitting part, and the other part does not pass through the second transmitting part and is directly visible to the player on the outside of the second decorative part. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to advance as possible light.

In the gaming machine according to feature 32, the second transparent part of the second decorative part is adjacent to or close to the first transparent part, and is arranged on the end side of the second decorative part away from the first decorative part. . The reflecting means provided below the second transmitting part reflects the light corresponding to the light output from the light emitting means upward and away from the first decorative part. A part of the reflected light passes through the second transmitting part, and the other part does not pass through the second transmitting part and travels outward from the second decorative part as light that can be directly seen by the player. It is configured like this. The way the light is viewed by the player depends on whether the light reflected by the reflecting means passes through the second transmitting section or travels outside the second transmitting section as light that is directly visible to the player. (For example, brightness, glitter, etc.) can be changed, so the decorativeness of the light reflected by the reflecting means is improved.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 32,
A gaming machine characterized in that the reflecting means is configured so that a part thereof is exposed on the outside of the second transmitting section without overlapping with the second transmitting section when the reflecting means is viewed from the front. .

In the gaming machine according to feature 33, a part of the reflecting means is exposed on the outside of the second transmitting section without overlapping the second transmitting section when the reflecting means is viewed from the front. Therefore, on the outside side of the second transmitting section, the player receives light that is a mixture of light that is reflected by the reflecting means from natural light and light that is reflected by the reflecting means and corresponds to the light output from the light emitting means. can be visually recognized. This makes it possible to give a different impression than when the light visible to the player is only light reflected by the reflecting means from natural light.

<Feature 34>
The gaming machine according to feature 32 or feature 33,
The light emitting means is provided below the second decorative part and is configured to be able to output light toward the second decorative part,
The second decorative part is configured such that when the light output from the light emitting means reaches, a part of the light passes through the first transmitting part and the other part is reflected towards the reflecting means. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to feature 34, when the light output from the light emitting means provided below the second decorative part toward the second decorative part reaches the second decorative part, Since a part of the light is transmitted through the first transmitting part and the other part is reflected toward the reflecting means, the light can be transmitted through the first transmitting part and the second transmitting part by the common light emitting means. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the arrangement of the light emitting means from becoming complicated, and manufacturing costs can be suppressed because the light emitting means for transmitting light to the first transmitting section and the second transmitting section are shared.

<Feature 35>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features 30 to 34,
The first decorative part has translucency,
a protrusion (protrusion 787) provided along the circumferential edge of the front surface of the first decorative part on the side where the second decorative part is provided;
a decorative member (decorative sheet 789) that is provided on the back side of the first decorative part, which is the back side of the front surface, and includes content that is visible from the front side through the first decorative part; Prepare,
At least a portion (end surface 787A) of the protrusion that is visible from the front side is processed so that it appears to have a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors included in the decorative member. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to feature 35, the back surface side of the first decorative portion having translucent properties is provided with content that is visible from the front side of the first decorative portion through the first decorative portion. A decorative member is provided. On the other hand, on the peripheral edge side of the surface of the first decorative part on which the second decorative part is provided, a protruding part is provided along the peripheral edge. Therefore, since the decorative member is provided on the back side of the first decorative part, and the protruding part is provided on the front side of the first decorative part, the protruding part can be provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member. can. Thereby, the decorative appearance of the protrusion can be improved.

In particular, the protrusion provided three-dimensionally with respect to the decorative member is processed so that it appears to have a color that reflects light more easily than at least some of the colors included in the decorative member, so that the protrusion has a decorative appearance. can be improved more suitably.

<Feature 40>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that is a display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery unit and that can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
a storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores performance images (video data) used for a predetermined first performance (first suggested performance) as a performance that can be displayed on the display unit;
a performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit;
Display control means (sub-display control means) for displaying on the display unit an image of at least one region cut out from the performance image stored in the storage unit as an image to be used for a predetermined second performance different from the first performance. control board 940);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display control means causes the display section to display an image of at least one area cut out from the performance image in a deformed or processed state.

<Feature 41>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that is a display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery unit and that can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores performance images (video data) used for a predetermined first performance (first suggestion performance) among the performances that can be displayed on the display unit;
an effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display section;
An image of at least one region cut out from the performance image stored in the storage unit when a predetermined second performance (second suggested performance) different from the first performance is selected by the performance selection means. display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on the display section,
When the first effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means causes the display unit to display the effect image without predetermined deformation or predetermined processing; When the second performance is selected by the performance selection means, an image of at least one area cut out from the performance image is displayed on the display unit in a state where the image is subjected to the predetermined transformation or the predetermined processing. A gaming machine characterized by:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature 40 or feature 41 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage section stores performance images used for a predetermined first performance among the performances that can be displayed on the display section.

When a predetermined second performance different from the first performance is selected by the performance selection means, at least one area cut out from the performance image used for the first performance stored in the storage section is selected by the display control means. The image is displayed on the display section after undergoing a predetermined transformation or processing. Therefore, since the effect images used for the first effect stored in the storage section are used in the second effect, it is possible to suppress the amount of memory of effect images, and to store images for each of the first effect and the second effect. To easily reduce the need to develop performance images, and to suppress development costs accordingly.

In addition, since the configuration is such that an image of an area cut out from the performance image used for the first performance is displayed in the second performance, the event that can be expected when the first performance is displayed is the performance used for the first performance. A similar suggestion can be made when a second effect using an image cut out from the image is displayed. As a result, for example, if the first performance is a performance that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation level, reliability), the ease of transition to the special game state can be indicated. It is also possible to suggest the degree by displaying the second effect. In addition, since the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances, It is possible to increase the variety of effects while suppressing the cost for developing effect images.

Here, in the second effect, since the configuration is such that an image of an area cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed, the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is displayed. It can be made difficult to guess. As a result, the difficulty level of guessing the event that can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed can be made different between when the first effect is displayed and when the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the gameplay by estimating the expected event (for example, the degree of ease of transition to a special gaming state) after the first effect or the second effect is displayed. Attention level can be improved.

In particular, since the image of the area cut out from the performance image used in the first performance is displayed in a transformed or processed state in the second performance, the first performance corresponding to the image displayed in the second performance is It is possible to suitably make it difficult to guess the effect image.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 40 or feature 41,
When the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, the display control means displays at least a portion of images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit in a front view. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is displayed in a deformed or processed state so that it appears to be facing substantially the same direction, which is different from the current direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature 42, when the second performance is selected by the performance selection means, the display control means cuts out the performance image from the performance image (the performance image used for the first performance) stored in the storage unit. At least some of the images of the plurality of areas are displayed in a deformed or processed state so that they appear to face substantially the same direction, which is different from the front direction. This makes it possible to give a more orderly impression than when the images of the plurality of areas are displayed so that they all face different directions.

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to feature 42,
The display control means is arranged to display images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit in a transformed or processed state when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the images is displayed so as to appear to overlap with other images.

In the gaming machine according to feature 43, when the second performance is selected by the performance selection means, the display control means cuts out the performance image from the performance image (the performance image used for the first performance) stored in the storage unit. At least one of the images in a plurality of areas that have been transformed or processed is displayed so that it appears to overlap the other image, so the content of the overlaid image is shown to the player. It can be made difficult to recognize. In this respect as well, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess the effect image corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the gameplay of guessing what can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed (for example, the ease of transition to a special game state). , it is possible to increase the attention to the gaming machine.

<Features 50>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that is a display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery unit and that can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
a storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores performance images (video data) used for a predetermined first performance (first suggested performance) as a performance that can be displayed on the display unit;
an effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display section;
As an image used for a predetermined second effect (second suggestion effect) different from the first effect, at least among images corresponding to images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by comprising display control means (sub-control board 940) for simultaneously displaying some images on the display section.

<Feature 51>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) that is a display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery unit and that can display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result;
A storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores performance images (video data) used for a predetermined first performance (first suggestion performance) among the performances that can be displayed on the display unit;
an effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting an effect to be displayed on the display section;
When a predetermined second performance (second suggested performance) different from the first performance is selected by the performance selection means, an image of a plurality of regions cut out from the performance image stored in the storage unit A gaming machine characterized by comprising display control means (sub-control board 940) for simultaneously displaying at least some of the corresponding images on the display section.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine according to feature 50 or feature 51 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase the degree of attention to the gaming machine. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display an effect according to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage section stores performance images used for a predetermined first performance among the performances that can be displayed on the display section.

When a predetermined second performance different from the first performance is selected by the performance selection means, the display control means controls the display control means to display a plurality of areas cut out from the performance image used for the first performance stored in the storage unit. At least some of the images corresponding to the images are simultaneously displayed on the display section. Therefore, since the effect images used for the first effect stored in the storage section are used in the second effect, it is possible to suppress the amount of memory of effect images, and to store images for each of the first effect and the second effect. To easily reduce the need to develop performance images, and to suppress development costs accordingly.

In addition, since the configuration is such that an image corresponding to the image of the area cut out from the performance image used for the first performance is displayed in the second performance, the event that can be expected when the first performance is displayed is A similar suggestion can be made when a second effect using an image cut out from the effect image used for the effect is displayed. As a result, for example, if the first performance is a performance that can suggest the degree of ease of transition to the special game state (expectation level, reliability), the ease of transition to the special game state can be indicated. It is also possible to suggest the degree by displaying the second effect. In addition, since the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the first effect is displayed and the suggestion of an event that can be expected when the second effect is displayed are realized with different appearances, It is possible to increase the variety of effects while suppressing the cost for developing effect images.

Here, in the second effect, since the configuration is such that an image corresponding to an image of an area cut out from the effect image used for the first effect is displayed, the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect is It is possible to make it difficult to guess the effect image. As a result, the difficulty level of guessing the event that can be expected after the first effect or the second effect is displayed can be made different between when the first effect is displayed and when the second effect is displayed. It is possible to improve the gameplay by estimating the expected event (for example, the degree of ease of transition to a special gaming state) after the first effect or the second effect is displayed. Attention level can be improved.

In particular, since the configuration is such that at least some of the images corresponding to images of a plurality of areas cut out from the effect image used for the first effect are displayed simultaneously, for example, images corresponding to images of the plurality of areas are displayed. It is easier to guess which effect image in the first effect the image displayed in the second effect corresponds to than when one of the images is displayed alone. This can prevent it from becoming too difficult to guess the effect image of the first effect corresponding to the image displayed in the second effect.

In the gaming machine described in feature 51, "an image corresponding to images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image" refers to an image that is completely identical in appearance to images of a plurality of regions cut out from the effect image. It may be an image, it may be an almost identical image, it may be an image that displays an image cut out from a production image with the same appearance, or it may be an image that displays an image cut out from a production image with the same appearance. It may be an image that has been deformed or processed.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 50 or feature 51,
The display control means is arranged so that when the second effect is selected by the effect selection means, at least one image among the images corresponding to the images of the plurality of cut out areas appears to overlap with another image. A game machine characterized by displaying information.

In the gaming machine according to feature 52, when the second performance is selected by the performance selection means, the display control means cuts out the performance image stored in the storage unit in association with the first performance. Since the configuration is such that at least one image out of the images corresponding to images in a plurality of areas is displayed so as to overlap with other images, it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the overlaid image. can. Thereby, it is possible to suitably make it difficult to guess the effect image of the first effect that corresponds to the image displayed in the second effect.

<Feature 60>
The game machine includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, and can be placed at neutral positions set at a plurality of locations when the operated part is not operated. an operating means ( button operation section 850, operation cover member 870),
The operating means can be held at one of the neutral positions when the operated part is not operated, and the operating means can be moved to a position without a player's operation on the operated part. An actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) for operating;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means so that the position of the operation means can at least be changed;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means includes at least control for moving the operation means at a speed that generates an inertial force large enough to deform the elastic body.

<Feature 61>
It includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) supported by a base body (base body 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation. The operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position when the operating section is not operated, and when the player operates the operated section in the predetermined direction, the operated section is moved toward the base by deformation of the elastic body. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) configured to be movable in the predetermined direction relative to the button;
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed to the predetermined direction or the predetermined direction without any operation of the operated part by the player. actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) movably operating in opposite directions;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means such that at least the position of the operation means can be changed.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine according to feature 60 or feature 61, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. In other words, in the operating means including the operated part, the operated part is supported by the base body through the elastic body, so that when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction, the elastic body deforms. This configuration allows the operated section to be moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the base body.

The operating means is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated section is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not operated.

Further, the operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the actuating means without the player operating the operated portion. The actuating means are controlled by a motion control means such that the position of the actuating means is at least changeable.

Therefore, for example, the actuating means is operated under the control of the operation control means, and thereby the operating means stopped at a predetermined first position (that is, a state in which no operation is performed on the operated part) is moved to the first position. (for example, a neutral position) to a predetermined second position in a predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction and then stopped at the second position, the stoppage occurs at the second position. In the operating means, the operated part supported by the base via the elastic body can be moved along a predetermined direction by the inertia force received by the operated part, and the predetermined direction and the predetermined It is also possible to perform a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates in the opposite direction.

Alternatively, for example, when the operating means operates the operated part in a predetermined direction from the neutral position when the player operates the operating means in a predetermined direction with a force that exceeds the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, and when the operation on the operated part is completed after the operating means moves from the neutral position in a predetermined direction by operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated part. In the case where the operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position, after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force is completed, the operating means returns to the neutral position and stops, and the operated object is supported by the base via an elastic body. The inertia force received by the operated part allows the part to vibrate (reciprocating motion) in a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In this manner, according to the gaming machine according to feature 60 or feature 61, the operating means including the operated portion supported by the base via the elastic body is controlled by the operating means controlled by the operation control means. Since the position of the operating means is configured to be changeable at least, the operated part of the operating means is vibrated back and forth between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the inertial force received by the operated part. It can be moved (reciprocating motion).

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means that can provide effects using vibrations of the operated section. Since the operating means can now constitute a part of the performance, interest in the operating means can be increased, and thereby, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved. Further, even if the movement of the operating means is simply controlled, the operation of the operated section can be complicated, and the tactile sensation when the player touches the operated section can be made different.

<Feature 62>
The gaming machine according to feature 60 or feature 61,
The actuating means is configured to move the operated part from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force that exceeds a holding force that holds the operating means at the neutral position. The operation means is enabled to move, and the operation on the operated section is performed after the operation means is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated section. A gaming machine characterized in that when the game is finished, the operating means is moved to the neutral position.

In the gaming machine according to feature 62, when the operating means causes the operating means to move to the neutral position when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. The device is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction from the neutral position, and the operating means is moved from the neutral position in the predetermined direction by the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position). The operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position when the operation on the operated section is completed later.

Therefore, since the position of the operating means can be moved in a predetermined direction by the actuating means, the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated part due to the player's operation from the neutral position to the predetermined direction is determined by the deformation of the elastic body. It becomes possible to make the amount of movement of the operated part exceed the amount of movement that is possible. Thereby, compared to a case where the amount of movement of the operated section is limited to a certain range based on the deformation of the elastic body, it is possible to diversify the operational feeling when the player operates the operated section.

Further, when the operation control means is configured to control the operating means such that the holding force can be changed, the force with which the player operates the operated part can be varied in the area where the operating means is moved by the operating means. Therefore, even in such a case, it is possible to diversify the operational feeling when the player operates the operated section.

<Feature 70>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
a fluctuation execution means (main control board 920) that, when the starting condition is met, displays a symbol on a predetermined display section in a fluctuating manner and then stops displaying a symbol corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the stop display by the variation execution means, a game control means (main control board 920 )and,
If the start condition is met when the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation execution means, information corresponding to the lottery results by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main a RAM of the control board 920) and a suspension storage means (main control board 920) for suspending execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means,
An operation that includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and that the operated part is located at a predetermined neutral position when it is not operated. means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870);
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operation means or the magnitude of a reaction force to a moving operation of the operation means;
The operation control means controls the operation of the operation means so that the operation of the operation means is controlled in a manner according to at least one of the number of suspension information (the number of suspensions) stored in the suspension storage means or the contents of the suspension information. A gaming machine comprising at least the following.

<Feature 71>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
a fluctuation execution means (main control board 920) that, when the starting condition is met, displays a symbol on a predetermined display section in a fluctuating manner and then stops displaying a symbol corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means as a stop symbol;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, after the stop display by the variation execution means, a game control means (main control board 920 )and,
If the start condition is met when the fluctuation display is being performed by the fluctuation execution means, information corresponding to the lottery results by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main a RAM of the control board 920) and a suspension storage means (main control board 920) for suspending execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means,
An operation that includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and that the operated part is located at a predetermined neutral position when it is not operated. means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without any operation of the operated part by the player. an operating means that is movable from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when a player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force that exceeds a holding force that holds the operating means at the neutral position; The operation means is moved in a predetermined direction, and after the operation means is moved from the neutral position in the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated part, the operation means is moved in the predetermined direction. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the part is completed;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means so that the position of the operation means can at least be changed;
The operation control means is configured to move the operating means to the neutral position that is predetermined according to the number of suspension information stored in the suspension storage means (the number of suspensions), or to control the operation by the player. A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means is controlled so that the movement mode of the operating means when the operating section is operated is in a mode according to the content of the reservation information stored in the reservation storage means.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, the operating means, which includes an operated section movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated section is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is configured to move the operating means from the neutral position in a predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding a holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. The operated part is configured to be movable to the operated part after the operating means moves from the neutral position in a predetermined direction due to the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position). The operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position when the operation is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured such that the position of the operating means can be moved at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the actuating means without the player operating the operated section. The actuating means are controlled by a motion control means such that the position of the actuating means is at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71, if a predetermined starting condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, the holding storage means stores the lottery result by the lottery means. In a configuration in which information corresponding to a predetermined number of items is stored as pending information in a predetermined storage unit with an upper limit of a predetermined number, and execution of a variable display corresponding to the information by the variable execution unit is suspended, the information is stored in the pending storage unit. A hold in which the operating means moves to a neutral position predetermined according to the number of hold information, or the movement mode of the operating means when the operated part is operated by the player is stored in the hold storage means. The actuation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the mode corresponds to the content of the information.

By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated part by the player's operation from the neutral position in a predetermined direction, thereby improving the operational feel of the operating means. Can be diversified. Furthermore, by changing the movement mode of the operating means when the player operates the operated section, it is possible to diversify the operational feeling when the player operates the operated section. By diversifying the operating feel of the operating means, attention to the gaming machine can be increased.

In addition, examples of the content of the pending information include the validity of the lottery result, the content of the performance selected based on the lottery result, and the like.

<Feature 72>
In the gaming machine according to feature 70 or feature 71,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base body (base body 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, and the player A gaming machine characterized in that when the part is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated part is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to feature 72, since the operated section is supported by the base via the elastic body, when the player operates the operated section in a predetermined direction, the operating means The operated portion is configured to be able to be moved in a predetermined direction relative to the base body by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operated part supported by the base body via the elastic body, The inertial force received by the operated section allows it to perform a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means that can provide effects using vibrations of the operated section. Since the operating means can now constitute a part of the performance, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

<Feature 80>
An operation that includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and that the operated part is located at a predetermined neutral position when it is not operated. means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870);
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means such that at least the position of the operation means can be changed;
The operation control means is configured to satisfy a predetermined condition based on the gaming situation (for example, the number of holds, the playing time, the number of executions of a predetermined effect (for example, displaying a specific character)) or the lottery result of a predetermined lottery. The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation of the operating means is controlled so that the operating means moves to a neutral position corresponding to the established condition among the plurality of predetermined neutral positions.

<Feature 81>
An operation that includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and that the operated part is located at a predetermined neutral position when it is not operated. means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without any operation of the operated part by the player. an operating means that is movable from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when a player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force that exceeds a holding force that holds the operating means at the neutral position; The operation means is moved in a predetermined direction, and after the operation means is moved from the neutral position in the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated part, the operation means is moved in the predetermined direction. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the part is completed;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means so that the position of the operation means can at least be changed;
The operation control means controls the actuation means so that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation means is moved to a neutral position corresponding to the established condition among the plurality of predetermined neutral positions. A gaming machine featuring:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine according to feature 80 or feature 81, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, the operating means, which includes an operated section movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated section is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is configured to move the operating means from the neutral position in a predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding a holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. The operated part is configured to be movable to the operated part after the operating means moves from the neutral position in a predetermined direction due to the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position). The operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position when the operation is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured such that the position of the operating means can be moved at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the actuating means without the player operating the operated section. The actuating means are controlled by a motion control means such that the position of the actuating means is at least changeable.

Here, the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operating means is moved to a neutral position corresponding to the satisfied condition among a plurality of predetermined neutral positions. . By changing the neutral position of the operating means, it is possible to change the amount of movement (stroke amount) of the operated part by the player's operation from the neutral position in a predetermined direction. It is possible to diversify the operational feel when operating. By diversifying the operating feel of the operating means, attention to the gaming machine can be increased.

Note that the "predetermined conditions" described in feature 81 include, for example, when the number of pending unit games related to special symbols changes, or during a predetermined performance (for example, a performance performed during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols). This may also be the case, for example, when the number of times the operated section has been operated has reached a predetermined number of times.

<Feature 82>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80 or feature 81,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base body (base body 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, and the player A gaming machine characterized in that when the part is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated part is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to feature 82, the operating means has the operated section supported by the base via the elastic body, so that when the player operates the operated section in a predetermined direction, the operating means The operated portion is configured to be able to be moved in a predetermined direction relative to the base body by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operated part supported by the base body via the elastic body, The inertial force received by the operated section allows it to perform a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means that can provide effects using vibrations of the operated section. Since the operating means can now constitute a part of the performance, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

<Features 90>
An operation that includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and that the operated part is located at a predetermined neutral position when it is not operated. means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870);
an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that holds the operating means at the neutral position and enables movement of the operating means from the neutral position in the predetermined direction when the player operates the operating means in the predetermined direction; ,
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operation means and the reaction force against the moving operation of the operation means;
The operation control means controls the actuation means so that when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction, a reaction force to the movement operation of the operation means changes, A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of patterns of changes in the reaction force are set corresponding to lottery results or expectations of a predetermined lottery.

<Feature 91>
An operation that includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and that the operated part is located at a predetermined neutral position when it is not operated. means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without any operation of the operated part by the player. an operating means that is movable from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when a player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force that exceeds a holding force that holds the operating means at the neutral position; The operation means is moved in a predetermined direction, and after the operation means is moved from the neutral position in the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated part, the operation means is moved in the predetermined direction. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the part is completed;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that at least the position of the operation means and the holding force can be changed;
The operation control means is configured to operate the operation control means at a first position away from the neutral position in the predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force. A game machine characterized in that the operating means is controlled so that a reaction force against a movement operation of the operating means is changed.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, the operating means, which includes an operated section movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated section is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is configured to move the operating means from the neutral position in a predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding a holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. The operated part is configured to be movable to the operated part after the operating means moves from the neutral position in a predetermined direction due to the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position). The operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position when the operation is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured such that the position of the operating means can be moved at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the actuating means without the player operating the operated section. The actuating means are controlled by a motion control means such that the position of the actuating means is at least changeable.

Here, when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the holding force changes at a first position away from the neutral position in a predetermined direction; The actuation means are controlled by the movement control means. As a result, when the player operates the operated part with a force exceeding the holding force, the operating feeling of the operating means changes at the first position in the middle of the operation, so that the operating feeling of the operating means becomes monotonous. Therefore, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved. For example, in addition to the control of the operation feeling that resists a constant reaction force to the moving operation of the operation means, by setting the control of the operation feeling in which the reaction force changes discontinuously, it is possible to control the operation feeling of the operation means. The reaction force to the moving operation of the operating means at one position can be varied.

<Feature 92>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base body (base body 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, and the player A gaming machine characterized in that when the part is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated part is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to feature 92, since the operated section is supported by the base via the elastic body, when the player operates the operated section in a predetermined direction, the operating means The operated portion is configured to be able to be moved in a predetermined direction relative to the base body by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operated part supported by the base body via the elastic body, The inertial force received by the operated section allows it to perform a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means that can provide effects using vibrations of the operated section. Since the operating means can now constitute a part of the performance, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

<Feature A0>
It includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and is maintained in a predetermined neutral state when the operated part is not operated. Operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870),
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the position of the operation means so that the position of the operation means can at least be changed;
detection means (encoder, sub-control board 940) capable of detecting at least one of the amount of movement of the operating means or the moving speed of the operated section when the player operates the operated section in a predetermined direction; ,
A predetermined display when at least one of the movement amount or the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value or reaches a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range. an operation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display on the section (decorative pattern display device 479) or operating a predetermined movable section;
A gaming machine characterized in that two or more values corresponding to lottery results of a predetermined lottery are set as the predetermined target value, the predetermined value, or a value within the predetermined range.

<Feature A1>
An operation that includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's operation, and that the operated part is located at a predetermined neutral position when it is not operated. means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870);
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without any operation of the operated part by the player. an operating means that is movable from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when a player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force that exceeds a holding force that holds the operating means at the neutral position; The operation means is moved in a predetermined direction, and after the operation means is moved from the neutral position in the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated part, the operation means is moved in the predetermined direction. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the part is completed;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means such that at least the position of the operation means can be changed;
Detection means capable of detecting at least one of the amount of movement of the operating means or the moving speed of the operating section when the player operates the operating section in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force ( encoder, sub-control board 940),
A predetermined display when at least one of the movement amount or the movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value or reaches a predetermined value or a value within a predetermined range. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: operation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display on a section (decorative pattern display device 479) or operating a predetermined movable section.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, the operating means, which includes an operated section movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the operating means when the operated section is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is configured to move the operating means from the neutral position in a predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding a holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. The operated part is configured to be movable to the operated part after the operating means moves from the neutral position in a predetermined direction due to the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position). The operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position when the operation is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured such that the position of the operating means can be moved at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the actuating means without the player operating the operated section. The actuating means are controlled by a motion control means such that the position of the actuating means is at least changeable.

Here, in the gaming machine according to feature A0 or feature A1, the amount of movement of the operating means when the player operates the operated section in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, or the amount of movement of the operated section Detection means capable of detecting the moving speed of the vehicle is provided. When the movement amount or movement speed detected by the detection means exceeds a predetermined target value, the operation execution means displays a predetermined display on a predetermined display section or displays a predetermined display. The movable part is operated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player operates the operating means in accordance with a predetermined target value, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

<Feature A2>
In the gaming machine described in feature A0 or feature A1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base body (base body 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, and the player A gaming machine characterized in that when the part is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated part is movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine described in feature A2, since the operated section is supported by the base via the elastic body, when the player operates the operated section in a predetermined direction, the operating means The operated portion is configured to be able to be moved in a predetermined direction relative to the base body by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operated part supported by the base body via the elastic body, The inertial force received by the operated section allows it to perform a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means that can provide effects using vibrations of the operated section. Since the operating means can now constitute a part of the performance, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

<Feature B0>
An operating section (operated section 852, operation cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that can be touched by a player and movable in a predetermined direction (downward), and at least a part of the operating section an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) that is housed and attached to a predetermined opening;
an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means at a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can at least be changed;
The neutral position of the operating means is a position where the contact surface is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening (or at least a part of the periphery of the opening) in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the contact surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening (or at least a part of the periphery of the opening), or A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least a recessed position relative to the surface (or at least a part of the periphery of the opening) in the moving direction of the operating means.

<Feature B1>
It is equipped with an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in the direction of the pressing (downward) by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface (operating surface 870B), and the pressing surface is used for playing games. An operating means (button operating section 850, operation cover member 870) that is housed and attached in a predetermined opening while facing the person, and is located at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not pressed. and,
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not pressed, and the position of the operating means is at least opposite to the direction of the pressing without the player pressing the operated part. an actuating means movable in the direction of when the player performs the pressing operation on the operated part with a force exceeding a holding force that holds the operating means at the neutral position; The operation means can be moved in the direction of the operation, and after the operation means has been moved from the neutral position in the direction of the pressing by a pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operation target part, the operation means can be moved in the direction of the operation. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means toward the neutral position when the pressing operation on the part is completed;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means so that the position of the operation means can at least be changed;
The neutral position of the operating means is a position where the pressing surface is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is parallel to the opening surface in the moving direction of the operating means. A gaming machine characterized by including at least a recessed position.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to feature B0 or feature B1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which operating means that can be touched by a player or operating means that can be operated by a player can be suitably operated. I can do it. For example, an operating means that includes an operated part that can be moved in the direction of the press by a player's pressing operation on a predetermined pressing surface can be held at a predetermined neutral position by the actuating means when the operated part is not pressed. It is composed of Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not pressed.

In addition, when the operating means is operated by the player to press the operated part in a predetermined direction (more specifically, the direction of the press) with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. The operating means is configured to be movable from the neutral position in the direction of the pressing, and the operating means is moved by the pressing operation on the operated part (pressing operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position). The operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position when the pressing operation on the operated portion is completed after the operating means has moved from the neutral position in the direction of the pressing.

Further, the operating means is configured such that the position of the operating means can be moved at least in a direction opposite to the direction of the pressing by the operating means without the player's pressing operation on the operated section. The actuating means are controlled by a motion control means such that the position of the actuating means is at least changeable.

Here, in an operating means that is housed and attached to a predetermined opening with the pressing surface (the surface on which a pressing operation is performed by the player) of the operated part facing the player, the neutral position of the operating means is such that the pressing surface of the operating section is The configuration includes at least a position where the surface is substantially equal to the opening surface of the opening in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface is recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface. Therefore, the neutral position of the operating means is a position where the pressing surface of the operated part is approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening and the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where it is recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface. In this case, compared to the case where the pressing surface protrudes from the opening surface (more specifically, protruding in the opposite direction to the pressing direction), the force of hitting the pressing surface is It is possible to make certain pressing operations difficult to perform.

As a result, the pressing surface of the operated section is at a position approximately equal to the opening surface of the opening in the moving direction of the operating means, or a position where the pressing surface of the operated section is recessed in the moving direction of the operating means with respect to the opening surface is at the neutral position of the operating means. By setting the position, the player who operates the operating means (pressing the operated part) is required to hold the operating means (to place the operating means in the neutral position) rather than pressing with force such as hitting the pressing surface. It is possible to perform a pressing operation of pushing the pressing surface against the holding force (holding force).

Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with an actuating means that allows the operating means to move from the neutral position in the direction of the pressing when the operated part is pressed with a force that exceeds the holding force, a forceful pressing operation is required. Since the force of the actuation means allows the player to suitably experience the operational feeling of pressing, which is difficult to experience, it is possible to increase the attention to the gaming machine equipped with the actuating means.

<Feature B2>
In the gaming machine described in feature B0 or feature B1,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base body (base body 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in the direction of the pressing operation by a player's pressing operation on the pressing surface, A gaming machine characterized in that when a player operates the pressing surface in the pressing direction, the operated part is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body. .

In the gaming machine described in feature B2, the operating means has the operated part supported by the base body via the elastic body, so that the player can move the pressing surface in a predetermined direction (more specifically, in the direction of pressing). ), the operated portion is configured to be able to be moved in the direction of the pressing with respect to the base by deformation of the elastic body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the pressing operation on the pressing surface with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the object supported by the base body via the elastic body The operating section can be caused to vibrate (reciprocating motion) in a reciprocating direction between a pressing direction and a direction opposite to the pressing direction by the inertial force received by the operated section.

Thereby, the operating means can function not only as a means for simply allowing the player to perform a pressing operation, but also as a means that can provide effects using vibrations of the operated section. Since the operating means can now constitute a part of the performance, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

<Feature C0>
An operating section (operated section 852, operation cover member 870) having a contact surface (pressing surface) that can be touched by a player and movable in a predetermined direction (downward), and at least a part of the operating section an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) that is housed and attached to a predetermined opening;
an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) capable of holding the operating means at a predetermined neutral position and moving the position of the operating means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation means so that the position of the operation means can at least be changed;
Provided on a side closer to the player than the operating means, and supporting at least a portion of the player's hand excluding a part of the finger side that contacts the operating section and the forearm part continuous with the hand. a support part (hand rest 895) that is provided at a position where the player can touch the operating part on the finger side of the supported part with at least a part of the supported part being supported; A gaming machine characterized by:

<Feature C1>
The operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) is movable in a predetermined direction (downward) by a player's hand operation, and the operated part is in a predetermined neutral position when not operated. operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) located at
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and the position of the operating means is at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without any operation of the operated part by the player. an operating means that is movable from the neutral position to the predetermined direction when a player operates the operated part in the predetermined direction with a force that exceeds a holding force that holds the operating means at the neutral position; The operation means is moved in a predetermined direction, and after the operation means is moved from the neutral position in the predetermined direction by an operation with a force exceeding the holding force on the operated part, the operation means is moved in the predetermined direction. an actuating means (actuating mechanism 860) that moves the operating means toward the neutral position when the operation on the part is completed;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the actuation means such that at least the position of the operation means can be changed;
The player is provided on a side closer to the player than the operating means, and includes at least a part of the player's hand excluding a part of the finger side that operates the operated part and the forearm part that is continuous with the hand. a support part (hand rest 895) which is capable of being supported, and supports the operated part so that the player can operate the operated part by hand on the finger side of the supported part while the at least part of the supported part is supported; A game machine characterized by comprising:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which operating means that can be contacted by a player or operating means that can be operated by a player can be suitably operated. I can do it. For example, an operating means including an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by a player's hand operation is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position by the actuating means when the operated part is not operated. . Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not operated.

In addition, the operating means is configured to move the operating means from the neutral position in a predetermined direction when the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction with a force exceeding a holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position. The operated part is configured to be movable to the operated part after the operating means moves from the neutral position in a predetermined direction due to the operation on the operated part (operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position). The operating means is configured to move toward the neutral position when the operation is completed.

Further, the operating means is configured such that the position of the operating means can be moved at least in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the actuating means without the player operating the operated section. The actuating means are controlled by a motion control means such that the position of the actuating means is at least changeable.

Here, on the side closer to the player than the operating means, at least a portion of the player's hand excluding the finger side that operates the operated part and the forearm part that is continuous with the hand is attached to the player's hand. A support portion is provided for supporting the operated portion so as to be operable by hand. Therefore, when a player operates the operated part with his/her hand, at least part of the part of the hand other than the part of the finger that operates the operated part and the forearm that is continuous with the hand is supported. Since the hand can be supported by the part, the hand can be stabilized, and the player can be prevented from operating the operated part at an inappropriate position.

Furthermore, since at least a part of the forearm continuous with the part of the player's hand excluding the part on the side of the finger that operates the operated part can be supported by the support part, the hand and the forearm part can be supported by the support part. The strength of the operation on the operated part can be suppressed compared to the case where the operated part moves freely. This makes it difficult for the player who operates the operated section (operates the operating means) to perform forceful operations (for example, hitting the operated section) on the operated section.

Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with an actuating means that allows the operating means to move from the neutral position in the predetermined direction when the operated part is operated in the predetermined direction with a force exceeding the holding force, the Since the player can suitably experience the feeling of operating the operating means, which is difficult to experience due to the force of a certain operation, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine equipped with the operating means.

In addition, in the gaming machines of characteristics C0 and C1, the "hand" may be a region distal to the wrist and may be composed of the palm and fingers, and the "forearm" may be a region continuous with the hand. It may also be the area from the wrist to the elbow.

<Feature C2>
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A translucent member (a front board) that is provided in front of the gaming area where the gaming ball flows down and partitions the gaming area from the player so that the player can view the gaming area from the front side. 222),
The operating means is provided on the front side of the transparent member,
The support portion is provided such that at least a portion thereof is on the front side of the operation means,
The length in the front-back direction from the front-back length in the region in front of the light-transmitting member to the front-back length in the region including the operated part and the support part from the front end of the operated part to the rear end of the support part. A gaming machine characterized in that the length excluding the above is shorter than the length of the operated section in the front-back direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature C2, the operating means is provided on the front side of the transparent member that partitions between the player and the gaming area through which the gaming ball flows, and the supporting section is provided at least partially. In a configuration provided to be on the front side of the operating means, the front end of the operating means in the region including the operated part and the support part of the operating means is determined from the length in the front-rear direction in the region on the front side of the light-transmitting member. The length excluding the length in the front-rear direction from to the rear end of the support part is configured to be shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the operated part. In other words, the area of the operating means including the operated part and the support part occupies a relatively large area in the front-rear direction of the area in front of the light-transmitting member.

In such a configuration, the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region in front of the transparent member (for example, the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the region on the front side of the front side, or the size of the operated portion is relatively large in the front region, (e.g., a size that can be operated with a finger). In this way, even when the size of the operated section is configured to be relatively large in the area in front of the light-transmitting member, the supporting section is provided so that at least a part of the operated section is located in front of the operating means. This enables a suitable operation of the operated part (that is, a relatively large operated part), and also allows the player to suitably experience the feeling of operating the operating means provided with the operated part. be able to.

<Feature C3>
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The operating means is configured such that the operated portion is supported by a base body (base body 851) via an elastic body (spring member 853) and is movable in a predetermined direction by a player's operation, and the player A gaming machine characterized in that when the part is operated in the predetermined direction, the operated part is configured to be movable in the predetermined direction with respect to the base body by deformation of the elastic body.

In the gaming machine according to feature C3, since the operated section is supported by the base via the elastic body, when the player operates the operated section in a predetermined direction, the operating means The operated portion is configured to be able to be moved in a predetermined direction relative to the base body by deformation of the body.

Therefore, for example, in the operating means that returns to the neutral position and stops after the operation with a force exceeding the holding force that holds the operating means in the neutral position, the operated part supported by the base body via the elastic body, The inertial force received by the operated section allows it to perform a vibrating motion (reciprocating motion) that reciprocates between a predetermined direction and a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

As a result, the operating means can function not only as a means for allowing a player to perform an operation, but also as a means that can provide effects using vibrations of the operated section. Since the operating means can now constitute a part of the performance, it is possible to increase interest in the operating means, and in this respect as well, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

<Feature D1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) that is a display section that displays the lottery results by the lottery means and that can display at least an effect according to the lottery results before displaying the lottery results;
a storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (video data) that can be used for the plurality of types of effects (variable display, suggestive effect) that can be displayed on the display unit;
performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of types of performances;
When the predetermined starting condition is met, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display section, and when the performance is selected by the performance selection means, the storage section is configured to display the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the effect on the display unit using the effect image stored in the display unit;
The display control means targets at least some of the plurality of performances during a non-gaming state in which a variable display that is executed before the lottery result is displayed is performed. At least one unit image (frame image, still image) constituting one or more of the effect images each used for the effect of the section, or each from at least one unit image forming the one or more effect images. A gaming machine characterized in that a non-gaming image (customer waiting effect) including an image of at least one cut out area is displayed on the display section.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature D1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In the above, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display at least an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means causes the lottery result by the lottery means to be displayed on the display section, and the performance to be displayed on the display section is selected from among the plurality of types of performances by the performance selection means. In this case, the performance using the performance image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before displaying the lottery result.

In addition, during a non-gaming state in which the player is waiting for a game to be executed, the display control means selects one or more effects that are used for at least some effects among the plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit. A non-gaming image is displayed that includes at least one unit image constituting the image, or images of at least one region each cut out from at least one unit image constituting the one or more performance images. displayed in the section.

As a result, the non-gaming image is displayed during a non-gaming state in which the player is waiting for the player to play a game, so that the player can see the effect that can be displayed on the display unit when a predetermined starting condition is met. (More specifically, it is possible to make the user recognize or guess what kind of performance is at least some of the multiple types of performances). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the performance displayed on the display section, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

In particular, the non-gaming image is constructed by reusing a part of the effect image stored in the storage unit (more specifically, a unit image configuring the effect image or an image of an area cut out from the unit image). Since it is an image that is displayed on the display when a predetermined starting condition is met, there is no need to prepare a dedicated image for non-gaming images, and the amount of memory can be reduced accordingly. Non-gaming images can be displayed at the same high resolution as the performance images). Furthermore, since there is no need to prepare a dedicated image for non-gaming images, development costs can be reduced accordingly.

Note that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature D1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for a game to be executed, or instead of the non-gaming state, a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation section may be performed. It may also be in a possible operable state.

<Feature E1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) that is a display section that displays the lottery results by the lottery means and that can display at least an effect according to the lottery results before displaying the lottery results;
a storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (video data) that can be used for the plurality of types of effects (variable display, suggestive effect) that can be displayed on the display unit;
a first performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of types of performances in response to the predetermined result when the predetermined starting condition is met;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
The same as the first effect selection means or the first effect selection means when the player operates the operation part during a non-gaming state in which a variable display is not performed before the lottery result is displayed. a second performance selection means (sub-control board 940) that selects a performance to be displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of types of performances based on selection conditions that are substantially the same as the selection conditions;
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display section, and when the performance is selected by the first performance selection means, the lottery result is displayed before the lottery result is displayed. Display control means (sub control board 940) for displaying the effect on the display unit using the effect image stored in the storage unit,
The display control means causes the display unit to display a display corresponding to the lottery result when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, and also causes the second effect selection unit to display a display corresponding to the lottery result on the display unit. A game characterized in that when the performance is selected by, the display unit displays the performance using the performance image stored in the storage unit before displaying the display corresponding to the lottery result. Machine.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature E1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In the above, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display at least an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the first performance selection means selects a performance to be displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of types of performances that can be displayed on the display unit in accordance with a lottery result by the lottery unit. Ru. On the other hand, if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state in which the player is waiting for the player to play a game, the second effect selection means selects a plurality of types that can be displayed on the display unit. The performance to be displayed on the display section is selected from among the performances based on selection conditions that are the same as or substantially the same as the first performance selection means.

When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display section, and the first performance selection means selects the performance to be displayed on the display section from among a plurality of kinds of performances. When selected, the performance using the performance image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before displaying the lottery result.

Further, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the display control means causes the display unit to display a display corresponding to the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result. At the same time, when the performance to be displayed on the display unit is selected from among the plurality of types of performances by the second performance selection means, the performance using the performance image stored in the storage unit corresponds to the lottery result. displayed on the display section before displaying the information to be displayed.

Therefore, if a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, the effect selected under the same or almost the same selection conditions as when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied is displayed, so that the predetermined The variable display that appears when the starting condition is met can be displayed with the same or substantially the same frequency (probability) as when the starting condition is met during the non-gaming state. This allows the player, during a non-gaming state, to experience a simulated effect that is displayed when a predetermined starting condition is met, at the same or approximately the same frequency as when the starting condition is met. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the gameplay provided by the effects displayed when the starting conditions are met, and thereby the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be increased.

Note that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature E1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for a game to be executed, or instead of the non-gaming state, a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation section may be performed. It may also be in a possible operable state.

<Feature F1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) that is a display section that displays the lottery results by the lottery means and that can display at least an effect according to the lottery results before displaying the lottery results;
a storage unit (ROM of the sub-control board 940) that stores a plurality of types of effect images (video data) that can be used for the plurality of types of effects (variable display, suggestive effect) that can be displayed on the display unit;
performance selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a performance to be displayed on the display unit from among the plurality of types of performances in accordance with the lottery result when the predetermined starting condition is met;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
Display control means for displaying a performance selected by the performance selection means on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means being a variable display executed before the lottery result is displayed. Display control means (sub control means) for displaying on the display section an effect using the effect image stored in the storage section when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation section during a non-gaming state substrate 940);
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state, execution is performed between when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and when the performance selected by the performance selection means ends. performance non-execution means (sub-control board 940) for non-execution of a part of the performance to be performed during the period from when the predetermined operation is performed until the performance selected by the performance selection means is completed; A gaming machine characterized by:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature F1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In the above, the display unit that displays the lottery result by the lottery means is configured to be able to display at least an effect corresponding to the lottery result before displaying the lottery result. The storage unit stores a plurality of types of effect images that can be used for a plurality of types of effects that can be displayed on the display unit.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display section, and the performance to be displayed on the display section is selected from among the plurality of kinds of performances by the performance selection means. If so, the performance using the performance image stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit before displaying the lottery result.

Furthermore, if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during the non-gaming state where the player is waiting for the player to play a game, the performance selected by the performance selection means is stored in the storage unit. A performance using a performance image is displayed.

Here, if the player operates the operation part during the non-gaming state, one of the functions that will be executed from when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied until the performance selected by the performance selection means ends. The performance non-execution means disables the performance from the time the operation section is operated until the performance selected by the performance selection means ends.

Therefore, the period from when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-gaming state until the performance displayed on the display unit (that is, the performance selected by the performance selection means) ends, and the predetermined starting condition are In the period from the establishment of the performance to the end of the performance displayed on the display unit (i.e., the performance selected by the performance selection means), some of the performances executed during the latter period are not executed during the former period. There are some differences in appearance.

As a result, the effect that is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-gaming state is different from the effect that is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the effect that is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the non-gaming state is different from the effect that is displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Based on the difference, it is possible to appropriately make the player recognize that the performance is a pseudo performance in which there is no possibility of a gaming state occurring.

Therefore, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit during a non-gaming state, the player may, for example, perform a special game after the performance with respect to the performance displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation. It is possible to suppress the misunderstanding of events that cannot occur in a pseudo production, such as the occurrence of a state. As a result, players may misunderstand the effect displayed on the display by operating the operation section during a non-gaming state, and as a result, the player may have expectations for the occurrence of a special gaming state that should not occur, etc. The occurrence of unfavorable situations can be suitably suppressed.

Note that the non-gaming state in the gaming machine described in feature F1 may be a non-gaming state in which the player waits for a game to be executed, or instead of describing the non-gaming state, a predetermined operation on the operation unit is possible. It may also be in an operable state.

In addition, in place of the description of the performance non-execution means in the gaming machine described in feature F1, it is also possible that the player presses the operation unit during a non-gaming state in which the variable display that is performed before the lottery result is displayed is not performed. When a predetermined operation is performed, some of the functions that are executed between the establishment of the predetermined starting condition and the end of the production selected by the production selection means are performed after the predetermined operation is performed. It may also be a function stopping means that stops until the performance selected by the selection means ends.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in feature F1, the performance that is not performed by the performance non-execution means may be a performance accompanying an input operation of an input means that can be inputted by the player during a variable display. It may also be an effect in which an action object (accessory object) driven by a driving means such as a motor or a solenoid performs a predetermined action.

<Feature F2>
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means causes the display unit to display a lottery result by the lottery unit after the fluctuating display of the symbol and the fluctuating display of the symbol, and causes the first effect selection unit to display the lottery result by the lottery device on the display unit. If the performance is selected, displaying the performance using the performance image stored in the storage unit on the display unit before displaying the lottery result;
The performance non-execution means executes the variable display of the symbols when the player operates the operation section during the non-gaming state, and executes the display corresponding to the lottery result after the operation section is operated. A gaming machine characterized in that the game is not executed until it is displayed on the display section.

In the gaming machine described in feature F2, when a predetermined starting condition is met, the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display section after the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the operator operates the operating section, the performance non-execution means disables the execution of the fluctuating display of symbols from the time the operating section is operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display section. It is considered to be executed. Therefore, since the player does not recognize the fluctuating display of symbols from the time the operation unit is operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the player may not operate the operation unit while in a non-gaming state. It is possible to suitably suppress erroneous recognition of the effect displayed on the display section due to operation of the section.

<Feature F3>
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
an operating member (accessory object) operated by a predetermined driving means;
When the predetermined starting condition is met, the display control means drives the drive means to operate the operating member before the display control means displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display section. control board 940);
When the player performs the predetermined operation during the non-gaming state, the performance non-execution means controls the operation of the operating member by the operation control means to correspond to the lottery result after the predetermined operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the game is not executed until the display is displayed on the display section.

In the gaming machine described in feature F3, if the predetermined starting condition is met, the operating member operates before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on the display unit, and the gaming machine is started during the non-gaming state. When a person operates the operating section, the effect non-execution means causes the action of the operating member to be disabled from the time the operating section is operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display section. It is said that Therefore, since the player does not recognize the operation of the operating member from the time the operation unit is operated until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the player does not operate the operation member while in a non-gaming state. It is possible to suitably suppress erroneous recognition of the effect displayed on the display section due to operation of the section.

<Feature G1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
An operation means (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
Display selection means for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display section when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means being executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state in which a variable display is not performed, the variable display mode to be displayed on the display section can be selected when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. Display selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting a mode;
When the predetermined starting condition is met, a display that causes the display unit to display a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and a lottery result by the lottery means at a variable time corresponding to the variable display. Control means (sub control board 940),
The display control means is configured to provide a corresponding display consisting of at least a part of a variable display according to a mode selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, At least one of a first display (suggestion effect) that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to a special gaming state, or a second display that includes a predetermined display (suspension display 1622, suggestion display 1623) that can suggest the degree of expectation. A gaming machine characterized in that a corresponding display (a pseudo variable display for demonstration) including a corresponding display is displayed on the display section in a time shorter than the variable time corresponding to the variable display according to the selected mode.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature G1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. , the display unit is configured to be capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied.

When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode (specific content) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the variable display selected by the display selection means and the lottery result by the lottery means on the display section at a variable time corresponding to the variable display. be done.

On the other hand, the player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state (during a non-gaming state in which the player is waiting for the player to play a game) in which the variable display that is performed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed is not performed. In this case, the display selection means selects a mode that can be selected when a predetermined starting condition is met as the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. The mode of fluctuation display is selected.

When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means displays a special corresponding display consisting of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. A first display that can suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the gaming state (a degree of expectation that indicates the degree of ease of transition to the special game state), or a second display that includes a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation. A corresponding display including at least one of the following is displayed on the display unit in a shorter time than the variation time corresponding to the selected variation display mode.

As a result, the player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state to display a corresponding display that corresponds to the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means, thereby satisfying the predetermined starting condition. What kind of display (the first display or the predetermined display included in the second display) can suggest the degree of expectation of transitioning to the special gaming state even if the predetermined starting condition is not satisfied? It is possible to visually confirm whether the display is displayed or not. Therefore, in a configuration including a first display or a second display in which the fluctuating display displayed when the starting condition is satisfied is a display that can suggest the above-mentioned expectation level, an event that can be expected after the fluctuating display (for example, a special It is possible to improve the gameplay by inferring the degree of ease of transition to a gaming state from the contents of the variable display, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

In particular, the corresponding display that is displayed when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state is displayed on the display section in a shorter time than the variable time corresponding to the variable display mode selected by the display selection means. Therefore, the display (the first display or a predetermined display included in the second display) that can suggest the degree of expectation of transitioning to the special gaming state can be efficiently viewed within a time shorter than the fluctuation time. I can do it.

Note that the non-gaming state of the gaming machine described in feature G1 may be a non-gaming state in which a variable display is not performed before the lottery results are displayed, and the non-gaming state does not allow the player to play the game. It may be a non-gaming state in which it waits, or instead of being described as a non-gaming state, it may be an operable state in which a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means or a predetermined operation part can be performed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in feature G1, "the variable display selected (by the display selection means)" may be from the start to the end of the variable display, or from the start to the end of the variable display. In addition to this, it may also include the state before or at the time of starting the variable display.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in feature G1, the "corresponding display" may be the variable display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variable display in which a part of the variable display is omitted. good.

<Feature G2>
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The modes that can be selected by the display selection means include a plurality of types of modes including at least one of the first display or the second display as a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display. is set,
The display control means controls one of the plurality of types of display effects that can be selected by the display selection means and executed at the same timing when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state. Two or more of the display effects are simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that does.

In the case of the gaming machine described in feature G2, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, a plurality of different types preset for the variable display mode selected by the display selection means are displayed. A first display as a display effect (a display included in the variable display that can suggest the level of expectation of transitioning to a special gaming state) or a second display (a display included in the variable display that can suggest the level of expectation for transitioning to the special gaming state) at least one of the display including a predetermined display capable of indicating , are displayed on the display section at the same time.

In other words, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be displayed simultaneously on the display section at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can , a display (a first display or a predetermined display included in a second display) that can suggest two or more levels of expectation that can appear in separate variable displays that are executed when the starting condition is met multiple times, They can be viewed together at the same time. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest an expectation level of 2 or more during the non-gaming state, so that the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation level of 2 or more during the game. It becomes possible to easily play the game while recognizing the difference in the corresponding expectation level.

Furthermore, two or more first displays or two or more second displays that are displayed at the same time are displayed in a smaller size than when a variable display selected by the display selection means is displayed when a predetermined starting condition is met. Therefore, based on the display size, it is possible to appropriately make the player recognize that the first display and the second display are displays in which there is no possibility that a special gaming state will occur after the display. .

<Feature H1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
An operation means (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
Display selection means for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display section when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means being executed before the lottery result is displayed. When the player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state in which a variable display is not performed, the variable display mode to be displayed on the display section can be selected when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. Display selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting a mode;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying on the display section a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. ,
The display control means, when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, displays a corresponding display (a pseudo display for demonstration) consisting of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means. and a display corresponding to the lottery result with respect to the correspondence display) are displayed on the display section, and at least a part of the correspondence display or at least one of the display corresponding to the lottery result is A game characterized in that when a predetermined starting condition is met, a variable display according to a mode selected by the display selection means or a lottery result by the lottery means is displayed in a smaller size on the display section than when displaying a lottery result by the lottery means. Machine.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature H1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. , the display unit is configured to be capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied.

When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode (specific content) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means causes the display section to display a variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means and a lottery result by the lottery means.

On the other hand, the player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state (during a non-gaming state in which the player is waiting for the player to play a game) in which the variable display that is performed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed is not performed. In this case, the display selection means selects a mode that can be selected when a predetermined starting condition is met as the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. A variable display is selected. When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means displays a corresponding display consisting of at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, and the corresponding display. A display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the display unit.

Thereby, by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, the player can visually recognize at least a portion of the variable display that can be displayed when the predetermined starting condition is met, as the corresponding display. Therefore, since the configuration is such that at least a part of the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is satisfied can be displayed during the non-gaming state, the game brought about by the variable display that is displayed when the starting condition is satisfied. It is possible to increase the player's interest in sex, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the gaming machine.

In particular, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means controls at least part of the corresponding display (at least a part of the variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means); , at least one of the displays corresponding to the lottery results is displayed in a smaller size than the variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means or the lottery result by the lottery means when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. displayed in the section.

As a result, part or all of the corresponding display (at least part of the variable display) displayed on the display after a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means during the non-gaming state, or the display corresponding to the lottery result. , unlike variable displays and lottery results that are displayed based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, there is no possibility that a special gaming state will occur after the corresponding display ends or after the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to appropriately make the player recognize that there is a certain thing based on the display size.

Therefore, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means during a non-gaming state, the special gaming state occurs after the corresponding display is displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation. It is possible to suppress misidentification of events that cannot occur during a non-gaming state, such as when the player plays a game. As a result, a player may misunderstand the corresponding display displayed on the display unit or the display corresponding to the lottery result by operating the operating means during a non-gaming state, and as a result, a special gaming state that should not occur may occur. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of situations that are unfavorable for players and game parlor staff, such as expectations for the occurrence of such events.

Note that the non-gaming state of the gaming machine described in feature H1 may be a non-gaming state in which a variable display is not performed before the lottery result is displayed, and the non-gaming state is such that the player is not allowed to play the game. It may be a non-gaming state in which it waits, or instead of being described as a non-gaming state, it may be an operable state in which a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means or a predetermined operation part can be performed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in feature H1, the "fluctuating display in the mode selected by the display selection means" may be from the start to the end of the fluctuating display, or from the start to the end of the fluctuating display. In addition to this, it may also include the state before or at the time of starting the variable display.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in feature H1, the "corresponding display" may be the variable display itself selected by the display selection means, or may be a variable display in which a part of the variable display is omitted. good.

<Feature H2>
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
As the mode that can be selected by the display selection means, a mode including a plurality of different display effects that can be executed at the same timing after the start of the variable display is set,
The display control means controls one of the plurality of types of display effects that can be selected by the display selection means and executed at the same timing when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state. Two or more of the display effects are simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means is displayed when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that does.

In the gaming machine described in feature H2, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, one of the multiple types of variable displays prepared in advance for the mode selected by the display selecting means is displayed. Part or all of two or more corresponding displays corresponding to two or more variable displays are the display target, and at least a part of each of the two or more corresponding displays that are the display targets is controlled by display control. By means of the means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display in a mode selected by the display selection means is displayed at the same time on the display unit in a smaller size than when a variable display is displayed in the mode selected by the display selection means.

In other words, when there are two or more corresponding displays to be displayed, at least a portion of each of the two or more corresponding displays can be displayed simultaneously on the display section, so that the player can Display effects that can be executed at the same time can be visually recognized at the same time.

Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which a variable display is prepared that includes a display effect that can suggest the level of expectation for transition to a special gaming state, the player can perform the execution at the same timing by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state. Differences in display effects that can suggest two or more of the expected levels of expectation can be efficiently recognized by visually recognizing the fluctuating display after the effect. This makes it possible for the player to easily play the game while recognizing the difference in the level of expectation that corresponds to the difference in the display that can suggest the level of expectation.

<Feature H3>
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The display effect is a first display (suggestion effect) that is a display included in the variable display selected by the display selection means and can suggest the degree of expectation of transitioning to the special gaming state, or the display selection means the display includes at least one of a second display including a predetermined display (pending display 1622, suggestion display 1623) that is included in the variable display selected by and that can suggest the expectation level;
When the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, the display control means controls one of the first display or the second display included in the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display. A game machine characterized in that at least one of the above is simultaneously displayed on the display section in a smaller size than when displaying a variable display in a mode selected by the display selection means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. .

In the case of the gaming machine described in feature H3, when the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the first display (to the special gaming state) included in each of the two or more corresponding displays targeted for display. At least one of the display that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition) or the second display (the display that includes a predetermined display that can suggest the degree of expectation to transition to the special gaming state) is displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. They are simultaneously displayed on the display unit in a smaller size than when displaying a variable display according to the mode selected by the selection means.

In other words, since two or more first displays or two or more second displays can be displayed simultaneously on the display section at the same timing after the start of the variable display, the player can , a display (a first display or a predetermined display included in a second display) that can suggest two or more levels of expectation that can appear in separate variable displays that are executed when the starting condition is met multiple times, They can be viewed together at the same time. Therefore, the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest an expectation level of 2 or more during the non-gaming state, so that the player can efficiently recognize the difference in the display that can suggest the expectation level of 2 or more during the game. It becomes possible to easily play the game while recognizing the difference in the corresponding expectation level.

<Feature J1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
The operating means is operable by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operated part is An operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) that is located at a predetermined neutral position when not operated;
The operating means can be held at the neutral position when the operated part is not operated, and the position of the operating means can be changed to the predetermined direction or the predetermined direction without any operation of the operated part by the player. actuation means (actuation mechanism 860) movable in opposite directions;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling movement of the position of the operation means by the operation means;
Display selection means for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display section when the predetermined starting condition is met, the display selection means being executed before the lottery result is displayed. When a player operates the operating means located at the neutral position during a non-technical state in which a variable display is not being performed, the predetermined starting condition is satisfied as the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section. display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting selectable modes when
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means causes the display section to display a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means, and displays the lottery result by the lottery means on the display section. If the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means (sub control board 940 ) and,
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The display control means is configured to allow a player to control the operated portion during a period in which the operation means can be operated when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. when the is operated from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, displaying on the display section a predetermined effect prepared to appear in the specific variable display;
The operation control means is configured to operate the operation means during a period in which the operation means can be operated when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. , after moving the operated part from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, moving the operated part in the opposite direction to the neutral position,
The display control means is configured to cause the operation control means to control the operated section when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. When the player is moved from the neutral position in the predetermined direction, the display section displays a predetermined effect prepared to appear in the specific variable display.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature J1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. , the display unit is configured to be capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied.

When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display selection means selects the mode (specific content) of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit. Further, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means causes the display section to display a variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means and a lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to be held at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated. Thereby, the operating means is located at a predetermined neutral position in a state where the operated section is not operated. The operating means is configured to be able to move the position of the operating means in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction without any operation by the player on the operated part under control by the actuating means.

When a player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state in which the variable display that is executed before the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed (during a non-gaming state in which the player waits for the player to play a game) The display selection means selects a mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display unit when a predetermined starting condition is met; The following aspects are selected. When the player operates the operating means during the non-gaming state, the display control means causes at least a variable display in the mode selected by the display selection means to be displayed on the display section.

Thereby, by operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, the player can visually confirm the variable display that can be displayed when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the configuration is such that the variable display that can be displayed when the starting condition is met can be displayed during the non-gaming state, the player is not satisfied with the gameplay provided by the variable display that is displayed when the starting condition is met. As a result, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

Here, the variable display selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display that includes a period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display, and a predetermined starting condition is satisfied. If the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means (when the predetermined starting conditions are met and the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means), the specific variation display is selected by the display selection means. A predetermined effect prepared to appear in the specific variable display by the display control means when the player operates the operated part from the neutral position in a predetermined direction during the period in which the operation means in the display can be operated. is displayed on the display.

If a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state (when the player operates the operation means during the non-gaming state, and the display selection means specifies ), during the period in which the operated part can be operated, after the operated part is moved from the neutral position to the predetermined direction by the operation control means, the operated part changes to the predetermined direction. is moved to the neutral position in the direction opposite to the direction of. Therefore, if a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means when the player operates the operating means during a non-gaming state, the operation target part during the period during which the operated part can be operated during the specific variable display The operating section automatically moves back and forth as if operated by a player.

As a result, when a specific variable display is displayed as a result of a player operating an operating means during a non-gaming state, the operated section is It is possible to simulate a situation in which the player operates the operated part without the player actually operating the operated part.

When the operation control means moves the operated part from the neutral position in a predetermined direction, the display control means displays on the display part a predetermined effect prepared to appear in the particular variable display. . Therefore, if a specific variable display is displayed as a result of the player operating the operating means during a non-gaming state, the player may It is possible to experience in a simulated manner what kind of effects appear when the parts are operated, without actually operating the operated parts.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific variable display (a variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means) can appear as a variable display that is displayed when the starting condition is met, when the player is in a non-gaming state, To improve a player's interest in the gameplay brought about by the specific variable display, in which a predetermined effect can be produced through the player's participation, since the specific variable display can be experienced in a simulated manner. Therefore, the degree of attention to the gaming machine can be improved.

Note that the non-gaming state of the gaming machine described in feature J1 may be a non-gaming state in which a variable display is not performed before the lottery results are displayed, and the non-gaming state does not allow the player to play the game. It may be a non-gaming state in which it waits, or instead of being described as a non-gaming state, it may be an operable state in which a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means or a predetermined operation part can be performed.

<Feature J2>
The gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
If the player operates the operated section in the predetermined direction while the variable display is displayed based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, the non-gaming state is ended. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a non-gaming state ending means (sub-control board 940).

In the gaming machine described in feature J2, if the player operates the operated part in a predetermined direction while the variable display is displayed based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state, The non-gaming state is ended by the non-gaming state ending means. Therefore, the variable display that is displayed during the non-gaming state (the variable display that is displayed based on the player operating the operating means during the non-gaming state) is controlled by the player's operation on the operated means (more specifically, The game can be easily ended by the player operating the operated part in a predetermined direction.

<Feature K1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display section (decorative pattern A gaming machine comprising a display device 479),
A display control means that performs control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display section when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the display control means controlling the display unit to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied (starting winning of a special symbol, a variable display image that includes at least a part of the variable display that is displayed when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied (when the push operation device is pressed during a non-gaming state); The display image includes a gaming machine image (gaming machine image 1701) corresponding to the gaming machine displayed on the display unit, and a player image (player image 1702) corresponding to the player located in front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by comprising display control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displaying on the display section.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

In contrast, the gaming machine described in feature K1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to match the predetermined variable display and the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying the corresponding result display.

In the game machine, when a predetermined display condition is satisfied, a variable display image that includes at least a part of a variable display that is displayed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the variable display are displayed under the control of the display control means. A gaming machine image corresponding to the gaming machine whose display image is displayed on the display section and a player image corresponding to the player located on the front side of the gaming machine are displayed on the display section. Therefore, the player who plays the game on the gaming machine can display the game machine image based on the fulfillment of the display conditions through the actions and appearance of the player in the image of the player playing the game on the gaming machine displayed on the display unit. It is possible to transmit various information to the player, such as the player's feelings regarding the current variable display that is being displayed, and the player's feelings in accordance with the level of expectation shown by the performance that appears in the variable display, and how to operate the gaming machine.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature K1, in the variable display that is displayed when a predetermined display condition is met, at the end of the variable display, the result can be displayed using at least a part of the gaming machine image or the player image. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a display is performed.

<Feature K2>
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
When displaying the game machine image and the player image on the display section, the display control means displays at least one of the game machine image or the player image in such a manner that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to display at least a portion of the result differently depending on whether it is a result or not.

In the gaming machine according to feature K2, when the gaming machine image and the player image are displayed on the display section, at least one of the gaming machine image or the player image is displayed on the lottery means under the control of the display control means. Depending on whether the lottery result is a predetermined result or not, at least a portion of the result is displayed as being different. Therefore, the lottery result by the lottery means can be suggested to the player by the difference in at least a portion of at least one of the gaming machine image and the player image.

<Feature K3>
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The display control means changes the player image to an image corresponding to the result display in the case of the predetermined result (jackpot win) without displaying the result display at the timing of displaying the result display. A game machine characterized in that it performs at least control to cause

With the gaming machine described in feature K3, at the timing of displaying the result display, the display control means can control the result display without displaying the result display, and the player image can support the display of the result when the result is a predetermined result. image. Therefore, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result that causes a special game state to occur, the result can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature L1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
Display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the display unit to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
The display control means includes first lottery result display control for displaying the result display in a predetermined manner (combination of decorative symbols) when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the variable display is displayed on the display section. and, when displaying the variable display on the display unit, displaying the result display by the first lottery result display control in a manner (transformation, reduction) different from the predetermined manner, or displaying the first result. It is configured to be able to execute a second lottery result display control that displays a predetermined image (alternative display 1625) that is an image with different content from the result display by the display control and that corresponds to the predetermined result (jackpot winning). A gaming machine characterized by:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature L1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display a result display corresponding to a lottery result. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to match the predetermined variable display and the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying the corresponding result display.

In the gaming machine, the display control means is configured to be able to execute first lottery result display control and second lottery result display control. Specifically, according to the first lottery result display control, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a variable display is displayed on the display section, a result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, according to the second lottery result display control, when the variable display is displayed on the display section, the result display by the first lottery result display control is displayed in a manner different from the predetermined manner, or , a predetermined image corresponding to a predetermined result is displayed, the content of which is different from that displayed by the first lottery result display control. Therefore, the lottery results displayed by the second lottery result display control have a different display format or contents from the lottery results displayed by the first lottery result display control, so the lottery results are different from the lottery results displayed by the first lottery result display control. It is possible to increase variations in the display of the lottery results, and it is also possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results by deforming, reducing, etc., or by using images with different contents. Thereby, when the lottery results are displayed, it is possible to provide a gameplay experience in which the lottery results are closely watched.

<Feature M1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operated section can be changed;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
As the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The display control means controls the operated part and the operated part during the operable period when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. An image (effect image 1712) that includes a part of the body in contact with or in close proximity (left hand 1712B), in which the part of the body moves while performing an operation on the operation means (movement operation on the operated part). A gaming machine characterized by controlling display on the display section.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature M1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. In the gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the display control means allows the player to operate the operation means. During the possible period, the image includes the operated part of the operating means and a part of the body that is in contact with or close to the operated part, and the part of the body moves while the operating means (movement operation on the operated part) is performed. An image to be operated is displayed on the display section. For this reason, it is possible to suggest to the player how to operate the operating means based on the content of the displayed image (an image in which a part of the body touching or close to the operated part of the operating means moves while operating the operating means). I can do it.

<Feature M2>
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
The display control means is configured to perform the operation while the part of the body moves during the operable period when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the display unit to display, together with an image for performing an operation on the operation means, an image (character information based on a character string such as "Continuous Hit!") indicating information regarding the operation on the operation means.

In the gaming machine described in feature M2, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the player operates the operation means under the control of the display control means. During the possible operable period, an image showing an operation on the operating means (display information 1713) related to the operation on the operating means is displayed along with an image in which a part of the body touching or close to the operated part of the operating means is moving. Since it is displayed on the display section, the image showing the information related to the operation on the operation means can suggest to the player how to operate the operation means in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature N1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operated section can be changed;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
As the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The display control means generates a moving image representing the operation of the operating means during the operable period when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. and the position of the operated part of the operating means has a displacement amount different from the amount of displacement controlled by the operation control means, or a reciprocating speed different from the reciprocation speed controlled by the operation control means. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the display section to display a moving image (effect image 1715) including at least one of the modes.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, the gaming machine described in feature N1 can provide a gaming machine that can suitably display effect images. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. In the gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the display control means allows the player to operate the operation means. A moving image representing the operation of the operation means in the possible period, in which the position of the operated part of the operation means is in a manner of displacement different from the amount of displacement controlled by the operation control means, or A moving image including at least one aspect of the reciprocating speed different from the reciprocating speed under control is displayed on the display unit. Thereby, the operation of the operation means controlled by the operation control means can be suggested to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Feature N2>
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation control means controls the operating means to change the position of the operated section in a situation where the moving image is displayed on the display section.

In the gaming machine according to feature N2, in a situation where a moving image is displayed on the display section, the operating means operates under the control of the operation control means, thereby changing the position of the operated section. To have a player visually recognize a moving image displayed on a display unit while the operating unit is operating in which the position of the operating unit changes, thereby allowing the player to specifically grasp the operating mode of the operating unit. I can do it.

<Feature P1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operated section can be changed;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
As the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The operation control means changes the position of the operated part from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction during at least part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. A game machine characterized by performing displacement control.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature P1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. In the gaming machine, the position of the operated part is controlled by the operation control means to be changed from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or the predetermined direction during at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the operable period. is configured to be displaced in the opposite direction. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining time of the operable period through the position of the operated part (for example, the height position of the operated part). For example, even when playing a game without visually checking a display device capable of displaying a variable display, it is possible to know through the position of the operated part that the operable period has occurred and the length of the remaining time. be able to.

<Feature Q1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The display control means controls to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and controls the operation control means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute at least a control that causes the predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position. .

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature Q1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated part that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means controls to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from a neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means, and controls the operation control means. Accordingly, when the position of the operated portion is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position, a predetermined effect is displayed. Therefore, the player can visually check the operated part of the operating means, recognize the position (for example, height position) of the operated part, or put his/her hand on the operated part to locate the operated part. Although we feel the change in the amount of operation, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the trigger for the performance to be executed, and as a result, the trigger for the execution of the same performance is associated with the height position of multiple types of operation surfaces. It is possible to provide enhanced gameplay.

<Feature R1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The display control means controls to display a predetermined first effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means; and the operation control means. When the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control, a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is displayed. A game machine comprising:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature R1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means controls to display a predetermined first effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from a neutral position to a predetermined first position under the control of the operation control means; When the position of the operated part is displaced to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control, a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is displayed. . Therefore, the player can visually check the operated part of the operating means and recognize the position (for example, height position) of the operated part, or put his/her hand on the operated part and position the operated part. It is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player feels the change in the amount of change and expects to execute different performances that are set separately according to the amount of operation.

<Feature S1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operating means so as to be able to change at least one of the position of the operated section or the magnitude of a reaction force to a moving operation of the operated section;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
As the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The operation control means is configured to move the operated part by a predetermined amount in the predetermined direction during the operable period when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. When the operation is performed, the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the predetermined amount of movement is set to a predetermined first magnitude, and the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the predetermined amount of movement is controlled. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to at least execute control to set the size to a second size different from the first size.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature S1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means such that at least one of the position of the operated section or the magnitude of the reaction force against the moving operation of the operated section can be changed.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. In the gaming machine, the operation control means moves the operated part by a predetermined amount in a predetermined direction during an operable period when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. Control for adjusting the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the operated part has moved a predetermined amount to a predetermined first magnitude when the operated part is operated, and the reaction force to the operation after the operated part has moved the predetermined amount. is configured to be capable of at least controlling the size of the image to a second size different from the first size. For this reason, the player is given a tactile experience in advance of how much force must be applied to operate the operated part of the operating means to cause the operated part to operate, and then the player is given a tactile sensation that is different from that tactile sensation. The degree can be easily understood. This makes it easier for players to recognize the differences in the operating feel when multiple types of operating feels are provided on the operating means, and accurately conveys the information that you want to convey to the player based on the differences in the operating feel, such as changes in expectations. can do.

<Feature S2>
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
The specific variable display is configured such that one of a plurality of types of effects can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period,
The display control means selects the plurality of types when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means and the operation means is operated during the operable period. is configured to be able to execute at least a control that causes a predetermined first effect to appear among the effects, and a control that causes a second effect that is different from the first effect to appear,
The operation control means is configured to move the operated part by a predetermined amount in the predetermined direction during the operable period when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. When operated, if the first effect is displayed by the display control means, the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the predetermined amount of movement is controlled to be the first magnitude; When the second effect is displayed by the display control means, control is performed so that the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the predetermined amount of movement is the second magnitude. A gaming machine featuring:

In the gaming machine described in feature S2, the specific variable display is such that when the operating means is operated during the operable period during which the player can operate the operating means, one effect among a plurality of types of effects appears. configured as possible. The display control means selects a predetermined first of the plurality of types of effects when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, and the operating means is operated during the operable period. The present invention is configured to be able to execute at least control for displaying a first performance and control for displaying a second performance different from the first performance.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means moves the operated part by a predetermined amount in a predetermined direction during an operable period when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. When the operation is performed, when the first effect is displayed by the display control means, the magnitude of the reaction force against the operation after the operated portion moves by a predetermined amount is controlled to be the first magnitude; When the second effect is displayed by the display control means, control is performed so that the magnitude of the reaction force to the operation after the operated part has moved by a predetermined amount becomes the second magnitude. Therefore, when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player expects to perform different effects that are separately set depending on the level of the feeling of operating the operating means.

<Feature T1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated section can be changed in accordance with the progress of the variable display;
When the predetermined starting condition is met, the operation control means causes the position of the operated section to vary for at least a portion of the period from the start of the variable display by the display control means to the end of the variable display. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to gradually displace the game machine from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in accordance with the progress of the variable display in a period.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature T1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to match the predetermined variable display and the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying the corresponding result display.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

In this gaming machine, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the position of the operated part is controlled by the operation control means for at least part of the period from the start of the fluctuating display by the display control means to the end of the fluctuating display. In accordance with the progress of the variable display during the variable period of the section, the display is gradually displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Therefore, a game in which the player can recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing a change in the position of the operated part on the operating means (for example, a change in height) or by feeling the touch of the operated part with the hand. can provide sex.

<Feature T2>
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
The operation control means changes the position of the operated part from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction, depending on the progress of the variable display during the variation period, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. 1. A gaming machine that performs control to gradually displace the area at a substantially constant speed to a predetermined end point position.

In the gaming machine according to feature T2, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the position of the operated part is controlled by the operation control means during the fluctuation period (from the start of the fluctuation display by the display control means to the corresponding one). at a substantially constant speed from the neutral position to a predetermined end position in a predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, according to the progress of the variable display during at least a part of the period until the end of the variable display. Gradually displaced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay by allowing the player to recognize the progress of the variable display by visually recognizing changes in the position of the operated part on the operating means (for example, changes in height) or by feeling the touch of the operated part. can be provided.

<Feature U1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operated section can be changed;
When the operating means is operated, a predetermined event (starting based on the fulfillment of the predetermined starting condition) and ending after a predetermined time if the operation is not performed (progress of a variable display, during a game) a state control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the state (progress of a predetermined period of time measured during the operation) from the state when the operation was performed in accordance with the amount of operation by the operation. A gaming machine characterized by:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature U1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to match the predetermined variable display and the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying the corresponding result display.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed.

In this gaming machine, when the operation means is operated, the state of a predetermined event that would end after a predetermined time if the operation is not performed is changed to the state when the operation was performed, under the control of the state control means. The screen is configured to advance according to the amount of operation from the operation. Therefore, when the player wants to advance the progress of the variable display, he or she can easily advance the variable display to the section that he or she wants to advance to. can be provided.

<Feature V1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display the predetermined fluctuation display and the result display on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated section can be changed in accordance with the progress of the variable display;
The display control means advances the progression (playback position) of the variable display from the timing when the operation on the operation means is performed according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation, and controls the operation. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to return the progression of the fluctuating display to the timing when the operation was performed or the timing when the fluctuation display progressed without performing the operation when the operation ends.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature V1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated part that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the predetermined variable display and the result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are changed to match the predetermined variable display and the lottery result by the lottery means under the control of the display control means. The corresponding result display is displayed on at least a display unit capable of displaying the corresponding result display.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

In this gaming machine, under the control of the display control means, the variable display progresses from the timing when the operation on the operation means is performed, according to the speed and amount of operation by the operation, and When the process ends, the progress of the variable display is configured to return to the timing when the relevant operation was performed or to the timing when it progressed without performing the relevant operation. For this reason, the configuration is such that the control of the progress of the variable display on the first control board (first control means) and the control of the progress of the variable display on the second control board (second control means) are performed in synchronization. In this method, it is possible to add a game feature in which the variable display can be fast-forwarded while synchronizing the control of the progress of the variable display on each control board, and events that will occur later can be recognized in advance.

<Feature W1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operated section can be changed;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
As the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The specific variable display is configured such that a predetermined effect can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period,
The display control means is arranged such that when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the operated section is set to the predetermined value by an operation on the operating means during the operable period. control for causing the predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position by the operation; control for causing the predetermined effect to appear when the position of the part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position that is distant from the first position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine with special features.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature W1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode, and the specific variable display is , is configured such that a predetermined effect can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period.

In the gaming machine, the display control means controls the operation of the operated part by operating the operating means during an operable period when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. control to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from a neutral position to a predetermined first position due to the operation; The device is configured to be able to execute at least a control that causes a predetermined performance to appear when the device is displaced from the first position to a predetermined second position that is distant from the first position in a predetermined direction. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation on the operating means and the effect to be executed, and a game experience is provided in which the trigger for executing the same effect is associated with multiple types of amounts of operation. can do.

<Feature X1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operated section can be changed;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
As the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The specific variable display is configured such that one of a plurality of types of effects can appear when the operating means is operated during the operable period,
The display control means is arranged such that when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied and the specific variable display is selected by the display selection means, the operated section is set to the predetermined value by an operation on the operating means during the operable period. control for displaying a predetermined first effect among the plurality of types of effects when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position due to the operation in the direction of . and, when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position that is distant from the first position in the predetermined direction due to the operation, the first effect among the plurality of types of effects occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute at least a control that causes a different predetermined second performance to appear.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature X1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated section that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed.

Here, as a mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode, and the specific variable display is , when the operating means is operated during the operable period, one of a plurality of types of effects can be displayed.

In the gaming machine, the display control means controls the operation of the operated part by operating the operating means during an operable period when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied and a specific variable display is selected by the display selection means. control for displaying a predetermined first effect among a plurality of types of effects when the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position due to the operation; When the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined second position distant from the first position in a predetermined direction due to the operation, a predetermined second effect different from the first effect among the plurality of types of effects is performed. The display is configured to be able to execute at least the control that causes the display to appear. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming experience in which the player expects to execute different effects that are respectively set according to the amount of operation.

<Features Z series>
A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration for migrating is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

<Feature Za>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operated section from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The display control means controls to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction under the control of the operation control means. , control for causing the predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated portion is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means; A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be at least executable.

With the gaming machine described in feature Za, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to suitably operate an operated part that can be operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means controls to display a predetermined effect when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to the predetermined first position in the opposite direction under the control of the operation control means. and a control that causes a predetermined effect to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the operation control means. It is composed of

Therefore, the player visually recognizes the operated part of the operating means, recognizes the position of the operated part (for example, the return position in the opposite direction after operating the operated part), or Even if you put your hand on the part and feel the change in the position of the operated part, it is difficult to understand the correspondence between the amount of operation and the trigger for the performance to be performed, and as a result, the trigger for the same performance to be executed. It is possible to provide playability associated with a plurality of types of return positions of the operation surface.

<Features ZB>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
It includes an operating part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be pressed by the player, and can be pressed by the player. an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operation section at a predetermined neutral position when a part of the operation section is not in contact with the operating section;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operation section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operation section from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that performs displacement control;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The display control means controls to display a predetermined first effect when the position of the operating part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction under the control of the operation control means. and when the position of the operating part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position under the control of the action control means, a predetermined second effect different from the first effect is generated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to at least execute control for producing effects.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature ZB, the predetermined direction in which the player can press refers to a pressing motion that increases the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part. The opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be moved away from the action section.

<Feature Zb>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The display control means causes a predetermined first effect to appear when the position of the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to a predetermined first position in the opposite direction under the control of the operation control means. control, and when the position of the operated part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of the operation control means, a predetermined effect different from the first effect is generated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least a control that causes a second effect to appear.

With the gaming machine described in Feature ZB or Feature Zb, it is possible to suitably operate the operating part that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body, or the operated part that can be operated by the player. We can provide gaming machines. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means includes an operating section that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be moved in a predetermined direction that can be pressed by the player. The operating means is configured such that the operating section can be placed at a predetermined neutral position in a state where no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operating portion or the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the display control means displays a predetermined first effect when the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced from the neutral position to the predetermined first position in the opposite direction under the control of the operation control means. , and when the position of the operating part or the operated part is displaced in the opposite direction to a predetermined second position different from the first position by the control of the operation control means, the first effect is The present invention is configured to be able to execute at least a control that causes a different predetermined second effect to appear.

Therefore, if the operating part of the operating means or the operated part of the operating means is displaced in the opposite direction, the player must be aware of the amount of displacement (i.e., whether it has been displaced to the first position, or whether it has been displaced to the second position). It is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player expects to perform different performances set according to the player's performance (or not). In addition, the operating part of the operating means or the operated part of the operating means is visually recognized, and the position of the operating part or the operated part (for example, the return position in the opposite direction after being displaced in a predetermined direction) is recognized. or place your hand on the operating part or the operated part, and while feeling the change in the position of the operating part or the operated part, check the correspondence between the amount of displacement in the opposite direction and the trigger for the performance to be performed. The relationship is difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to provide a game experience in which different effects are set depending on the amount of displacement.

<Features Zc>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so as to be able to control at least the magnitude of the reaction force to the movement operation of the operated section;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period,
When a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in the specific variable display, the operation control means controls the operated part in a pressing operation direction in a situation where the player is pressing the operated part. a first control in which the reaction force in the direction of the pressing operation is controlled based on a predetermined first condition; and a second control in which the specific variable display has a different level of expectation from the first effect. When the performance is executed, the condition for controlling the reaction force in some sections is common to the first control, and based on a predetermined second condition including a control section different from the first control. and a second control in which the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled.

With the gaming machine described in feature Zc, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to suitably operate an operated part that can be operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means such that at least the magnitude of the reaction force against the moving operation of the operated section can be controlled.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from among a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period.

In the gaming machine, when a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in a specific variable display, the operation control means moves in the pressing operation direction in a situation where the player is pressing the operated part. The first control, in which the operated part can be moved by pressing the button, and the reaction force in the direction of the pressing operation is controlled based on a predetermined first condition, and the first effect, which is an effect in a specific variable display, have different expectations. When a different second effect is executed, the conditions for controlling the reaction force in the partial section are common to the first control, and a predetermined condition including a control section different from the first control is used. It is configured to be able to execute at least a second control in which the reaction force in the pressing operation direction is controlled based on a second condition.

Therefore, when the first effect or the second effect is executed in a specific variable display, the reaction in the pressing operation direction will occur in at least some sections of each effect (i.e., sections where the conditions for controlling the reaction force are common). Since it is possible to make the player feel a similar reaction force as a force, in the relevant section, the player can determine whether the performance being executed is the first performance based on the feel of the reaction force, or whether the expectation level is different from the first performance. It is difficult to distinguish whether it is a different second performance. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player expects the level of expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of performances with different levels of expectation.

<Features ZD>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
It includes an operating part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be pressed by the player, and can be pressed by the player. an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operation section at a predetermined neutral position when a part of the operation section is not in contact with the operating section;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operation section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operation section from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that performs displacement control;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period in which the operating section is operable during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from among a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating unit operates during the period,
When a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in the specific variable display, the motion control means moves the player in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion section. a first control in which the operating portion is movable in the opposite direction and the reaction force in at least a part of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition; When a second performance with a different expectation level from the first performance is executed, a second control is controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force in the partial section is different from the first control. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least the following.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature ZD, the predetermined direction in which the player can press refers to a pressing motion that increases the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part. The opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be moved away from the action section.

<Feature Zd>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period,
When a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in the specific variable display, the operation control means is configured to press the operated portion in the opposite direction in a situation where the player presses the operated portion in a predetermined direction. a first control in which the operated part is movable in the opposite direction, and a reaction force in at least a part of the section in the opposite direction is controlled based on a predetermined first condition; and as an effect in the specific fluctuation display. When a second performance with a different expectation level from the first performance is executed, the first control is a second performance controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force in the part of the section is different. 1. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to execute at least two controls.

With the gaming machine described in Feature ZD or Feature Zd, it is possible to suitably operate the operating part that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body, or the operated part that can be operated by the player. We can provide gaming machines. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means includes an operating section that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be moved in a predetermined direction that can be pressed by the player. The operating means is configured such that the operating section can be placed at a predetermined neutral position in a state where no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operating portion or the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from among a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period.

In the gaming machine, when a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in a specific variable display, the operation control means controls whether a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part, or , in a situation where the player presses the operated section in a predetermined direction, the operating section or the operated section can be moved in the opposite direction, and at least a part of the section in the opposite direction is moved; a first control in which the reaction force is controlled based on a predetermined first condition; and a second control in which the reaction force is controlled based on a predetermined first condition; and when a second effect having a different expectation level from the first effect is executed as a effect in a specific variable display, the first control and a second control that is controlled based on a predetermined second condition in which the reaction force in the part of the section is different.

Therefore, in the first effect and the second effect that can be executed in a specific variable display, the reaction force is different in at least a part of the section in the opposite direction, so that a part of the player's body is not in contact with the operating part. In a situation where the player is in contact with the user, or in a situation where the player presses the operated part in a predetermined direction, the player may not be able to control the performance being executed due to the feeling of the reaction force in that part of the area. It is difficult to determine whether it is the first performance or the second performance, which has a different level of expectation from the first performance. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player expects the level of expectation of the performance executed in a specific variable display including a plurality of performances with different levels of expectation.

<Features Ze>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means is configured to move the operated section along the predetermined direction while generating a reaction force that resists the moving operation when the player moves the operated section along the predetermined direction. At least a first control in which the operation proceeds, and a second control in which the operation of the operating means is controlled in a direction in which the operated section proceeds in the direction in which the movement operation is performed after performing the first control. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

With the gaming machine described in feature Ze, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to suitably operate an operated part that can be operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, when the player operates the operated section to move along the predetermined direction, the operation control means moves the operated section along the predetermined direction while generating a reaction force that resists the moving operation. and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means in a direction in which the operated section advances in the direction in which the moving operation is performed after performing the first control. be done.

Therefore, after the player moves the operated part in a predetermined direction by the moving operation and feels a reaction force that resists the moving operation, the second control causes the operated part to move in the direction of the moving operation. As a result of the movement, the reaction force feels smaller, and in some cases, the movement speed of the operated part due to the movement is too fast, causing the player to perform an operation on the operated part (for example, the player hand) A situation may arise in which the user moves away from the operated part. Thereby, it is possible to add surprise to the movement operation of the operated part by the player, and it is possible to provide various gaming features using the operating means.

<Features ZF>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
It includes an operating part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be pressed by the player, and can be pressed by the player. an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operation section at a predetermined neutral position when a part of the operation section is not in contact with the operating section;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operation section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operation section from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that performs displacement control;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The motion control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force that can move the motion section in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion section; A gaming machine characterized in that, after performing the first control, it is possible to execute at least a second control that controls the operation of the operating means in a direction in which the operating section advances in the predetermined direction.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature ZF, the predetermined direction in which the player can press refers to a pressing motion that increases the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part. The opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be moved away from the action section.

<Feature Zf>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force that can move the operated section in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operated section; After performing the first control, the device is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least a second control that controls the operation of the operating means in a direction in which the operated portion advances in the predetermined direction. Game machine.

With the gaming machine described in Feature ZF or Feature Zf, it is possible to suitably operate the operating part that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body, or the operated part that can be operated by the player. We can provide gaming machines. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means includes an operating section that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be moved in a predetermined direction that can be pressed by the player. The operating means is configured such that the operating section can be placed at a predetermined neutral position in a state where no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operating portion or the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means generates a reaction force capable of moving the operating section or the operated section in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating section or the operated section. and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means or the operating means so that the operating section or the operated section advances in a predetermined direction after performing the first control. configured as possible.

Therefore, after the player feels a reaction force that can move the operating part or the operated part in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part or the operated part, As the operating part or the operated part moves in a predetermined direction (i.e., the opposite direction to the opposite direction) under the second control, the reaction force feels smaller, and in some cases, the movement The movement speed of the operated part is too fast, which may cause a situation in which a part of the player's body (a part of the player's body) that has come into contact with the operating part or the operated part moves away from the operating part or the operated part. . As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the player, it is possible to add surprise to the touch that the player receives from the operating section or the operated section movable in the opposite direction, and the operating means or the operating means It is possible to provide a variety of gameplay using the .

<Feature Zg>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means is configured to move the operated section along the predetermined direction while generating a reaction force that resists the moving operation when the player moves the operated section along the predetermined direction. and a first control in which the operating means is configured to generate a reaction force that causes the operated part to be held at a certain position or within a certain range in the direction in which the moving operation is performed after performing the first control. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least a second control for controlling the operation of the gaming machine.

With the gaming machine described in feature Zg, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to suitably operate an operated part that can be operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, when the player operates the operated section to move along the predetermined direction, the operation control means moves the operated section along the predetermined direction while generating a reaction force that resists the moving operation. a first control in which the operation proceeds, and after performing the first control, the operating means is operated so as to generate a reaction force that is maintained at a certain position or within a certain range in the direction in which the operated part is moved. The second control is configured to be able to execute at least the second control.

Therefore, after the player moves the operated part in a predetermined direction by the moving operation and feels a reaction force that resists the moving operation, the operated part moves due to the reaction force generated by the second control. The operated part, which was being moved in a predetermined direction by the own moving operation, suddenly stopped moving because it was held at a certain position or within a certain range in the direction in which the moving operation was performed, or the operated part suddenly stopped moving. I feel like my movement has gotten worse. Thereby, it is possible to add surprise to the movement operation of the operated part by the player, and it is possible to provide various gaming features using the operating means.

<Features ZH>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
It includes an operating part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be pressed by the player, and can be pressed by the player. an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operation section at a predetermined neutral position when a part of the operation section is not in contact with the operating section;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operation section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operation section from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that performs displacement control;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The motion control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force that can move the motion section in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the motion section; and a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to generate a reaction force that maintains the operating section at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range after performing the first control. A game machine characterized by:

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature ZH, the predetermined direction in which the player can press refers to a pressing motion that increases the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part. The opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be moved away from the action section.

<Features Zh>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means includes a first control that generates a reaction force that can move the operated section in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operated section; and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so as to generate a reaction force that maintains the operated portion at a predetermined position or within a predetermined range after performing the first control. A gaming machine characterized by the following configuration.

With the gaming machine described in Feature ZH or Feature Zh, it is possible to suitably operate the operating part that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body, or the operated part that can be operated by the player. We can provide gaming machines. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means includes an operating section that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be moved in a predetermined direction that can be pressed by the player. The operating means is configured such that the operating section can be placed at a predetermined neutral position in a state where no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operating portion or the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means generates a reaction force capable of moving the operating section or the operated section in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating section or the operated section. a first control that generates a first control, and an operation of the operating means or the operating means so as to generate a reaction force that maintains the operating part or the operated part in a predetermined position or within a predetermined range after performing the first control. and a second control for controlling.

Therefore, after the player feels a reaction force that can move the operating part or the operated part in the opposite direction in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the operating part or the operated part, Due to the reaction force generated by the second control, the operating part or the operated part is held in a predetermined position or within a predetermined range in the direction of the movement operation, causing the operating part or the operated part to suddenly move. I feel that the operating part or the operated part has disappeared or the movement of the operating part or the operated part has deteriorated. As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the player, it is possible to add surprise to the touch that the player receives from the operating section or the operated section movable in the opposite direction, and the operating means or the operating means It is possible to provide a variety of gameplay using the .

<Features Zj>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means performs a predetermined movement operation in which a part of the player's body moves away from the operated part after the part of the player's body and the operated part move toward the predetermined direction. a first operation control for operating the operated part in a first manner when the predetermined moving operation is performed; A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least a second operation control.

With the gaming machine described in feature Zj, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to suitably operate an operated part that can be operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means performs a predetermined movement operation in which a part of the player's body moves away from the operated part after the part of the player's body and the operated part move in a predetermined direction. a first operation control that causes the operated part to operate in a first manner when the predetermined moving operation is performed; The second operation control is configured to be able to execute at least the second operation control.

Therefore, when the first motion control is performed and when the second motion control is performed, after a part of the player's body and the operated part move in a predetermined direction, the player When a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the body of the person moves away from the operated section, the operation mode of the operated section can be made different. For example, if a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body moves away from the operated part after the player's body part and the operated part move in a predetermined direction, the The operated section can be moved to different positions (eg, different positions in the height direction), or the moving speed of the operated section can be made different. Thereby, it is possible to add surprise to the movement operation of the operated part by the player, and it is possible to provide various gaming features using the operating means.

<Features ZK>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
It includes an operating part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be pressed by the player, and can be pressed by the player. an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operation section at a predetermined neutral position when a part of the operation section is not in contact with the operating section;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operation section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operation section from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. An operation control means (sub-control board 940) that performs displacement control;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The motion control means is configured to control the motion control means when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the motion section after the body part of the player and the motion section are displaced in the opposite direction. a first operation control for operating the operating section in a first mode; and a second operation control for operating the operating section in a second mode different from the first mode when the predetermined situation occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least the following:

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature ZK, the predetermined direction in which the player can press refers to a pressing motion that increases the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part. The opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be moved away from the action section.

<Feature Zk>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means is configured to control the operation control means when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the operated part after the part of the player's body and the operated part are displaced in the opposite direction. a first operation control for operating the operated part in a first manner when the predetermined situation occurs; and a first operation control for operating the operated part in a second manner different from the first manner when the predetermined situation occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least two operation controls.

With the gaming machine described in Feature ZK or Feature Zk, it is possible to suitably operate the operating part that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body, or the operated part that can be operated by the player. We can provide gaming machines. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means includes an operating section that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be moved in a predetermined direction that can be pressed by the player. The operating means is configured such that the operating section can be placed at a predetermined neutral position in a state where no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operating portion or the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means is configured to control the operation of a predetermined situation in which a part of the player's body separates from the operating part after the part of the player's body and the operating part are displaced in the opposite direction. or if a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the operated part after the player's body part and the operated part are displaced in the opposite direction. , a first operation control for operating the operating section or the operated section in a first mode; and a first operation control for operating the operating section or the operated section in a second mode different from the first mode when the predetermined situation occurs. The second operation control for operating the operated section is configured to be able to execute at least the second operation control for operating the operated section.

Therefore, depending on whether the first motion control is performed or the second motion control is performed, after a part of the player's body and the operating section or the operated section are displaced in the opposite direction, , it is possible to change the mode of operation of the operated section when a predetermined situation occurs in which a part of the player's body separates from the operating section or the operated section. For example, after a part of the player's body and the operating part or the operated part move in the opposite direction, there is a predetermined time period in which the player's body part moves away from the operating part or the operated part. When a situation occurs, the operated section can be moved to a different position (for example, a different position in the height direction), or the moving speed of the operated section can be made different. As a result, in a situation where a part of the player's body is in contact with the player, it is possible to add surprise to the touch that the player receives from the operating section or the operated section movable in the opposite direction, and the operating means or the operating means It is possible to provide a variety of gameplay using the .

<Feature Zm>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means includes:
When the operating force of the player on the operated part is a predetermined magnitude, the operated part moves in a predetermined movement movement pattern (combination of movement speed and movement amount) in the predetermined direction. generate a predetermined reaction force that operates by
When the operating force of the player on the operated part is different from the magnitude, the operated part moves according to the movement movement pattern, or the movement of the operated part approaches the movement movement pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to at least execute control to generate a reaction force having a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force.

With the gaming machine described in feature Zm, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably operate the operated part that can be operated by the player. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operation means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operated section can be changed. Under the control of the operation control means, the position of the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means controls a predetermined moving movement pattern (moving speed) of the operated part in a predetermined direction when the operating force of the player on the operated part is a predetermined magnitude. and the amount of movement), and when the operating force of the player on the operated part is different from the above-mentioned magnitude, the operated part moves according to the movement movement pattern. or at least control to generate a reaction force of a magnitude different from the predetermined reaction force so that the movement of the operated section approaches the pattern of the movement movement.

Therefore, even if the player operates the operated part with an operating force of a predetermined magnitude, even if the player operates the operated part with an operating force of a magnitude different from the predetermined magnitude, The operated section can be moved in a predetermined direction using a predetermined moving operation pattern or a pattern similar to the moving operation pattern. As a result, even if there are variations in the operating force applied to the operated part due to individual differences among players, each player can move the operated part in a pattern that is the same or similar (substantially the same) as a predetermined movement operation pattern. Since the movement can be made in the direction of , it is possible to provide all players with the ability to move the operated parts in the same or substantially the same pattern.

<Features ZN>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
It includes an operating part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be pressed by the player, and can be pressed by the player. an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operation section at a predetermined neutral position when a part of the operation section is not in contact with the operating section;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operation section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operation section from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that performs displacement control;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means includes:
When the contact force of a part of the player's body in contact with the operating section in the predetermined direction is of a predetermined magnitude, the operating section performs a predetermined movement motion in the opposite direction. Generates a predetermined reaction force that operates in a pattern (combination of movement speed and amount of movement),
The predetermined reaction force is such that when the contact force is different from the magnitude, the operating section operates in the pattern of the moving motion, or the motion of the operating section approaches the pattern of the moving motion. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to at least execute control for generating reaction forces of different magnitudes.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature ZN, the predetermined direction in which the player can press refers to a pressing motion that increases the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part. The opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be moved away from the action section.

<Features Zn>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The operation control means includes:
When the operating force on the operated part in the predetermined direction is a predetermined magnitude, the operated part moves in the opposite direction in a predetermined movement movement pattern (moving speed and amount of movement). generate a predetermined reaction force that operates in combination with
the predetermined reaction force so that when the operating force is different from the magnitude, the operated part moves in the pattern of the moving movement, or the movement of the operated part approaches the pattern of the moving movement; A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to at least execute control that generates a reaction force of a magnitude different from that of a game machine.

With the gaming machine described in Feature ZN or Feature Zn, it is possible to suitably operate the operating part that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body, or the operated part that can be operated by the player. We can provide gaming machines. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means includes an operating section that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be moved in a predetermined direction that can be pressed by the player. The operating means is configured such that the operating section can be placed at a predetermined neutral position in a state where no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operating portion or the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine, the operation control means controls the operation control means when the contact force of a part of the player's body in contact with the operating part in a predetermined direction is a predetermined magnitude, or when the contact force of a part of the player's body contacts the operating part in a predetermined direction. When the operating force is a predetermined magnitude, the operating part or the operated part moves in a predetermined movement pattern (combination of movement speed and movement amount) in the opposite direction. Generating a predetermined reaction force for movement, so that when the contact force is different from the magnitude, the movement part moves in the pattern of the movement movement, or the movement of the movement part approaches the pattern of the movement movement. or, when the operating force is different from the magnitude, the predetermined amount is set so that the operated part moves in the movement movement pattern, or the movement of the operated part approaches the movement movement pattern. The control system is configured to be able to at least perform control to generate a reaction force having a magnitude different from that of the reaction force.

Therefore, even if the contact force on the operating part or the operating force on the operated part by the player is a predetermined magnitude or a magnitude different from the predetermined magnitude, the operating part or the operated part can be adjusted in advance. It is possible to move in the opposite direction using a predetermined movement operation pattern or a pattern similar to the movement operation pattern. As a result, even if the contact force on the operating part and the operating force on the operated part vary due to individual differences among players, each player can perform the same or similar (almost the same) movement operation pattern to the predetermined movement operation pattern. Since the operating part or the operated part can be moved in the opposite direction in a pattern, it is possible to provide any player with a gaming experience in which the operating part or the operated part can be moved in the same or substantially the same pattern. Can be done.

<Features Zp>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so as to be able to control at least the magnitude of the reaction force to the movement operation of the operated section;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period,
The operation control means controls the operation of the operation means so that the operated section can move in the predetermined direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first effect is executed as a presentation in the specific variable display. and a first control for controlling the operation of the operated part at a speed different from the predetermined movement speed when a second effect having different expectations from the first effect is executed as the effect in the specific variable display. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to perform at least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to be movable in the predetermined direction.

With the gaming machine described in feature Zp, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the operated part that can be operated by the player can be suitably operated. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means is controlled by the operation control means such that at least the magnitude of the reaction force against the moving operation of the operated section can be controlled.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from among a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period.

In the gaming machine, when a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in a specific variable display, the operation control means is configured to operate the operated part so as to be movable in a predetermined direction at a predetermined movement speed. When the first control for controlling the operation of the means and the second effect having different expectations from the first effect are executed as a effect in a specific variable display, the operating speed of the operated part is different from the predetermined movement speed. The controller is configured to be able to execute at least a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so as to be able to move at a speed in a predetermined direction.

Therefore, the moving speed of the operated part that moves in a predetermined direction can be made different between when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed in a specific variable display. It is possible to provide a game feature that allows the player to estimate the level of expectation of the performance to be performed based on the movement speed of the operated section.

<Features ZQ>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
It includes an operating part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be pressed by the player, and can be pressed by the player. an operating means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operation section at a predetermined neutral position when a part of the operation section is not in contact with the operating section;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means such that the position of the operation section can be changed, the operation control means changing the position of the operation section from the neutral position to the predetermined direction or a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that performs displacement control;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period in which the operating section is operable during the period of the variable display according to the mode,
The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from among a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating unit operates during the period,
The operation control means controls the operation of the operation means so that the operation section can move in the opposite direction at a predetermined movement speed when a predetermined first effect is executed as an effect in the specific variable display. When a second effect having different expectations from the first effect is executed as a effect in the specific variable display, the operating unit moves at a speed different from the predetermined movement speed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute at least a second control that controls the operation of the operating means so as to be operable in the opposite direction.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Feature ZQ, the predetermined direction in which the player can press refers to a pressing motion that increases the pressure of the part of the player's body that is in contact with the operating part. The opposite direction may be a direction in which a part of the player's body can be moved away from the action section.

<Features Zq>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display (a variable display based on starting winnings, a pseudo variable display displayed during a non-gaming state) and a result display corresponding to the lottery result. and,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section can be changed, the operation control means controlling the operation of the operating means such that the position of the operated section is changed from the neutral position in the predetermined direction or in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls displacement in the direction;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to display, on the display section, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied; Equipped with
The mode selected by the display selection means includes a specific variable display including a period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode;
The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period,
The operation control means controls the operation of the operation means so that the operated part can move in the opposite direction at a predetermined moving speed when a predetermined first effect is executed as a effect in the specific variable display. and a first control for controlling the operation of the operated part at a speed different from the predetermined movement speed when a second effect having different expectations from the first effect is executed as the effect in the specific variable display. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute at least a second control for controlling the operation of the operating means so as to be able to move in the opposite direction.

With the gaming machine described in Feature ZQ or Feature ZQ, it is possible to suitably operate the operating part that can be brought into contact with a part of the player's body, or the operated part that can be operated by the player. We can provide gaming machines. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In this case, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the mode of the lottery are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Further, the operating means includes an operating section that can be touched by a part of the player's body and that can be moved in a predetermined direction that can be pressed by the player. The operating means is configured such that the operating section can be placed at a predetermined neutral position in a state where no part of the player's body is in contact with the operating means. On the other hand, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operating means is configured to be able to place the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operating means is not operated. The operation of the operating means or the operating means is controlled by the operation control means so that the position of the operating part or the operated part can be changed. Under the control of the motion control means, the position of the operating portion or the operated portion is displaced from the neutral position in a predetermined direction or in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

Here, as the mode selected by the display selection means, a specific variable display is provided that includes an operable period during which the player can operate the operating means during the period of the variable display according to the mode. The specific variable display is configured such that a performance selected from among a plurality of types of performances with different expectations can appear when the operating means is operated during the period.

In the gaming machine, when a predetermined first performance is executed as a performance in a specific variable display, the operation control means causes the operating part or the operated part to move in the opposite direction at a predetermined movement speed. A first control that operably controls the operation of the operating means or the operating means; and a second control that controls the operation of the operating means or the operating means when a second effect having a different expectation level from the first effect is executed as an effect in a specific variable display, the operating part or the operated part. is configured to be able to execute at least a second control that controls the operation of the operating means or the operating means so that the moving means can move in the opposite direction at a speed different from the predetermined moving speed.

Therefore, the moving speed of the operating part or the operated part that moves in the opposite direction can be made different between when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed in a specific variable display. It is possible to provide a game feature that allows a player to estimate the degree of expectation of a performance performed in a specific variable display based on the moving speed of the operating section or the operated section.

<Feature α0>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as stages for production in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; ,
Sound control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to output a fluctuating sound corresponding to the fluctuating display displayed on the display section by the display control means in synchronization with the fluctuating display,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, a plurality of types of fluctuating sounds are provided as fluctuating sounds corresponding to predetermined fluctuating displays (loss fluctuations) each having a predetermined length of fluctuating display time. (Loss fluctuating sound) is preset,
When one stage is set by the stage setting means and the predetermined fluctuating display is continuously displayed by the display control means, the sound control means may be configured to generate a sound a predetermined number of times (for example, A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to at least execute sound switching control for switching the fluctuating sound to another fluctuating sound and outputting the fluctuating sound each time the predetermined fluctuating display is displayed (once).

<Feature α1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage selected by the control of the player or the gaming machine from among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as a production stage in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; ,
Sound control means (sub-control board 940) that performs control to output a fluctuating sound corresponding to the fluctuating display displayed on the display section by the display control means in synchronization with the fluctuating display,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, a plurality of types of fluctuating sounds are provided as fluctuating sounds corresponding to predetermined fluctuating displays (loss fluctuations) each having a predetermined length of fluctuating display time. (Loss fluctuating sound) is preset,
The stage setting means sets the stage of the gaming machine when one stage is set by the stage setting means and a predetermined condition is satisfied after the display control means displays the variable display. Switch and set different stages by control,
When one stage is set by the stage setting means and the predetermined fluctuating display is continuously displayed by the display control means, the sound control means may be configured to generate a sound a predetermined number of times (for example, A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to at least execute sound switching control for switching the fluctuating sound to another fluctuating sound and outputting the fluctuating sound each time the predetermined fluctuating display is displayed (once).

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature α0 or feature α1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages and can suitably switch stages. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In the above, one stage is set by the stage setting means out of a plurality of types of stages that can be set as the stage of the performance in the variable display. Note that the stage setting means may be configured to set a stage selected by a player, or may be configured to select a stage selected by control of a gaming machine.

When the predetermined starting conditions are met, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. Under the control of the sound control means, a fluctuating sound corresponding to the fluctuating display displayed on the display section by the display control means is output in synchronization with the fluctuating display.

In this gaming machine, for each stage of a plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, a plurality of types of fluctuating sounds are provided as fluctuating sounds corresponding to a predetermined fluctuating display whose fluctuating display time is a predetermined length. is set in advance. The sound control means is configured to display the predetermined variation display a predetermined number of times when one stage is set by the stage setting means and the predetermined variation display is continuously displayed by the display control means. Each time the fluctuating sound is displayed, the fluctuating sound is configured to be capable of at least executing sound switching control for switching the fluctuating sound to another fluctuating sound and outputting the same.

Therefore, when a predetermined variable display with a predetermined length of variable display time is displayed continuously, the variable sound changes every time the predetermined variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined It is possible to prevent the atmosphere on the stage from becoming monotonous due to the continuous display of fluctuations. Thereby, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages, it is possible to clearly indicate the switching of stages.

Particularly, in the gaming machine described in feature α1, when one stage is set by the stage setting means, the stage setting means sets a predetermined condition (e.g. , a predetermined number of times of changing display that is greater than the number of times serving as a condition for changing the changing sound) is established, the stage is switched to another stage by the control of the gaming machine.

Therefore, when one stage is set and a predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display is displayed, the stage is switched to another stage by the control of the gaming machine. When the stage is switched, the fluctuating sound is switched to a fluctuating sound corresponding to the stage, thereby suppressing the atmosphere of the stage from becoming monotonous. In this respect as well, stages can be suitably switched in a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages.

Note that in the feature α0 and the feature α1, the sound switching control does not necessarily have to be configured to switch the fluctuating sound to another fluctuating sound and output it every time a predetermined fluctuating display is displayed a predetermined number of times. If a predetermined variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times or more and a predetermined specification change condition is satisfied, the variable sound may be switched to another variable sound and output.

<Feature β0>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as stages for production in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; ,
Sound control means (sub control board 940) that performs control to output a fluctuating sound corresponding to the fluctuating display displayed on the display section by the display control means in synchronization with the fluctuating display;
The operating means is operable by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the stage setting means An operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) whose operation is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the set stage;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means,
A plurality of types of fluctuating sounds are set by the sound control means as fluctuating sounds to be output in response to the fluctuating display, and the stage setting means sets a plurality of types of fluctuating sounds for each stage of the plurality of stages that can be set. Some of the fluctuating sounds are set in advance,
The operation control means includes, when one stage is set by the stage setting means, a first control for operating the operation means so as to have a first specification corresponding to the one stage; When a stage different from the first stage is set by the setting means, at least a second control for operating the operating means so as to achieve a second specification different from the first specification can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

<Feature β1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as stages for production in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; and,
Sound control means (sub control board 940) that performs control to output a fluctuating sound corresponding to the fluctuating display displayed on the display section by the display control means in synchronization with the fluctuating display;
The operating means is operable by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the stage setting means An operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) whose operation is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the set stage;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means,
A plurality of types of fluctuating sounds are set by the sound control means as fluctuating sounds to be output in response to the fluctuating display, and the stage setting means sets a plurality of types of fluctuating sounds for each stage of the plurality of stages that can be set. Some of the fluctuating sounds are set in advance,
In the case where one stage is set by the stage setting means, the operation control means is configured to perform a control operation in advance corresponding to the one stage each time the fluctuating display is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to at least execute specification-compatible operation control that switches the specification of the operating means to another specification among a plurality of set specifications and operates the operating means.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature β0 or feature β1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages and can suitably switch stages. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In the above, one stage is set by the stage setting means out of a plurality of types of stages that can be set as the stage of the performance in the variable display. Note that the stage setting means may be configured to set a stage selected by a player, or may be configured to select a stage selected by control of a gaming machine.

When the predetermined starting conditions are met, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

Under the control of the sound control means, a fluctuating sound corresponding to the fluctuating display displayed on the display section by the display control means is output in synchronization with the fluctuating display. A plurality of types of fluctuating sounds are set by the sound control means as fluctuating sounds to be output in response to the fluctuating display, and for each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, one of these multiple types of fluctuating sounds is set. Some fluctuating sounds are preset.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation of the operating means is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the stage set by the stage setting means. The operation of the operating means is controlled by an operation control means.

Here, in the gaming machine described in feature β0, when one stage is set by the stage setting means, the operation control means sets the operation means to the first specification corresponding to the one stage. a first control for operating the operating means, and a second control for operating the operating means so as to achieve a second specification different from the first specification when a stage different from the first stage is set by the stage setting means. 2 control.

Therefore, when the stage changes, the specifications of the operating means are switched to different specifications, and the operating means is operated so that the operating means has the relevant specifications, so the player can use different specifications depending on the stage. The operating means can be operated. As a result, the differences between each stage can be emphasized and shown to the player by the differences in the specifications of the operating means, so it is possible to clearly show the switching of stages in a gaming machine configured to be able to set multiple types of stages. can.

Further, in the gaming machine described in feature β1, when one stage is set by the stage setting means, the operation control means changes the one stage every time the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times. It is configured to be able to execute at least specification-compatible operation control that switches the specification of the operating means to another specification among a plurality of correspondingly preset specifications and operates the operating means.

Therefore, in a situation where the same stage continues, each time the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times, the specification of the operating means is switched to another specification, and the operating means is operated to the specified specification, so that the player Even in a situation where the same stage continues among multiple types of stages, it is possible to prevent the atmosphere of the stage from becoming monotonous. Thereby, stages can be suitably switched in a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages.

Note that in feature β0 and feature β1, the "specifications" of the operating means may be specifications regarding the appearance or shape of the operating means (for example, the neutral position of the operating means), or specifications regarding the operating mode of the operating means. (For example, the operating force pattern or movement pattern of the operating means) may be used. In addition, the operating means may have only one specification set, or may have multiple specifications set, and if multiple specifications are set, all of those multiple specifications can be operated. It may be a specification regarding the appearance and shape of the means, or it may be a specification regarding the operating mode of the operating means, or it may be a combination of a specification regarding the appearance or shape of the operating means and a specification regarding the operating mode of the operating means. Good too. In addition, the specification-based operation control does not necessarily have to be configured to switch the specification of the operating means to another specification and operate the operating means every time the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to switch the specification of the operating means to another specification and operate the operating means when a predetermined specification change condition is satisfied by being displayed a number of times or more.

<Feature β2>
The gaming machine according to feature β1,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, a plurality of types of fluctuating sounds are provided as fluctuating sounds corresponding to predetermined fluctuating displays (loss fluctuations) each having a predetermined length of fluctuating display time. (Loss fluctuating sound) is preset,
The sound control means is configured to control the predetermined fluctuating display when one stage is set by the stage setting means and the predetermined fluctuating display is continuously displayed by the display control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be capable of at least executing control for switching the fluctuating sound to another fluctuating sound and outputting the fluctuating sound every time the fluctuating sound is displayed the predetermined number of times.

In the gaming machine according to feature β2, when one stage is set by the stage setting means and when a predetermined variable display is continuously displayed by the display control means, the predetermined number of times is Each time the predetermined fluctuating display is displayed, the variable sound corresponding to the predetermined fluctuating display is switched to another fluctuating sound and the fluctuating sound is output. Therefore, when a predetermined variable display with a predetermined length of variable display time is displayed continuously, the variable sound changes every time the predetermined variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined It is possible to prevent the atmosphere on the stage from becoming monotonous due to the continuous display of fluctuations.

<Feature γ0>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as stages for production in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; ,
The operating means is operable by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the stage setting means An operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) whose operation is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the set stage;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages set by the stage setting means, a pattern (decorative pattern 1621) displayed in the variable display under the control of the display control means is one of the plurality of types of patterns. Some designs are set,
When one stage is set by the stage setting means and a variable display is executed with a predetermined first symbol, the operation control means sets a first specification corresponding to the variable display with the first symbol. a first control for operating the operating means so that the stage setting means sets a stage different from the first stage, and a second symbol different from the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner; 2. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute at least a second control for operating the operating means so as to have a second specification different from the first specification when the above is executed.

<Feature γ1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as stages for production in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; ,
The operating means is operable by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the stage setting means An operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) whose operation is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the set stage;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, a pattern (decorative pattern 1621) displayed in the variable display under the control of the display control means is one of the plurality of types of patterns. Some designs are preset,
When one stage is set by the stage setting means and a variable display is executed with the symbol corresponding to the one stage, the operation control means is configured to display the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, once). ) Specification-compatible operation control that switches the specification of the operating means to another specification among a plurality of preset specifications corresponding to the variable display of the symbol and operates the operating means each time the symbol is displayed. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be at least executable.

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature γ0 or feature γ1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages and can suitably switch stages. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In the above, one stage is set by the stage setting means out of a plurality of types of stages that can be set as the stage of the performance in the variable display. Note that the stage setting means may be configured to set a stage selected by a player, or may be configured to select a stage selected by control of a gaming machine.

When the predetermined starting conditions are met, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, some of the symbols among the plurality of types of symbols are set in advance as the symbols to be displayed in the variable display under the control of the display control means. Ru.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation of the operating means is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the stage set by the stage setting means. The operation of the operating means is controlled by an operation control means.

Here, in the gaming machine described in feature γ0, when one stage is set by the stage setting means and a variable display is executed with a predetermined first symbol, the variable display with the first symbol is a first control for operating the operating means so as to have a corresponding first specification; and a second symbol different from the first symbol by setting a stage different from the first stage by the stage setting means. When the variable display is executed in , at least a second control for operating the operating means so as to have a second specification different from the first specification is configured to be executable.

Therefore, when the stage changes and the symbols displayed on the variable display change, the specifications of the operating means are switched to different specifications, and the operating means is operated so that the operating means meets the specifications. , it is possible to operate operating means with different specifications depending on the stage. As a result, the differences between each stage can be emphasized and shown to the player by the differences in the specifications of the operating means, so it is possible to clearly show the switching of stages in a gaming machine configured to be able to set multiple types of stages. can.

Further, in the gaming machine described in feature γ1, when one stage is set by the stage setting means and a variable display is executed with a symbol corresponding to the one stage, the operation control means controls the variable display. Specification compatible operation control that switches the specification of the operating means to another specification among a plurality of preset specifications corresponding to the variable display of the symbol and operates the operating means every time the symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times. be configured to be at least executable.

Therefore, in a situation where the same stage continues, when a variable display with a symbol corresponding to the stage is performed, the specifications of the operating means are switched to another specification every time the symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times, and the operating means is operated to meet the specifications, the player can prevent the atmosphere of the stage from becoming monotonous even in a situation where the same stage continues among a plurality of types of stages. Thereby, stages can be suitably switched in a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages. In addition, the specification-based operation control does not necessarily have to be configured to switch the specification of the operating means to another specification and operate the operating means every time the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to switch the specification of the operating means to another specification and operate the operating means when a predetermined specification change condition is satisfied by being displayed a number of times or more.

<Feature δ0>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as stages for production in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; ,
An operating means that can be operated by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the operating means is operable. an operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) capable of arranging the operated section at a predetermined neutral position when the operated section is not operated;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) that controls the operation of the operation means so that the position of the operated section can be changed;
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages set by the stage setting means, a non-symbol part (background part) that is visibly displayed to the player apart from the symbols whose variable display is executed under the control of the display control means. 1631), some non-design parts of the non-design parts set in multiple types are set in advance,
The operation control means is configured such that when one stage is set by the stage setting means and a predetermined first non-symbol portion is displayed, a first specification corresponding to the first non-symbol portion is set. a first control for operating the operating means; and a stage different from the first stage is set by the stage setting means, and a second non-design part different from the first non-design part is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute at least a second control for operating the operating means so as to have a second specification different from the first specification.

<Feature δ1>
a lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means (main control board 920) that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display section (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means (sub-control board 940) for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as stages for production in the variable display;
display selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a variable display mode (specific content of the variable display) to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display on the display section; ,
The operating means is operable by the player, and includes an operated part (operated part 852, operation cover member 870) that can be moved in a predetermined direction (downward) by the player's operation, and the stage setting means An operation means (button operation section 850, operation cover member 870) whose operation is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the set stage;
an operation control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the operation of the operation means,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, a non-symbol part (background part) that is visibly displayed to the player apart from the symbols whose variable display is executed under the control of the display control means. 1631), some non-design parts of the non-design parts set in multiple types are set in advance,
The operation control means is configured to display the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, once) when one stage is set by the stage setting means and the non-design part corresponding to the one stage is displayed. Each time the non-design part is selected, at least specification-compatible operation control can be executed in which the specification of the operating means is switched to another specification among a plurality of types of specifications preset corresponding to the non-design part and the operating means is operated. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, if a ball enters the starting hole provided in the gaming area and wins a jackpot in a lottery held in response to the ball entering, a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state is entered. A configuration that migrates is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-31031).

However, although various improvements have been made to the configuration of conventional gaming machines, there may still be room for improvement.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature δ0 or feature δ1, stages can be suitably switched in a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages. That is, a gaming machine in which the game control means generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result of a predetermined lottery conducted by the lottery means is a predetermined result when a predetermined starting condition is established. In the above, one stage is set by the stage setting means out of a plurality of types of stages that can be set as the stage of the performance in the variable display. Note that the stage setting means may be configured to set a stage selected by a player, or may be configured to select a stage selected by control of a gaming machine.

When the predetermined starting conditions are met, the mode of the variable display to be displayed on the display section is selected by the display selection means, and the variable display according to the selected mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are controlled by the display control means. A result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed on a display section capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means.

For each stage of a plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, a plurality of types of non-symbol parts are displayed so as to be visible to the player separately from the symbols whose variable display is executed under the control of the display control means. Some non-design parts of the set non-design parts are set in advance.

Further, the operating means that can be operated by the player includes an operated section that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation. The operation of the operating means is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the stage set by the stage setting means. The operation of the operating means is controlled by an operation control means.

Here, in the gaming machine described in feature δ0, when one stage is set by the stage setting means and a predetermined first non-symbol part is displayed, the operation control means controls the first non-symbol part. a first control for operating the operating means so as to have a first specification corresponding to the part; and a stage setting means for setting a stage different from the first stage to a stage different from the first non-design part. When the second non-design part is displayed, the second control is configured to be able to execute at least a second control for operating the operating means so that the second specification different from the first specification is achieved when the second non-design part is displayed.

Therefore, when the stage changes and the non-symbol part that is visibly displayed to the player changes in addition to the symbols displayed on the variable display, the specifications of the operating means are switched to different specifications, and the operating means changes to the corresponding one. Since the operating means is operated according to the specifications, the player can operate the operating means with different specifications depending on the stage. As a result, the differences between each stage can be emphasized and shown to the player by the differences in the specifications of the operating means, so it is possible to clearly show the switching of stages in a gaming machine configured to be able to set multiple types of stages. can.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature δ1, when one stage is set by the stage setting means and a non-symbol portion corresponding to the one stage is displayed, the operation control means controls the variable display to a predetermined value. Each time the number of times is displayed, at least a specification-compatible operation control is executed to switch the specification of the operating means to another specification among multiple types of specifications preset corresponding to the non-design part and operate the operating means. configured as possible.

Therefore, in a situation where the same stage continues, the specifications of the operating means change every time the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times when the non-design part corresponding to the one stage is displayed. , it is possible to suppress the atmosphere of the stage from becoming monotonous. Thereby, stages can be suitably switched in a gaming machine configured to be able to set a plurality of types of stages.

In addition, in the feature δ0 and the feature δ1, the "specifications" of the operating means may be specifications regarding the appearance and shape of the operating means (for example, the neutral position of the operating means), or specifications regarding the operation mode of the operating means. (For example, the operating force pattern or movement pattern of the operating means) may be used. In addition, the operating means may have only one specification set, or may have multiple specifications set, and if multiple specifications are set, all of those multiple specifications can be operated. It may be a specification regarding the appearance and shape of the means, or it may be a specification regarding the operating mode of the operating means, or it may be a combination of a specification regarding the appearance or shape of the operating means and a specification regarding the operating mode of the operating means. Good too. In addition, the specification-based operation control does not necessarily have to be configured to switch the specification of the operating means to another specification and operate the operating means every time the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to switch the specification of the operating means to another specification and operate the operating means when a predetermined specification change condition is satisfied by being displayed a number of times or more.

Further, the "non-design part" may be constituted by a part of the display part, or may be constituted by a display device or a light emitting device different from the display device constituting the display part. For example, when the display section is configured with a liquid crystal display device, the background of the design, characters, etc. may be displayed as a non-design part, or a decoration equipped with a plurality of LEDs provided separately from the liquid crystal display device that displays the design. The non-symbol portion may be formed by a member (for example, a luminescent color of a part of a structure surrounding a display section that displays a pattern when viewed from the player's side).

Note that at least one feature described in Feature 10 to Feature δ1 may be applied in combination with any other feature or multiple features. Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown.

Pachinko machine: a firing operation means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires game balls based on the operation of the firing operation means, and a passage section that guides the fired game balls to a predetermined gaming area. A game machine comprising game parts arranged in a game area, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: The rotating body starts rotating based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player A gaming machine that gives benefits to

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100...Game machine, 479...Decorative pattern display device, 611...Base material, 621...Decorative pattern, 622...Decorative part, 701...Design, 702...Design, 703...Design, 721A...Design, 721B...Design, 741A...Design , 741B...Picture, 741C...Picture, 905...Back setting switch, 907...Initialization switch, 920...Main control board, 940...Sub-control board, 782...Light emitting means 786...Decorative lens part, 787...Protrusion part, 787A... End face, 788...Peripheral side decoration part, 789...Decoration sheet, 790B...Reflection film part, 853... Spring member, 860... Actuation mechanism, 870... Operation cover member, 870B... Operation surface, 895... Hand rest, 222... Front plate, 1622... Hold display, 1623... Suggestion display, 1625... Alternative display, 1701... Game Machine image, 1702...Player image, 1712...Production image, 1712B...Left hand, 1713...Display information, 1715...Production image

Claims (1)

a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined starting condition is met;
A game control means that generates a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
a display unit capable of displaying at least a predetermined variable display and a result display corresponding to the lottery result;
stage setting means for setting one stage among a plurality of types of stages that can be set as a production stage in the variable display;
Display selection means for selecting a variable display mode to be displayed on the display unit when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Display control means for controlling the display unit to display a variable display according to the mode selected by the display selection means and the result display when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
An operation means that can be operated by a player, which includes an operated part that can be moved in a predetermined direction by the player's operation, and whose operation is controlled according to specifications corresponding to the stage set by the stage setting means. means and
an operation control means for controlling the operation of the operation means,
For each stage of the plurality of types of stages that can be set by the stage setting means, some of the symbols set in the plurality of types are displayed in the variable display under the control of the display control means. preset,
When one stage is set by the stage setting means and a variable display is executed with the symbol corresponding to the one stage, the operation control means is configured to control the operation control means every time the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times. , configured to be capable of at least executing specification-compatible operation control for operating the operating means by switching the specification of the operating means to another specification among a plurality of types of specifications set in advance in response to the variable display according to the symbol. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images